SECTION 00000 COVER SHEET rev - Green-Simmons



PROJECT: REPAIR HVAC TRAININGFACILITY B4331PROJECT NUMBER: MAHG-071039KEESLER AIR FORCE BASE BILOXI, MISSISSIPPIStephens Mechanical LLC100% SUBMITTAL925 Tommy Munro Dr., Ste B30 OCTOBER 2019Biloxi, MS 39532228 207 3322INDEXSECTIONDESCRIPTIONPAGES00102DRAWING LIST200103SUMMARY OF PROJECT WORK201000GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WITH KEESLERAFB SUPPLEMENT801001HVAC COORDINATION, COMMISSIONING,AND CLOSE OUT401140WORK RESTRICTIONS201150QUALITY REQUIREMENTS701330SUBMITTALS301330APROJECT SCHEDULE301355AENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION501500TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES401561TEMPORARY FENCING201732SELECTIVE DEMOLITION301770NCLOSEOUT PROCEDURES301780ACLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS501782OPERATION AND MAINTENACE DATA302000GENERAL DEMOLITION602 41 00SELECTIVE DEMOLITION508 11 13STEEL FRAMES208 21 10FLUSH WOOD DOORS608 71 00DOOR HARDWARE1208 80 00GLAZING309 51 10ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS422 00 00PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE723 00 00AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, EXHAUST SYSTEMS3723 03 00BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS523 05 93TESTING ADJUSTING BALANCING2823 07 00THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS3823 09 00KAFB-DDC SPEC REV A2123 09 23BAC NET CONTROLS FOR HVAC4423 31 13METAL DUCTS1623 26 00AIR TERMINAL UNITS623 37 13DIFFUSERS REGISTERS GRILLES323 52 00HEATING BOILERS2923 64 26CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS3423 73 13.00MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AHU’S1126 00 00.00.20BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS426 05 00.00 40COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL826 05 19.10 10INSULATED WIRE AND CABLE726 05 71.00 40LOW VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES926 20 00INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM2126 24 16.00 40PANELBOARDS726 51 00INTERIOR LIGHTING13PART 1 GENERALSUMMARYThis document lists the drawings for the project pursuant to contract clause "DFARS 252.236-7001, Contract Drawings, Maps and Specifications."CONTRACT DRAWINGS Contract drawings are as follows: DRAWINGTITLENO.Title Sheet, Vicinity Map, Location map, Index of Drawings M100 SCHEDULES, DETAILSM101 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR DEMO PLAN M102 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR DEMO PLAN M103 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR DEMO PLAN M104 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR DEMO PLAN M105 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR DEMO PLAN M106 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR DEMO PLAN M107 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR DEMO PLAN M108 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR DEMO PLAN M109 ROOF DEMO PLANM201 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR PIPING PLAN M202 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR PIPING PLAN M203 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR PIPING PLAN M204 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR PIPING PLAN M205 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR PIPING PLAN M206 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR PIPING PLAN M207 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR PIPING PLAN M208 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR PIPING PLAN M301 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR HVAC PLAN M302 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR HVAC PLAN M303 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR HVAC PLAN M304 PARTIAL 1ST FLOOR HVAC PLAN M305 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR HVAC PLAN M306 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR HVAC PLAN M307 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR HVAC PLAN M308 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR HVAC PLAN M309 ROOF HVAC PLANM401 CHILLER PLANT DEMO & HVAC PLAN M402 TYPICAL PENTHOUSE DEMO & HVAC PLAN M501 CONTROL SEQUENCESM502 CONTROL SEQUENCESA100FIRST FLOOR PLAN - PART A A101FIRST FLOOR PLAN – PART B A102FIRST FLOOR PLAN – PART C A103FIRST FLOOR PLAN – PART D A104SECOND FLOOR PLAN – PART A A105SECOND FLOOR PLAN – PART BA106 SECOND FLOOR PLAN – PART C A107 SECOND FLOOR PLAN – PART D A600 OPENING SCHEDULE & TYPES E000 NOTES & SCHEDULESE101 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN E102 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN E103 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN E104 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN E105 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN E106 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN E107 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN E108 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN E109 ROOF DEMO PLANE201 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E202 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E203 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E204 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E205 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E206 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E207 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E208 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLANE301 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PLAN E302 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PLAN E303 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PLAN E304 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PLAN E305 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PLAN E306 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PLAN E307 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PLAN E308 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PLAN E309 ROOF & CHILLER PLANT PLANE400 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULES-- End of Document --PART 1 GENERALWORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTSProject DescriptionThe project: REPAIR HVAC TRAINING HALL FACILITY B4331 is an existing 136,000 square foot building composed of two floors. An adjacent physical plant supplying chilled water to six existing air handlers located in rooftop penthouses conditions the current building. The six existing air handlers will be removed and replaced with properly sized air handlers. All cooling is supplied by each air handler using chill water coil. The penthouse air handlers service six equally sized hallways per floor with classrooms on both sides of the hallways.The hallways are identical with respect to first and second floor. The air handlers are ducted vertically to the end of each hallway and use the corridors as a return air path with door grilles or transfer grilles from each space into the hallway. The hall supply ducts are located above the hallway ceiling with taps into each room. This project will make each room into a Variable Air Volume (VAV hereafter) system allowing for each room to have specific control with a separate thermostat. Features of the work shall include a complete and new DDC control system, replacing all doors that have door grilles with solid doors and new hardware, replacing the current fluorescent lighting with dimmable LED lighting throughout, and upgrading the physical plant with a new chiller and pumps as the current plant is undersized in capacity. Control features shall include conversion of the air handlers to vav operation, dehumidification cycles, scheduled system operation, reworking controls in physical plant, and interconnection to the base system with a Niagra based platform of control. Incidental work shall include closing up wall and roof penetrations for building pressure, adding mini split heat pumps to stairwells for moisture control, demolishing the current heating system and adding a high efficiency heating system with new boilers, piping, and pumps. The current roof mounted chill water piping shall be replaced with new as corrosion and insulation quality has severely diminished.LocationThe project is located on Keesler Air Force Base, Biloxi, Mississippi. Building B4331 on 1st St.In addition to "FAR 52.236-9, Protection of Existing Vegetation, Structures, Equipment, Utilities, and Improvements":Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent injury or damage to any portions of the existing work which remains.Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction operations to match existing or adjoining work, as approved by the Contracting Officer. At the completion of operations, existing work shall be in a condition equal to or better than that which existed before new work started.LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIESObtain digging permits prior to start of excavation by contacting the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance. Scan the construction site with electromagnetic or sonic equipment, and mark the surface of the ground paved surface where existing underground utilities or utilities encased in pier structures are discovered. Verify the elevations of existing piping, utilities, and any type of underground or encased obstruction not indicated to be specified or removed but indicated or discovered during scanning in locations to be traversed by piping, ducts, and other work to be conducted or installed. Verify elevations before installing new work closer than nearest manhole or other structure at which an adjustment in grade can be made.NOTIFICATION PRIOR TO EXCAVATIONNotify the Contracting Officer at least 15 days prior to starting excavation work and obtain a base dig permit from Vectrus’s Customer Service Desk. Contact Miss Utility 48 hours prior to excavating. Contractor is responsible for marking all utilities not marked by Miss Utility or base utilities shop.PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTIONSUMMARY OF WORKThe work covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all plant, labor, equipment and materials and performing all operations in connection to removing existing constant volume airside system at Bldg 4331 and installing new air handlers for a VAV airside system complete with new boilers, hot water system, new chiller, pumps, ductwork system, new lighting, new doors, and new DDC controls to include all work as indicated on drawings and in strict accordance with these specifications and applicable drawings and subject to terms and conditions of the contract.All work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner and in keeping with generally accepted standards for similar work.Contractor is responsible for field verifying all measurements and evaluating existing conditions.WORKING CONDITIONS:The Contractor shall take all necessary and prudent safety precautions to ensure the safety of the workforce and other exposed personnel.Underground Utilities: Protect all active utilities. Any damage to existing utility lines caused by the Contractor will be the Contractors responsibility.Hazardous Electrical Exposure: Provide Safety protection and precautions for any electrical exposure.Permits: Contractors will be required to obtain permits as required by Keesler in the performance of their work. Contractors shall post or have readily available all permits before work is commencedThe following permits must be obtained anytime referenced work is required.Dig Permit,VECTRUS Customer ServiceBurn Permit,Keesler AFB Fire DepartmentConfined Entry Permit, Certified Personnel, obtain permit from VECTRUS project management personnel, or VECTRUS safety office. Notification to fire department of actual day and time work is accomplished.MATERIAL DELIVERY AND STORAGE:Delivery: The Contractor shall have all materials for his work delivered during normal working hours or shall have a representative present to receive shipments. The contractor should be particularly aware that all delivery vehicles must have sufficient information to locate project site. This includes name and address of the project site and name of prime contractor and a point of contact for delivery.Storage: The Contractor shall be responsible for the storage of all material and equipment. All items shall be properly stored to maintain their original condition until actually installed.REPAIR OF GOVERNMENT -OWNED FACILITIES:In order to complete the work on this job, certain Government-owned facilities may have to be removed or altered in some way and others may be inadvertently damaged. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to return these facilities to a condition acceptable to the Government. UTILITIES:All reasonable amounts of electricity and water required for the completion of this project will be furnished to the Contractor without charge from existing Government facilities where feasible.INTERRUPTION OF UTILITY SERVICE: Interruptions to utility services shall be minimized. Necessary outages shall be coordinated with the Government a minimum of 21 days in advance of the planned outage. Contact the VECTRUS Construction Manager and Contracting Officer to arrange all outages.TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES: Portable sanitation units for this project shall be supplied by the contractor. This includes maintenance, transportation to and from job site, secure placement of unit as not to obstruct normal public activity, and unit clean-out as needed. The type units provided and the placement location(s) shall be approved by the Government.STORM DAMAGE: Should warnings of winds of gale force or stronger be issued, the Contractor shall take every practical precaution to minimize danger to persons and damage to property. These precautions shall be coordinated through the Government, [VECTRUS Construction Manager and Contracting Officer] and shall include closing all openings; removing all loose materials, tools, and equipment from exposed locations; as well as removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work. Contractor will follow Keesler requirements for Hurricane Conditions in force.SAFETY: The Contractor shall observe all Safety, Security, Traffic and Fire regulations presently enforced at Keesler Air Force Base. And comply with latest issue of OSHA requirements.CONSTRUCTIONMaterial: All material furnished by the Contractor for this job shall be new, unused material of high quality. All equipment and materials shall comply with the buy American act. Contractor shall notify Government if a deviation is required.Cleaning: The Contractor shall maintain the premises, including any staging area or storage areas, free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by the Contractor’s work and shall minimize the spread of dust and flying particles. As work is completed, or at the end of each day, the site shall be cleaned and all waste material shall be properly disposed of.JOBSITE MAINTENANCE AND STORAGE AREAS:The contractor shall maintain the jobsite and staging areas in conformance with Keesler standards.Lay down/staging areas shall be kept neat and free of loose debris at all times. Grass shall be cut and maintained regularly. Height and maintenance shall be consistent with normal Base standards and consistent with the immediate area.Jobsites and lay down/staging areas shall be enclosed with a 6’ chain link fence with brown fabric screening. Materials and equipment may be stored inside storage units. Items stored in the lay down area shall be arranged neatly.All temporary storage trailers and storage containers shall present a neat and clean appearance and shall be in a state of good repair and shall be located within the fenced area described in paragraph above.If allowed by the contract and if approved by the Government, an office mobile unit may be located outside of a fenced area. At a minimum, this unit shall be in a paved area and shall present a neat, professional appearance. Unit shall be of Keesler standard colors, shall have presentable skirting and access stairs. Ancillary items, such as porches and canopies, shall be neat and painted Keesler brown. Contractor shall submit a picture of the proposed unit for approval and before unit is moved to Base.Execution of work may require excavation or other type of work both at and away from primary work area. These areas shall be secured and work times shall be kept to a minimum. Open excavations shall bedirectly in progress or shall be covered directly after work complete. Open excavations requiring extended period of inactivity shall be temporarily backfilled. In no case shall an excavation be open for more than 72 hours. Barricades, fences and other warning devices shall be maintained neatly at all times.INTERUPTION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING SERVICE:Interruptions to any mechanical, electrical or plumbing services shall be minimized. Necessary outages shall be coordinated with the Government a minimum of 21 days in advance of the planned outage. The Contractor shall fill out a “Utility Service Outage Request Form” and submit it to the Government through the VECTRUS Construction Manager. The Government may require the contractor to attend a coordination meeting to access the purpose, intent, and impact of the outage request with the facility and any or all operations departments. Contractors shall not shut- down or start-up any mechanical, electrical or plumbing system without the coordination and/or permission of the Government. The VECTRUS Construction Manager may request that a VECTRUS technician be onsite at the time of start up or shut down.Environmental Protection:Contractor personnel shall, at all times, perform all work and take such steps required to prevent any interference or disturbances to the ecological balance of the environment. All work must be performed in accordance with applicable Federal, State, Local, and Air Force environmental regulations. Use good management practices to protect air, water, land and wildlife and to prevent noise, solid waste, radiant energy, dust and radioactive pollutants. In the event of a chemical or hazardous material spill, the contractor must immediately notify the Keesler Fire Department at 911 (identify that you are located on Keesler AFB) and the VECTRUS environmental representative at 228-377-5823.Required Asbestos Abatement and Management Procedures :These steps are in accordance with Air Force Instruction, EPA, and MDEQ. OSHA governs all worker safety and must be complied with by contractors and subcontractors. These requirements are summarized in the Keesler Air Force Base Asbestos Operations and Management Plan. Please reference the Plan. These steps are required by all personnel or contractors doing work on Keesler Air Force Base.If the personnel or contractor encounters what they think may be asbestos, they are required to stop and call the KAFB Asbestos Point of Contact (APOC) at the Keesler Environmental Section, which is Dale Goodall at 228-377-5823 or EMCS after hours. Once it is determined by the APOC that asbestos is present, instructions given IAW EPQ, MDEQ, Bio Environmental and APOC guidelines (Only the APOC and Bio Environmental are certified to make determination).Security Requirements:The Contractor is responsible for obtaining passes to enter the installation. The contractor shall coordinate with Government Contracting Officer to obtain approval and documentation for application of passes/ID.2.00BUILDING OCCUPANCYBuilding will remain operational and may be occupied during construction. Contractor shall perform all work during normal working hours except as otherwise approved to accommodate agreed upon “shut-downs” and other required “after hours” work.SCHEDULE OF WORKThe Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a schedule to meet construction time.For this contract the Contractor shall have 360 calendar days to complete the work.The Contractor shall develop, and submit for approval a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule indicating all work activities including required interruptions of utilities, facilities activities, traffic flow, etc.PHASING OF WORKIt is the intent of this project to install all utility lines complete and ready for service prior to interruption of existing lines and that minimum down time will be necessary for connections to new lines and abandonment of existing line.No facility shall have their services, or any other utility or service disrupted during normal working hours without prior approval. Weekend “shut-downs” may be permitted but must be coordinated through, and approved by, the Government.This will require careful planning, phasing and sequencing of the work, as well as providing temporary services as required.Contract phasing shall be fully developed by the Contractor with the User, the Contracting Officer and the Construction Manager and shall insure that the Contractor’s Phasing Plan fully allows the facility services to remain open and that there are no interferences with the facility’s ability to meet its scheduled obligations.GENERALThe contractor shall coordinate his work with the Construction Manager toavoid interference with necessary activities within and adjacent to the construction site. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of all trades to prevent any conflicts. The Contractor before proceeding with the construction shall resolve any conflicts of components.Normal Work HoursThe Contractor will perform all work during work hours between 7:00 A. M. and 5:00 P.M. but work after these normal business hour shall be required if necessary to complete the work as scheduled and as required by phasing requirements. The Contractor will not normally be permitted to work on weekends or on the following legal holidays (or the day the federal government observes these holidays) unless he has coordinated such work with the Government at least 72 hours in advance:New Year's Dayf. Labor DayMartin Luther King, Mr.’s Birthdayg. Columbus DayWashington's Birthdayh. Veteran's DayMemorial Dayi. Thanksgiving DayIndependence Dayj. Christmas Day4.0 SITE VISITBidder is responsible for site investigation in accordance with contract clause entitled "Site Investigation and Conditions Affecting the Work" (FAR 52.236-3).5.0 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONSThe Contractor must comply with the contract clause entitled "Specifications and Drawings for Construction" (FAR 52.236-21). See paragraph 19.01 entitled "INTENT OF DRAWINGS".MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALSSUBMITTAL REGISTERWithin fourteen calendar days after receipt of "Notice of award," of the contract, the Contractor shall furnish the Contracting Officer a Submittal Register to indicate the Contractor's scheduled submittal dates.The Register shall contain all items (shop drawings, manufacturer's literature, certificates of compliance, material samples, guarantees, etc.) that the Contractor shall submit for review and approval action during the life of the contract.The Contractor will submit four (4) copies of all required submittals unless otherwise specifically indicated.DESCRIPTIVE DATAThe Contractor shall submit three copies of AF Form 3000, Material Submittal Approval, to the Government for approval. Included shall be manufacturer's descriptive data for materials, fixtures, and equipment the Contractor proposes to incorporate in the work. The submittal shall include catalog numbers, diagrams, drawings, and such additional descriptive data and samples required to properly evaluate all items. When specifications require materials to conform to Federal, Military, Commercial, AGTM, etc., specifications and standards, the Contractor shall submit supplier's or manufacturer's Certification of Conformance in addition to other descriptive data. Catalog numbers and trade names specified indicate examples of a standard product. Other manufacturers' products may be substituted contingent upon approval. Approval of all items must be obtained prior to fabrication or purchase. Payment for work incorporating these materials will not be made if required material submittals have not been approved. Approval of materials, fixtures, and equipment will be based on manufacturer's published ratings and conformance with specifications.The Material Descriptive Data Submittal shall include, but shall not be limited to, the informationindicated in the appropriate specification section.The Shop Drawing Submittal shall include, but shall not be limited to, the information indicated in the appropriate specification section.The Samples Submittal shall include, but shall not be limited to, the information indicated in the appropriate specification section.CONTRACTOR DEVIATIONWhen data is submitted for approval, the Government's approval of such data shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviation from contract drawings and specifications. In the case of a deviation, the Contractor shall inform the Government in writing of the request for deviation with all the specific data related to the change.7.0 REFERENCED PUBLICATIONSAny publication referenced in this specification, but not shown in each part under paragraph entitled "APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS", also form a part of these specifications to the extent referenced.TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCINGProvide and install six-foot (6’) high chain link fence, including gates as indicated, in accordance with commercial (not residential) industry standards.Zinc coated steel fabric or wire not less than (9) gauge.Hot-dipped galvanized steel fence supports, framing and fittings of commercial grade sizes and weights.Provide Keesler standard brown vision screen.9.0 REMOVAL PROCEDURESNo removed items will be reused in this contract unless specifically listed in these specifications and/or on the drawings. All removed equipment becomes the property of the Contractor unless noted otherwise. The Contractor will be required to furnish lifting equipment as necessary to remove the equipment, and shall provide all equipment to transport the removed items off base. All unused material or debris will be removed from Government-controlled property. Use of Government-contracted dumpsters is prohibited. Unused materials, debris and rubbish shall bedisposed of off base in a permitted landfill. The Contractor shall comply with Mississippi Department of Environmental Management Regulations.10.0 GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERSWhenever the Contractor uses portable electrical tools or equipment in an outside location or in an interior wet location where floor is conductive such as concrete, the Contractor shall provide and use a portable ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI). This shall apply wherever electric power is supplied through Government-controlled facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the GFCI in operating condition and testing it before each use.11.0 FIRE REGULATIONSThe Contractor shall comply with all aspects of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) publication 241, "Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations," dated 1980 and the latest edition of the Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC)3-600-01.12.0 ASBESTOSNo friable asbestos containing materials will be installed as a part of this contract. Spray application of asbestos or asbestos-containing materials to exposed walls, ceilings, ducts, columns, etc. is prohibited. In the event friable asbestos containing materials are encountered during "rip out" and demolition operations, the Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager and Contracting Officer for appropriate abatement action to take place.13.0 INTENT OF DRAWINGSAll drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to qualify the materials specified and indicate their intended relationship to each other. The drawings are not to be scaled, rather field conditions should dictate placement. The various scales used on the drawings may not allow the indications of all fittings, offsets, and accessories that may be required. The Contractor is to carefully investigate the conditions that would affect the work to be performed and shall arrange such work accordingly.14.0 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS [SEE SPECIFICATIONS]The Contractor shall provide to the Government marked drawings commonly referred to as "as-builts" indicating conditions that differ from that shown on the contract plans The Contractor will review with the Government the "as-builts" on a bi-weekly basis to ensure an accurate up-to-date set of documents is being kept. Changes are to be noted as the work progresses. The Contractor will utilize a Government-furnished copy of the contract drawings with the changes neatly indicated in red using the drafting standards and legends indicated in the contract drawings. One copy is required and will be submitted to the Government at the final inspection. If there are no changes, a title sheet (from the contract drawings) will only be required with the note "NO CHANGES" marked appropriately.15.0 TRAFFIC CONTROLThe Contractor shall be responsible for the orderly handling of traffic through the work at all times during the life of the construction contract. This shall be accomplished in conformity with all state, local, federal, and military Authorities Having Jurisdiction.16.0 CONTRACTOR MAINTENANCEAt the end of each working day the Contractor shall clean up the work site which includes the construction area(s), construction office area(s), material storage area(s), parking and eating area(s), and any other area(s) affected by the construction process. Stacked material shall not be within 8m (25-feet) of an active roadway. Tracking of soil, mud or other construction debris or substance on any Base street, parking area, sidewalk, patio, driveway, turf, or otherarea shall not be permitted. The Contractor shall keep all turfed areas clean within the construction limits, and shrubs and other elements in the landscape shall be maintained.ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTIONThe work includes demolition or removal of all construction indicated or specified. All material and debris resulting from this project shall become property of the Contractor and shall be hauled off and disposed off base at the Contractor's expense. Organic waste from ground clearing operations may be disposed of at the Base compost facility, but check with the Government for final clearance. All solid wastes including but not limited to wood, sheetrock, metal, wire, paint, painted brick, painted concrete, painted rock, painted anything, and etc. shall be disposed of in an approved state certified landfill at the Contractor's expense.Clean concrete, brick, rock, and dirt do not require disposal in a certified landfill. This material shall be disposed off base in any legal manner that will not result in liability to the United States Air Force. Payment for services to the Contractor shall not be released until Contractor has provided copies of all landfill receipts to the Government. The Contractor shall comply with all state, local, federal, and military Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).ENVIRONMENTAL RELEASE REPORTINGAn environmental release report shall be completed for all environmental releases that are caused by an Air Force activity or which occur on an Air Force installation or facility. Examples of environmental releases are listed as follows but not limited to: oil releases to navigable waters, hazardous substance release above the reportable quantity, vinyl chloride releases, excessive emissions over amount allowed in permits, hazardous material incidents occurring during transportation, underground storage tank spills and releases, and any emergency incidents of environmental contamination. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Government in the event of any environmental release. The following information shall be documented; the time, type, amount, and cause of release.19.0 PROTECTION OF EXISTING LANDSCAPE DURING CONSTRUCTION:The Contractor will be responsible for repairing all damage to the surrounding landscape caused during construction. All ruts and holes filled and leveled, areas cleaned, and covered with new sod consisting of an approved species. Any damaged shrubs or bushes shall be replaced in kind unless otherwise dictated in the Drawings and Specifications. No trees shall be cut and trimmed or removed without the approval of the base Arborist and VECTRUS Construction Manager.20.0 STAGING AREAThe Contractor will be provided space as indicated for an office trailer and staging of materials in support of this project and must provide protection and security for it in that area. If not identified on contract drawings the location will be mutually agreed upon and within a reasonable distance to the construction area. Contractor will be required to provide temporary fencing with Keesler AFB standard brown screening around all trailer and staging areas. Contractor will be responsible for job site security as required.21.0 TESTINGWhere specific tests are required by this contract, the Contractor shall notify the Government at least 24 hours prior to testing. The Contractor shall turn in a test report, if required, to the Government as soon as possible. The Contractor shall not proceed with any work that would cover up the work being tested until the Government has approved the work being tested.22.0 CONDUCT OF WORKThe Contractor shall conduct his work so the Government property and personnel, other personnel, and work areas shall be protected at all times from inconvenience, damage of any nature, or injury caused by this work untilcompletion of the contract.REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED PROPERTYIn the event of damages of any nature caused by this work (including maintenance and warranty operations) due to improper protection, precaution, or safety measures, such damages shall be repaired or such property shall be replaced by the Contractor at no expense, cost, or charge to the Government.In the event the Contractor does not satisfactorily repair or replace such damage caused by the work of the contract, the Government reserves the right to make the necessary corrections and deduct from the contract price the cost to the Government for inconveniences, labor material, etc. involved.24.0 BARRICADESThe Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain all required barricades as directed by the Safety Office and the Government Project Manager, and access driveways and doors will remain clear at all times.CLEANING SCHEDULEClean sites of all construction related and project related debris on a regular basis or as required by the Government.Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the work areas and the site. All base roads are to be cleaned of dirt/debris as directed.Execute final cleaning prior to the final inspection.26.0 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES [SEE SPECIFICATIONS]Closeout procedures will be conducted for each construction area/building as if it were a separate project. When the Contractor is ready for final inspection, the Contractor shall notify the Government (in writing) within two (2) working days of the desired inspection date. During the inspection, the Contractor and the Government shall document all deficiencies on a "punch list." The Government will provide a formal copy of the punch list to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting all punch list items prior to the end of the contract completion date and notify the Government (in writing) when the contractor is ready for re-inspection.27.0 Controlled/Restricted Areas.The Contractor shall implement local Base procedures for entries to Air Force control/restricted areas where Contractor personnel will work.28.0 WEAPONS, FIREARMS, AND AMMUNITIONContractor employees are prohibited from possessing weapons, firearms, or ammunition on themselves or within Contractor-owned or privately owned vehicles while on Keesler AFB.29.0 TRAFFIC LAWSAll Contractor personnel shall comply with Base traffic regulations.-- END OF SECTION –PROJECT CLOSE-OUT SEQUENCE:The General Contractor and Mechanical Contractor are required to coordinate the following sequence with the VECTRUS STM, Designer/Engineer and VECTRUS CEOM shop supervisor one month prior to the beginning of the Certified Factory Start-Up for all equipment. All coordination requests must be submitted in writing or e-mail to the STM. The Contractor shall submit proof of Factory Technician Start-Up Certification and Factory Start-Up Report for approval in the submittal process. All of the following procedures are sequential and must therefore be coordinated and executed in sequential order. The Contractor will be allowed to proceed to each sequential item based on successful completion of each item as approved and directed by the STM.Controls Commissioning with Commissioning Reports for all Devices: The Contractor shall not proceed to item #2 until all controls commissioning reports for all devices are submitted to the STM and approved. Controls commissioning reports shall be submitted upon the immediate completion of controls commissioning so as not to delay the project. The Contractor shall begin delivery of all Close-Out materials at this point (see item #7).Operational Test: After completion of installation, all mechanical systems shall be started and operated to prove proper functioning of each item of equipment. All operating test shall be scheduled with the STM and performed to the satisfaction of the STM. The contractor shall coordinate the controls contractor to be present. Should any element or individual piece of equipment not perform properly, the Contractor shall make all required corrections and repeat the operational test for the equipment in question and/or any other related equipment that must operate in unison to the satisfaction of the STM before proceeding to item #3.Certified Factory Start-up with Certified Factory Start-up Report: After equipment installation and operational test are completed; the Contractor shall provide the services of a manufacturer certified field representative for starting the unit and training for the VECTRUS CEOM operator(s) and or technician(s) at no additional costs. Training can occur sequential to Certified Factory Start-Up if successful and the STM is provided the Certified Factory Start-Up Report immediately upon completion, approved, and Certified Factory Training has been previously coordinated. Uncertified vendor field representatives are not allowed. Factory certified vendor field representatives are only allowed if they are approved during the submittal process. The contractor shall coordinate the controls contractor to be present. The Contractor shall present VECTRUS STM with all required copies of the O&M manuals upon completion of Factory Start-Up and prior to Training.Test and Balance: The contractor shall provide complete Test & Balance service as dictated by the specifications. Any deviations from the Test & Balance specification shall be requested in writing to the VECTRUS STM and approved by the Designer/Engineer. The Contractor shall request in writing all pertinent information required for Test & Balance if additional or any information is needed. The Test & Balance Report shall be presented to the Designer/Engineer within 48 Hours for approval by the Designer/Engineer. The Designer/Engineer shall have 1 week to review upon receipt thereof. Additional details of the Test & Balance requirements are presented specifically in the Test & Balance section of the specifications.Training for newly installed Mechanical Systems and Devices:Scheduling: Typically, training is only scheduled on Tuesday, Wednesday, or Thursday each week; but exceptions may be permitted on request. Requests for Rescheduling training must be presented in writing or e-mail and may be contingent to a 7-day advance notice. All systems and devices must be fully tested and functioning prior to beginning scheduledtraining. It is the installers responsibility to ensure that the equipment works BEFORE VECTRUS CEOM staff arrive for training.Start-up and/or Operational Reports: All equipment reports shall be completed in full and delivered to VECTRUS STM prior to beginning the training.Training: Shall be provided by Certified Factory Technician(s) and must include demonstrated performance of all designed system and device functions. Any failures identified during the training which are not immediately (less than 15 minutes) repairable will result in training stoppage until corrected and ALL system component operations re-verified prior to resuming the training.Rescheduling of Training: If any failure is identified prior to or during training which requires rescheduling of the training; The contractor shall notify the VECTRUS STM in writing or e-mail, who in turn, will notify VECTRUS CEOM Supervisors and coordinate. The reschedule date will not require a 7 day notice but will be accommodated at the earliest time based on VECTRUS STM/CEC/CEOM work load and manning.Pre-Final Inspection: When requested by the STM and/or the Contractor and deemed necessary by the STM a courtesy Pre-Final Inspection shall be provided to the contractor. Written comments shall be offered to the Contractor and the Contractor shall address all issues before requesting Final Inspection.Final Inspection (95% complete): The Contractor shall request a date/time/place for Final Inspection in writing or e-mail to the VECTRUS STM when the Contractor has verified all items are completed by the Contractors work force and/or sub-contractors. Upon approval and coordination of the Final Inspection Request, the STM shall approve Contractor Progress Payment Request to 95% completion. The STM shall provide the contractor in writing a punch-list of any issues found during the course of inspection. The Contractor shall request in writing or e-mail a Re-Inspection of punch list items when the contractor has verified his work force or sub-contractors have successfully completed all punch-list items.Close-Out Materials: The Contractor shall provide the following Close-Out materials immediately following Final Inspection. The Contractor is encouraged to begin assimilating and submitting Close-Out Materials upon initiation of the End of Project Close-Out Sequence. The Contractor shall present VECTRUS STM with all required copies of the O&M manuals upon completion of Factory Start-Up and prior to Training. The following items shall be submitted to the VECTRUS buyer prior to approval of the 100% Progress PaymentUnit Input Report (Refrigerant).Contractor Warranty.Equipment Warranties.O&M manuals and/or equipment (not submittal for materials and equipment) for all submittal required equipment.Copies of all Permits if not already received.Approve final invoiced payment (100% complete): Upon receipt and approval of all Close-Out Materials, the VECTRUS STM shall approve the Contractors 100% Progress Payment.UTILITY OUTAGES: The Contractor shall be responsible to request Utility Outages using a copy of the “UTILITY OUTAGE REQUEST FORM” at the end of this section.Maximum possible utility (electrical, water, HVAC) outages duringnormal business hours: 1-2 hours pending (unless approved temporary serviceis provided) 4 week notification and approval by Base Command, MSG, VECTRUS and facility personnel.Maximum possible utility (electrical, water, HVAC,.) outages after normal business hours and requiring VECTRUS shop support: Friday 7:00 AM - 5:00 PM (Down Fridays only)Saturday 7:00 AM - 5:00 PMSunday 7:00 AM - 5:00 PMPending 4 week notification and approval by Base Command, MSG, VECTRUS and facility personnel.Maximum possible utility (electrical, water, HVAC,.) outages after normal business hours and not requiring VECTRUS shop support: Thurs. 6:00 PM - Monday 5:00 am (Down Friday weekend)Friday 6:00 PM - Monday 5:00 amPending 3 week notification and approval by Base Command, MSG, VECTRUS and facility personnel.UTILITY OUTAGE REQUEST FORMDate Submitted:Project Number and Facility Name and Number:Outage Time and Duration:Proposed Outage Type and System(s) to be taken out of service:Mechanical: Electrical: Plumbing:Other (Explain Type):Work Location:Workers Access Routes and Entry Points (Be specific):Any known Impacts to Facility Operations (Be specific):Areas of the Facility that will be affected:Back Out Measures that will be employed if needed:Protective Measures Employed for Workers Safety:Temporary Measures that will be utilized to protect the facility and its mission:Check Out Procedures for bringing system back on line:Notification Lead Time:Contractors Signature/Date:VECTRUS Operations Signature/Date:VECTRUS STM Signature/Date:Facility Representative's Signature/Date:PART 1 GENERALSUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Contractor regulations; GTransportation of personnel, materials, and equipment; GCONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISESActivity RegulationsEnsure that Contractor personnel employed on the Activity become familiar with and obey Activity regulations including safety, fire, traffic and security regulations. Keep within the limits of the work and avenues of ingress and egress. Ingress and egress of Contractor material deliveries at the Activity is limited to the commercial gate. To minimize traffic congestion, delivery of materials shall be outside of peak traffic hours (6:30 to 8:00 a.m. and 3:30 to 5:00 p.m.) unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer. Wear hard hats and all required personal protection in designated areas. Do not enter any restricted areas unless required to do so and until cleared for such entry. The Contractor's equipment shall be conspicuously marked for identification.1.2.1.1 Employee ListA. The Contractor shall provide to the Contracting Officer, in writing, the names of two designated representatives authorized to request personnel and vehicle passes for employees and subcontractor's employees prior to commencement of work under this contract. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements of "Important Clarifications - Contractors - How to Gain Access," using most recent copy, in obtaining access to the Keesler AFB complex for the life of the contract. A copy of these requirements will be provided at the preconstruction conference.Working HoursRegular working hours shall consist of a period between 7 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. 5 days per week, excluding Government holidays.Work Outside Regular HoursWork outside regular working hours requires Contracting Officer approval. Make application 15 calendar days prior to such work to allow arrangements to be made by the Government for inspecting the work in progress, giving the specific dates, hours, location, type of work to be performed, contract number and project title. Based on the justification provided, the Contracting Officer may approve work outside regular hours. During periods of darkness, the different parts of the work shall be lighted in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer.Utility Cutovers and InterruptionsMake utility cutovers and interruptions after normal working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, and Government holidays. Conform to procedures required in the paragraph "Work Outside Regular Hours."Ensure that new utility lines are complete, except for the connection, before interrupting existing service. It is the intension of this project to continue operations of existing utility service until such time as the new utility can be made ready for service.Interruption to water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, telephone service, electric service, air conditioning, heating, fire alarm, shall be considered utility cutovers pursuant to the paragraph entitled "Work Outside Regular Hours." Approvals will be required for all outages, contractor shall work with the Government representatives to schedule these outages. Approvals for outages may take up to 3 weeks for approval and must be scheduled to allow for approvals.Operation of Station Utilities: The Contractor shall not operate nor disturb the setting of control devices in the station utilities system, including water, sewer, electrical, and steam services. The Government will operate the control devices as required for normal conduct of the work. The Contractor shall notify the Government Representatives giving reasonable advance notice when such operation is required.PART 2 PRODUCTSNot used.PART 3 EXECUTIONNot used.-- End of Section –PART 1 GENERALREFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)EM 385-1-1(2003) Safety -- Safety and Health RequirementsSUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals QC Plan; G,Submit a QC plan within 15 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award.QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTSEstablish and maintain a QC program as described in this section. The QC program consists of a QC Manager, a QC plan, a Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, QC meetings, three phases of control, submittal review and approval, testing, and QC certifications and documentation necessary to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction and operations which comply with the requirements of this contract. The QC program shall cover on-site and off-site work and shall be keyed to the work sequence. No work or testing may be performed unless the QC Manager is on the work site.Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to AcceptanceThe only work that is authorized to proceed prior to the acceptance of the QC plan is mobilization of storage and office trailers, temporary utilities, and surveying.AcceptanceAcceptance of the QC plan is required prior to the start of construction. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require changes in the QC plan and operations as necessary, including removal of personnel, to ensure the specified quality of work. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time in order to verify the submitted qualifications.Notification of ChangesNotify the Contracting Officer, in writing, of any proposed change, including changes in the QC organization personnel, a minimum of seven calendar days prior to a proposed change. Proposed changes shall be subject to the acceptance by the Contracting Officer.QC ORGANIZATIONQC ManagerDutiesProvide a QC Manager to implement and manage the QC program. In addition to implementing and managing the QC program, the QC Manager may perform the duties of project superintendent. The QC Manager is required to attend the Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, conduct the QC meetings, perform the three phases of control, perform submittal review and approval, ensure testing is performed and provide QC certifications and documentation required in this contract. The QC Manager is responsible for managing and coordinating the three phases of control and documentation performed by others.QualificationsAn individual experienced as a superintendent, inspector, QC Manager, project manager, or construction manager on similar size and type construction contracts which included the major trades that are part of this contract. The individual must be familiar with the requirements of the EM 385-1-1 and have experience in the areas of hazard identification and safety compliance.Construction Quality Management TrainingIn addition to the above experience requirements, the QC Manager shall have completed the course Construction Quality Management for Contractors and will have a current certificate.QC PLANRequirementsProvide, for acceptance by the Contracting Officer, a QC plan submitted in a three-ring binder that covers both on-site and off-site work and includes the following with a table of contents listing the major sections identified with tabs.QC ORGANIZATIONA chart showing the QC organizational structure and its relationship to the production side of the organization.NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONSIn resume format, for each person in the QC organization. Include the CQM for Contractors course certification required by the paragraph entitled "Construction Quality Management Training".DUTIES, RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF QC PERSONELOf each person in the QC organization.OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS: A listing of outside organizations such as Contracting Office rural and consulting engineering firms that will be employed by the Contractor and a description of the services these firms will provide.APPOINTMENT LETTERS: Letters signed by an officer of thefirm appointing the QC Manager and stating that they are responsible for managing and implementing the QC program as described in this contract. Include in this letter the QC Manager's authority to direct the removal and replacement of non-conforming work.SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER: Procedures for reviewing, approving and managing submittals. Provide the name(s) of the person(s) in the QC organization authorized to review and certify submittals prior to approval.TESTING LABORATORY INFORMATION: Testing laboratory information required by the paragraphs "Accredited Laboratories" or "Testing Laboratory Requirements", as applicable.TESTING PLAN AND LOG: A Testing Plan and Log that includes the tests required,referenced by the specification paragraph number requiring the test, the frequency, and the person responsible for each test.PROCEDURES TO COMPLETE REWORK ITEMS: Procedures to identify, record, track and complete rework items.DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES: Use Government formats.LIST OF DEFINABLE FEATURES: A Definable Feature of Work (DFOW) is a task, which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has the same control requirements and work crews. The list shall be cross-referenced to the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the specification sections. For projects requiring a Progress Chart, the list of definable features of work shall include but not be limited to all items of work on the schedule. For projects requiring a Network Analysis Schedule, the list of definable features of work shall include but not be limited to all critical path activities.PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THREE PHASES OF CONTROL: For each DFOW provide Preparatory and Initial Phase Checklists. Each list shall include a breakdown of quality checks that will be used when performing the quality control functions, inspections, and tests required by the contract documents. The preparatory and initial phases shall be conducted with a view towards obtaining quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems.PERSONNEL MATRIX: Not Applicable.PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION INSPECTION: See the paragraph entitled "COMPLETION INSPECTIONS".TRAINING PROCEDURES AND TRAINING LOG: Not Applicable.COORDINATION AND MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING MEETINGDuring either the Pre-Construction conference, but prior to the start of construction, discuss the QC program required by this contract. The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC details, including documentation, administration for on-site and off-site work, and the coordination of the Contractor's management, production and the QC personnel. At the meeting, the Contractor will be required to explain how three phases of control will be implemented for each DFOW. Contractor's personnel required to attend shall include the QC Manager, project manager, and superintendent. Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by the QC Manager and signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the signed minutes to all attendees.QC MEETINGSAfter the start of construction, the QC Manager shall conduct QC meetings weekly at the work site with the superintendent and the foreman responsible for the ongoing and upcoming work. The QC Manager shall prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the Contracting Officer within two working days after the meeting. As a minimum, the following shall be accomplished at each meeting:Review the minutes of the previous meeting;Review the schedule and the status of work and rework;Review the status of submittals;Review the work to be accomplished in the next two weeks and documentation required;Resolve QC and production problems (RFIs, etc.);Address items that may require revising the QC plan; and g. Review Accident Prevention Plan (APP).THREE PHASES OF CONTROLThe three phases of control shall adequately cover both on-site and off-site work and shall include the following for each DFOW.Preparatory PhaseNotify the Contracting Officer at least two work days in advance of each preparatory phase. Conduct the preparatory phase with the superintendent and the foreman responsible for the definable feature of work. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions in the daily CQC Report and in the QC checklist. Perform the following prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work:Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections;Review the contract drawings;Verify that appropriate shop drawings and submittals for materials and equipment have been submitted and approved. Verify receipt of approved factory test results, when required;Review the testing plan and ensure that provisions have been made to provide the required QC testing;Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work has been completed;Examine the required materials, equipment and sample work to ensure that they are on hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and submitted data;Review the APP and appropriate Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met, and that required Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are submitted; andDiscuss construction methods and the approach that will be used to provide quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each DFOW.Initial PhaseNotify the Contracting Officer at least two work days in advance of each initial phase. When construction crews are ready to start work on a DFOW, conduct the Initial Phase with the foreman responsible for that DFOW. Observe the initial segment of the work to ensure that it complies with contract requirements. Document the results of the Initial Phase in the daily CQC Report and in the QC checklist. Perform the following for each DFOW:Establish the quality of workmanship required;Resolve conflicts;Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory; andCheck work procedures for compliance with the APP and the appropriate AHA to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met.Follow-Up PhasePerform the following for on-going work daily, or more frequently as necessary, until the completion of each DFOW and document in the daily CQC Report and in the QC checklist:Ensure the work is in compliance with contract requirements;Maintain the quality of workmanship required;Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory;Ensure that rework items are being corrected; andPerform safety inspections.Additional Preparatory and Initial PhasesAdditional preparatory and initial phases shall be conducted on the same DFOW if the quality of on-going work is unacceptable, if there are changes in the applicable QC organization, if there are changes in the on-site production supervision or work crew, if work on a DFOW is resumed after substantial period of inactivity, or if other problems develop.Notification of Three Phases of Control for Off-Site WorkNotify the Contracting Officer at least two weeks prior to the start of the preparatoryand initial phases.SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVALProcedures for submission, review, and approval of submittals are described in the submittal section of the specification.TESTINGExcept as stated otherwise in the specification sections, perform sampling and testing required under this contract.Accreditation RequirementsConstruction materials testing laboratories must be accredited by a laboratory accreditation authority and will be required to submit a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The laboratory's scope of accreditation must include the appropriate ASTM standards (i.e.; E 329, C 1077, D 3666, D 3740, A 880, E 543) listed in the technical sections of the specifications. Laboratories engaged in Hazardous Materials Testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA. The policy applies to the specific laboratory performing the actual testing, not just the "Corporate Office."Laboratory Accreditation AuthoritiesLaboratory Accreditation Authorities include the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) administered by the National Institute of Standards and Technology, the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), International Accreditation Services, Inc. (IAS), U. S. Army Corps of Engineers Materials Testing Center (MTC), the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA), the Washington Association of Building Officials (WABO) (Approval authority for WABO is limited to projects within Washington State), and the Washington Area Council of Engineering Laboratories (WACEL) (Approval authority by WACEL is limited to projects within the EFA Chesapeake and Public Works Center Washington geographical area).Capability CheckThe Contracting Officer retains the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory and the laboratory technician's testing procedures, techniques, and other items pertinent to testing, for compliance with the standards set forth in this contract.Test ResultsCite applicable Contract requirements, tests or analytical procedures used.Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements. If the item fails to conform, notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red letters "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to the specification requirements, whichever is applicable. Test results shall be signed by a testing laboratory representative authorized to sign certified test reports. Furnish the signed reports, certifications, and other documentation to the Contracting Officer via the QC Manager.QC CERTIFICATIONSContractor Quality Control Report CertificationEach CQC Report shall contain the following statement: "On behalf of the Contractor, I certify that this report is complete and correct and equipment and material used and work performed during this reporting period is in compliance with the contract drawings and specifications to the best of my knowledge except as noted in this report."Invoice CertificationFurnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer with each payment request, signed by the QC Manager, attesting that as-built drawings are current and attesting that the work for which payment is requested, including stored material, is in compliance with contract pletion CertificationUpon completion of work under this contract, the QC Manager shall furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer attesting that "the work has been completed, inspected, tested and is in compliance with the contract."COMPLETION INSPECTIONSPunch-Out InspectionNear the completion of all work or any increment thereof established by a completion time stated in the Contract clause "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work," or stated elsewhere in the specifications, the QC Manager shall conduct an inspection of the work and develop a punch list of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications. Include in the punch list any remaining items of the "Rework Items List", which were not corrected prior to the Punch-Out inspection. The punch list shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. A copy of the punch list shall be provided to the Contracting Officer. The QC Manager or staff shall make follow-on inspections to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished, the Contractor shall notify the Government that the facility is ready for the Government"Pre-Final Inspection".Pre-Final InspectionThe Government will perform this inspection to verify that the facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government pre-final punch list may be developed as a result of this inspection. The QC Manager shall ensure that all items on this list are corrected prior to notifying the Government that a "Final" inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Any items noted on the "Pre-Final" inspection shall be corrected in a timely manner and shall be accomplished before the contract completion date for the work or any particular increment thereof if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.Final Acceptance InspectionThe QC Manager, the superintendent, or other Contractor management personnel and the Contracting Officer will be in attendance at this inspection. Additional Government personnel may be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will be formally scheduled by the Contracting Officer based upon results of the "Pre-Final Inspection". Notice shall be given to the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to the final inspection. The notice shall state that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor as being unacceptable will be complete by the date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete for this inspection may be cause for the Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional inspection cost in accordance with the contract clause "Inspection of Construction".DOCUMENTATIONMaintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC program operations and activities. The forms identified under the paragraph "INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER (CONTRACTING OFFICER)" shall be used. Reports are required for each day work is performed. Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the contract. Every space on the forms must be filled in. Use N/A if nothing can be reported in one of the spaces. The superintendent and the QC Manager must prepare and sign the Contractor Production and CQC Reports, respectively. Thereporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. In the "remarks" section in this report which will contain pertinent information including directions received, problems encountered during construction, work progress and delays, conflicts or errors in the drawings or specifications, field changes, safety hazards encountered, instructions given and corrective actions taken, delays encountered and a record of visitors to the work site. For each remark given, identify the Schedule Activity No. that is associated with the remark.Quality Control ValidationEstablish and maintain the following in a series of three ring binders. Binders shall be divided and tabbed as shown below. These binders shall be readily available to the Government's Quality Assurance Team during all business hours.All completed Preparatory and Initial Phase Checklists, arranged by specification section.All milestone inspections, arranged by Activity/Event Number.A current up-to-date copy of the Testing and Plan Log with supporting field test reports, arranged by specification section.Copies of all contract modifications, arranged in numerical order. Also include documentation that modified work was accomplished.A current up-to-date copy of the Rework Items List.Maintain up-to-date copies of all punch lists issued by the QCStaff on the Contractor and Sub-Contractors and all punch lists issued by the Government.As-Built DrawingsThe QC Manager is required to review the as-built drawings, required by Section 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations, which have been made from the Contract drawings. Ensure each deviation has been identified with the appropriate modifying documentation, e.g. PC number, modification number, RFI number, etc. The QC Manager shall initial each deviation or revision. Upon completion of work, the QC Manager shall submit a certificate attesting to the accuracy of the as-built drawings prior to submission to the Contracting Officer.NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCEThe Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected non-compliance with the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall make no part of the time lost due to such stop orders the subject of claim for extension of time, for excess costs, or damages.PART 2 PRODUCTSNOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTIONNOT USEDEND OF SECTIONPART 1.0 GENERALThe Contracting Officer may request submittals in addition to those specified when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work covered in the respective sections.Units of weights and measures used on all submittals are to be the same as those used in the contract drawings.Each submittal is to be complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready determination of compliance with contract requirements. When multiple products are included on the same technical sheet, the product being provided shall be clearly marked.Contractor's Quality Control System Manager, to check and approve all items prior to submittal and stamp, sign, and date indicating action taken. Proposed deviations from the contract requirements are to be clearly identified.Submittals are to be scheduled and made prior to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered thereby. Picked up and disposed of in accordance with manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and in compliance with existing laws and regulations samples remaining upon completion of the work.SUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for all submittals. Government approval is required for extensions of design, critical materials, any deviations from the solicitation, the accepted proposal, or the completed design, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer.The approval of submittals by the Construction Manager and Contracting Officer shall not be construed as a complete check, but will indicate only that the general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory. Approval will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error, which may exist, as the Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of adequate connections, details and satisfactory construction of all work.FORWARDING SUBMITTALS REQUIRING GOVERNMENT APPROVALSubmittals Required from the ContractorAs soon as practicable after award of contract, and before procurement of fabrication, forward to the Government. Submittals required in the technical sections of this specification. The Contractor shall prepare and submit all items listed on the Submittal Register (741-F-016, Schedule of Material Submittals, or equivalent)TRANSMITTAL FORM (AF 3000):AF Form 3000 shall be used for submitting both Governments approved and information only submittals in accordance with the instructions on the reverse side of the form. These forms will be furnished to the Contractor by the GOVERNMENT. This form shall be properly completed by filling out all the heading blank spaces and identifying each item submitted. Special care will be exercised to ensure proper listing of the specification paragraph and/or sheet number of the contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALSNumber of Copies SubmittalsSubmit four copies of submittals.Review ScheduleA period of 14 working days will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals.SUBMITTAL REGISTERPrepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses. The Contractor shall develop a complete list of submittals required in the specifications, and use the list to prepare the Submittal Register. The Contractor is required to complete the submittal register and submit it to the Contracting Officer for approval within 30 calendar days after Notice to Proceed.1.4.1 Copies Delivered to the GovernmentDeliver one copy of submittal register updated by Contractor to Government with each invoice request.SCHEDULINGSchedule and submit concurrently submittals covering component items forming a system or items that are interrelated. Include certifications to be submitted with the pertinent drawings at the same time. No delay damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals.Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing. Allow for potential resubmittal of requirements.Submittals called for by the contract documents will be listed on the register.Re-submit register and annotate monthly by the Contractor with actual submission and approval dates. When all items on the register have been fully approved, no further re-submittal is required.Carefully control procurement operations to ensure that each individual submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled submittal date shown on the approved "Submittal Register."Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, beginning with receipt by approving authority, that includes at least 14 working days for Contracting Officer approval. Period of review for submittals with Contracting Officer approval begins when Government receives submittal from QC organizationPeriod of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial submittal.Schedule SubmittalAt the Preconstruction conference, provide, for approval by the Contracting Officer, the following schedule of submittals:Schedule of shop drawings and technical submittals required by the specifications and ERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITYReview submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with contract documents.Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in paragraph entitled "Review Notations" and with markings appropriate for action indicated.Upon completion of review of submittals Government will, stamp and date approved submittals. 2 copies of the approved submittal will be retained by the Contracting Officer and 2 copies of the submittal will be returned to the Contractor.Review NotationsDISAPPROVED [OR REJECTED] SUBMITTALSContractor shall make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or specifications; notice as required under the clause entitled, "Changes" is to be given to the Contracting Officer. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of connection details and construction ofwork. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.If changes are necessary to submittals, the Contractor shall make such revisions and submission of the submittals in accordance with the procedures above. No item of work requiring a submittal change is to be accomplished until the changed submittals are approved.APPROVED[/ACCEPTED] SUBMITTALSThe Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not be construed as a complete check, and indicates only that the general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory, design, general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information appear to meet the Solicitation and Accepted Proposal. Approval or acceptance will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error which may exist.APPROVED SAMPLESApproval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and is not be construed to change or modify any contract requirements. Approval of the Contractor's samples by the Contracting Officer does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the contract.WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENTPayment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if required approvals have not been obtained.PROGRESS SCHEDULEBar ChartSubmit the progress chart, for approval by the Contracting Officer, at the Preconstruction Conference in one reproducible and 4 copies.Prepare the progress chart in the form of a bar chart utilizing form "Construction Progress Chart" or comparable format acceptable to the Contracting Officer.Project Network AnalysisSubmit the initial progress schedule within 21 calendar days of notice to proceed. Schedule is to be updated and resubmitted monthly beginning 7 calendar days after return of the approved initial schedule. Sufficient detail to facilitate the Contractor's control of the job and to allow the Contracting Officer to readily follow progress for portions of the work should be shown within the schedule.PART 2 PRODUCTSNot UsedPART 3 EXECUTIONNot Used-- End of Section --PART 1 GENERALREFERENCES (Not Applicable)QUALIFICATIONSThe Contractor shall designate an authorized representative who shall be responsible for the preparation of all required project schedule reports.PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTIONGENERAL REQUIREMENTSPursuant to the Contract Clause, SCHEDULE FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS, a Project Schedule as described below shall be prepared. The scheduling of construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor management personnel shall actively participate in its development. Subcontractors and suppliers working on the project shall also contribute in developing and maintaining an accurate Project Schedule. The approved Project Schedule shall be used to measure the progress of the work, to aid in evaluating time extensions, and to provide the basis of all progress payments.BASIS FOR PAYMENTThe schedule shall be the basis for measuring Contractor progress. Lack of an approved schedule or scheduling personnel will result in an inability of the Contracting Officer to evaluate Contractor's progress for the purposes of payment.PROJECT SCHEDULEThe computer software system utilized by the Contractor to produce the Project Schedule shall be capable of providing all requirements of this specification. Failure of the Contractor to meet the requirements of this specification shall result in the disapproval of the schedule. Manual methods used to produce any required information shall require approval by the Contracting Officer.Use of the Critical Path MethodThe Critical Path Method (CPM) of network calculation shall be used to generate the Project Schedule. The Contractor shall provide the Project Schedule in the Precedence Diagram Method (PDM).Level of Detail RequiredThe Project Schedule shall include an appropriate level of detail. Failure to develop or update the Project Schedule or provide data to the Contracting Officer at the appropriate level of detail, as specified by the Contracting Officer, shall result in the disapproval of the schedule. The Contracting Officer will use, but is not limited to, the following conditions to determine the appropriate level of detail to be used in the Project Schedule:Activity DurationsTasks related to the procurement of long lead materials or equipment shall be included as separate activities in the project ernment ActivitiesGovernment and other agency activities that could impact progress shall be shown.ResponsibilityAll activities shall be identified in the project schedule by the party responsible to perform the work.Work AreasAll activities shall be identified in the project schedule by the work area in which the activity occurs.Modification or Claim NumberAny activity that is added or changed by contract modification or used to justify claimed time shall be identified by a mod or claim code that changed the activity.Bid ItemAll activities shall be identified in the project schedule by the Bid Item to which the activity belongs.Phase of WorkAll activities shall be identified in the project schedule by the phases of work in which the activity occurs.Category of WorkAll Activities shall be identified in the project schedule according to the category of work which best describes the activityScheduled Project CompletionThe schedule interval shall extend from NTP to the contract completion date.Project Start DateThe schedule shall start no earlier than the date on which the NTP was acknowledged.Constraint of Last ActivityCompletion of the last activity in the schedule shall be constrained by the contract completion date.Interim Completion DatesContractually specified interim completion dates shall also be constrained to show negative float if the early finish date of the last activity in that phase falls after the interim completion date.PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONSThe Contractor shall provide the submissions as described below. The data disk, reports, and network diagrams required for each submission are contained in paragraph SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS.Initial Project Schedule SubmissionThe Initial Project Schedule shall be submitted for approval within 20 calendar days after NTP. The schedule shall provide a reasonable sequence of activities which represent work through the entire project and shall be at a reasonable level of detail.Periodic Schedule UpdatesBased on the result of progress meetings, specified in "Periodic Progress Meetings," the Contractor shall submit periodic schedule updates. These submissions shall enable the Contracting Officer to assess Contractor's progress.SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTSThe following items shall be submitted by the Contractor for the preliminary submission, initial submission, and every periodic project schedule update throughout the life of the project:Hard Copy of ScheduleTwo hard copies of the project schedule shall be provided.File Medium PDF or ExcelFile NameProject name and contract work DiagramThe network diagram shall be required on the initial schedule submission and on monthly schedule update submissions. The network diagram shall depict and display the order and interdependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished. The Contracting Officer will use, but is not limited to, the following conditions to review compliance with this paragraph:Continuous FlowDiagrams shall show a continuous flow from left to right with no arrows from right to left. The activity number, description, duration, and estimated earned value shall be shown on the diagram.Project Milestone DatesDates shall be shown on the diagram for start of project, any contract required interim completion dates, and contract completion dates.Critical PathThe critical path shall be clearly shown.PERIODIC PROGRESS MEETINGSProgress meetings to discuss payment shall include a monthly onsite meeting or other regular intervals mutually agreed to at the preconstruction conference.Meeting AttendanceThe Contractor's Project Manager shall attend the regular progressUpdate Submission Following Progress MeetingA complete update of the project schedule containing all approved progress, revisions, and adjuncts, based on the regular progress meeting, shall be submitted not later than 4 working days after the monthly progress meeting.REQUESTS FOR TIME EXTENSIONSIn the event the Contractor requests an extension of the contract completion date, or any interim milestone date, the Contractor shall furnish the following for a determination as to whether or not the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under the provisions of the contract: justification, project schedule data, and supporting evidence as the Contracting Officer may deem necessary. Submission of proof of delay is obligatory to any approvals.Justification of DelayThe project schedule shall clearly display that the Contractor has used, in full, all the float time available for the work involved with this request. The Contracting Officer's determination as to the number of allowable days of contract extension shall be based upon the project schedule updates in effect for the time period in question, and other factual information. Actual delays that are found to be caused by the Contractor's own actions, which result in the extension of the schedule, will not be a cause for a time extension to the contract completion date.DIRECTED CHANGESIf the NTP is issued for changes prior to settlement of price and/or time, the Contractor shall submit proposed schedule revisions to the Contracting Officer within 2 weeks of the NTP being issued. The proposed revisions to the schedule will be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to inclusion of those changes within the project schedule.3.9 OWNERSHIP OF FLOATFloat available in the schedule, at any time, shall not be considered for the exclusive use of either the Government or the Contractor.-- End of Section --PART 1 GENERALREFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)EM 385-1-1(2003) Safety -- Safety and Health RequirementsDEFINITIONSEnvironmental Pollution and DamageEnvironmental pollution and damage is the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade the environment aesthetically, culturally and/or historically.Environmental ProtectionEnvironmental protection is the prevention/control of pollution and habitat disruption that may occur to the environment during construction. The control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other pollutants.Contractor Generated Hazardous WasteContractor generated hazardous waste means materials that, if abandoned or disposed of, may meet the definition of a hazardous waste. These waste streams would typically consist of material brought on site by the Contractor to execute work, but are not fully consumed during the course of construction. Examples include, but are not limited to, excess paint thinners (i.e. methyl ethyl ketone, toluene etc.), waste thinners, excess paints, excess solvents, waste solvents, and excess pesticides, and contaminated pesticide equipment rinse water.GENERAL REQUIREMENTSThe Contractor shall minimize environmental pollution and damage that may occur as the result of construction operations. The environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of permanent work shall be protected during the entire duration of this contract. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable environmental Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible for any delays resulting from failure to comply with environmental laws and regulations.SUBCONTRACTORSThe Contractor shall ensure compliance with this section by subcontractors.PAYMENTNo separate payment will be made for work covered under this section. The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of fees associated with environmental permits, application, and/or notices obtained by the Contractor. All costs associated with this section shall be included in the contract price. The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of all fines/fees for violation or non-compliance with Federal, State, Regional and local laws and regulations.SUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Environmental Protection PlanENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLANPrior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to the site, the Contractor shall submit an Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval by the Contracting Officer. The purpose of the Environmental Protection Plan is to present a comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental issues which the Contractor must address during construction. Issues of concern shall be defined within the Environmental Protection Plan as outlined in this section. The Contractor shall address each topic at a level of detail commensurate with the environmental issue and required construction task(s). Topics or issues which are not identified in this section, but which the Contractor considers necessary, shall be identified and discussed after those items formally identified in this section. Prior to submittal of the Environmental Protection Plan, the Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer for the purpose of discussing the implementation of the initial Environmental Protection Plan; possible subsequent additions and revisions to the plan including any reporting requirements; and methods for administration of the Contractor's Environmental Plans. The Environmental Protection Plan shall be current and maintained onsite by the plianceNo requirement in this Section shall be construed as relieving the Contractor of any applicable Federal, State, and local environmental protection laws and regulations. During Construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for identifying, implementing, and submitting for approval any additional requirements to be included in the Environmental Protection Plan.ContentsThe environmental protection plan shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is(are) responsible for ensuring adherence to the Environmental Protection Plan.Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be removed from the site, if applicable.Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the Contractor's environmental protection personnel.Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel training program.An erosion and sediment control plan which identifies the type and location of the erosion and sediment controls to be provided. The plan shall include monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that the control measures are in compliance with the erosion and sediment control plan, Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. A Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) may be substituted for this plan.Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or embankments or haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials on the site.A contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially hazardous substances to be used on the job site; identifies the intended actions to prevent introduction of such materials into the air, water, or ground; and details provisions for compliance with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations for storage and handling of these materials.In accordance with EM 385-1-1, a copy of the Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and the maximum quantity of each hazardous material to be on site at any given time shall beincluded in the contaminant prevention plan. As new hazardous materials are brought on site or removed from the site, the plan shall be updated.A waste water management plan that identifies the methods and procedures for management and/or discharge of waste waters which are directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water, hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines. If a settling/retention pond is required, the plan shall include the design of the pond including drawings, removal plan, and testing requirements for possible pollutants. If land application will be the method of disposal for the waste water, the plan shall include a sketch showing the location for land application along with a description of the pretreatment methods to be implemented. If surface discharge will be the method of disposal, a copy of the permit and associated documents shall be included as an attachment prior to discharging the waste water. If disposal is to a sanitary sewer, the plan shall include documentation that the Waste Water Treatment Plant Operator has approved the flow rate, volume, and type of discharge.AppendixCopies of all environmental permits, permit application packages, approvals to construct, notifications, certifications, reports, and termination documents shall be attached, as an appendix, to the Environmental Protection Plan.PROTECTION FEATURESThis paragraph supplements the Contract Clause PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS. Prior to start of any onsite construction activities, the Contractor and the Contracting Officer shall make a joint condition survey. Immediately following the survey, the Contractor shall prepare a brief report including a plan describing the features requiring protection under the provisions of the Contract Clauses, which are not specifically identified on the drawings as environmental features requiring protection along with the condition of trees, shrubs and grassed areas immediately adjacent to the site of work and adjacent to the Contractor's assigned storage area and access route(s), as applicable. This survey report shall be signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer upon mutual agreement as to its accuracy and completeness. The Contractor shall protect those environmental features included in the survey report and any indicated on the drawings, regardless of interference which their preservation may cause to the Contractor's work under the contract.SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTSThe Contractor shall comply with the special environmental requirements listed here and included at the end of this section.ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT OF CONTRACT DEVIATIONSAny deviations, requested by the Contractor, from the drawings, plans and specifications which may have an environmental impact will be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer and may require an extended review, processing, and approval time. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to disapprove alternate methods, even if they are more cost effective, if the Contracting Officer determines that the proposed alternate method will have an adverse environmental impact.NOTIFICATIONThe Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any observed noncompliance with Federal, State or local environmental laws or regulations, permits, and other elements of the Contractor's Environmental Protection plan. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, inform the Contracting Officer of the proposed corrective action and take such action when approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No time extensions shall be granted or equitable adjustments allowed to the Contractor for any such suspensions. This is in addition to any other actions the Contracting Officer may take under the contract, or in accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulation or Federal Law.PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 3 EXECUTIONLAND RESOURCESThe Contractor shall confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and specifications. Prior to the beginning of any construction, the Contractor shall identify any land resources to be preserved within the work area. Except in areas indicated on the drawings or specified to be cleared, the Contractor shall not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil, and land forms without approval. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened to or attached to any trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized. The Contractor shall provide effective protection for land and vegetation resources at all times as defined in the following subparagraphs. Stone, soil, or other materials displaced into uncleared areas shall be removed by the Contractor.Work Area LimitsPrior to commencing construction activities, the Contractor shall mark the areas that need not be disturbed under this contract. Isolated areas within the general work area which are not to be disturbed shall be marked or fenced. Monuments and markers shall be protected before construction operations commence. Where construction operations are to be conducted during darkness, any markers shall be visible in the dark. The Contractor's personnel shall be knowledgeable of the purpose for marking and/or protecting particular objects.LandscapeTrees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms and other landscape features indicated and defined on the drawings to be preserved shall be clearly identified by marking, fencing, or wrapping with boards, or any other approved techniques. The Contractor shall restore landscape features damaged or destroyed during construction operations outside the limits of the approved work area.OdorsOdors from construction activities shall be controlled at all times. The odors shall not cause a health hazard and shall be in compliance with State regulations and/or local ordinances.Sound IntrusionsThe Contractor shall keep construction activities under surveillance and control to minimize environment damage by noise. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the State of Mississippi rules.CHEMICAL MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND WASTE DISPOSALDisposal of wastes shall be as directed below, unless otherwise specified in other sections and/or shown on the drawings.Solid WastesSolid wastes (excluding clearing debris) shall be placed in containers which are emptied on a regular schedule. Handling, storage, and disposal shall be conducted to prevent contamination. Segregation measures shall be employed so that no hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with solid waste. The Contractor shall transport solid waste off Government property and dispose of it in compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements for solid waste disposal. A Subtitle D RCRA permitted landfill shall be the minimum acceptable off-site solid waste disposal option. The Contractor shall verify that the selected transporters and disposal facilities have the necessary permits and licenses to operate. The Contractor shall comply with site procedures and Federal, State, and local laws and regulations.TRAINING OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNELThe Contractor's personnel shall be trained in all phases of environmental protection and pollution control. The Contractor shall conduct environmental protection/pollution control meetings for all Contractor personnel prior to commencing construction activities. Additional meetings shall be conducted for new personnel and when site conditions change. The training and meeting agenda shall include: methods of detecting and avoiding pollution; familiarization with statutory and contractual pollution standards; installation and care of devices, vegetative covers, and instruments required for monitoring purposes to ensure adequate and continuous environmentalprotection/pollution control; anticipated hazardous or toxic chemicals or wastes, and other regulated contaminants; recognition and protection of archaeological sites, artifacts, wetlands, and endangered species and their habitat that are known to be in the area.POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUPThe Contractor shall clean up all areas used for construction in accordance with Contract Clause: "Cleaning Up". The Contractor shall, unless otherwise instructed in writing by the Contracting Officer, obliterate all signs of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work area, structures, foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or waste materials, and other vestiges of construction prior to final acceptance of the work. The disturbed area shall be graded, filled and the entire area seeded unless otherwise indicated.-- End of Section --PART 1 GENERALGENERAL REQUIREMENTSSite PlanThe Contractor shall prepare a site plan indicating the proposed location and dimensions of any area to be fenced and used by the Contractor, the number of trailers to be used, avenues of ingress/egress to the fenced area and details of the fence installation. Any areas which may have to be graveled to prevent the tracking of mud shall also be identified. The Contractor shall also indicate if the use of a supplemental or other staging area is desired.Identification of EmployeesThe Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing to each employee, and for requiring each employee engaged on the work to display, identification as approved and directed by the Contracting Officer.Prescribed identification shall immediately be delivered to the Contracting Officer for cancellation upon release of any employee. When required, the Contractor shall obtain and provide fingerprints of persons employed on the project. Contractor and subcontractor personnel shall wear identifying markings on hard hats clearly identifying the company for whom the employee works.Employee ParkingContractor employees shall park privately owned vehicles in an area designated by the Contracting Officer. This area will be within reasonable walking distance of the construction site. Contractor employee parking shall not interfere with existing and established parking requirements of the military installation.AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICESPayment for Utility ServicesThe Government will make all reasonably required utilities available to the Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the contract The Contractor shall carefully conserve any utilities furnished without charge.Temporary ConnectionsThe Contractor, at its expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, shall provide and maintain necessary temporary connections, distribution linesSanitationThe Contractor shall provide and maintain within the construction area minimum field-type sanitary facilities approved by the Contracting Officer. Government toilet facilities will not be available to Contractor's personnel.TelephoneThe Contractor shall make arrangements and pay all costs for telephone facilities desired.BULLETIN BOARD, PROJECT SIGN, AND PROJECT SAFETY SIGNBulletin BoardImmediately upon beginning of work, the Contractor shall provide a weatherproof glass-covered bulletin board not less than 36 by 48 inches in size for displaying the Equal Employment Opportunity poster, a copy of the wage decision contained in the contract, Wage Rate Information poster, and other information approved by the Contracting Officer. The bulletin board shall be located at the project site in a conspicuous place easily accessible to all employees, as approved by the Contracting Officer. Legible copies of the aforementioned data shall be displayed until work is completed. Upon completion of work the bulletin board shall be removed by and remain the property of the Contractor.Project Sign IS NOT REQUIRED THIS PROJECTProject Signboard (Air Force) IS NOT REQUIRED THIS PROJECTProject and Safety SignsThe requirements for the signs, their content, and location shall be as shown on the drawings. The signs shall be erected within 15 days after receipt of the notice to proceed. The data required by the safety sign shall be corrected daily, with light colored metallic or non-metallic numerals. Upon completion of the project, the signs shall be removed from the site.PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFICDuring construction the Contractor shall provide access and temporary relocated roads as necessary to maintain traffic. The Contractor shall maintain and protect traffic on all affected roads during the construction period except as otherwise specifically directed by the Contracting Officer. Measures for the protection and diversion of traffic, including the provision of watchmen and flagmen, erection of barricades, placing of lights around and in front of equipment and the work, and the erection and maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs, shall be as required by the State and local authorities having jurisdiction. The traveling public shall be protected from damage to person and property.The Contractor's traffic on roads selected for hauling material to and from the site shall interfere as little as possible with public traffic. The Contractor shall investigate the adequacy of existing roads and the allowable load limit on these roads. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any damage to roads caused by construction operations.Haul RoadsThe Contractor shall be restricted to haul routes indicated on the drawings unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and distinctive markings for the safe movement of traffic. The method of dust control, although optional, shall be adequate to ensure safe operation at all times. Upon completion of the work, haul roads used and/or damaged by the Contracting Officer shall be cleaned and/or repaired to the condition prior to the start of construction work.BarricadesThe Contractor shall erect and maintain temporary barricades to limit public access to hazardous areas. Such barricades shall be required whenever safe public access to paved areas such as roads, parking areas or sidewalks is prevented by construction activities or as otherwise necessary to ensure the safety of both pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Barricades shall be securely placed, clearly visible with adequate illumination to provide sufficient visual warning of the hazard during both day and night.CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY FACILITIESAdministrative Field OfficesThe Contractor shall provide and maintain administrative field office facilities within the construction area at the designated site. Government office and warehouse facilities will not be available to the Contractor's personnel.Storage AreaThe Contractor shall construct a temporary 6 foot high chain link fence around trailers and materials. The fence shall include plastic strip inserts, colored brown, so that visibility through the fence is obstructed. Fence posts may be driven, in lieu of concrete bases, where soil conditions permit.Trailers, materials, or equipment shall not be placed or stored outside the fenced area unless such trailers, materials, or equipment are assigned a separate and distinct storage area by the Contracting Officer away from the vicinity of the construction site but within the military boundaries. Trailers, equipment, or materials shall not be open to public view with the exception of those items which are in support of ongoing work on any given day. Materials shall not be stockpiled outside the fence in preparation for the next day's work. Mobile equipment, such as tractors, wheeled lifting equipment, cranes, trucks, and like equipment, shall be parked within the fenced area at the end of each work day.Supplemental Storage AreaUpon Contractor's request, the Contracting Officer will designate another or supplemental area for the Contractor's use and storage of trailers, equipment, and materials. This area may not be in close proximity of the construction site but shall be within the military boundaries. Fencing of materials or equipment will not be required at this site; however, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanliness and orderliness of the area used and for the security of any material or equipment stored in this area. Utilities will not be provided to this area by the Government.Appearance of TrailersTrailers utilized by the Contractor for administrative or material storage purposes shall present a clean and neat exterior appearance and shall be in a state of good repair. Trailers which, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, require exterior painting or maintenance will not be allowed on the military property. Trailers shall be in accordance with Base standards for temporary trailers.Maintenance of Storage AreaFencing shall be kept in a state of good repair and proper alignment. Should the Contractor elect to traverse, with construction equipment or other vehicles, grassed or unpaved areas which are not established roadways, such areas shall be covered with a layer of gravel as necessary to prevent rutting and the tracking of mud onto paved or established roadways; gravel gradation shall be at the Contractor's discretion. Grass located within the boundaries of the construction site shall be mowed for the duration of the project. Grass and vegetation along fences, buildings, under trailers, and i areas not accessible to mowers shall be edged or trimmed neatly.Security ProvisionsAdequate outside security lighting shall be provided at the Contractor's temporary facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of its own equipment; in addition, the Contractor shall notify the appropriate law enforcement agency requesting periodic security checks of the temporary project field office.TEMPORARY PROJECT SAFETY FENCINGAs soon as practicable, but not later than 15 days after the date established for commencement of work, the Contractor shall furnish and erect temporary project safety fencing at the work site. The safety fencing shall be a chain link fence with brown vision screen or approved equal, a minimum of 72 inches high, supported and tightly secured to steel posts located on maximum 10 foot centers, constructed at the approved location. The safety fencing shall be maintained by the Contractor during the life of the contract and, upon completion and acceptance of the work, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the work site.CLEANUPConstruction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the like shall be removed from the work site daily. Any dirt or mud which is tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways shall be cleaned away. Materials resulting from demolition activities which are salvageable shall be stored within the fenced area described above or at the supplemental storage area. Stored material not in trailers, whether new or salvaged, shall be neatly stacked when stored.RESTORATION OF STORAGE AREAUpon completion of the project and after removal of trailers, materials, and equipment from within the fenced area, the fence shall be removed and will become the property of the Contractor. Areas used by the Contractor for the storage of equipment or material, or other use, shall be restored to the original or better condition. Gravel used to traverse grassed areas shall be removed and the area restored to its original condition, including top soil and sodding as necessary.PART 2 PRODUCTSNOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTIONNOT USEDEND OF SECTIONPART 1 – GENERALSUMMARYSection includes: Erection, maintenance, and dismantling of temporary fencing around construction site and materials storage areas. This section does not apply where security fencing is required.Refer to Contracting Officer for location of Personnel Gates and Vehicular Access Gates.SUBMITTALSSubmit in accordance with Division 01 requirementsShop drawing indicating layout of temporary fencing, location and size of gates, existing pavement and roads, access to fire hydrants and hose connections, and other site specific conditions. Prepare drawing after site observation and verification of existing conditions.PART 2 – PRODUCTSTEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCINGUnless otherwise indicated, type of temporary chain link fencing shall be Contractor's option. Following types are acceptable:New materials or previously used salvaged chain link fencing in good condition.Posts: Galvanized steel pipe of diameter to provide rigidity. Post shall be suitable for setting in concrete footings, driving into ground, anchoring with base plates, or inserting in precast concrete blocks.Fabric: Woven 2” galvanized steel wire mesh. Provide in continuous lengths to be wire tied to fence posts or prefabricated into modular pipe-framed fence panels.Length:400’ for lay down area as determined by Contracting Officer.Height: 6’-0”Post Spacing: Max 10’-0” OCPost CapsFit all exposed ends of post with caps. Provide caps that fit snugly and are weather tight. Where top rail is used, provide caps to accommodate the top rail. Install post caps as recommended by the manufacturer and as and Bottom Tension WireASTM A817 and ASTM F626, zinc-coated, having minimum coating the same as the fence fabric.Gates: Provide personnel and vehicle gates of the quantity and size indicated on the Drawings or by Contracting Officer required for functional access to site.Fabricate of same material as used for fencing.Vehicle gates:One (1) Required: Location by Contracting OfficerMinimum width: 20 feet to allow access for emergency vehicles.Capable of manual operation by one person.Lockable by Padlock: Provide Padlock and deliver three (3) sets of keys total for all gates to Contracting Officer. All Padlocks for Vehicular gates and Personnel gates must be keyed the same.Personnel / Pedestrian GatesMin two (2) required: Location by Contracting OfficerMinimum Width: 48”Capable of manual operation by one person.Lockable by Padlock: Provide Padlock and deliver three (3) sets of keys total for all gates to Contracting Officer. All Padlocks for Vehicular gates and Personnel gates must be keyed the same.PRIVACY FABRICProvide continuous water resistant knitted polypropylene 95% visibility blockage privacy fabric equal to PRIVACY SCREEN – 200 SERIES by .Color: Chosen by Contracting Officer from MFGR standard line of colors.Height: Match fence height.PLASTIC MESH FENCINGWhere indicated on Drawings or by Contracting Officer as required to provide visual warning and control, provide plastic mesh fencing supported by steel posts driven into ground or set in precast concrete blocks.Height: 36 inches minimum. Color: Safety orange.PART 3 – EXECUTIONInstallation of temporary fencing shall not deter or hinder access to existing and new hose connections and fire hydrants. Maintain 3 feet diameter clear space around fire hydrants.Where fire hydrant or hose connection is blocked by fencing, provide access gate.Access: Provide gates for personnel, delivery of materials, and access by emergency vehicles.Field verify location with Contracting Officer.INSTALLATIONChain link posts:Space as 10 maximum.For solid ground conditions drive posts min 36”, set in holes and compact backfill, or anchor in precast concrete blocks with concrete.For soft and unstable ground conditions, cast concrete plug around post.For posts over pavement: Use galvanized steel post plates or precast concrete blocks filled with concrete.Gate posts: Use bracing or concrete footings to provide rigidity for accommodating size of gate.Fence Mesh Fabric: Securely attach to posts top and bottom and min 12” OC verticalPrivacy Fabric: Securely attach to line posts and secure to top and bottom tension wire min 24” OC.Gates: Install with required hardware.Plastic mesh fencing: Space steel support posts to ensure mesh remains vertical and at proper height. Securely tie mesh to posts.MAINTENANCE AND REMOVALMaintain fencing in good condition. If damaged, immediately repair.Remove temporary fencing upon completion of Work or when no longer required for security or control. Backfill holes and compact to finish grade. Holes in pavement shall be surfaced to match existing paving. Repair damage caused by installation of temporary fencing.END OF SECTIONPART 1 - GENERALSUMMARYSection Includes:Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.DEFINITIONSRemove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.PREINSTALLATION MEETINGSPredemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project RMATIONAL SUBMITTALSFor refrigerant- VECTRUS Technicians will remove and store all refrigerant.Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSLandfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.FIELD CONDITIONSConditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by The Government as far as practical.Before selective demolition, The Government will remove the following items:N/ANotify The Government Contracting Officer and VECTRUS Construction Manager of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.Hazardous materials will be removed PER Keesler AFB Asbestos Operations and Hazardous Management plan before start of the Work. Unless specifically stated as part of the project.If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify The Government Contracting Officer and VECTRUS Construction Manager.Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.PART 2 - PRODUCTSPEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSRegulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.PART 3 - EXECUTIONEXAMINATIONVerify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSExisting Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against ply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 01100 "Summary."Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to The Government.Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.PREPARATIONTemporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERALGeneral: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.Removed and Reinstalled Items:Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.Protect items from damage during transport and storage.Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALSGeneral: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain The Government's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled ply with requirements specified in Section 01524 "Construction Waste Management."Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.Disposal: Transport demolished materials off The Government's property and legally dispose of them.CLEANINGClean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.END OF SECTIONPART 1 GENERALSUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Equipment/Product Warranty List; GSD-11 Closeout Submittals As-Built Drawings; G Record Of Materials; GUtility Record Drawings Utility As-Built Drawings; GEquipment/Product Warranty Tag; G Hazardous Material Reporting; G Certification of EPA Designated Items; GHAZARDOUS MATERIAL REPORTINGSubmit hazardous material reporting information which includes actual quantities of hazardous materials stored and used during the project.CERTIFICATION OF EPA DESIGNATED ITEMSSubmit the Certification of EPA Designated Items as required by FAR 52.223-9, "Certification and Estimate of Percentage of Recovered Material Content for EPA Designated Items".PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSAs-Built Drawings"FAC 5252.236-9310, Record Drawings." In addition to the requirements of FAC 5252.236-9310, the Contractor shall survey the horizontal and vertical location of all underground utilities to within 0.1 feet relative to the station datum. All pipe utilities shall be surveyed at each fitting and every 100 LF of run length. Electrical and communication duct bank, direct buried conduit, and direct buried conductor shall be surveyed every 100 LF and at each change of direction. Locations and elevations shall be recorded on the Record Drawings. Submit drawings with QC certification.Utility Record DrawingsIn addition to as-built drawings, provide for each exterior utility system a set of reproducible utility drawings that are stamped and signed by a registered professional civil engineer or professional land surveyor and two paper copies. Submit within ten working days after each system is in place, but no later than five working days before final inspection. Indicate exterior utilities from a point five feet from a building to the termination point or point of connection to existing system. Include the following:Horizontal and vertical controls for new utilities and existing utilities exposed during construction. Reference to station's horizontal and vertical control system.Sufficient dimensional control for all important features such as beginning and termination points, points of connection, inverts for sewer lines and drainage collection systems, top of pipe or conduit runs, manholes, cathodic protection appurtenances, valves, valve stem tops, backflow preventers, and other significant features.Indicate type and size of all materials used in the construction of the system.Indicate bearing and distance on tangent lines. On curves, indicate delta and radius of the curve, also provide X, Y, and Z coordinates at all BC and EC angle points. Indicate horizontal and vertical control for all intersecting and tangent points where utility alignment changes. Indicate X, Y, and Z coordinates at building line and point of connection for straight building laterals or services under 40 feet.Tolerances: Horizontal and vertical control dimensions, plus or minus 0.10 foot. Angular control, plus or minus 0 degrees 01 minute.As-Built Record of MaterialsFurnish a record of materials. Where several manufacturers' brands, types, or classes of the item listed have been used in the project, designate specific areas where each item was used. Designations shall be keyed to the areas and spaces depicted on the contract drawing. Furnish the record of materials used in the following format:MATERIALS SPECIFICATION MANUFACTURER MATERIALS USED WHERE DESIGNATION (MANUFACTURER'S USED DESIGNATION)EQUIPMENT/PRODUCT WARRANTIESEquipment/Product Warranty ListFurnish to the Contracting Officer a bound and indexed notebook containing written warranties for equipment/products furnished under the contract, and prepare a complete listing of such equipment/products. The equipment/products list shall state the specification section applicable to the equipment/product, duration of the warranty therefore, start date of the warranty, ending date of the warranty, and the point of contact for fulfillment of the warranty. The warranty period shall begin on the same date as project acceptance and shall continue for the full product warranty period. Execute the full list and deliver to the Contracting Officer prior to final acceptance of the facility.Equipment Warranty Tags and Guarantor's Local RepresentativeFurnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone number of the guarantor's representative nearest to the location where the equipment and appliances are installed. The guarantor's representative, upon request of thestation representative, shall honor the warranty during the warranty period, and shall provide the services prescribed by the terms of the warranty. At the time of installation, tag each item of warranted equipment with a durable, oil- and water-resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer. Attach tag with copper wire and spray with a clear silicone waterproof coating. Leave the date of acceptance and QC's signature blank until project is accepted for beneficial occupancy. Tag shall show the following information:EQUIPMENT/PRODUCT WARRANTY TAGType of Equipment/Product Warranty Period From To Contract No. Inspector's Signature Date Accepted Construction Contractor:Name: Address: Telephone: Warranty Contact: Name: Address: Telephone: STATION PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE1.6 CLEANUPLeave premises "broom clean." Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. Replace filters of operating equipment. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems. Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site.PART 2 PRODUCTSNot used. PART 3 EXECUTIONNot used.-- End of Section –PART 1 GENERALSUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-02 Shop Drawings As-Built DrawingsDrawings showing final as-built conditions of the project. The manually prepared drawings shall consist of 2 complete full sized set of marked up prints. Major system redesigns or designs done in the submittal phase may require additional autocad files.SD-03 Product DataAs-Built Record of Equipment and MaterialsTwo copies of the record listing the as-built materials and equipment incorporated into the construction of the project.Warranty Management PlanOne set of the warranty management plan containing information relevant to the warranty of materials and equipment incorporated into the construction project, including the starting date of warranty of construction. The Contractor shall furnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone number of each of the guarantor's representatives nearest to the project location.Warranty TagsTwo record copies of the warranty tags showing the layout and design. Final CleaningPROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSAs-Built DrawingsThis paragraph covers as-built drawings complete, as a requirement of the contract. The terms "drawings," "contract drawings," "drawing files," "working as-built drawings" and "final as-built drawings" refer to contract drawings which are revised to be used for final as-built drawings.Working As-Built and Final As-Built DrawingsThe Contractor shall revise 2 sets of paper drawings by red-line process to show the as-built conditions during the prosecution of the project. These working as- built marked drawings shall be kept current on a weekly basis and at least one set shall be available on the jobsite at all times.Changes from the contract plans which are made in the work or additionalinformation which might be uncovered in the course of construction shall be accurately and neatly recorded as they occur by means of details and notes. Finalas-built drawings shall be prepared after the completion of each definable feature of work, as appropriate for the project. The working and final as-built drawings shall show, but shall not be limited to, the following information:The actual location, kinds and sizes of all sub-surface utility lines. In order that the location of these lines and appurtenances may be determined in the event the surface openings or indicators become covered over or obscured, the as-built drawings shall show, by offset dimensions to two permanently fixed surface features, the end of each run including each change in direction. Valves, splice boxes and similar appurtenances shall be located by dimensioning along the utility run from a reference point. The average depth below the surface of each run shall also be recorded.The location and dimensions of any changes within the building structure.Correct grade, elevations, cross section, or alignment of roads, earthwork, structures or utilities if any changes were made from contract plans.Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the Contractor.The topography, invert elevations and grades of drainage installed or affected as part of the project construction.Changes or modifications which result from the final inspection.Where contract drawings or specifications present options, only the option selected for construction shall be shown on the final as-built prints.If borrow material for this project is from sources on Government property, or if Government property is used as a spoil area, the Contractor shall furnish a contour map of the final borrow pit/spoil area elevations.Systems designed or enhanced by the Contractor, such as HVAC controls, fire alarm, fire sprinkler, and irrigation systems.Modifications (change order price shall include the Contractor's cost to change working and final as-built drawings to reflect modificationsDrawing PreparationThe as-built drawings shall be modified as may be necessary to correctly show the features of the project as it has been constructed by bringing the contract set into agreement with approved working as-built prints, and adding such additional drawings as may be necessary. These working as-built marked prints shall be neat, legible and accurate. These drawings are part of the permanent records of this project and shall be returned to the Contracting Officer after approval by the Government. Any drawings damaged or lost by the Contractor shall be satisfactorily replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Government.Manually Prepared DrawingsOnly personnel proficient in the preparation of manually prepared drawings shall be employed to modify the original contract drawing or prepare additional new drawings. Additions and corrections to the contract drawings shall be neat, clean and legible, shall be done to the same level of detail, and shall match the adjacent existing line work, and lettering being annotated in type, density, size and style.Within 30 days for contracts less than $5 million after Government approval of all of the working as-built drawings for a phase of work, the Contractor shall prepare the final as-built drawings for that phase of work and submit two sets of blue-line prints of these drawings for Government review and approval (One digital set).Drawings will become the property of the Government upon final approval. Failure to submit final as-built drawings and marked prints, as required herein, will be cause for withholding any payment due the Contractor under this contract. Approval and acceptance of final as-built drawings shall be accomplished before final payment is made to the Contractor.PaymentNo separate payment will be made for as-built drawings required under this contract, and all costs accrued in connection with such drawings shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor.As-Built Record of Equipment and MaterialsThe Contractor shall furnish two sets of final record of equipment and materials 15 days after final inspection. The designations shall be keyed to the related area depicted on the contract drawings.Final Approved Shop DrawingsThe Contractor shall furnish final approved project shop drawings 30 days after transfer of the completed facility.Construction Contract SpecificationsThe Contractor shall furnish final as-built construction contract specifications, including modifications thereto, 30 days after transfer of the completed facility.Real Property EquipmentThe Contractor shall furnish a list of installed equipment furnished under this contract. The list shall include all information usually listed on manufacturer's name plate. The "EQUIPMENT-IN-PLACE LIST" shall include, as applicable, the following for each piece of equipment installed: description of item, location (by room number), model number, serial number, capacity, name and address of manufacturer, name and address of equipment supplier, condition, spare parts list, manufacturer's catalog, and warranty. A draft list shall be furnished at time of transfer. The final list shall be furnished 30 days after transfer of the completed facility.WARRANTY MANAGEMENTWarranty Management PlanThe Contractor shall develop a warranty management plan. At least 30 days before the planned pre-warranty conference, the Contractor shall submit the warranty management plan for Government approval. The warranty management plan shall include all required actions and documents to assure that the Government receives all warranties to which it is entitled. The plan shall be in narrative form and contain sufficient detail to render itsuitable for use by future maintenance and repair personnel Warranty information made available during the construction phase shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to each monthly pay estimate. Approved information shall be assembled in a binder and shall be turned over to the Government upon acceptance of the work. The construction warranty period shall begin on the date of project acceptance and shall continue for the full product warranty period. A joint 9 month warranty inspection shall be conducted, measured from time of acceptance, by the Contractor, Contracting Officer and the Customer Representative.Performance BondThe Contractor's Performance Bond shall remain effective throughout the construction period.In the event the Contractor fails to commence and diligently pursue any construction warranty work required, the Contracting Officer will have the work performed by others, and after completion of the work, will charge the remaining construction warranty funds of expenses incurred by the Government while performing the work, including, but not limited to administrative expenses.In the event sufficient funds are not available to cover the construction warranty work performed by the Government at the Contractor's expense, the Contracting Officer will have the right to recoup expenses from the company.Following oral or written notification of required construction warranty repair work, the Contractor shall respond in a timely manner. Written verification will follow oral instructions. Failure of the Contractor to respond will be cause for the Contracting Officer to proceed against the Contractor.Pre-Warranty ConferencePrior to contract completion, and at a time designated by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer to develop a mutual understanding with respect to the requirements of this section. In connection with these requirements and at the time of the Contractor's quality control completion inspection, the Contractor shall furnish the name, telephone number and address of a licensed and bonded company which is authorized to initiate and pursue construction warranty work action on behalf of the Contractor. This point of contact will be located within the local service area of the warranted construction, shall be continuously available, and shall be responsive to Government inquiry on warranty work action and status. This requirement does not relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities in connection with other portions of this provision.Contractor's Response to Construction Warranty Service RequirementsFollowing oral or written notification, the Contractor shall respond to construction warranty service requirements as shown below. The Contractor shall submit a report on any warranty item that has been repaired during the warranty period. The report shall include the cause of the problem, date reported, corrective action taken, and when the repair was completed.If the Contractor does not perform the construction warranty within the timeframes specified, the Government will perform the work and back charge the construction warranty payment item established. Performonsite inspection to evaluate situation, and determine course of action within 8 hours, all other work to be initiated within 3 work days and work continuously to completion or relief.Warranty TagsAt the time of installation, each warranted item shall be tagged with a durable, oil and water resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer. Each tag shall be attached with a copper wire and shall be sprayed with a silicone waterproof coating. The date of acceptance and the QC signature shall remain blank until project is accepted for beneficial occupancy.MECHANICAL TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING, AND COMMISSIONING Prior to final inspection and transfer of the completed facility; all reports, statements, certificates, and completed checklists for testing, adjusting, balancing, and commissioning of mechanical systems shall be submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer as specified in applicable technical specification sections.OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSOperation manuals and maintenance manuals shall be submitted as specified. Operation manuals and maintenance manuals provided in a common volume shall be clearly differentiated and shall be separately indexed.FINAL CLEANINGThe premises shall be left broom clean. Stains, foreign substances, and temporary labels shall be removed from surfaces. Carpet and soft surfaces shall be vacuumed. Equipment and fixtures shall be cleaned to a sanitary condition. Filters of operating equipment shall be replaced. Debris shall be removed from roofs, drainage systems, gutters, and downspouts. Paved areas shall be swept and landscaped areas shall be raked clean. The site shall have waste, surplus materials, and rubbish removed. The project area shall have temporary structures, barricades, project signs, and construction facilities removed. A list of completed clean-up items shall be submitted on the day of final inspection.PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PRT 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)– End of Section –PART 1 GENERALSUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATASubmit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data specifically applicable to this contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment, product, or system. Organize and present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and subassembly level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance with this section and Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.Package QualityDocuments must be fully legible. Poor quality copies and material with hole punches obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted.Package ContentData package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled "Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Packages." Comply with the data package requirements specified in the individual technical sections, including the content of the packages and addressing each product, component, and system designated for data package submission.Changes to SubmittalsManufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data shall be furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Changes, additions, or revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of submitted data, shall be submitted by the Contractor within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change requirement.TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGESOperating InstructionsInclude specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the following phases of operation:Safety PrecautionsList personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all operating conditions.Operator PrestartInclude procedures required to set up and prepare each system for use.Startup, Shutdown, and Post-Shutdown ProceduresProvide narrative description for Startup, Shutdown and Post-shutdown operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure.Normal OperationsProvide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures. Include Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and specific equipment.Emergency OperationsInclude Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment. Include Emergency Shutdown Instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of all utility systems including required valve positions, valve locations and zones or portions of systems controlled.Operator Service RequirementsInclude instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and recording gage readings.Environmental ConditionsInclude a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature, humidity, and other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each product, component or system.Describe conditions under which the item equipment should not be allowed to run.Preventive MaintenanceInclude the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize corrective maintenance and repair.Lubrication DataInclude preventative maintenance lubrication data, in addition to instructions for lubrication provided under paragraph titled "Operator Service Requirements":A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and applications.Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities.A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency.Preventive Maintenance Plan and ScheduleInclude manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance, inspections, tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance. Provide manufacturer's projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft. For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified frequency and procedures for each separate operation.Corrective Maintenance (Repair)Include manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for correcting problems and making repairs.Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic TechniquesInclude step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or require replacement.Wiring Diagrams and Control DiagramsWiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces.Provide acomplete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to actual installation configuration and numbering.Maintenance and Repair ProceduresInclude instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.Removal and Replacement InstructionsInclude step-by-step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies, subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Instructions shall include a combination of text and illustrations.Spare Parts and Supply ListsInclude lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations. List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to obtain.Corrective Maintenance Work-HoursInclude manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance work-hours including requirements by type of craft. Corrective maintenance that requires completion or participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be identified and tabulated separately.AppendicesProvide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphsbut pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment. Include the following:Parts IdentificationProvide identification and coverage for all parts of each component, assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations and separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key number that will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown in the listings shall be grouped by components, assemblies, and subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment, components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments,or accessories, such astypically shown in a master parts catalogWarranty InformationList and explain the various warranties and include the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract documents in order to keep warranties in force.Personnel Training RequirementsProvide information available from the manufacturers that are needed for use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the equipment and systems.Testing Equipment and Special Tool InformationInclude information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of components.Contractor InformationProvide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or equipment, or system. For each item, also provide the name address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service organization most convenient to the project site. Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product, equipment, and system manufacturers.SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGESFurnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections.Data Package 3Safety precautionsNormal operationsEmergency operationsEnvironmental conditionsLubrication dataPreventive maintenance plan and schedule Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic tech.Wiring diagrams and control diagrams Maintenance and repair proceduresRemoval and replacement instructions Spare parts and supply listParts identificationWarranty informationTest equipment and special tool information Contractor informationPART 2 PRODUCTSNOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTIONNOT USEDEND OF SECTIONPART 1 GENERALREFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (ARI)ARI Guideline K(1997) Containers for Recovered Fluorocarbon Refrigerants AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)ANSI A10.6(1990; R 1998) Safety Requirements for Demolition OperationsU.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)EM 385-1-1(2003) Safety -- Safety and Health RequirementsU.S. DEFENSE LOGISTICS AGENCY (DLA)DLA 4145.25(June 2000) Storage and Handling of Liquefied and Gaseous Compressed Gases and Their Full and Empty CylindersU.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)DOD 4000.25-1-M(2000) Requisitioning and Issue ProceduresMIL-STD-129(Rev P) Military Marking for Shipment and StorageU.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 40 CFR 61-SUBPART MNational Emission Standard for Asbestos40 CFR 82Protection of Stratospheric Ozone49 CFR 173.301Shipment of Compressed Gases in Cylinders and Spherical Pressure VesselsGENERAL REQUIREMENTSDo not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Construction Manager and Contracting Officer. Remove rubbish and debris from the base; do not allow accumulations inside or outside the building. The work includes demolition, salvage of identified items and materials, and removal of resulting rubbish and debris.Remove rubbish and debris from Government property daily, unless otherwise directed. Materials that cannot be removed daily shall be stored in areas specified by the Construction Manager and Contracting Officer. In the interest of occupational safety and health, perform the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable Sections.SUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-07 CertificatesDemolition plan; Notifications;Notification of Demolition and Renovation forms;Proposed salvage, demolition and removal procedures for approval before work is started.REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTSComply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to the requirements of the "Contract Clauses," conform to the safety requirements contained in ANSI A10.6.Furnish timely notification of demolition and renovation projects to Federal, State, regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M. Notify the Regional Office of the United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), State's environmental protection agency and the Construction Manager and Contracting Officer in writing 10 working days prior to the commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M.DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROLPrevent the spread of dust and debris and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution.PROTECTIONTraffic Control SignsWhere pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work, use traffic barricades with flashing lights. Anchor barricades in a manner to prevent displacement by wind. Notify the Construction Manager And Contracting Officer prior to beginning such work.Existing WorkBefore beginning any demolition work, survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. Record existing work in the presence of the Construction Manager And Contracting Officer showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or removal. Photographs sized 4 inch will be acceptable as a record of existing conditions. Include in the record the elevation of the top of foundation walls, the location and extent of cracks and other damage and description of surface conditions that exist prior to before starting work.Items to Remain in PlaceTake necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Government. Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the Construction Manager And Contracting Officer. Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated.Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements and/or pavements to remain. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition or removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval by the Construction Manager And Contracting Officer prior to performing such work.Existing ConstructionDo not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or necessary for installation of new construction. Provide temporary shoring and bracing for support of building components to prevent settlement or other movement. Provide protective measures to control accumulation and migration of dust and dirt in all work areas. Remove dust, dirt, and debris from work areas daily.Weather ProtectionFor portions of the building to remain, protect building interior and materials and equipment from the weather at all times.Utility ServiceMaintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. Prior to start of work, utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be shut off by the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor.FacilitiesProtect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. Floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, and other structural components that are designed and constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring, and are determined to be in stable condition, must remain standing without additional bracing, shoring, or lateral support until demolished, unless directed otherwise by the Construction Manager And Contracting Officer. Ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure bracing, shoring, or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work performed under this contract.Protection of PersonnelBefore, during and after the demolition work the Contractor shall continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the demolition site. No area, section, or component of floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, or other structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient bracing, shoring, or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area.BURNINGThe use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permittedRELOCATIONSPerform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled in the trades involved. Items to be relocated which are damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired or replaced with new undamaged items as approved by the Construction Manager And Contracting Officer.REQUIRED DATAThe Demolition plan shall include procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility services, a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of operations. Include statements affirming Contractor inspection of the existing roof deck and its suitability to perform as a safe working platform or if inspection reveals a safety hazard to workers, state provisions for securing the safety of the workers throughout the performance of the work. Provide procedures for safe conduct of the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1.ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTIONComply with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified.USE OF EXPLOSIVESUse of explosives will not be permitted.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 FILL MATERIALComply with excavating, backfilling, and compacting procedures for soils used as backfill material to fill basements, voids, depressions or excavations resulting from demolition of structures.PART 3 EXECUTIONEXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVEDStructuresFlooring in way of work for vertical chases.Utilities and Related Equipment General RequirementsDo not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing bythe Construction Manager And Contracting Officer. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Government except when approved in writing and then only after temporary utility services have been approved and provided. Do not begin demolition work until all utility disconnections have been made. Shut off and cap utilities for future use, as indicated.Disconnecting Existing UtilitiesRemove existing utilities, as indicated and as uncovered by work and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by the Construction Manager And Contracting Officer. When utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the Construction Manager And Contracting Officer shall be notified prior to further work in that area. Remove meters and related equipment and deliver to a location on the station in accordance with instructions of the Construction Manager And Contracting Officer.MasonrySawcut and remove masonry so as to facilitate the installation of new work. Where new masonry adjoins existing, the new work shall abut or tie into the existing construction as indicated and/ or specified for the new work. Provide square, straight edges and corners where existing masonry adjoins new work and other locations.ConcreteSaw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 2 inch. Make each cut in walls perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete.Structural SteelDismantle structural steel at field connections and in a manner that will prevent bending or damage. Salvage and recycle structural steel, steel joists, girders, angles, plates, columns and shapes. Flame-cutting torches are permitted when other methods of dismantling are not practical. Transport steel joists and girders as whole units and not dismantled. Transport structural steel shapes to a designated storage area, stacked according to size, type of member and length, and stored off the ground, protected from the weather.Miscellaneous MetalSalvage shop-fabricated items such as access doors and frames, steel gratings, metal ladders, wire mesh partitions, metal railings, metal windows and similar items as whole units. Salvage light-gage and cold- formed metal framing, such as steel studs, steel trusses, and similar items. Scrap metal shall become the Contractor's property. Recycle scrap metal to the greatest extent possible as part of demolition operations. Provide separate containers to collect scrap metal and transport to a scrap metal collection or recycle facility.CarpentrySalvage and recycle lumber, millwork items, and finished boards except those that are unfit for reuse. Remove windows, doors and frames and similar items as whole units, complete with trim and accessories. Do not remove hardware attached to units, except for door closers. Brace the open end of door frames to prevent damage.PatchingWhere removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished work, patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces. Where new work is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work. Finished surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface and shall match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to texture and finish. Patching shall be as specified and indicated, and shall include:Concrete and Masonry: Completely fill holes and depressions, identified and caused by previous physical damage or left as a result of removals in existing masonry walls to remain, with an approved masonry patching material, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.Air Conditioning EquipmentRemove air conditioning equipment without releasing chlorofluorocarbon refrigerants to the atmosphere in accordance with the Clean Air Act Amendment of 1990. Recover all refrigerants prior to removing air conditioning equipment and dispose of in accordance with the paragraph entitled "Disposal of Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)."Mechanical Equipment and FixturesDisconnect mechanical hardware at the nearest connection to existing services to remain, unless otherwise noted. Mechanical equipment and fixtures must be disconnected at fittings.PipingDisconnect piping at unions, flanges and valves, and fittings as required to reduce the pipe into straight lengths. If the piping that remains can become pressurized due to upstream valve failure, end caps, blind flanges, or other types of plugs or fittings with a pressure gage and bleed valve shall be attached to the open end of the pipe to ensure positive leak control. Box prefabricated supports, hangers, plates, valves, and specialty items according to size and type.Classify piping not reusable as scrap metal.Fixtures, Motors and MachinesRemove motors and machines associated with heating, air conditioning, refrigeration, and other mechanical system installations.Classify units as scrap and disposed of by the Contractor.CONCURRENT EARTH-MOVING OPERATIONSDo not begin excavation, filling, and other earth-moving operations that are sequential to demolition work in areas occupied by structures to be demolished until all demolition in the area has been completed and debris removed. Holes, open basements and other hazardous openings shall be filled.DISPOSITION OF MATERIALTitle to MaterialsAll materials and equipment removed and not reused or salvaged, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Government property. Title to materials resulting from demolition, and materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Construction Manager And Contracting Officer of the Contractor's demolition and removal procedures, and authorization by the Construction Manager And Contracting Officer to begin demolition. The Government will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract award. Materials and equipment shall not be viewed by prospective purchasers or sold on the site.Disposal of Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)Class I and Class II ODS are defined in Section, 602(a) and (b), of The Clean Air Act. Prevent discharge of Class I and Class II ODS to the atmosphere. Place recovered ODS in cylinders meeting ARI Guideline K suitable for the type ODS (filled to no more than 80 percent capacity) and provide appropriate labeling. Recovered ODS shall be remove from Government property and dispose of in accordance with 40 CFR 82.Products, equipment and appliances containing ODS in a sealed, self-contained system (e.g. residential refrigerators and window air conditioners) shall be disposed of in accordance with 40 CFR 82.Special InstructionsNo more than one type of ODS is permitted in each container. A warning/hazardous label shall be applied to the containers in accordance with Department of Transportation regulations. All cylinders including but not limited to fire extinguishers, spheres, or canisters containing an ODS shall have a tag with the following information:Activity name and unit identification codeActivity point of contact and phone numberType of ODS and pounds of ODS containedDate of shipmentNaval stock number (for information, call (804) 279-4525).Transportation GuidanceShipment of all ODS containers shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-129, DLA 4145.25 (also referenced one of the following: Army Regulation 700-68, Naval Supply Instruction 4440.128C, Marine Corps Order 10330.2C, and Air Force Regulation 67-12), 49 CFR 173.301, and DOD 4000.25-1-M.Unsalvageable MaterialConcrete, masonry, and other noncombustible material, except concrete permitted to remain in place, shall be disposed of off base. Dispose of combustible material off the site.CLEANUPDebris and rubbish shall be removed from basement and similar excavations. Debris shall be removed and transported in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal.DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALSDispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other non-salvageable materials resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal, state and local regulations as contractually specified off the base. Removed materials shall not be stored on the project site.Burning on Government PropertyBurning of materials removed from demolished structures will not be permitted on Government property.Removal from Government PropertyTransport waste materials removed from demolished structures, except waste soil, from Government property for legal disposal. Contractor shall furnish all disposal tickets at the completion of the project to the Construction Manager and Contracting Officer.-- End of Section --SECTION 02 41 00 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONPART 1 – GENERALSUMMARYThis Section includes the following:Demolition and removal of existing doors and door hardware.DEFINITIONSRemove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.Remove and Reinstall:Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.Existing to Remain:Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.SUBMITTALSSchedule of Selective Demolition Activities:Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.Landfill Records:Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.QUALITY ASSURANCEDemolition Firm Qualifications:An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.Regulatory Requirements:Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective ply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.Standards:Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.PROJECT CONDITIONSGovernment will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.Conduct selective demolition so Government's operations will not be disrupted.Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Government as far as practical.Notify Contracting Officer of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.Hazardous Materials:hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.If materials other than those indicated on the Drawings are suspicious of containing hazardous materials, do not disturb; immediately notify Contracting Officer.Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.Utility Service:Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.PART 2 – PRODUCTSTEMPORARY PARTITIONSProvide partitions in order to limit dust and dirt migration and to segregate the areas where the following Work is being performed:Provide to segregate new interior spaces from interior spaces to remain.Construct dustproof partitions with minimum 2” x 4” wood studs @ 16” oc with gypsum wallboard or plywood on each side.Provide hinged doors for access.Cover existing openings with 6-mil polyethylene sheeting to prevent transmission of dust into other areas.Protect air-handling equipment by sealing off all intake louvers and other areas.PART 3 – EXECUTIONEXAMINATIONVerify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Contracting Officer.Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSExisting Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.Service/System Requirements:Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. Notify Contracting Officer 1 week in advance of anticipated utility outages.If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.Disposal of all fluorescent tubes and all lighting ballasts:The Contractor shall obtain a temporary EPA ID Number.This number can be obtained from the Mississippi Department of Environmental Quality by fax at no charge to the Contractor.The Government shall be provided with a waste manifest and Certificate of Disposal from the recycler.The Contractor is to provide the dump receipts on a weekly basis to the Contracting Officer.Fluorescent Tubes:Hazardous waste lamps that are listed under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), must be removed in compliance with RCRA hazardous waste requirements.Lamps are regulated as a universal waste under 40 CFR Part 273.All lamps in lighting fixtures including fluorescent, high intensity discharge (HID), neon, mercury vapor, high pressure sodium and metal halide lamps, shall be removed and disposed of.Tubes shall be removed intact and properly packaged for transport to the recycler.Lighting Ballasts:All lighting ballast that are unmarked or which do not contain “PCP free” labeling shall be recycled by an EPA authorized Universal Waste Processor.PREPARATIONTemporary Facilities: Provide temporary partitions, barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.Temporary Shoring:Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.SELECTIVE DEMOLITIONGeneral:Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated.Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces.Temporarily cover openings to remain.Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials.At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations.Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.Removed and Reinstalled Items:Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.Paint equipment to match new equipment.Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing.Identify contents of containers.Protect items from damage during transport and storage.Reinstall items in locations ply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment.Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.Existing Items to Remain:Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition.When permitted by the Contracting Officer, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selectivedemolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALSGeneral:Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Government's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.Burning or burying of any material on site is prohibited.Disposal:Transport demolished materials off Government's property and legally dispose of them.CLEANINGClean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations.Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.END OF SECTIONSECTION 08 11 13 – STEEL FRAMESPART 1 – GENERALSUMMARYTypes of work in this section include vision lite kits for glazing in flush wood doors.Related Sections include the following:Division 8 Section “Flush Wood Doors”Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”Division 8 Section “Glazing”SUBMITTALSShop Drawings - Submit for fabrication and installation of vision lite frame.Include details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements and details of joints and connections.Show anchorage and accessory items.Provide schedule of frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.QUALITY ASSURANCEProvide hollow metal frames complying with ANSI A250.8/SDI100-1998 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and as herein specified.Manufacturer - Provide each type of door frame unit by a single firm specializing in production of that type of work.DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGDeliver hollow metal work carton or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage.Minor damages may be repaired, provided finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Contracting Officer; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.Store frames at building site under cover.Place units on wood sills at least 4" high, or otherwise store on floors in manner that will prevent rust and damage.Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber.PART 2 – PRODUCTSMANUFACTURERSDKS Steel Door and Frame SystemOr equalMATERIALSCold-Rolled Steel Sheets:Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366 and ASTM A568.Standard glazing tape applied to both sides of PONENTSStandard Steel FramesProvide 20 gauge CRS frame – low profile.1 1/4" trim with mitered welded corners with counter sunk mounting holes and single side attaching with mounting screws included.Low profile beveled vision lite kit.Mounting holes shall be on the non-corridor side. Projection from door shall not exceed 3/8”.Finish:Baked on powder coat finish – Color to be selected by Architect.FABRICATIONGeneralFabricate steel frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle.Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.PART 3 – EXECUTIONEXAMINATIONInstaller must examine substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer.INSTALLATIONGeneralInstall steel frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer’s data, and as herein specified.END OF SECTIONSECTION 08 21 10 – FLUSH WOOD DOORSPART 1 – GENERALSUMMARYExtent and location of each type of wood door is shown on Drawings and in schedule.Types of doors required include the following:Pre-finished solid core flush wood doors with veneer faces.All doors are to be installed in existing frames.Field verify all dimensions and conditions prior to furnishing submittal to Contracting Officer.Contractor to furnish one quart of each factory finish selected as part of door package.This finish is for fieldapplication / repair of damaged or field modified doors and shall be delivered to the site with the doors.Related Sections include the following:Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”Division 8 Section “Glazing”Division 8 Section “Steel Frames” (for glazing)SUBMITTALSProduct Data:Submit door manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door.Include details of core and edge construction and similar components.Shop Drawings:Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.Indicated blocking locations for hardware locations.Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.Requirements for veneer matching.Doors to be factory finished and finish requirementsSamples:provide minimum 12 inch x 12 inch wood face with veneer facing and finish selected.Special Warranty:Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by- 84-inch section.Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors:Life of installation.QUALITY ASSURANCEGeneral:Comply with requirements of the following standards unless otherwise indicated.WDMA I.S.1-A-11, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."Fire-Rated Wood Doors:Where fire-resistance classifications are shown or scheduled for wood door assemblies, provide doors which comply with requirements of NFPA No. 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows" and which have been tested and rated with single point hardware.Provide label of an approved nationally recognized independent testing laboratory on each door.Allowable Tolerances for Fabrication:Size, overall dimensions - 1/16"Maximum warp and diagonal squareness - 1/8"DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGProtect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and ply with the "On-site Care" recommendations of NWMA pamphlet "Care and Finishing of Wood Doors" and with manufacturer's instructions.Deliver doors to site after building has reached average prevailing humidity of this area.Store doors in area where no excessive variations of heat, dryness or humidity are to be encountered.PART 2 – PRODUCTSMANUFACTURERS Equal to:Algoma HardwoodsVT Industries (Eggers Industries)Graham ManufacturingMohawk Flush DoorsOshkosh Door Co.DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERALLow-Emitting Materials:Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.WDMA I.S.1-A-11 Performance Grade:Extra heavy duty.All doors must meet specified WDMA Performance Duty Level, including face screw holding requirement. Surface applied hardware shall be installed with screws; through bolts are not acceptable.Particleboard-Core Doors:Particleboard:ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 only, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.Provide doors with structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.Fire-Protection-Rated Doors:Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.Mineral-Core Doors:Core:Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.Blocking:Provide blocking with screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated to eliminate through-bolting hardware.Indicate blocking locations on shop drawings.Edge Construction:At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split ply with specified requirements for exposed edges.INTERIOR SOLID CORE DOORSGrade:Custom, with Grade A faces.Species:Select white oakCut:Rotary cutPair and Set Match:Provide for doors hung in same opening.Core:Particleboard (LD-2) or mineral core (based on fire requirements)Exposed Vertical Edges:Hardwood, of same or compatible species as face, minimum thickness of 1/2 inch.Construction:Five plies.Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.FABRICATIONFactory fit doors to suit existing frame-opening sizes.Field verify opening sizes.No field trimming will be ply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise ply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-ply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.Metal Astragals:Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.Openings:Factory cut and trim openings through doors.Light Openings:Trim openings with moldings of material and profile selected.Glazing:install glazing in ply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section “Glazing."ACCESSORIESGlazing:Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. Fill glazing bead nail holes in factory finished doors.FINISHESGeneral:Comply with referenced quality standard for factory plete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted at edges of cutouts, and mortises.Transparent Finish:Grade:PremiumFinish:WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.Staining:All doors to receive factory stain finish.Final color, build, and sheen to be approved by Contracting Officer based on actual review samples.Factory pre-finished doors to be individually protected with transparent poly-wrap at the factory.Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted at edges of cutouts, and mortises.PART 3 – EXECUTIONEXAMINATIONExamine doors and existing door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.Verify that existing frames comply with indicated requirements forsize and swing characteristics.Any deficiencies must be corrected prior to door installation.Reject doors with defects.Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.INSTALLATIONCondition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.Building shall be fully enclosed and permanent climate control system operating.Hardware:Coordinate installation with Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”.Installation Instructions:Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.Job-Fitted Doors:Align and fit doors in existing frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors.Machine doors for hardware.Seal edges of cutouts and mortises after fitting and machining.Clearances:Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch frombottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise ply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.Trim bottom rail only to extent permitted by labeling agency.Factory-Finished Doors:Do not trim factory finished doors for width.ADJUST AND CLEANOperation:Correct any deficiency that prohibits the door from swinging or operating freely.Do not remove hinge screws after initial insertion.Shims used for alignment purposes must be inserted between hinge and frame.Do not insert shims between hinge and door.To prevent stile failure, insure that door closers are properly adjusted and do not limit the door opening swing.Limit door opening swing only with a properly located stop.Finished Doors:Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.PROTECTIONDo not “prop” doors open with any devices during construction at the base of the door.If this occurs, doors will be rejected and replaced at no cost to the Owner.Protection of Completed Work:Advise Architect of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of work.One month prior to expiration of Trade Contractor’s 1-year warranty, the Contractor shall perform a walk-thru, with the Architect present, of all wood door openings and adjust hardware as necessary for proper operation of doors to fully satisfy door manufacturer’s warranty.END OF SECTIONSECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWAREPART 1 - GENERALSUMMARYThis Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.This Section includes the following:HingesLock cylinders and keysLock and latch setsPush Button Combination Cylindrical LockBoltsClosersLever door holderMiscellaneous door control devicesDoor trim unitsProtection platesAstragals or meeting seals on pairs of doorsLatch protectorRelated Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:Division 8 Section “Flush Wood Doors”Products furnished but not installed under this Section to include:Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by GOVERNMENT.REFERENCESStandards of the following as referenced:American National Standards Institute (ANSI)Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)Factory Mutual (FM)National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)UL 10C - Fire Tests Door AssembliesWarnock HerseyRegulatory standards of the following as referenced:Department of Justice, Office of the Attorney General, Americans with Disabilities Act, Public Law 101-336 (ADA).CABO/ANSI A117.1: Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People, 1992 edition.SUBMITTALSGeneral: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. For items other than those scheduled in the “Headings” of Section 3, provide catalog information for the specified items and for those submitted.Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into vertical format “hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.Use specification Heading numbers with any variations suffixed a, b, etc.Include the following information:Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.Name and manufacturer of each item.Fastenings and other pertinent information.Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.Mounting locations for hardware.Door and frame sizes and materials.Keying information.Cross-reference numbers used within schedule deviating from those specified.Column 1: State specified item and manufacturer.Column 2: State prior approved substituted item and its manufacturer.Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule.Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.Keying Schedule:Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Government's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule.Samples will be returned to the supplier.Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware.Check shop drawingsof other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.Contract closeout submittals:Operation and maintenance data: Complete information for installed door hardware.Warranty: Completed and executed warranty forms.QUALITY ASSURANCESingle Source Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available for consultation to Contracting Officer, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work.Coordination Meetings:Supplier shall set up and attend the following:Supplier to meet with the Contracting Officer to finalize lock functions and keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.Supplier to meet with the installer prior to beginning of installation of door hardware.General Contractor shall set up and attend the following:Supplier to meet with the Contracting Officer, General Contractor, electrical and security contractors to coordinate all electrical hardware items.Supplier to provide riser diagrams, elevation drawings, wiring diagrams and operational descriptions as required by the General and sub-contractors.Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening and degree of label.Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not.All hardware shall comply with standards UBC 702 (1997) and UL 10C.Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary marking on doors’ UL labels indicating “Fire Door to be equipped with Fire Exit Hardware”) provide UL label on exit devices indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”.PRODUCT HANDLINGTag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier.As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule.Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container.Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site).Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed.Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.WARRANTYSpecial warranties:Door Closers:Ten year periodExit Devices:Three year periodLocks and Cylinders:Three year periodPART 2 - PRODUCTSMANUFACTURED UNITS(*Denotes manufacturer referenced in the Hardware Headings)Hinges:Acceptable manufacturers equal to:Ives*BommerPBBCharacteristics:Templates: Provide only template-produced units.Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.For wood doors and frames install threaded-to-the-head wood screws.For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4 inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws.Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.Hinge pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins.Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable pins.Interior Doors: Non-rising pins.Tips:Flat button and matching plug.Finished to match leafs.Size: Except as otherwise indicated, size hinges as follows:Doors up to 3'-0" in width:Standard weight, ball bearing, 4-1/2 x 4-1/2Doors over 3'-0" in width and labeled doors over 8'-0" in height:Heavy weight, ball bearing, 5 x 4-1/2Quantity: Furnish one pair of hinges for all doors up to 5’-0" high.Furnish one hinge for each additional 2-1/2 feet or fraction thereof.Cylinders:Acceptable manufacturers:Match existing Keesler Air Force Base Standard.Characteristics:Review the keying system with the Contracting Officer and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or great- grandmaster).Equip locksets with core cylinders to match existing Base Standard.Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel ply with Contracting Officer's instructions for master keying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol, and notation, “DO NOT DUPLICATE."Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system, 10 construction master keys, 3 construction control keys and 3 permanent control keys.Furnish one extra blank for each lock.Furnish construction keys to General Contractor.Install permanent cores and deliver keys to Contracting ernment to install permanent coresLocksets, Latchsets, Deadbolts:Acceptable manufacturers equal to:Schlage*SargentBestMortise Locksets and Latchsets: as scheduled.Chassis: Cold-rolled steel.Latchbolts: 3/4-inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type.Lever Trim: Through-bolted, accessible design, cast or solid rod lever as scheduled.Spindles: Independent break-away.Thumbturns: Accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting motions to operate.Deadbolts: Stainless steel 1-inch throw.Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid.Strikes: 16 gage curved stainless steel, bronze or brass with 1" deep box construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.Basis of Design: Schlage L series, design 017.Acceptable Substitution: Sargent 8200 series; Best 47 series.Certifications:ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security.ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 30 UL Listed.Closers and Door Control Devices:Acceptable manufacturers equal to:LCN Closers 4041*Sargent 281Corbin Russwin DC8000Characteristics:Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder and metal cover.All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120oF to -30oF without seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door.Closers for fire- rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL 10C.Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped.Spring power adjustment allows for quick and accurate power adjustment by way of dial adjustment gauge located on closer spring tube.Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves.Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed and back check.All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and forearms for parallel arm closers).All parallel arm mounted closers shall have “EDA” type arms.All surface closers shall be certified to exceed ten million (10,000,000) full load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. All closers (overhead, surface and concealed) shall be of one manufacturer and carry manufacturer's ten year warranty (electric closers to have two year warranty).Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped provide adjustable units complying with ADA and ANSI A-117.1 provisions for door opening force.Closers to be installed to allow door swing as shown on plans. Doors swinging into exit corridors shall provide for corridor clear width as required by code.Where possible, mount closers inside rooms.Powder coating finish to be certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing by ETL, an independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification.Basis of Design: LCN 4041 seriesAcceptable Substitution: Sargent 281 series x SRI, Corbin Russwin DC8000 series x SRI.Push Button Combination Locks:Acceptable manufacturers:Kaba Simplex* 5051 Push Button Combination Lock, Heavy Duty –Grade 1; ANSI Rating – Grade 1 A156.2Approved equalCharacteristics:Provide heavy duty, satin chrome finish.Key override.Lever Door Holders:Acceptable manufacturers equal to:Rockwood* Zoro #G0424137IvesCharacteristics:Provide heavy duty, cast brass satin chrome finish - surface mounted as scheduled.Projection 4 5/8”; height 2 1/4”; width 1 1/4"; tip material – rubber.Floor Stops and Wall Bumpers:Acceptable manufacturers equal to:TrimcoIves*RockwoodCharacteristics:Refer to Hardware Headings.Door Bolts:Acceptable manufacturers equal to:TrimcoIves*RockwoodCharacteristics:Flush bolts to be forged brass 6-3/4" x 1", with 1/2" diameter bolts.Plunger to be supplied with milled surface one side that fits into a matching guide.Self-latching flush bolts to be UL listed as top and bottom bolts on a pair of classified fire doors.Bolt construction to be of rugged steel and brass components.Protective Plates:Acceptable manufacturers equal to:TrimcoIves*RockwoodCharacteristics:Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners for door trimunits consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws.Materials:Metal Plates: Stainless Steel, .050 inch (U.S. 18 gage).Fabricate protection plates not more than 2 inches less than door width on push side and not more than 1 inch less than door width on pull side.Heights:Kick plates to be 8 inches in height.Door Seals/Gasketing:Acceptable manufacturers equal to:National Guard Products*Reese IndustriesZero WeatherstrippingTypes: Indicated in Hardware Headings.AstragalsAcceptable manufacturers equal to:National Guard Products (NGB)*Approved equalTypes: Square Edge Z AstragalCharacteristics:20 gauge cold rolled steel; #8 x3/4” flat undercoat Phillips head SMS; powder coat standard tan finish.Latch Protector:Acceptable manufacturers equal to:Assa Abloy - Rockwood*Approved equalTypes: .105” stainless steel – US32D; 3” x 11”Fastener:5/16” 18 carriage bolts and hex drive sex nutes.MATERIALS AND FABRICATIONManufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with requiredfire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Contracting Officer.Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated.Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation.Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item.Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated.Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including “prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners.Do not use thru-bolts or sex bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of adequately fastening the hardware, or otherwise found in the Hardware Headings. Coordinate with wood doors and metal doors and frames.Where thru-bolts are used, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt as a means of reinforcing the work, or use sex screw fasteners.HARDWARE FINISHESMatch items to the manufacturer’s standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).Provide finishes that match those established by ANSI.Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer’s standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated.The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer."The designations used to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.Hinges: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless SteelContinuous Hinges: 628 (US28) Clear Anodized AluminumFlush Bolts: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless SteelLocks: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless SteelExit Devices: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless SteelDoor Closers: 689 Powder Coat AluminumProtective Plates: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless SteelDoor Stops: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless SteelOverhead Holders: 630 Satin Stainless Steel and 689 Powder Coated Steel (as scheduled)PART 3 – EXECUTIONINSTALLATIONMount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Contracting Officer."Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute."Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors."Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections.Do not installsurface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location.Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.Seals:Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATINGAdjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit.Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area.Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.Adjust door control devices to function properly with final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.Door Hardware Supplier's Field Service:Inspect door hardware items for correct installation and adjustment after complete installation of door hardware.Instruct Government's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes.File written report of this inspection to Contracting Officer.Door Hardware Manufacturer’s Field Service:Prior to project completion, representatives of the lock, exit device and overhead closer manufacturers shall inspect and certify that all units are installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, and are regulated properly and functioning correctly.A written report of the inspection results and recommendations shall be provided to the Contracting Officer and shall include the appropriate certificates.HARDWARE SCHEDULESet #1:Classroom mortice lockCloser on active leaf Square edge Z astragalTop and bottom flush bolts at inactive leaf Latch protector at inactive leafPadlock hasp at Door 249Set #2:Classroom lockCloser on active leaf Square edge Z astragalTop and bottom flush bolts at inactive leaf Lever door holder at active leafLatch protector at inactive leafSet #3:Classroom lockCloser on active leaf Square edge Z astragalTop and bottom flush bolts at inactive leaf Lever door holder at active leafLatch protector at inactive leaf KickplateSet #4:Office/Privacy lock CloserLever door holder Kickplate at Door 145, 150Set #5:Pushbutton cipher lock (lever) Closer at each leafTop and bottom flush bolts at inactive leaf Latch protectorKickplates at each leafSet #6:Pushbutton cipher lock (lever) Closer on active leafTop and bottom flush bolts at inactive leaf Lever door holder at active leaf KickplatesLatch protector on inactive leafPadlock hasp at Door 256END OF SECTIONSECTION 08 80 00 – GLAZINGPART 1 – GENERALSUMMARYTypes of work in this section include glass and glazing for:Fixed Glass Units in flush wood doors.Related Sections include the following:Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”Division 8 Section “Glazing”Division 8 Section “Steel Framesz” for vision lite frames.QUALITY ASSURANCESafety glass products are to comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.Single Source fabrication responsibility:Fabrication processes shall be fabricated by a single Fabricator.Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent operation of glazing components of the work.During installation, discard units with significant edge damage or other ply with combined recommendations and technical reports by manufacturers of glass and glazing products as used in each glazing channel, and with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association "Glazing Manual", except where more stringent requirements are indicated.PART 2 – PRODUCTSFABRICATIONProvide in overall sizes indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.GL1:CSG (Clear Safety Glass):1/4 inch thick clear fully tempered glass.Oleo-resinous Glazing Compound:Oil-based glazing compound; non- staining and non-bleeding; provide proper type as required for channel.Use for interior locations.ACCESSORIESMiscellaneous Materials:Cleaners, Primers and Sealers:Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.Setting Blocks:Neoprene or EPDM, 79-90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used.Spacers:Neoprene or EPDM, 40-50 durometer hardness with proven compatibility with sealants pressible Filler (Rod):Closed-cell or waterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used; flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compressive strength for 25% deflection.PART 3 – EXECUTIONPREPARATIONClean glazing channel and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing.Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate.Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are used.Apply primer or sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.INSTALLATIONGlazingInstall setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet located in 1/4 of glass width from each corner. Set blocks in thin course of heel-bead compound, if any.Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where preshimmed tapes are used for glazing.Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width.Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.Voids and Filler Rods:Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or installing filler rods in channel at heel of jambs and head (do not leave voids in sill channels), except as otherwise indicated and depending on light size, thickness and type of glass and complying with manufacturer's recommendations.Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass.Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations.CLEANINGWash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion of ply with glass product manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning.PROTECTIONProtect glass from breakage.Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass.Remove non-permanent labels and clean surfaces.Cure sealant for high early strength and durability.Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.END OF SECTIONSECTION 09 51 10 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGSPART 1 – GENERALSUMMARYExtent of each type of acoustical ceiling is specified herein.Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following:Acoustical panel ceilings and exposed suspension.SUBMITTALSProduct Data:Manufacturer’s product specifications and installation instructions for materials and suspension system, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as required showing compliance with these specifications.Coordination Drawings:layout of ceilings drawn to scale coordinating acoustical tile ceiling installation and spacing with hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items. Include locations of all mechanical and electrical items. Reproduction of Contract Documents is not acceptable and will be rejected if submitted.Samples:Set of samples for acoustical unit, showing full range of exposed color and texture, and set of 12” long samples of suspension system.QUALITY ASSURANCEInstaller:Firm with not less than three years of successful experience in installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this project and which is acceptable to manufacturer of acoustical units.DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGDeliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes.Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content.Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.Minor damages may be repaired, provide finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Contracting Officer; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.PROJECT CONDITIONSSpace enclosure - Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, until work above ceilings is completed, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.PART 2 – PRODUCTSMANUFACTURERS equal toArmstrong World IndustriesUSG Interiors, Inc.CertainTeed (BPB America)MINERAL FIBER ACOUSTICAL PANELSType 1 (ACT1):1. NRC – 0.55; CAC – 332’ x 2’ x 5/8” Radar ClimaPlus (2210) by USG Interiors, Inc.2’ x 2’ x 5/8” Fine Fissured (1728) by Armstrong World Industries.2’ x 2’ x 5/8” Fine Fissured (HHF-157) by Certainteed.Where units less than 6 inches wide would occur at edges of room with 24 X 24 inch pattern, provide 24 X 48 inch panels cut to extend to wall, eliminating the tee near the wall.CEILING SUSPENSION MATERIALSGeneral:Comply with ASTM C635, as applicable to type of suspension system required for type of ceiling units indicated. Provide UL listed system for fire rated ceilings.Coordinate with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtures and HVAC equipment.1. Structural Class:Intermediate-duty.Attachment Devices:Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1 Direct Hung.Hanger Wires-galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A641, soft temper, prestretched, yield-stress load of at leasttimes design load, but not less than 12 gage (0.106").1. Add additional wires at a 45 degree angle for seismic bracing per IBC 2003, Section 1621.Edge Molding:provide manufacturer’s standard wall angle (7/8” hemmed angle molding) for edges of ceiling of material and finish to match exposed tee flanges in same space unless otherwise noted below:Exposed Suspension System:Manufacturer's standard exposed tees, cross tees and accessories of types indicated, with exposed cross tees coped to lay flush with main runners. Hot dipped galvanized steel on all surfaces of ceiling suspension system, including mouldings, trim and accessories.Fire rated suspension system with fire rated ceiling units.Suspension System:For “ACT1” Ceilings:Prelude XL15/16” Exposed Tee Grid System by Armstrong World Industries.Donn DX 15/16” Exposed Tee Grid System by USG Interiors.Classic Stab System 15/16” Exposed Tee Grid System by Certainteed.PART 3 – EXECUTIONEXAMINATIONInstaller must examine conditions under which acoustical ceiling work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions.Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer.PREPARATIONMeasure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling – in accordance with approved coordination layout drawing.INSTALLATIONGeneral:Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and to comply with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements as indicated, and industry standard applicable to work.Install suspension system to comply with ASTM C636, with hangers supported only from building structural members or from carrying channels supported by structural members.Locate hangers near each end and spaced maximum 4' - 0" along each main tee and as required by UL assembly unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12' - 0".Provide extra hangers and carrying channels as required to support weight at lighting fixtures and duct outlets.Install edge mouldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units.Attach mouldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12' -0".Miter corners accurately and connect securely.Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations.CLEANINGClean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge mouldings and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.END OF SECTIONSECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE11/15PART 1GENERALREFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)ASTM D2564(2012) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping SystemsCAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)CISPI 301(2012) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping ApplicationsCISPI 310(2012) Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping ApplicationsINTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)ICC IPC(2018) International Plumbing CodePLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)PPFA Fire Man(2016) Firestopping: Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive ConstructionSUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval.Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-02 Shop Drawings Plumbing System; GSTANDARD PRODUCTS1.3.1 Administrative InterpretationsFor ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply.These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project.References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGHandle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer.Replace damaged or defective items.PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONSThe Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.PART 2PRODUCTSMATERIALSMaterials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and II. PVC pipe shall contain a minimum of 25 percent recycled content in accordance with ASTM F1760.Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements.Pipe fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials.Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF/ANSI 14 and shall be NSF listed for the service intended.Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement used for potable hot and cold water service shall bear the NSF seal "NSF-PW."Pipe Joint MaterialsGrooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used underground. Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe.Cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Institute.Joints and gasket materials shall conform to the following:Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe:for hub and spigot type ASTM A74, AWWA C606.For hubless type:CISPI 310Brazing Material:Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP-5.Brazing Flux:Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing material.Flux shall be as follows:lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.Solder Material:Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B32.Solder Flux:Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to ASTM B813, Standard Test 1.PTFE Tape:PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot type and hubless type):ASTM C564.Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe:ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855.MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMSEscutcheon PlatesProvide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces.Provide chromium-plated on copper alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces.Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.Pipe SleevesProvide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors.Sleeves are not required where [supply] drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade, except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.Sleeves in Masonry and ConcreteProvide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves.Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade.Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core- drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.Sleeves Not in Masonry and ConcreteProvide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.Pipe Hangers (Supports)Provide MSS SP-58 Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise.Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps.Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21, 28,29, or 30 clamps.Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter.Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer.Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor.Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for insulated piping.PART 3EXECUTIONGENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSPiping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A.Installation of plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance with PPFA Fire Man.The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories.Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent PipeBell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil, waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.Copper Tube and PipeBrazed.Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2/B2.2M, ASME B16.50, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes.Copper to copper joints shall include the use of copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without flux.Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorus, copper- phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.Soldered.Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for piping 2 inches and smaller.Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015.Soldered joints shall not be used in compressed air piping between the air compressor and the receiver.Copper Tube Extracted Joint.Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in accordance with ICC IPC.Press connection.Copper press connections shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions for manufactured rated size.The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s) approved by the manufacturer of that joint.Minimum distance between fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.Plastic PipePVC and CPVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement elastomeric, threading, (threading of Schedule 80 Pipe is allowed only where required for disconnection and inspection; threading of Schedule 40 Pipe is not allowed), or mated flanged.Pipe PenetrationsProvide sealants for all pipe penetrations.All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.SupportsGeneralHangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain.Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers.In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member.Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run.Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and SupportsInstallation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 except as modified herein.Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed.Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-58 and shall have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher.Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe.Type 40 shields shall:Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes.High density inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-58 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping.Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves.Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC.Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on- grade, at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations.Vertical pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe movement.Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed.Where steel slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate.On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60 degrees F a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction.3.1.6Structural AttachmentsAttachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices.Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5.Supports shall not be attached to metal decking.Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer.Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.TABLE IPIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR DRAINAGE, WASTE, VENT AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING SYSTEMSItem #Pipe and Fitting MaterialsSERVICE ASERVICE BSERVICE CSERVICE DSERVICE ESERVICE FSERVICE G1Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, hub and spigot, ASTM A74 with compression gaskets.Pipe and fittings shall be marked with theCISPI trademark.XXXXX2Cast iron soil pipe and fittings hubless, CISPI 301 and ASTM A888.Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the CISPItrademark.XXXX3Polyvinyl Chloride plastic drain, waste and vent pipe and fittings, ASTM D2665, ASTM F891, (Sch 40) ASTM F1760XXXXXXXSERVICE:A - Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain B - Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In BuildingsC - Underground Vent D - Aboveground Vent- Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground- Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground G - Condensate Drain Aboveground* - Hard Temper-- End of Section --SECTION 23 00 00AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS PART 1GENERALSYSTEM DESCRIPTIONFurnish ductwork, piping offsets, fittings, and accessories as required to provide a complete installation.Coordinate the work of the different trades to avoid interference between piping, equipment, structural, and electrical work.Provide complete, in place, all necessary offsets in piping and ductwork, and all fittings, and other components, required to install the work as indicated and specified.Mechanical Equipment IdentificationThe number of charts and diagrams shall be equal to or greater than the number of mechanical equipment rooms.Where more than one chart or diagram per space is required, mount these in edge pivoted, swinging leaf, extruded aluminum frame holders which open to 170 degrees.Service LabelingLabel equipment, including fans, air handlers, terminal units, etc. with labels made of self-sticking, plastic film designed for permanent installation.Labels shall be in accordance with the typical examples below:SERVICELABEL AND TAG DESIGNATIONAir handling unit NumberAHU - [ ]Control and instrument airCONTROL AND INSTR.Exhaust Fan NumberEF -[ ]VAV Box NumberVAV - [ ]Fan Coil Unit NumberFC -[ ]Terminal Box NumberTB -[ ]Unit Ventilator NumberUV -[ ]Identify similar services with different temperatures or pressures.Where pressures could exceed 125 pounds per square inch, gage, include the maximum system pressure in the label.Label and arrow piping in accordance with the following:Each point of entry and exit of pipe passing through walls.Each change in direction, i.e., elbows, tees.In congested or hidden areas and at all access panels at each point required to clarify service or indicated hazard.In long straight runs, locate labels at distances within eyesight of each other not to exceed 75 feet.All labels shall be visible and legible from the primary service and operating area.For Bare or Insulated Pipesfor Outside Diameters ofLettering1/2 thru 1-3/8 inch1/2 inch1-1/2 thru 2-3/8 inch3/4 inch2-1/2 inch and larger1-1/4 inch1.1.3Color CodingColor coding of all piping systems shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-101.SUBMITTALSSubmit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:Product DataMetallic Flexible DuctInsulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts Duct ConnectorsDuct Access Doors Fire DampersManual Balancing Dampers Automatic Smoke-Fire Dampers Automatic Smoke Dampers Sound Attenuation Equipment DiffusersRegisters and Grilles LouversAir Vents, Penthouses, and Goosenecks Centrifugal FansIn-Line Centrifugal Fans Axial Flow FansPanel Type Power Wall Ventilators Centrifugal Type Power Wall Ventilators Centrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators Propeller Type Power Roof Ventilators Air-Curtain FansCeiling Exhaust Fans Air Handling UnitsRoom Fan-Coil Units Energy Recovery Devices Test ProceduresTest ReportsPerformance Tests Damper Acceptance TestCertificatesOzone Depleting Substances Manufacturer's InstructionsManufacturer's Installation Instructions Operation and Maintenance TrainingOperation and Maintenance DataOperation and Maintenance Manuals Fire DampersManual Balancing Dampers Automatic Smoke-Fire Dampers Automatic Smoke Dampers Centrifugal FansIn-Line Centrifugal Fans Axial Flow FansCentrifugal Type Power Wall Ventilators Centrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators Propeller Type Power Roof Ventilators Air-Curtain FansCeiling Exhaust Fans Air Handling Units Room Fan-Coil UnitsEnergy Recovery Devices Closeout SubmittalsEnergy Efficient EquipmentReduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) Indoor Air Quality During Construction Ozone Depleting Substances for RefrigerantsQUALITY ASSURANCEExcept as otherwise specified, approval of materials and equipment is based on manufacturer's published data.Where materials and equipment are specified to conform to the standards of the Underwriters Laboratories, the label of or listing with reexamination in UL Bld Mat Dir, and UL 6 is acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to Underwriters Laboratories requirements.In lieu of such label or listing, submit a written certificate from any nationally recognized testing agency, adequately equipped and competent to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and that the units conform to the specifiedrequirements.Outline methods of testing used by the specified agencies.Where materials or equipment are specified to be constructed or tested, or both, in accordance with the standards of the ASTM International (ASTM), the ASME International (ASME), or other standards, a manufacturer's certificate of compliance of each item is acceptable as proof of compliance.Conformance to such agency requirements does not relieve the item from compliance with other requirements of these specifications.Where products are specified to meet or exceed the specified energy efficiency requirement of FEMP-designated or Energy Star certified product categories, equipment selected shall have as a minimum the efficiency rating identified under "Energy-Efficient Products" at specifications conform to the efficiency requirements as defined in Public Law PL-109-58, "Energy Policy Act of 2005" for federal procurement of energy-efficient products.Equipment having a lower efficiency than Energy Star or FEMP requirements may be specified if the designer determines the equipment to be more life-cycle cost effective using the life-cycle cost analysis methodology and procedure in 10 CFR 436.Prevention of CorrosionProtect metallic materials against corrosion.Manufacturer shall provide rust-inhibiting treatment and standard finish for the equipment enclosures. Do not use aluminum in contact with earth, and where connected to dissimilar metal.Protect aluminum by approved fittings, barrier material, or treatment.Ferrous parts such as anchors, bolts, braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles, washers, and miscellaneous parts not of corrosion-resistant steel or nonferrous materials shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M for exterior locations and cadmium-plated in conformance with ASTM B766 for interior locationsAsbestos ProhibitionDo not use asbestos and asbestos-containing products.Ozone Depleting Substances Used as RefrigerantsMinimize releases of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) during repair, maintenance, servicing or disposal of appliances containing ODS's by complying with all applicable sections of 40 CFR 82 Part 82 Subpart F.Any person conducting repair, maintenance, servicing or disposal of equipment containing refrigerants must comply with the following:Do not knowingly vent or otherwise release into the environment, Class I or Class II substances used as a refrigerant.Do not open appliances without meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 82 Part 82.156 Subpart F, regarding required practices for evacuation andcollection of refrigerant, and 40 CFR 82 Part 82.158 Subpart F, regarding standards of recycling and recovery equipment.Only persons who comply with 40 CFR 82 Part 82.161 Subpart F, regarding technician certification, can conduct work on appliances containing refrigerant.In addition, provide copies of all applicable certifications to the Contracting Officer at least 14 calendar days prior to initiating maintenance, repair, servicing, dismantling or disposal of appliances, including:Proof of Technician CertificationProof of Equipment Certification for recovery or recycling equipment.Proof of availability of certified recovery or recycling equipment.Use of Ozone Depleting Substances, Other than RefrigerantsThe use of Class I or Class II ODS's listed as nonessential in 40 CFR 82 Part 82.66 Subpart C is prohibited. These prohibited materials and uses include:Any plastic party spray streamer or noise horn which is propelled by a chlorofluorocarbonAny cleaning fluid for electronic and photographic equipment which contains a chlorofluorocarbon; including liquid packaging, solvent wipes, solvent sprays, and gas sprays.Any plastic flexible or packaging foam product which is manufactured with or contains a chlorofluorocarbon, including, open cell foam, open cell rigid polyurethane poured foam, closed cell extruded polystyrene sheet foam, closed cell polyethylene foam and closed cell polypropylene foam except for flexible or packaging foam used in coaxial cabling.Any aerosol product or other pressurized dispenser which contains a chlorofluorocarbon, except for those listed in 40 CFR 82 Part 82.66 Subpart C.Request a waiver if a facility requirement dictates that a prohibited material is necessary to achieve project goals.Submit the waiver request in writing to the Contracting Officer.The waiver will be evaluated and dispositioned.Test ProceduresSubmit proposed test procedures and test schedules for the ductwork leak test, and performance tests of systems, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGProtect stored equipment at the jobsite from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.Additionally, cap or plug all pipes until installed.PART 2PRODUCTSPRODUCT SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIAFor products in this section, where applicable and to extent allowed by performance criteria, provide and document the following:Energy Efficient EquipmentProvide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT that the following products meet energy efficiency requirements as outlined in this section:Centrifugal FansIn-Line Centrifugal FansAxial Flow FansPanel Type Power Wall VentilatorsCentrifugal Type Power Wall VentilatorsCentrifugal Type Power Roof VentilatorsPropeller Type Power Roof VentilatorsAir-Curtain FansCeiling Exhaust FansAir Handling UnitsRoom Fan-Coil UnitsCoil Induction UnitsReheat UnitsUnit VentilatorsEnergy Recovery DevicesReduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for sealants, coatings or adhesivesLow or no VOC's and no added urea formaldehyde for duct sealants, coatings or adhesives, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph REDUCE VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (VOC).Ozone Depleting Substances for RefrigerantsDo not use any Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) as Refrigerants per requirements in 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES.STANDARD PRODUCTSProvide components and equipment that are "standard products" of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are of a similar material, design and workmanship."Standard products" is defined as being in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years before bid opening, including applications of components and equipment under similar circumstances and of similar size, satisfactorily completed by a product that is sold on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures.Products having less than a 2-year field service record are acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown.Provide equipment items that are supported by a service organization.STANDARD PRODUCTSExcept for the fabricated duct, plenums and casings specified in paragraphs "Metal Ductwork" and "Plenums and Casings for Field-Fabricated Units", provide components and equipment that are standard products ofmanufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are of a similar material, design and workmanship.This requirement applies to all equipment, including diffusers, registers, fire dampers, and balancing dampers.All energy consuming HVAC equipment must be Energy Star or Federal Energy management Program (FEMP) designated efficiency in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT.Standard products are defined as components and equipment that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use in similar applications ofsimilar size for at least two years before bid opening.Prior to this two year period, these standard products shall have been sold on the commercial market using advertisements inmanufacturers' catalogs or brochures.These manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures shall have been copyrighted documents or have been identified with a manufacturer's document number.Provide equipment items that are supported by a service organization. In product categories covered by Energy Star or the Federal Energy Management Program, provide equipment that is listed on the Energy Star Qualified Products List or that meets or exceeds the FEMP-designated Efficiency Requirements.IDENTIFICATION PLATESIn addition to standard manufacturer's identification plates, provide engraved laminated phenolic identification plates for each piece of mechanical equipment.Identification plates are to designate the function of the equipment.Submit designation with the shop drawings.Identification plates shall be three layers, black-white-black, engraved to show white letters on black background.Letters shall be upper case.Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and smaller shall be 1/16-inch thick, with engraved lettering 1/8-inch high; identification plates larger than 1-1/2-inches high shall be 1/8-inch thick, with engraved lettering of suitable height.Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and larger shall have beveled edges.Install identification plates using a compatible adhesive.EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND ACCESSFully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts exposed to personnel contact according to OSHA requirements.Properly guard or cover with insulation of a type specified, high temperature equipment and piping exposed to contact by personnel or where it creates a potential fire hazard.ELECTRICAL WORKProvide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers indicated as part of motor control centers.Provide electrical equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.Provide manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown.For packaged equipment, include manufacturer provided controllers with the required monitors and timed restart.For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type, fractional- horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11.Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction motors, including motors that are part of a system , and that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1.Select premium efficiency polyphase motors in accordance with NEMA MG 10.Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.Provide motors rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified.Provide motor duty that allows for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop.Provide motor torque capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and other necessary appurtenances.Fit motor bearings with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state variable-speed controllers are allowed to accomplish the same function. Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated 10 hp or less and adjustable frequency drives for larger motors.ANCHOR BOLTSProvide anchor bolts for equipment placed on concrete equipment pads or on concrete slabs.Bolts to be of the size and number recommended by the equipment manufacturer and located by means of suitable templates.Installation of anchor bolts shall not degrade the surrounding concrete.PAINTINGPaint equipment units in accordance with approved equipment manufacturer's standards unless specified otherwise.Field retouch only if approved.Otherwise, return equipment to the factory for refinishing.INDOOR AIR QUALITYProvide equipment and components that complywith the requirements of ASHRAE 62.1 unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.DUCT SYSTEMSMetal DuctworkProvide metal ductwork construction, including all fittings and components, that complies with SMACNA 1966, as supplemented and modified by this specification .Ductwork shall be constructed meeting the requirements for the duct system static pressure specified in APPENDIX D of Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.Provide radius type elbows with a centerline radius of 1.5 times the width or diameter of the duct where space permits.Otherwise, elbows having a minimum radius equal to the width or diameter of the duct or square elbows with factory fabricated turning vanes are allowed.Provide sealants that conform to fire hazard classification specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS and are suitable for the range of air distribution and ambient temperatures to which it is exposed.Do not use pressure sensitive tape as a sealant.Make spiral lock seam duct, and flat oval with duct sealant and lock with not less than 3 equally spaced drive screws or other approved methods indicated in SMACNA 1966.Apply the sealant to the exposed male part of the fitting collar so that the sealer is on the inside of the joint and fully protected by the metal of the duct fitting.Apply one brush coat of the sealant over the outside of the joint to at least2 inch band width covering all screw heads and joint gap.Dents in the male portion of the slip fitting collar are not acceptable.Fabricate outdoor air intake ducts and plenums with watertight soldered or brazed joints and seams.Metallic Flexible DuctProvide duct that conforms to UL 181 and NFPA 90A with factory-applied insulation, vapor barrier, and end connections.Provide duct assembly that does not exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed. Provide ducts designed for working pressures of 2 inches water gauge positive and 1.5 inches water gauge negative.Provide flexible round duct length that does not exceed 5 feet.Secure connections by applying adhesive for 2 inches over rigid duct, apply flexible duct 2 inches over rigid duct, apply metal clamp, and provide minimum of three No. 8 sheet metal screws through clamp and rigid duct.Inner duct core:Provide interlocking spiral or helically corrugated flexible core constructed of zinc-coated steel, aluminum, or stainless steel; or constructed of inner liner of continuous galvanized spring steel wire helix fused to continuous, fire-retardant, flexible vapor barrier film, inner duct core.Insulation:Provide inner duct core that is insulated with mineral fiber blanket type flexible insulation, minimum of 1 inch thick. Provide insulation covered on exterior with manufacturer's standard fire retardant vapor barrier jacket for flexible round duct.Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct RunoutsUse flexible duct runouts only where indicated.Runout length is indicated on the drawings, and is not to exceed 5 feet.Provide runouts that are preinsulated, factory fabricated, and that comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181. Provide either field or factory applied vapor barrier.Provide not less than 20 ounce glass fabric duct connectors coated on both sides with neoprene.Where coil induction or high velocity units are supplied with vertical air inlets, use a streamlined, vaned and mitered elbow transition piece for connection to the flexible duct or hose.Provide a die-stamped elbow and not a flexible connector as the last elbow to these units other than the vertical air inlet type.Insulated flexible connectors are allowed as runouts.Provide insulated material and vapor barrier that conform to the requirements of Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.Do not expose the insulation material surface to the air stream.General Service Duct ConnectorsProvide a flexible duct connector approximately 6 inches in width where sheet metal connections are made to fans or where ducts of dissimilar metals are connected.For round/oval ducts, secure the flexible material by stainless steel or zinc-coated, iron clinch-type draw bands.For rectangular ducts, install the flexible material locked to metal collars using normal duct construction methods.Provide a composite connector system that complies with NFPA 701 and is classified as "flame-retardent fabrics" in UL Bld Mat Dir.Duct Access DoorsProvide hinged access doors conforming to SMACNA 1966 in ductwork and plenums where indicated and at all air flow measuring primaries, automatic dampers, fire dampers, coils, thermostats, and other apparatus requiring service and inspection in the duct system.Provide access doors upstream and downstream of air flow measuring primaries and heating and cooling coils.Provide doors that are a minimum 15 by 18 inches, unless otherwise shown.Where duct size does not accommodate this size door, make the doors as large as practicable.Equip doors 24 by 24 inches or larger with fasteners operable from inside and outside the duct.Use insulated type doors in insulated ducts.Fire DampersUse 1.5 hour rated fire dampers unless otherwise indicated.Provide fire dampers that conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and UL 555.Perform the fire damper test as outlined in NFPA 90A.Provide a pressure relief door upstream of the fire damper.If the ductwork connected to the fire damper is to be insulated then provide a factory installed pressure relief damper.Provide automatic operating fire dampers with a dynamic rating suitable for the maximum air velocity and pressure differential to which it is subjected.Provide fire dampers approved for the specific application, and install according to their listing.Equip fire dampers with a steel sleeve or adequately sized frame installed in such a manner that disruption of the attached ductwork, if any, does not impair the operation of the damper.Equip sleeves or frames with perimeter mounting angles attached on both sides of the wall or floor opening.Construct ductwork in fire-rated floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly systems with air ducts that pierce the ceiling of the assemblies in conformance with UL Fire Resistance.Provide [curtain type with damper blades] [in the air stream] [out of the air stream][ or ][single blade type][ or ][multi-blade type] fire dampers. Install dampers that do not reduce the duct or the air transfer opening cross-sectional area.Install dampers so that the centerline of the damper depth or thickness is located in the centerline of the wall, partition or floor slab depth or thickness.Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the installation details given in SMACNA 1819 and in manufacturer's instructions for fire dampers.Perform acceptance testing of fire dampers according to paragraph Fire Damper Acceptance Test and NFPA 90A.Manual Balancing DampersFurnish manual balancing dampers with accessible operating mechanisms.Use chromium plated operators (with all exposed edges rounded) in finished portions of the building.Provide manual volume control dampers that are operated by locking-type quadrant operators.Install dampers that are 2 gauges heavier than the duct in which installed.Unless otherwise indicated, provide opposed blade type multileaf dampers with maximum blade width of 12 inches.Provide access doors or panels for all concealed damper operators and locking setscrews.Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters not less than the thickness of the insulation when the locking-type quadrant operators for dampers are installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, to provide clearance between the duct surface and the operator.Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters not less than the thickness of the insulation when the locking-type quadrant operators for dampers are installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, to provide clearance between the duct surface and the operator.Stand- off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.FramesWidthHeightGalvanized Steel ThicknessLengthMaximum 19 inchesMaximum 12 inchesMinimum 20 gaugeMinimum 3 inchesMore than 19 inchesMaximum 12 inchesMinimum 16 gaugeMinimum 3 inchesSingle Leaf BladesWidthHeightGalvanized Steel ThicknessLengthMaximum 19 inchesMaximum 12 inchesMinimum 20 gaugeMinimum 3 inchesMore than 19 inchesMaximum 12 inchesMinimum 16 gaugeMinimum 3 inchesBlade AxlesTo support the blades of round dampers, provide galvanized steel shafts supporting the blade the entire duct diameter frame-to-frame.Axle shafts shall extend through standoff bracket and hand quadrant.WidthHeightMaterialSquare ShaftMaximum 19 inchesMaximum 12 inchesGalvanized SteelMinimum 3/8 inchMore than 19 inchesMaximum 12 inchesGalvanized SteelMinimum 1/2 inchAxleBearingsSupport the shaft on each end at the frames with shaft bearings.Shaft bearings configuration shall be a pressed fit to provide a tight joint between blade shaft and damper frame.WidthHeightMaterialMaximum 19 inchesMaximum12inchessolid nylon, or equivalent solid plastic, or oil-impregnated bronzeMore than 19 inchesMaximum12inchesoil-impregnated bronzeControl Shaft/Hand QuadrantProvide dampers with accessible locking-type control shaft/hand quadrant operators.Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters for the locking-type quadrant operators on dampers installed on ducts to be thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of 2 inches off the metal duct surface.Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.Finish Mill GalvanizedDuct Height Greater than 12 inchesDampersProvide dampers with multi-leaf opposed-type blades.FramesMaximum 48 inches in height; maximum 48 inches inwidth; minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel,minimum of 5 inches long.BladesMinimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel; 6 inch nominal width.Blade AxlesTo support the blades of round dampers, provide galvanized square steel shafts supporting the blade the entire duct diameter frame-to-frame.Axle shafts shall extend through standoff bracket and hand quadrant.Axle BearingsSupport the shaft on each end at the frames with shaft bearings constructed of oil-impregnated bronze, or solid nylon, or a solid plastic equivalent to nylon.Shaft bearings configuration shall be a pressed fit to provide a tight joint between blade shaft and damper frame.Blade ActuatorMinimum 1/2 inch diameter galvanized steel.Blade Actuator LinkageMill Galvanized steel bar and crank plate with stainless steel pivots.Control Shaft/Hand QuadrantProvide dampers with accessible locking-type control shaft/hand quadrant operators.Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters for the locking-type quadrant operators on dampers installed on ducts to be thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of 2 inches off the metal ductsurface.Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.Finish Mill GalvanizedRound DampersFramesSizeGalvanized Steel ThicknessLength4 to 20 inchesMinimum 20 gaugeMinimum 6 inches22 to 30 inchesMinimum 20 gaugeMinimum 10 inches32 to 40 inchesMinimum 16 gaugeMinimum 10 inchesBladesSizeGalvanizedSteelThickness4 to 20 inchesMinimum 20gauge22 to 30 inchesMinimum 16gauge32 to 40 inchesMinimum 10gaugeBlade AxlesTo support the blades of round dampers, provide galvanized steel shafts supporting the blade the entire duct diameter frame-to-frame.Axle shafts shall extend through standoff bracket and hand quadrant.SizeShaft Size and Shape4 to 20 inchesMinimum 3/8 inch square22 to 30 inchesMinimum 1/2 inch square32 to 40 inchesMinimum 3/4 inch squareAxleBearingsSupport the shaft on each end at the frames with shaft bearings constructed of oil-impregnated bronze, or solid nylon, or a solid plastic equivalent to nylon.Shaft bearings configuration shall be a pressed fit to provide a tight joint between blade shaft and damper frame.SizeMaterial4 to 20 inchessolid nylon, or equivalent solid plastic, or oil-impregnated bronze22 to 30 inchessolid nylon, or equivalent solid plastic, or oil-impregnated bronze32 to 40 inchesoil-impregnated bronze, or stainless steel sleeve bearingControl Shaft/Hand QuadrantProvide dampers with accessible locking-type control shaft/hand quadrant operators.Provide stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters for the locking-type quadrant operators on dampers installed on ducts to be thermally insulated. Stand-off distance shall be a minimum of 2 inches off the metal duct surface.Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.Finish Mill GalvanizedAutomatic Balancing DampersProvide dampers as specified in paragraph SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES, subparagraph CONTROLS.Automatic Smoke-Fire DampersMultiple blade type, 180 degrees F fusible fire damper link; smoke damper assembly to include electric damper operator. UL 555 as a 1.5 hour rated fire damper; further qualified under UL 555S as a leakage rated damper.Provide a leakage rating under UL 555S that is no higher than Class II or III at an elevated temperature Category B ( 250 degrees F for 30 minutes ). Ensure that pressure drop in the damper open position does not exceed 0.1 inch water gauge with average duct velocities of 2500 fpm.Automatic Smoke DampersUL listed multiple blade type, supplied by smoke damper manufacturer, with electric damper operator as part of assembly.Qualified under UL 555S with a leakage rating no higher than Class II or III at an elevated temperature Category B ( 250 degrees F for 30 minutes ).Ensure that pressure drop in the damper open position does not exceed 0.1 inch water gauge with average duct velocities of 2500 fpm.Air Supply And Exhaust Air DampersWhere outdoor air supply and exhaust air dampers are required they shall have a maximum leakage rate when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D as required by ASHRAE 90.1 - IP[ or UFC 4-010-01], including maximum Damper Leakage for:Climate Zones 1,2,6,7,8 the maximum damper leakage at 1.0 inch w.g. for motorized dampers is 4 cfm per square foot of damper area and non- motorized dampers are not allowed.All other Climate Zones the maximum damper leakage at 1.0 inch w.g. is10 cfm per square foot and for non-motorized dampers is 20 cfm per square foot of damper area.Dampers smaller than 24 inches in either direction may have leakage of 40 cfm per square foot.Air Deflectors and Branch ConnectionsProvide air deflectors at all duct mounted supply outlets, at takeoff or extension collars to supply outlets, at duct branch takeoff connections, and at 90 degree elbows, as well as at locations as indicated on the drawings or otherwise specified.Conical branch connections or 45 degree entry connections are allowed in lieu of deflectors for branch connections.Furnish all air deflectors, except those installed in 90 degree elbows, with an approved means of adjustment.Provide easily accessible means for adjustment inside the duct or from an adjustment with sturdy lock on the face of the duct.When installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, provide external adjustments with stand-off mounting brackets, integral with the adjustment device, to provide clearance between the duct surface and the adjustment device not less than the thickness of the thermal insulation.Provide factory-fabricated air deflectors consisting of curved turning vanes or louver blades designed to provide uniform air distribution and change of direction with minimum turbulence or pressure loss.Provide factory or field assembled air deflectors.Make adjustment from the face of the diffuser or by position adjustment and lock external to the duct.Provide stand-off brackets on insulated ducts as described herein.Provide fixed air deflectors, also called turning vanes, in 90 degree elbows.Plenums and Casings for Field-Fabricated UnitsPlenum and CasingsFabricate and erect plenums and casings as shown in SMACNA 1966, as applicable.Construct system casing of not less than 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel.Furnish cooling coil drain pans with 1 inch threaded outlet to collect condensation from the cooling coils.Fabricate drain pans from not lighter than 16 gauge steel, galvanized after fabrication or of 18 gauge corrosion-resisting sheet steel conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304, welded and stiffened.Thermally insulate drain pans exposed to the atmosphere to prevent condensation.Coat insulation with a flame resistant waterproofing material.Provide separate drain pans for each vertical coil section, and a separate drain line for each pan.Size pans to ensure capture of entrained moisture on the downstream-air side of the coil.Seal openings in the casing, such as for piping connections, to prevent air leakage.Size thewater seal for the drain to maintain a pressure of at least 2 inch water gauge greater than the maximum negative pressure in the coil space.CasingTerminate casings at the curb line and bolt each to the curb using galvanized angle, as indicated in SMACNA 1966.Access DoorsProvide access doors in each section of the casing.Weld doorframes in place, gasket each door with neoprene, hinge with minimum of two brass hinges, and fasten with a minimum of two brass tension fasteners operable from inside and outside of the casing.Where possible, make doors 36 by 18 inches and locate them 18 inches above the floor.Where the space available does not accommodate doors of this size, use doors as large as the space accommodates.Swing doors so that fan suction or pressure holds doors in closed position, airtight.Provide a push-button station, located inside the casing, to stop the supply.Factory-Fabricated Insulated Sheet Metal PanelsFactory-fabricated components are allowed for field-assembled units, provided all requirements specified for field-fabricated plenums and casings are met.Provide panels of modular design, pretested for structural strength, thermal control, condensation control, and acoustical control.Seal and insulate panel joints.Provide and gasket access doors to prevent air leakage.Provide panel construction that is not less than 20 gauge galvanized sheet steel, assembled with fasteners treated against corrosion. Provide standard length panels that deflect not more than 1/2 inch under operation.Construct details, including joint sealing, not specifically covered, as indicated in SMACNA 1966.Construct the plenums and casings to withstand the specified internal pressure of the air systems.Duct LinerUnless otherwise specified, duct liner is not permitted.Sound Attenuation EquipmentSystems with total pressure above 4 Inches Water GaugeProvide sound attenuators on the discharge duct of each fan operating at a total pressure above 4 inch water gauge, and, when indicated, at the intake of each fan system.Provide sound attenuators elsewhere as indicated.Provide factory fabricated sound attenuators, tested by an independent laboratory for sound and performance characteristics.Provide a net sound reduction as indicated.Maximum permissible pressure drop is not to exceed0.63 inch water gauge.Construct traps to be airtight when operating under an internal static pressure of 10 inch water gauge.Provide air-side surface capable of withstanding air velocity of 10,000 fpm.Certify that the equipment can obtain the sound reduction values specified after the equipment is installed in the system and coordinated with the sound information of the system fan to be provided.Provide sound absorbing material conforming to ASTM C1071, Type I or II.Provide sound absorbing material that meets the fire hazard rating requirements for insulation specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.For connection to ductwork, provide a duct transition section.Factory fabricated double-walled internally insulated spiral lock seam and round duct and fittings designed for high pressure air system can be provided if complying with requirements specified for factory fabricated sound attenuators, in lieu of factory fabricated sound attenuators.Construct the double-walled duct and fittings from an outer metal pressure shell of zinc- coated steel sheet, 1 inch thick acoustical blanket insulation, and an internal perforated zinc-coated metal liner.Provide a sufficient length of run to obtain the noise reduction coefficient specified.Certify that the sound reduction value specified can be obtained within the length of duct run provided.Provide welded or spiral lock seams on the outer sheet metal of the double-walled duct to prevent water vapor penetration.Provide duct and fittings with an outer sheet that conforms to the metal thickness of high-pressure spiral and round ducts and fittings shown in SMACNA 1966.Provide acoustical insulation with a thermal conductivity "k" of not more than 0.27 Btu/inch/square foot/hour/degree F at 75 degrees F mean temperature.Provide an internal perforated zinc-coated metal liner that is not less than 24 gauge with perforations not larger than 1/4 inch in diameter providing a net open area not less than 10 percent of the surface.System with total pressure of 4 Inch Water Gauge and Lower Use sound attenuators only where indicated.Provide factory fabricatedsound attenuators that are constructed of galvanized steel sheets.Provideattenuator with outer casing that is not less than 22 gauge.Provide fibrous glass acoustical fill.Provide net sound reduction indicated. Obtain values on a test unit not less than 24 by 24 inches outside dimensions made by a certified nationally recognized independent acoustical laboratory.Provide air flow capacity as indicated or required.Provide pressure drop through the attenuator that does not exceed the value indicated, or that is not in excess of 15 percent of the total external static pressure of the air handling system, whichever is less.Acoustically test attenuators with metal duct inlet and outlet sections while under the rated air flow conditions.Include with the noise reduction data the effects of flanking paths and vibration transmission.Construct sound attenuators to be airtight when operating at the internal static pressure indicated or specified for the duct system, but in no case less than 2 inch water gauge.Diffusers, Registers, and GrillesProvide factory-fabricated units of aluminum that distribute the specified quantity of air evenly over space intended without causing noticeable drafts, air movement faster than 50 fpm in occupied zone, or dead spots anywhere in the conditioned area.Provide outlets for diffusion, spread, throw, and noise level as required for specified performance.Certify performance according to ASHRAE 70.Provide sound rated and certified inlets and outlets according to ASHRAE 70.Provide sound power level as indicated.Provide diffusers and registers with volume damper with accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or if standard with the manufacturer, an automatically controlled device is acceptable.Provide opposed blade type volume dampers for all diffusers and registers, except linear slot diffusers.Provide linear slot diffusers with round or elliptical balancing dampers.Where the inlet and outlet openings are located less than 7 feet above the floor, protect them by a grille or screen according to NFPA 90A.DiffusersProvide diffuser types indicated.Furnish ceiling mounted units with anti- smudge devices, unless the diffuser unit minimizes ceiling smudging through design features.Provide diffusers with air deflectors of the type indicated.Provide air handling troffers or combination light and ceiling diffusers conforming to the requirements of UL Electrical Constructn for the interchangeable use as cooled or heated air supply diffusers or return air units.Install ceiling mounted units with rims tight against ceiling.Provide sponge rubber gaskets between ceiling and surface mounted diffusers for air leakage control.Provide suitable trim for flush mounted diffusers. For connecting the duct to diffuser, provide duct collar that is airtight and does not interfere with volume controller.Provide return or exhaust units that are similar to supply diffusers.Louvered Face DiffusersProvide adjustable four-way air pattern controls as indicated.Provide diffuser faceplates that do not sag or deflect when operating under design conditions.Linear DiffusersMake joints between diffuser sections that appear as hairline cracks. Provide alignment slots for insertion of key strips or other concealed means to align exposed butt edges of diffusers.Equip with plaster frames when mounted in plaster ceiling.Do not use screws and bolts in exposed face of frames or flanges.Metal-fill and ground smooth frames and flanges exposed below ceiling.Furnish separate pivoted or hinged adjustable air-volume- damper and separate air-deflection blades.Registers and GrillesProvide units that are four-way directional-control type, except provide return and exhaust registers that are fixed horizontal or vertical louver type similar in appearance to the supply register face.Furnish registers with sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling.Install wall supply registers at least 6 inches below the ceiling unless otherwise indicated.Locate return and exhaust registers 6 inches above the floor unless otherwise indicated.Achieve four-way directional control by a grille face which can be rotated in 4 positions or by adjustment of horizontal and vertical vanes.Provide grilles as specified for registers, without volume control damper.RegistersDouble-deflection supply registers.Provide manufacturer-furnished volume dampers.Provide volume dampers of the group-operated, opposed-blade type and key adjustable by inserting key through face of register.Operating mechanism shall not project through any part of the register face.Provide exhaust and return registers as specified for supply registers, except provide exhaust and return registers that have a single set of nondirectional face bars or vanes having the same appearance as the supply registers. Set face bars or vanes at 45 degrees.LouversProvide louvers for installation in exterior walls that are associated with the air supply and distribution system.Air Vents, Penthouses, and GoosenecksFabricate air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks from aluminum sheets with aluminum structural shapes.Provide sheet metal thickness, reinforcement, and fabrication that conform to SMACNA 1966.Accurately fit and secure louver blades to frames.Fold or bead edges of louver blades for rigidity and baffle these edges to exclude driving rain.Provide air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks with bird screen.Bird Screens and FramesProvide bird screens that conform to ASTM E2016, No. 2 mesh, aluminum or stainless steel.Provide "medium-light" rated aluminum screens.Provide "light" rated stainless steel screens.Provide removable type frames fabricated from either stainless steel or extruded aluminum.AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENTFansTest and rate fans according to AMCA 210.Calculate system effect on air moving devices in accordance with AMCA 201 where installed ductwork differs from that indicated on drawings.Install air moving devices to minimize fan system effect.Where system effect is unavoidable, determine the most effective way to accommodate the inefficiencies caused by system effect on the installed air moving device.The sound power level of the fans shall not exceed 85 dBA when tested according to AMCA 300 and rated in accordance with AMCA 301.Provide all fans with an AMCA seal.Connect fans to the motors either directly or indirectly with V-belt drive.Use V-belt drives designed for not less than 120 percent of the connected driving capacity.Provide variable pitch motor sheaves for 15 hp and below, and fixed pitch as defined by AHRI Guideline D (A fixed-pitch sheave is provided on both the fan shaft and the motor shaft. This is a non-adjustable speed drive.).Select variable pitch sheaves to drive the fan at a speed which can produce the specified capacity when set at the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment.When fixed pitch sheaves are furnished, provide a replaceable sheave when needed to achieve system air balance.Provide motors for V-belt drives with adjustable rails or bases.Provide removable metal guards for all exposed V-belt drives, and provide speed-test openings at the center of all rotating shafts.Provide fans with personnel screens or guards on both suction and supply ends, except that the screens need not be provided, unless otherwise indicated, where ducts are connected to the fan.Provide fan and motor assemblies with vibration-isolation supports or mountings as indicated.Use vibration-isolation units that are standard products with published loading ratings.Select each fan to produce the capacity required at the fan static pressure indicated.Provide sound power level as indicated.Obtain the sound power level values according to AMCA 300.Provide standard AMCA arrangement, rotation, and discharge as indicated. Provide power ventilators that conform to UL 705 and have a UL label.Centrifugal FansProvide fully enclosed, single-width single-inlet, or double-width double- inlet centrifugal fans, with AMCA Pressure Class I, II, or III as requiredor indicated for the design system pressure.Provide impeller wheels that are rigidly constructed and accurately balanced both statically and dynamically.[Provide forward curved or backward-inclined airfoil design fan blades in wheel sizes up to 30 inches.Provide backward-inclined airfoil design fan blades for wheels over 30 inches in diameter].[Provide open-wheel radial type booster fans for exhaust dryer systems, and fans suitable for conveying lint and the temperatures encountered.Equip the fan shaft with a heat slinger to dissipate heat buildup along the shaft.Install an access (service) door to facilitate maintenance to these fans.] Provide fan wheels over 36 inches in diameter with overhung pulleys and a bearing on each side of the wheel.Provide fan wheels 36 inches or less in diameter that have one or more extra long bearings between the fan wheel and the drive.Provide sleeve type, self-aligning and self-oiling bearings with oil reservoirs, or precision self-aligning roller or ball-type with accessible grease fittings or permanently lubricated type.Connect grease fittings to tubing for serviceability from a single accessible point.Provide L50 rated bearing life at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.Provide steel, accurately finished fan shafts, with key seats and keys for impeller hubs and fan pulleys.Provide fan outlets of ample proportions, designed for the attachment of angles and bolts for attaching flexible connections.Provide[[manually] [automatically] operated inlet vanes on suction inlets.Provide [manually] [automatically] operated outlet dampers.]Unless otherwise indicated, provide motors that do not exceed 1800 rpm and have [open] [dripproof] [totally enclosed] [explosion- proof] enclosures.[Provide [manual] [magnetic] [across-the-line] [reduced- voltage-start] type motor starters with [general-purpose] [weather- resistant] [watertight] enclosure.] [Provide remote manual switch with pilot indicating light where indicated.]In-Line Centrifugal FansProvide in-line fans with centrifugal backward inclined blades, stationary discharge conversion vanes, internal and external belt guards, and adjustable motor mounts.Mount fans in a welded tubular casing.Provide a fan that axially flows the air in and out.Streamline inlets with conversion vanes to eliminate turbulence and provide smooth discharge air flow.Enclose and isolate fan bearings and drive shafts from the air stream.Provide precision, self aligning ball or roller type fan bearings that are sealed against dust and dirt and are permanently lubricated.Provide L50 rated bearing life at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.[Provide motors with [open][dripproof][totally enclosed] [explosion-proof] enclosure.] [Provide [manual] [magnetic] motor starters across-the-line with [general-purpose] [weather-resistant] [explosion-proof] enclosures.][Provide remote manual switch with pilot indicating light where indicated.]Axial Flow FansProvide axial flow fans complete with drive components and belt guard, with steel housing, cast fan wheel, cast or welded steel diffusers, fan shaft, bearings, and mounting frame as a factory-assembled unit.Provide fan wheels that are dynamically balanced and keyed to the fan shaft, with radially projecting blades of airfoil cross-section.Enclose and isolate fan bearings and drive shafts from the air stream.Permanently lubricate fan bearings or provide them with accessible grease fittings.Provide precision self-aligning ball or roller type fan bearings that are sealed against dust and dirt.Provide fan bearings that have a L50 rated bearinglife at not less than 200,000 hours of operation as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.Provide fan inlets with an aerodynamically shaped bell and an inlet cone.Install diffuser or straightening vanes at the fan discharge to minimize turbulence and provide smooth discharge air flow.Furnish fan unit with [inlet and outlet flanges,] [inlet screen,] [duct equalizer section,] and [manual] [automatic] operation adjustable inlet vanes.Unless otherwise indicated, provide motors that do not exceed 1800 rpm and have [open] [dripproof] [totally enclosed] [explosion-proof] enclosure.[Provide [manual] [magnetic] motor starters across-the-line with [general-purpose] [weather-resistant] [explosion-proof] enclosure.] [Provide remote manual switch with pilot indicating light where indicated.]Panel Type Power Wall VentilatorsProvide propeller type fans, assembled on a reinforced metal panel with venturi opening spun into panel.Provide direct or V-belt driven fans with wheels less than 24 inches in diameter and provide V-belt driven fans with wheels 24 inches in diameter and larger.Provide fans with wall mounting collar.Provide lubricated bearings.Equip fans with wheel and motor side metal or wire guards which have a corrosion-resistant finish.Provide [dripproof][totally enclosed fan cooled][explosion-proof] type motor enclosure.Install [gravity][motor operated] backdraft dampers where indicated.Centrifugal Type Power Wall VentilatorsProvide [direct][ or ][V-belt] driven centrifugal type fans with backward inclined, non-overloading wheel.Provide removable and weatherproof motor housing.Provide unit housing that is designed for sealing to building surface and for discharge and condensate drippage away from building surface.Construct housing of heavy gauge aluminum.Equip unit with an [aluminum or plated steel wire discharge bird screen,] [disconnect switch,] [[anodized aluminum][stainless steel] wall grille,] [manufacturer's standard [gravity][motor-operated] damper,] an airtight and liquid-tight metallic wall sleeve.Provide [totally enclosed fan cooled] [dripproof] [explosion- proof] type motor enclosure.Use only lubricated bearings.Centrifugal Type Power Roof VentilatorsProvide [direct][ or ][V-belt] driven centrifugal type fans with backward inclined, non-overloading wheel.Provide hinged or removable and weatherproof motor compartment housing, constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. Provide fans with [birdscreen,] [disconnect switch,] [[gravity] [motorized] dampers,] [sound curb,] [roof curb,] and [extended base].Provide [dripproof] [explosion-proof] type motor enclosure.Provide centrifugal type kitchen exhaust fans according to UL 705, fitted with V-belt drive, round hood, and windband upblast discharge configuration, integral residue trough and collection device, with motor and power transmission components located in outside positively air ventilated compartment.Use only lubricated bearings.Propeller Type Power Roof VentilatorsProvide [direct][ or ][V-belt] driven fans.Provide hinged or removable weathertight fan housing, fitted with framed rectangular base constructed of aluminum or galvanized steel.Provide [totally enclosed fan cooled] [explosion-proof] type motors.Furnish motors with nonfusible, horsepowerrated, manual disconnect mount on unit.Furnish fans with [gravity] [motor operated] dampers, [birdscreen][sound curb][roof curb].Use only lubricated bearings.Air-Curtain FansProvide fans that conform to AMCA 220 with AMCA seal.Furnish air curtains with a weatherproof housing constructed of high impact plastic or minimum 18 gauge rigid welded steel.Provide backward curved, non-overloading, centrifugal type fan wheels, accurately balanced statically and dynamically. Provide motors with totally enclosed fan cooled enclosures.Provide remote manual type motor starters with weather-resistant enclosure actuated when the doorway served is open.Provide air curtains that attain the air velocities specified within 2 seconds following activation.Provide bird screens at air intake and discharge openings.Provide air curtain unit or a multiple unit installation that is at least as wide as the opening to be protected.Provide the air discharge openings to permit outward adjustment of the discharge air.Place installation and adjust according to the manufacturer's written recommendation.Furnish directional controls on air curtains for service windows for easy clean or convenient removal.Design air curtains to prevent the adjustment of the air velocities specified.Make the interior surfaces of the air curtain units accessible for cleaning. Provide certified test data indicating that the fan can provide the air velocities required when fan is mounted as indicated.Provide air curtains designed as fly fans unless otherwise indicated.[Provide air curtains designed for use in service entranceways that develop an air curtain not less than 3 inches thick at the discharge nozzle.Provide air velocity that is not less than 1600 fpm across the entire entryway when measured 3 feet above the floor.][Provide air curtains designed for use on customer entranceways that develop an air curtain not less than 8 inches thick at the discharge opening.Provide velocity that is not less than 600 fpm across the entire entryway when measured 3 feet above the floor.Equip recirculating type air curtains with readily removable filters, or design the filters for in-position cleaning.Provide readily accessible and easily cleanable air capture compartment or design for in-position cleaning.] [Provide air curtains designed for use on service windows that develop an air curtain not less than 8 inches thick at the discharge opening.Provide air velocity that is not less than 600 fpm across the entire opening of the service window measured 3 feet below the air discharge opening.]Ceiling Exhaust FansProvide centrifugal type, direct driven suspended cabinet-type ceiling exhaust fans.Provide fans with acoustically insulated housing.Provide chatter-proof backdraft damper.Provide egg-crate design or louver design integral face grille.Mount fan motors on vibration isolators.Furnish unit with mounting flange for hanging unit from above.Provide U.L. listed fans.CoilsProvide fin-and-tube type coils constructed of seamless [copper][red brass] tubes and [aluminum][ or ][copper] fins mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes.[Provide copper tube wall thickness that is a minimum of [0.016][0.020][0.024] inches].[Provide red brass tube wall thickness that is a minimum of [0.035] [0.049] inches].[Provide aluminum fins that are [0.0055][0.0075] inch minimum thickness.][Provide copper fins that are0.0045 inch minimum thickness.]Provide casing and tube support sheets that are not lighter than 16 gauge galvanized steel, formed to provide structural strength.When required, provide multiple tube supports to prevent tube sag.Test each coil at the factory under water at not less than 400 psi air pressure and make suitable for 200 psi working pressure and 300 degrees F operating temperature unless otherwise stated.Mount coils for counterflow service.Rate and certify coils to meet the requirements of AHRI 410.Direct-Expansion CoilsProvide suitable direct-expansion coils for the refrigerant involved. Provide refrigerant piping that conforms to ASTM B280 and clean, dehydrate and seal.Provide seamless copper tubing suction headers or seamless or resistance welded steel tube suction headers with copper connections.Provide supply headers that consist of a distributor which distributes the refrigerant through seamless copper tubing equally to all circuits in the coil.Provide circuited tubes to ensure minimum pressure drop and maximum heat transfer.Provide circuiting that permits refrigerant flow from inlet to suction outlet without causing oil slugging or restricting refrigerant flow in coil.Provide field installed coils which are completely dehydrated and sealed at the factory upon completion of pressure tests.Water CoilsInstall water coils with a pitch of not less than 1/8 inch/foot of the tube length toward the drain end.Use headers constructed of cast iron, welded steel or copper.Furnish each coil with a plugged vent and drain connection extending through the unit casing.Provide removable water coils with drain pans.Air FiltersList air filters according to requirements of UL 900, except list high efficiency particulate air filters of 99.97 percent efficiency by the DOP Test method under the Label Service to meet the requirements of UL 586.Extended Surface Pleated Panel FiltersProvide 2 inch depth, sectional, disposable type filters of the size indicated with a MERV of 8 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2.Provide initial resistance at 500 fpm that does not exceed 0.36 inches water gauge. Provide UL Class 2 filters, and nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat media.Attach a wire support grid bonded to the media to a moisture resistant fiberboard frame.Bond all four edges of the filter media to the inside of the frame to prevent air bypass and increase rigidity.AIR HANDLING UNITSField-Fabricated Air Handling UnitsProvide built-up units as specified in paragraph DUCT SYSTEMS.Provide fans, coils spray-coil dehumidifiers, and air filters as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT for types indicated.Factory-Fabricated Air Handling UnitsProvide single-zone draw-through type units as indicated.Units shall include fans, coils, airtight insulated casing, access sections where indicated, combination sectional filter-mixing box, vibration-isolators, and appurtenances required for specified operation.Provide vibration isolators as indicated.Physical dimensions of each air handling unit shall be suitable to fit space allotted to the unit with the capacity indicated.Provide air handling unit that is rated in accordance with AHRI 430 and AHRI certified for cooling.Casings Provide the following:Casing sections2 inch double wall type, constructed of a minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel, or 18 gauge corrosion-resisting sheet steel conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304. Inner casing of double-wall units that are a minimum 20 gauge solid galvanized steel or corrosion- resisting sheet steel conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304.Design and construct casing with an integral insulated structural galvanized steel frame such that exterior panels are non-load bearing.Individually removable exterior panels with standard tools.Removal shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit.Furnish casings with access sections, according to paragraph AIR HANDLING UNITS, inspection doors, and access doors, all capable of opening a minimum of90 degrees, as indicated.Insulated, fully gasketed, double-wall type inspection and access doors, of a minimum 18 gauge outer and 20 gauge inner panels made of either galvanized steel or corrosion-resisting sheet steel conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304.Doors shall be rigid and provided with heavy duty hinges and latches.Inspection doors shall be a minimum 12 inches wide by 12 inches high.Access doors shall be a minimum 24 inches wide, the full height of the unit casing or a minimum of 6 foot, whichever is less.[Install a minimum 8 by 8 inches sealed glass window suitable for the intended application, in all access doors.]Double-wall insulated type drain pan (thickness equal to exterior casing) constructed of 16 gauge corrosion resisting stainless steel conforming to ASTM A167, Type 304, conforming to ASHRAE 62.1. Construct drain pans water tight, treated to prevent corrosion, and designed for positive condensate drainage.When 2 or more cooling coils are used, with one stacked above the other, condensate from the upper coils shall not flow across the face of lower coils.Provide intermediate drain pans or condensate collection channels and downspouts, as required to carry condensate to the unit drain pan out of the air stream and without moisture carryover.Construct drain pan to allow for easy visual inspection, including underneath the coil without removal of the coil and to allow complete and easy physical cleaning of the pan underneath the coil without removal of the coil. Coils shall be individually removable from the casing.Casing insulation that conforms to NFPA 90A.Double-wall casing sections handling conditioned air shall be insulated with not less than2 inches of foam insulation.Foil-faced insulation is not an acceptable substitute for use with double wall casing.Double wall insulation shall be completely sealed by inner and outer panels.A latched and hinged inspection door, in the fan and coil sections. Plus additional inspection doors, access doors and access sections where indicated.Heating and Cooling CoilsProvide coils as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT.Air FiltersProvide air filters as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT for types and thickness indicated.FansProvide the following:Fans that are double-inlet, centrifugal type with each fan in a separate scroll.Dynamically balance fans and shafts prior to installation into air handling unit, then after it has been installed in the air handling unit, statically and dynamically balance the entire fan assembly.Mount fans on steel shafts, accurately ground and finished.Fan bearings that are sealed against dust and dirt and are precision self-aligning ball or roller type, with L50 rated bearing life at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.Bearings shall be permanently lubricated or lubricated type with lubrication fittings readily accessible at the drive side of the unit.Support bearings by structural shapes, or die formed sheet structural members, or support plates securely attached to the unit casing.Do not fasten bearings directly to the unit sheet metal casing.Furnish fans and scrolls with coating indicated.Fans that are driven by a unit-mounted, or a floor-mounted motor connected to fans by V-belt drive complete with belt guard for externally mounted motors.Furnish belt guards that are the three- sided enclosed type with solid or expanded metal face.Belt drives shall be designed for not less than a 1.3 service factor based on motor nameplate rating.Motor sheaves that are variable pitch for 25 hp and below and fixed pitch above 25 hp as defined by AHRI Guideline D.Where fixed sheaves are required, the use of variable pitch sheaves is allowed during air balance, but replace them with an appropriate fixed sheave after air balance is completed.Select variable pitch sheaves to drive the fan at a speed that produces the specified capacity when set at the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment.Furnish motors for V- belt drives with adjustable bases, and with open enclosures.Motor starters of magnetic type with general-purpose enclosure.Select unit fan or fans to produce the required capacity at the fan static pressure with sound power level as indicated.Obtain the sound power level values according to AMCA 300, ASHRAE 68, or AHRI 260 I-P.Access Sections and Filter/Mixing BoxesProvide access sections where indicated and furnish with access doors as shown.Construct access sections and filter/mixing boxes in a manner identical to the remainder of the unit casing and equip with access doors. Design mixing boxes to minimize air stratification and to promote thorough mixing of the air streams.TERMINAL UNITSRoom Fan-Coil UnitsProvide base units that include galvanized coil casing, coil assembly drain pan [valve and piping package,] [outside air damper,] [wall intake box,] air filter, fans, motor, fan drive, motor switch, an enclosure for cabinet models and casing for concealed models, leveling devices integral with the unit for vertical type units, and sound power levels as indicated.Obtain sound power level data or values for these units according to test procedures based on AHRI 350.Sound power values apply to units provided with factory fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles.Values obtained for the standard cabinet models are acceptable for concealed models without separate test provided there is no variation between models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or relative arrangement of parts.Provide automatic valves and controls as specified in paragraph SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES, subparagraph CONTROLS.Fasten each unit securely to the building structure.Provide units with capacity indicated. Provide room fan-coil units that are certified as complying with AHRI 440, and meet the requirements of UL 1995.EnclosuresFabricate enclosures from not lighter than 18 gauge steel, reinforced and braced.Provide enclosures with front panels that are removable and have 1/4 inch closed cell insulation or 1/2 inch thick dual density foil faced fibrous glass insulation.Make the exposed side of a high density, erosion- proof material suitable for use in air streams with velocities up to 4,500 fpm.Provide a discharge grille that is [adjustable] [fixed] and that is of such design as to properly distribute air throughout the conditioned space. Plastic discharge and return grilles are acceptable provided the plastic material is certified by the manufacturer to be classified as flame resistant according to UL 94 and the material complies with the heat deflection criteria specified in UL 1995.Provide galvanized or factory finished ferrous metal surfaces with corrosion resistant enamel, and access doors or removable panels for piping and control compartments, plus easy access for filter replacement.Provide duct discharge collar for concealed models.FansProvide steel or aluminum, multiblade, centrifugal type fans.In lieu of metal, fans and scrolls could be of non-metallic materials of suitably reinforced compounds with smooth surfaces.Dynamically and statically balance the fans.Provide accessible assemblies for maintenance.Disassemble and re-assemble by means of mechanical fastening devices and not by epoxies or cements.CoilsFabricate coils from not less than 3/8 inch outside diameter seamless copper tubing, with copper or aluminum fins mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes.Provide coils with not less than 1/2 inch outside diameter flare or sweat connectors, accessory piping package with thermal connections suitable for connection to the type of control valve supplied, and manual air vent.Test coils hydrostatically at 300 psi or under water at 250 psi air pressure.Provide coils suitable for 200 psi working pressure.Make provisions for coil removal.Drain PansSize and locate drain and drip pans to collect all water condensed on and dripping from any item within the unit enclosure or casing.Provide condensate drain pans designed for self-drainage to preclude the buildup of microbial slime and thermally insulated to prevent condensation and constructed of not lighter than 21 gauge type 304 stainless steel or noncorrosive ABS plastic.Provide insulation with a flame spread rating not over 25 without evidence of continued progressive combustion, a smoke developed rating no higher than 50, and of a waterproof type or coated with a waterproofing material.Design drain pans so as to allow no standing water and pitch to drain.Provide minimum 3/4 inch NPT or 5/8 inch OD drain connection in drain pan.Provide plastic or metal auxiliary drain pans to catch drips from control and piping packages, eliminating insulation of the packages; if metal, provide auxiliary pans that comply with the requirements specified above.Extend insulation at control and piping connections 1 inch minimum over the auxiliary drain pan.Manually Operated Outside Air DampersProvide manually operated outside air dampers according to the arrangement indicated, and parallel airfoil type dampers of galvanized construction.Provide blades that rotate on stainless steel or nylon sleeve bearings.FiltersProvide disposable type filter that complies with ASHRAE 52.2.Filters in each unit shall be removable without the use of tools.MotorsProvide motors of the permanent split-capacitor type with built-in thermal overload protection, directly connected to unit fans.Provide motor switch with two or three speeds and off, manually operated, and mounted on an identified plate [inside the unit below or behind an access door][ or][adjacent to the room thermostat][as indicated].In lieu of the above fan speed control, a solid-state variable-speed controller having a minimum speed reduction of 50 percent is allowed.Provide motors with permanently- lubricated or oilable sleeve-type or combination ball and sleeve-type bearings with vibration isolating mountings suitable for continuous duty.Provide a motor power consumption, shown in watts, at the fan operating speed selected to meet the specified capacity that does not exceed the following values:Free Discharge MotorsUnit Capacity (cfm)Maximum Power Consumption (Watts)115V230V277V200701109030010011011040017015015060018021022080024024023010003102502701200440400440High Static MotorsUnit Capacity (cfm)Maximum Power Consumption (Watts)20014530014540021060032080032010005301200530ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICESRotary WheelProvide unit that is a factory fabricated and tested assembly for air-to-air energy recovery by transfer of sensible heat from exhaust air to supply air stream, with device performance according to ASHRAE 84 and that delivers an energy transfer effectiveness of not less than 70 percent with cross- contamination not in excess of 0.1 percent of exhaust airflow rate at systemdesign differential pressure, including purging sector if provided with wheel.Provide exchange media that is chemically inert, moisture-resistant, fire-retardant, laminated, nonmetallic material which complies with NFPA 90A.Isolate exhaust and supply streams by seals which are static, field adjustable, and replaceable.Equip chain drive mechanisms with ratcheting torque limiter or slip-clutch protective device.Fabricate enclosure from galvanized steel and include provisions for maintenance access.Provide recovery control and rotation failure provisions as indicated.Desiccant WheelProvide counterflow supply, regeneration airstreams, a rotary type dehumidifier designed for continuous operation, and extended surface type wheel structure in the axial flow direction with a geometry that allows for laminar flow over the operating range for minimum air pressure differentials.Provide the dehumidifier complete with a drive system utilizing a fractional-horsepower electric motor and speed reducer assembly driving the rotor.Include a slack-side tensioner for automatic take-up for belt-driven wheels.Provide an adsorbing type desiccant material.Apply the desiccant material to the wheel such that the entire surface is active as a desiccant and the desiccant material does not degrade or detach from the surface of the wheel which is fitted with full-face, low-friction contact seals on both sides to prevent cross leakage.Provide rotary structure that has underheat, overheat and rotation fault circuitry.The wheel assembly shall come with a warranty for a minimum of five years.FACTORY PAINTINGFactory paint new equipment, which are not of galvanized construction. Paint with a corrosion resisting paint finish according to ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A924/A924M.Clean, phosphatize and coat internal and external ferrous metal surfaces with a paint finish which has been tested according to ASTM B117, ASTM D1654, and ASTM D3359.Submit evidence of satisfactory paint performance for a minimum of 125 hours for units to be installedindoors and 500 hours for units to be installed outdoors.Provide rating of failure at the scribe mark that is not less than 6, average creepage not greater than 1/8 inch.Provide rating of the inscribed area that is not less than 10, no failure.On units constructed of galvanized steel that have been welded, provide a final shop docket of zinc-rich protective paint on exterior surfaces of welds or welds that have burned through from the interior according to ASTM D520 Type I.Factory painting that has been damaged prior to acceptance by the Contracting Officer shall be field painted in compliance with the requirements of paragraph FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICESRefrigerant PipingThe requirements for refrigerant piping are specified in Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING.2.17.3Condensate Drain LinesProvide and install condensate drainage for each item of equipment that generates condensate in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE except as modified herein.Backflow PreventersThe requirements for backflow preventers are specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.InsulationThe requirements for shop and field applied insulation are specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.ControlsThe requirements for controls are specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS and 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.PART 3EXECUTIONCONSTRUCTION-RELATED SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIAPerform and document Indoor Air Quality During Construction.Provide documentation showing that after construction ends, and prior to occupancy, new filters were installed in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph INDOOR AIR QUALITY DURING CONSTRUCTION.EXAMINATIONAfter becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.INSTALLATIONInstall materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements of the contract drawings and approved manufacturer's installation instructions.Accomplish installation by workers skilled in this type of work.Perform installation so that there is no degradation of the designed fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.No installation is permitted to block or otherwise impede access to any existing machine or system.Install all hinged doors to swing open a minimum of 120 degrees.Provide an area in front of all access doors that clears a minimum of 3 feet.In front of all access doors to electrical circuits, clear the area the minimum distance to energized circuits as specified in OSHA Standards, part 1910.333.Except as otherwise indicated, install emergency switches and alarms in conspicuous locations.Mount all indicators, to include gauges, meters, and alarms in order to be easily visible by people in the area.Condensate Drain LinesProvide water seals in the condensate drain from all units.Provide a depth of each seal of 2 inches plus the number of inches, measured in water gauge, of the total static pressure rating of the unit to which the drain is connected.Provide water seals that are constructed of 2 tees and an appropriate U-bend with the open end of each tee plugged.Provide pipe cap or plug cleanouts where indicated.Connect drains indicated to connect to the sanitary waste system using an indirect waste fitting.Insulate air conditioner drain lines as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.Equipment and InstallationProvide frames and supports for tanks, compressors, pumps, valves, air handling units, fans, coils, dampers, and other similar items requiring supports.Floor mount or ceiling hang air handling units as indicated. Anchor and fasten as detailed.Set floor-mounted equipment on not less than6 inch concrete pads or curbs doweled in place unless otherwise indicated. Make concrete foundations heavy enough to minimize the intensity of the vibrations transmitted to the piping, duct work and the surrounding structure, as recommended in writing by the equipment manufacturer.In lieu of a concrete pad foundation, build a concrete pedestal block with isolators placed between the pedestal block and the floor.Make the concrete foundation or concrete pedestal block a mass not less than three times the weight of the components to be supported.Provide the lines connected to the pump mounted on pedestal blocks with flexible connectors.Access PanelsInstall access panels for concealed valves, vents, controls, dampers, and items requiring inspection or maintenance of sufficient size, and locate them so that the concealed items are easily serviced and maintained or completely removed and replaced.Provide access panels as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.Flexible DuctInstall pre-insulated flexible duct in accordance with the latest printed instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight joint.Provide hangers, when required to suspend the duct, of the type recommended by the duct manufacturer and set at the intervals recommended.Metal DuctworkInstall according to SMACNA 1966 unless otherwise indicated.Install duct supports for sheet metal ductwork according to SMACNA 1966, unless otherwise specified.Do not use friction beam clamps indicated in SMACNA 1966.Anchor risers on high velocity ducts in the center of the vertical run to allow ends of riser to move due to thermal expansion.Erect supports on the risers that allow free vertical movement of the duct.Attach supports only to structural framing members and concrete slabs.Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means is provided and approved for preventing the anchor from puncturing the metal decking.Where supports are required between structural framing members, provide suitable intermediate metal framing.Where C-clamps are used, provide retainer clips.Dust ControlTo prevent the accumulation of dust, debris and foreign material during construction, perform temporary dust control protection.Protect the distribution system (supply and return) with temporary seal-offs at all inlets and outlets at the end of each day's work.Keep temporary protection in place until system is ready for startup.InsulationProvide thickness and application of insulation materials for ductwork, piping, and equipment according to Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.Externally insulate outdoor air intake ducts and plenums [up to the point where the outdoor air reaches the conditioning unit][ or ][up to the point where the outdoor air mixes with the return air stream].Duct Test HolesProvide holes with closures or threaded holes with plugs in ducts and plenums as indicated or where necessary for the use of pitot tube in balancing the air system.Plug insulated duct at the duct surface, patched over with insulation and then marked to indicate location of test hole if needed for future use.Power Roof Ventilator MountingProvide foamed 1/2 inch thick, closed-cell, flexible elastomer insulation to cover width of roof curb mounting flange.Where wood nailers are used, predrill holes for fasteners.Power Transmission Components AdjustmentTest V-belts and sheaves for proper alignment and tension prior to operation and after 72 hours of operation at final speed.Uniformly load belts on drive side to prevent bouncing.Make alignment of direct driven couplings to within 50 percent of manufacturer's maximum allowable range of misalignment.EQUIPMENT PADSProvide equipment pads to the dimensions shown or, if not shown, to conform to the shape of each piece of equipment served with a minimum 3-inch margin around the equipment and supports.Allow equipment bases and foundations, when constructed of concrete or grout, to cure a minimum of [28][14][ ] calendar days before being loaded.CUTTING AND PATCHINGInstall work in such a manner and at such time that a minimum of cutting and patching of the building structure is required.Make holes in exposed locations, in or through existing floors, by drilling and smooth by sanding. Use of a jackhammer is permitted only where specifically approved.Make holes through masonry walls to accommodate sleeves with an iron pipe masonry core saw.CLEANINGThoroughly clean surfaces of piping and equipment that have become covered with dirt, plaster, or other material during handling and construction before such surfaces are prepared for final finish painting or are enclosed within the building structure.Before final acceptance, clean mechanical equipment, including piping, ducting, and fixtures, and free from dirt, grease, and finger marks.PENETRATIONSProvide sleeves and prepared openings for duct mains, branches, and other penetrating items, and install during the construction of the surface to be penetrated.Cut sleeves flush with each surface.Place sleeves for round duct 15 inches and smaller.Build framed, prepared openings for round duct larger than 15 inches and square, rectangular or oval ducts.Sleeves and framed openings are also required where grilles, registers, and diffusers are installed at the openings.Provide one inch clearance between penetrating and penetrated surfaces except at grilles, registers, and diffusers.Pack spaces between sleeve or opening and duct or duct insulation with mineral fiber conforming with ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2.SleevesFabricate sleeves, except as otherwise specified or indicated, from 20 gauge thick mill galvanized sheet metal.Where sleeves are installed in bearing walls or partitions, provide black steel pipe conforming with ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 20.Framed Prepared OpeningsFabricate framed prepared openings from 20 gauge galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.InsulationProvide duct insulation in accordance with Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall penetrations.Terminate duct insulation at fire dampers and flexible connections.For duct handling air at or below 60 degrees F, provide insulation continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are exposed to unconditioned air.Closure CollarsProvide closure collars of a minimum 4 inches wide, unless otherwise indicated, for exposed ducts and items on each side of penetrated surface, except where equipment is installed.Install collar tight against the surface and fit snugly around the duct or insulation.Grind sharp edges smooth to prevent damage to penetrating surface.Fabricate collars for round ducts 15 inches in diameter or less from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for square and rectangular ducts, or round ducts with minimum dimension over 15 inches from 18 gauge galvanized steel.Fabricate collars for square and rectangular ducts with a maximum side of 15 inches or less from 20 gauge galvanized steel.Install collars with fasteners a maximum of 6 inches on center.Attach to collars a minimum of 4 fastenerswhere the opening is 12 inches in diameter or less, and a minimum of 8 fasteners where the opening is 20 inches in diameter or less.FirestoppingWhere ducts pass through fire-rated walls, fire partitions, and fire rated chase walls, seal the penetration with fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.FIELD PAINTING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTClean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted.Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces.Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except clean to bare metal on metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F.Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry.Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat.Provide aluminum or light gray finish coat.Temperatures less than 120 degrees FImmediately after cleaning, apply one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat to metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F.Temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees FApply two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of two mils to metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F.Temperatures greater than 400 degrees FApply two coats of 315 degrees C 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of two mils to metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 400 degrees F.Finish PaintingThe requirements for finish painting of items only primed at the factory, and surfaces not specifically noted otherwise, are specified in Section 0990 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMSProvide identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and item number on all valves and dampers.Provide tags that are 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter with stamped or engraved markings.Make indentations black for reading clarity.Attach tags to valves with No. 12 AWG 0.0808-inch diameter corrosion-resistant steel wire, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain or plastic straps designed for that purpose.DUCTWORK LEAK TESTPerform ductwork leak test for the entire air distribution and exhaust system, including fans, coils, filters, etc.Provide test procedure, apparatus, and report that conform to SMACNA 1972 CD.The maximum allowable leakage rate is 2% of system plete ductwork leak test with satisfactory results prior to applying insulation to ductwork exterior.DUCTWORK LEAK TESTSThe requirements for ductwork leak tests are specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.DAMPER ACCEPTANCE TESTSubmit the proposed schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of test. Operate all fire dampers and smoke dampers under normal operating conditions, prior to the occupancy of a building to determine that they function properly.Test each fire damper equipped with fusible link by having the fusible link cut in place.Test dynamic fire dampers with the air handling and distribution system running.Reset all fire dampers with the fusible links replaced after acceptance testing.To ensure optimum operation and performance, install the damper so it is square and free from racking.TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCINGThe requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing are specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.Begin testing,adjusting, and balancing only when the air supply and distribution, including controls, has been completed, with the exception of performance tests.PERFORMANCE TESTSAfter testing, adjusting, and balancing is complete as specified, test each system as a whole to see that all items perform as integral parts of the system and temperatures and conditions are evenly controlled throughout the building.Record the testing during the applicable season.Make corrections and adjustments as necessary to produce the conditions indicated or specified.Conduct capacity tests and general operating tests by an experienced engineer.Provide tests that cover a period of not less than 2 days for each system and demonstrate that the entire system is functioning according to the specifications.Make coincidental chart recordings at points indicated on the drawings for the duration of the time period and record the temperature at space thermostats or space sensors, the humidity at space humidistats or space sensors and the ambient temperature and humidity in a shaded and weather protected area.Submit test reports for the ductwork leak test, and performance tests in booklet form, upon completion of testing.Document phases of tests performed including initial test summary, repairs/adjustments made, and final test results in the reports.CLEANING AND ADJUSTINGInside of air handlers, thoroughly clean ducts, plenums, and casing of debris and blow free of small particles of rubbish and dust and then vacuum clean before installing outlet faces.Wipe equipment clean, with no traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots.Provide temporary filters prior to startup of all fans that are operated during construction, and install new filters after all construction dirt has been removed from the building, and the ducts, plenums, casings, and other items specified have been vacuum cleaned.Maintain system in this clean condition until final acceptance.Properly lubricate bearings with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer.Tighten belts to proper tension.Adjust control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment to setting indicated or directed.Adjust fans to the speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions.Maintain all equipment installed under the contract until close out documentation is received, the project is completed and the building has been documented as beneficially occupied.OPERATION AND MAINTENANCEOperation and Maintenance ManualsSubmit six manuals at least 2 weeks prior to field training.Submit data complying with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.Submit Data Package 3 for the items/units listed under SD-10 Operation and Maintenance DataOperation And Maintenance TrainingConduct a training course for the members of the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer.Make the training period consist of a total of 4 hours of normal working time and start it after all work specified herein is functionally completed and the Performance Tests have been approved.Conduct field instruction that covers all of the items contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.Submit the proposed On-site Training schedule concurrently with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and at least 14 days prior to conducting the training course.-- End of Section --SECTION 23 03 00BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODSPART 1GENERALSUBMITTALSSubmit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:Closeout SubmittalsEnergy Efficient Equipment for MotorsReduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for paint/coatings;RELATED REQUIREMENTSThis section applies to all sections of Divisions: 21, FIRE SUPPRESSION; 22, PLUMBING; and 23, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING of this projectspecification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.QUALITY ASSURANCEMaterial and Equipment QualificationsProvide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.Standard products must have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening.The 2-year use must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.The product must have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.Alternative QualificationsProducts having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.Service SupportThe equipment items must be supported by service organizations.Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications.These service organizations must be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.Manufacturer's NameplateFor each item of equipment, provide a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.Modification of ReferencesIn each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears.Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.DefinitionsFor the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions must be considered mandatory, the word "should" is interpreted as "must."Reference to the "code official" must be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer."For Air Force owned property, references to the "owner" must be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer."For leased facilities, references to the "owner" must be interpreted to mean the "lessor."References to the "permit holder" must be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."Administrative InterpretationsFor ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply.These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project.References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, must be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGHandle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer.Replace damaged or defective items.ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTSFurnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their respective pieces of equipment.Motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors must conform to and have electrical connections provided under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment.Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted.Controllers and contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and must have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished.When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of additional electrical service and related work must be included under the section that specified that motor or equipment.Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment must be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSElectrical installations must conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified herein.New WorkProvide electrical components of mechanical equipment, such as motors, motor starters, control or push-button stations, float or pressure switches, solenoid valves, integral disconnects, and other devices functioning to control mechanical equipment, as well as control wiring and conduit for circuits rated 100 volts or less, to conform with the requirements of the section covering the mechanical equipment.Extended voltage range motors are not to be permitted.The interconnecting power wiring and conduit, control wiring rated 120 volts (nominal) and conduit, [the motor control equipment forming a part of motor control centers,] and the electrical power circuits must be provided under Division 26, except internal wiring for components of package equipment must be provided as an integral part of the equipment.When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, provide any required changes to the electrical service as may be necessary and related work as a part of the work for the section specifying that motor or equipment.Modifications to Existing SystemsWhere existing mechanical systems and motor-operated equipment require modifications, provide electrical components under Division 26.High Efficiency MotorsHigh Efficiency Single-Phase MotorsUnless otherwise specified, single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating- current motors must be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.High Efficiency Polyphase MotorsUnless otherwise specified, polyphase motors must be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to the applications as listed in NEMA MG10.Additionally, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings must meet or exceed energy efficient ratings in accordance with Table 12-6C of NEMA MG 1.1.6.4Three-Phase Motor ProtectionProvide controllers for motors rated one 1 horsepower and larger with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase- loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage.Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNELWhen specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system.Instructors must bethoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and must be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.Instruction must be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation.The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished must be as specified in the individual section.When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction.Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.ACCESSIBILITYInstall all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible.Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.PART 2PRODUCTSPRODUCT SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIAFor products in this section, where applicable and to extent allowed by performance criteria, provide and document the following:Energy Efficient Equipment for MotorsProvide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT that the motors meet energy efficiency requirements as outlined in this section.Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for paint/coatingsLow or no VOC's and no added urea formaldehyde for paints or coatings, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph REDUCE VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (VOC).PART 3EXECUTIONPAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENTNew equipment painting must be factory applied or shop applied, and must be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.Factory Painting SystemsManufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors must withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test.Salt-spray fog test must be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance criteria must be as follows:immediately after completion of the test, the paint must show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss ofadhesion; and the specimen must show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment must not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen.If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system must be designed for the temperature service.Shop Painting Systems for Metal SurfacesClean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted.Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces.Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F must be cleaned to bare metal.Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry.Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat must be aluminum or light gray.Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F must receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil per coat.Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F:Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F must receive two coats of400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 400 degrees F must receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.-- End of Section --SECTION 23 05 93TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVACPART 1GENERALDEFINITIONSAABC:Associated Air Balance CouncilCOTR:Contracting Officer's Technical RepresentativeDALT:Duct air leakage testDALT'd:Duct air leakage testedHVAC:Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning; or heating, ventilating, and coolingNEBB:National Environmental Balancing BureauOut-of-tolerance data:Pertains only to field acceptance testing of Final DALT or TAB report.When applied to DALT work, this phase means "a leakage rate measured during DALT field acceptance testing which exceeds the leakage rate allowed by SMACNA Leak Test Manual for an indicated duct construction and sealant class.""a leakage rate measured during DALT field acceptance testing which exceeds the leakage rate allowed by Appendix D REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCT AIR LEAK TESTING."When applied to TAB work this phase means "a measurement taken during TAB field acceptance testing which does not fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the original measurement reported on the TAB Report for a specific parameter."Season of maximum heating load:The time of year when the outdoor temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 30 degrees Fahrenheit of the project site's winter outdoor design temperature, throughout the period of TAB data recording.Season of maximum cooling load:The time of year when the outdoor temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 5 degrees Fahrenheit of the project site's summer outdoor design temperature, throughout the period of TAB data recording.Season 1, Season 2:Depending upon when the project HVAC is completed and ready for TAB, Season 1 is defined, thereby defining Season 2. Season 1 could be the season of maximum heating load, or the season of maximum cooling load.Sound measurements terminology:Defined in AABC MN-1, NEBB MASV, or SMACNA 1858 (TABB).TAB:Testing, adjusting, and balancing (of HVAC systems)TAB'd:HVAC Testing/Adjusting/Balancing procedures performedTAB Agency:TAB FirmTAB team field leader:TAB team field leaderTAB team supervisor:TAB team engineerTAB team technicians:TAB team assistants1.1.1Similar TermsIn some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the TAB Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to use the industry standards specified, along with additional requirements listed herein to produce optimal results.The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent over the corresponding AABC, NEBB, or TABB requirements where differences exist.SIMILAR TERMSContract TermAABC TermNEBB TermTABB TermTAB StandardNational Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning SystemsProcedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental SystemsInternational Standards for Environmental Systems BalanceTAB SpecialistTAB EngineerTAB SupervisorTAB SupervisorSystems Readiness CheckConstruction Phase InspectionField Readiness Check & Preliminary Field ProceduresField Readiness Check & Prelim. Field ProceduresWORK DESCRIPTIONThe work includes duct air leakage testing (DALT) and testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of new heating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air and water.Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the TAB procedural standard recommended by the TAB trade association that approved the TAB Firm's ply with requirements of AABC MN-1, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, or SMACNA 1780 (TABB) as supplemented and modified by this specification section.All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB procedural standards are considered mandatory.Conduct DALT and TAB of the indicated existing systems and equipment and submit the specified DALT and TAB reports for approval.Conduct DALT testing in compliance with the requirements specified in SMACNA 1972 CD, except as supplemented and modified by this section.Conduct DALT and TAB work in accordance with the requirements of this section.Air Distribution SystemsTest, adjust, and balance system[s] (TAB) in compliance with this section. Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation to exterior of air distribution systems as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.Water Distribution SystemsTAB system[s] in compliance with this section.Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation to water distribution systems as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. At Contractor's option and with Contracting Officer's written approval, the piping systems may be insulated before systems are TAB'd.Terminate piping insulation immediately adjacent to each flow control valve, automatic control valve, or device.Seal the ends of pipe insulation and the space between ends of pipe insulation and piping, with waterproof vapor barrier coating.After completion of work under this section, insulate the flow control valves and devices as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.TAB SCHEMATIC DRAWINGSShow the following information on TAB Schematic Drawings:A unique number or mark for each piece of equipment or terminal.Air quantities at air terminals.Air quantities and temperatures in air handling unit schedules.Water quantities and temperatures in thermal energy transfer equipment schedules.Water quantities and heads in pump schedules.Water flow measurement fittings and balancing fittings.Ductwork Construction and Leakage Testing Table that defines the DALT test requirements, including each applicable HVAC duct system ID or mark, duct pressure class, duct seal class, and duct leakage test pressure.The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Specialist must review the Contract Plans and Specifications and advise the Contracting Officer of any deficiencies that would prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the system, and systems readiness check.The TAB Specialist must provide aDesign Review Report individually listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action necessary for proper system operation. The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Specialist must review the Contract Plans and Specifications and advise the Contracting Officer of any deficiencies that would prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the system, including records of existing conditions, and systems readiness check.The TAB Specialist must provide a Design Review Report individually listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action necessary for proper system operation.Submit three copies of the TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms to the Contracting Officer, no later than 21 days prior to the start of TAB field measurements.SUBMITTALSSubmit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:Preconstruction SubmittalsIndependent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications TAB Design Review ReportTAB FirmDesignation of TAB Team AssistantsDesignation of TAB Team Engineer or TAB Specialist Designation of TAB Team Field LeaderShop DrawingsTAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms Product DataEquipment and Performance Data TAB Related HVAC Submittals TAB ProceduresProposed procedures for TAB, submitted with the TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms.CalibrationSystems Readiness CheckTest ReportsCompleted Pre-Final DALT ReportCertified Final DALT ReportPrerequisite HVAC Work Checkout List For Season 1 Certified Final TAB Report for Season 1 Prerequisite HVAC Work Checkout List For Season 2 Certified Final TAB Report for Season 2TAB Design Review Report TAB Report for Season 1 TAB Report for Season 2CertificatesIndependent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications Instrument Calibration CertificatesTAB FirmQUALITY ASSURANCEIndependent TAB Agency and Personnel QualificationsTo secure approval for the proposed agency, submit information certifying that the TAB agency is a first tier subcontractor who is not affiliated with any other company participating in work on this contract, including design, furnishing equipment, or construction.Further, submit the following, for the agency, to Contracting Officer for approval:Independent AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB agency:TAB agency:AABC registration number and expiration date of current certification; or NEBB certification number and expiration date of current certification; or TABB certification number and expiration date of current certification.TAB team supervisor:Name and copy of AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB supervisor certificate and expiration date of current certification.TAB team field leader:Name and documented evidence that the team field leader has satisfactorily performed full-time supervision of TAB work in the field for not less than 3 years immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.TAB team field technicians:Names and documented evidence that each field technician has satisfactorily assisted a TAB team field leader in performance of TAB work in the field for not less than one year immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.Current certificates:Registrations and certifications are current, and valid for the duration of this contract.Renew Certifications which expire prior to completion of the TAB work, in a timely manner so that there is no lapse in registration or certification.TAB agency or TAB team personnel without a current registration or current certification are not to perform TAB work on this contract.TAB Team Members:TAB team approved to accomplish work on this contract are full-time employees of the TAB agency.No other personnel is allowed to do TAB work on this contract.Replacement of TAB team members: Replacement of members may occur if each new member complies with the applicable personnel qualifications and each is approved by the Contracting Officer.PART 2PRODUCTSNot UsedPART 3EXECUTIONWORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTSComply with requirements of this section as specified in Appendix A WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS.PRE-DALT/TAB MEETINGMeet with the Contracting Officer's technical representative (COTR)[and the designing engineer of the HVAC systems] to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of the DALT work and TAB work requirements.Ensure that the TAB supervisor is present at this meeting.Requirements to be discussed include required submittals, work schedule, and field quality control.DALT PROCEDURESInstruments, Consumables and PersonnelProvide instruments, consumables and personnel required to accomplish the DALT field work.Follow the same basic procedure specified below for TAB Field Work, including maintenance and calibration of instruments, accuracy of measurements, preliminary procedures, field work, workmanship and treatment of deficiencies.Calibrate and maintain instruments in accordance with manufacturer's written procedures.Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field WorkAdvance Notice of Pre- Final DALT Field WorkOn completion of the installation of each duct system indicated to be DALT'd, notify the Contracting Officer in writing prior to the COTR's duct selection field visit.Ductwork To Be DALT'dFrom each duct system indicated as subject to DALT, the COTR will randomly select sections of each completed duct system for testing by the Contractor's TAB Firm.The sections selected will not exceed 20 percent of the total measured linear footage of duct systems indicated as subject to DALT.Sections of duct systems subject to DALT will include 20 percent of main ducts, branch main ducts, branch ducts and plenums for supply, return, exhaust, and plenum ductwork.It is acceptable for an entire duct system to be DALT'd instead of disassembling that system in order to DALT only the 20 percent portion specified above.DALT TestingPerform DALT on the HVAC duct sections of each system as selected by the COTR.Use the duct class, seal class, leakage class and the leak test pressure data indicated on the drawings, to comply with the procedures specified in SMACNA 1972 CD.In spite of specifications of SMACNA 1972 CD to the contrary, DALT ductwork of construction class of 3-inch water gauge static pressure and below if indicated to be DALT'plete DALT work on the COTR selected ductwork within 48 hours after the particular ductwork was selected for DALT. Separately conduct DALT work for large duct systems to enable the DALT work to be completed in 48 hours.Quality Assurance - COTR DALT Field Acceptance TestingIn the presence of the COTR and TAB team field leader, verify for accuracy Pre-final DALT Report data selected by the COTR.For each duct system, this acceptance testing shall be conducted ona maximum of 50 percent of the duct sections DALT'd.Further, if any data on the Pre-final DALT report form for a given duct section is out-of-tolerance, then field acceptance testing shall be conducted on data for one additional duct section, preferably in the same duct system, in the presence of the COTR.Additional COTR Field Acceptance TestingIf any of the duct sections checked for a given system are determined to have a leakage rate measured that exceeds the leakage rate allowed by SMACNA Leak Test Manual for an indicated duct construction class and sealant class, terminate data checking for that section.The associated Pre-final DALT Report data for the given duct system will be disapproved.Make the necessary corrections and prepare a revised Pre-final DALT Report.Reschedule a field check of the revised report data with the COTR.Certified Final DALT ReportOn successful completion of all field checks of the Pre-final DALT Report data for all systems, the TAB Supervisor is to assemble, review, certify and submit the Final DALT Report to the Contracting Officer for approval.On successful completion of all field checks of the Pre-Final DALT Report data for all systems, the TAB Supervisor shall assemble, review, approve, signand submit the Final DALT Report in compliance with Appendix BREPORTS - DALT and TAB to the Contracting Officer for approval.Prerequisite for TAB Field WorkDo not commence TAB field work prior to the completion and approval, for all systems, of the Final DALT Report.TAB PROCEDURESTAB Field WorkTest, adjust, and balance the HVAC systemsuntil measured flow rates (air and water flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents.That is, comply with the the requirements of AABC MN-1 and AABC MN-4, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, NEBB MASV, or SMACNA 1780 (TABB) and SMACNA 1858(TABB),except as supplemented and modified by this section.Provide instruments and consumables required to accomplish the TAB work. Calibrate and maintain instruments in accordance with manufacturer's written procedures.Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systemsuntil measured flow rates (air and water flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents. Conduct TAB work, including measurement accuracy, and sound measurement work in conformance with the AABC MN-1 and AABC MN-4, or NEBB TABES and NEBB MASV, or SMACNA1780 (used by TABB) andSMACNA 1858 sound measurement procedures, except as supplemented and modified by this section.[The only water flow and air flow reporting which can be deferred until the Season 2 is that data which would be affected in terms of accuracy due to outside ambient conditions.]Preliminary ProceduresUse the approved pre-field engineering report as instructions and procedures for accomplishing TAB field work.TAB engineer is to locate, in the field, test ports required for testing.It is the responsibility of the sheet metal contractor to provide and install test ports as required by the TAB engineer.TAB Air Distribution SystemsUnits With CoilsReport heating and cooling performance capacity tests for hot water, chilled water, DX and steam coils for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity.Submit the following data and calculations with the coil test reports:For air handlers with capacities greater than 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) cooling, such as factory manufactured units, central built-up units and rooftop units, conduct capacity tests in accordance with AABC MN-4, procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."Do not determine entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures by single point measurement, but by the average of multiple readings in compliance with paragraph 3.5-5, "Procedures", (in subparagraph d.) of AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."Submit part-load coil performance data from the coil manufacturer converting test conditions to design conditions; use the datafor the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity in compliance with AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing," paragraph 3.5.7, "Actual Capacity Vs. Design Capacity" (in subparagraph c.).For units with capacities of 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) or less, such as fan coil units, duct mounted reheat coils associated with VAV terminal units, and unitary units, such as through-the-wall heat pumps:Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single point measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures; submit the calculations with the coil reports.Air Handling UnitsAir handling unit systems including fans (air handling unit fans, exhaust fans and winter ventilation fans), coils, ducts, plenums, mixing boxes, terminal units, variable air volume boxes, and air distribution devices for supply air, return air, outside air, mixed air relief air, and makeup air.Rooftop Air ConditioningRooftop air conditioning systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums, and air distribution devices for supply air, return air, and outside air.For refrigeration compressors/condensers/condensing units/evaporators, report data as required by NEBB, AABC, and TABB standard procedures, including refrigeration operational data.Heating and Ventilating UnitsHeating and ventilating unit systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums, roof vents, registers, diffusers, grilles, and louvers for supply air, return air, outside air, and mixed air.Makeup Air UnitsMakeup air unit systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums, registers, diffusers, grilles, and louvers for supply air, return air, outside air, and mixed air.Return Air FansReturn air fan system including fan ducts, plenums, registers, diffusers, grilles, and louvers for supply air, return air, outside air, and mixed air.Fan CoilsFan coil unit systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums, and air distribution devices for supply air, return air, and outside air.Exhaust FansExhaust fan systems including fans, ducts, plenums, grilles, and hoods for exhaust air.Unit HeatersTAB Water Distribution SystemsHeating Hot WaterHeating hot water systems including boilers, hot water converters (e.g., heat exchangers), pumps, coils, system balancing valves and flow measuring devices.Sound Measurement WorkAreas To Be Sound MeasuredIn the following spaces, measure and record the sound power level for each octave band listed in ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK Noise Criteria:All HVAC mechanical rooms, including machinery spaces and other spaces containing HVAC power drivers and power driven equipment.All spaces sharing a common barrier with each mechanical room, including rooms overhead, rooms on the other side of side walls, and rooms beneath the mechanical room floor.[c.AHU No. 1 System:Rooms: [ ]][d.[ ] System:Rooms: [ ]][e.[ ] System:Rooms:[ ]ProcedureMeasure sound levels in each room, when unoccupied except for the TAB team, with all HVAC systems that would cause sound readings in the room operating in their noisiest mode. Record the sound level in each octave band.Attempt to mitigate the sound level and bring the level to within the specified ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK noise criteria goals, if such mitigation is within the TAB team's control.State in the report the ASHRAE HVAC APP IP HDBK noise criteria goals.If sound level cannot be brought into compliance, provide written notice of the deficiency to the Contractor for resolution or correction.TimingMeasure sound levels at times prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB.MetersMeasure sound levels with a sound meter complying with ASA S1.4, Type 1 or 2, and an octave band filter set complying with ASA S1.11 PART 1.Use measurement methods for overall sound levels and for octave band sound levels as prescribed by NEBB.CalibrationCalibrate sound levels as prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB, except that calibrators emitting a sound pressure level tone of 94 dB at 1000 hertz (Hz) are also acceptable.Background Noise CorrectionDetermine background noise component of room sound (noise) levels for each (of eight) octave bands as prescribed by AABC or NEBB or TABB.TAB Work on Performance Tests Without Seasonal LimitationsPerformance TestsIn addition to the TAB proportionate balancing work on the air distribution systems and the water distribution systems, accomplish TAB work on the HVAC systems which directly transfer thermal energy.TAB the operational performance of the [heating systems] [and] [cooling systems].Ambient TemperaturesOn each tab report form used for recording data, record the outdoor and indoor ambient dry bulb temperature range and the outdoor and indoor ambient wet bulb temperature range within which the report form's data was recorded. Record these temperatures at beginning and at the end of data taking.Sound MeasurementsComply with the paragraph SOUND MEASUREMENT WORK, specifically, the requirement that a room must be operating in its noisiest mode at the time of sound measurements in the room.The maximum noise level measurements could depend on seasonally related heat or cooling transfer equipment.Refrigeration UnitsFor refrigeration compressors/condensers/condensing units, report data as required by NEBB Form TAB 15-83, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, including refrigeration operational data.CoilsReport heating and cooling performance capacity tests for [hot water], [chilled water], [DX] [and steam coils] for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity.Submit the following data and calculations with the coil test reports:[a.For Central station air handlers with capacities greater than 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) cooling, such as factory manufactured units, centralbuilt-up units and rooftop units, conduct capacity tests in accordance with AABC MN-4, procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing".Entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures are not determined by single point measurement, but the average of multiple readings in compliance with paragraph 3.5-5, "Procedures", (in subparagraph d.) of AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."Submit part-load coil performance data from the coil manufacturer converting test conditions to design conditions; use the data for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity in compliance with AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing," paragraph 3.5.7, "Actual Capacity Vs. Design Capacity" (in subparagraph c.).b.For units with capacities of 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) or less, such as fan coil units, duct mounted reheat coils associated with VAV terminal units, and unitary units, such as through-the-wall heat pumps:Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single point measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures; submit the calculations with the coil reports.TAB Work on Performance Tests With Seasonal LimitationsPerformance TestsAccomplish proportional balancing TAB work on the air distribution systems and water distribution systems, in other words, accomplish adjusting and balancing of the air flows and water flows, any time during the duration of this contract, subject to the limitations specified elsewhere in this section.However, accomplish, within the following seasonal limitations, TAB work on HVAC systems which directly transfer thermal energy.Accomplish proportionate balancing TAB work on the air distribution systems and water distribution systems, in other words, accomplish adjusting and balancing of the air flows and water flows, any time during the duration of this contract, subject to the limitations specified elsewhere in this section.However, accomplish, within the following seasonal limitations, TAB work on HVAC systems which directly transfer thermal energy.Season Of Maximum LoadVisit the contract site for at least two TAB work sessions for Season 1 and Season 2 field measures.Visit the contract site during the season of maximum heating load and visit the contract site during the season of maximum cooling load, the goal being to TAB the operational performance of the heating systems and cooling systems under their respective maximum outdoor environment-caused loading.During the seasonal limitations, TAB the operational performance of the heating systems and cooling systems.Visit the contract site for at least two TAB work sessions for TAB field measurements.Ambient TemperaturesOn each tab report form used for recording data, record the outdoor and indoor ambient dry bulb temperature range and the outdoor and indoor ambient wet bulb temperature range within which the report form's data was recorded. Record these temperatures at beginning and at the end of data taking.Sound MeasurementsComply with the paragraph SOUND MEASUREMENT WORK, specifically, the requirement that a room must be operating in its noisiest mode at the time of sound measurements in the room.The maximum noise level measurements could depend on seasonally related heat or cooling transfer equipment.Refrigeration UnitsFor refrigeration compressors/condensers/condensing units,report data as required by NEBB Form TAB 15-83, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, including refrigeration operational data.CoilsReport heating and cooling performance capacity tests for hot water, DX for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity. Submit the following data and calculations with the coil test reports:For Central station air handlers with capacities greater than 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) cooling, such as factory manufactured units, central built-up units and rooftop units, conduct capacity tests in accordance with AABC MN-4, procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."Entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures are not determined by single point measurement, but by the average of multiple readings in compliance with paragraph 3.5-5, "Procedures", (in subparagraph d.) of AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."Submit part-load coil performance data from the coil manufacturer converting test conditions to design conditions; use the data for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity in compliance with AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing," paragraph 3.5.7, "Actual Capacity Vs. Design Capacity" (in subparagraph c.).For units with capacities of 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) or less, such as fan coil units, duct mounted reheat coils associated with VAV terminal units, and unitary units, such as through-the-wall heat pumps:Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single point measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures; submit the calculations with the coil reports.WorkmanshipConduct TAB work on the HVAC systems until measured flow rates are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents.This TAB work includes adjustment of balancing valves, balancing dampers, and sheaves.Further, this TAB work includes changing out fan sheaves and pump impellers if required to obtain air and water flow rates specified or indicated.If, with these adjustments and equipment changes, the specified or indicated design flow rates cannot be attained, contact the Contracting Officer for direction.DeficienciesStrive to meet the intent of this section to maximize the performance of the equipment as designed and installed.However, if deficiencies in equipment design or installation prevent TAB work from being accomplished within the range of design values specified in the paragraph WORKMANSHIP, provide written notice as soon as possible to the Contractor and the Contracting Officer describing the deficiency and recommended correction.Responsibility for correction of installation deficiencies is the Contractor's.If a deficiency is in equipment design, call the TAB team supervisor for technical assistance.Responsibility for reporting design deficiencies to Contractor is the TAB team supervisor's.TAB ReportsAdditional requirements for TAB Reports are specified inAppendix B REPORTS - DALT and TABAfter completion of the TAB field work, prepare the TAB field data for TAB supervisor's review and certification, using the reporting forms approved in the pre-field engineering report.Data required by those approved data report forms is to be furnished by the TAB team.Except as approved otherwise in writing by the Contracting Officer, the TAB work and thereby the TAB report is considered incomplete until the TAB work is accomplished to within the accuracy range specified in the paragraph WORKMANSHIP.Prepare the report neatly and legibly; the pre-final TAB report is the final TAB report minus the TAB supervisor's review and certification.Obtain, at the contract site, the TAB supervisor's review and certification of the TAB report.Verbally notify the COTR that the field check of the TAB report data can commence; give this verbal notice 48 hours in advance of field check commencement.Do not schedule field check of the TAB report until the specified workmanship requirements have been met or written approval of the deviations from the requirements have been received from the Contracting Officer.Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Acceptance TestingTAB Field Acceptance TestingDuring the field acceptance testing, verify, in the presence of the COTR, random selections of data (water, air quantities, air motion, sound level readings) recorded in the TAB Report.Points and areas for field acceptance testing are to be selected by the COTR.Measurement and test procedures are the same as approved for TAB work for the TAB Report.Field acceptance testing includes verification of TAB Report data recorded for the following equipment groups:Group 1:boilers, return fans, computer room units, and air handling units (rooftop and central stations).Group 2:25 percent of the supply diffusers, registers, grilles associated with constant volume air handling units.Group 3:25 percent of the return grilles, return registers, exhaust grilles and exhaust registers.Group 4:25 percent of the supply fans, exhaust fans, and pumps.Further, if any data on the TAB Report for Groups 2 through 5 is found not to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the TAB Report data, additional group data verification is required in the presence of the COTR.Verify TAB Report data for one additional piece of equipment in that group.Continue this additional group data verification until out-of- tolerance data ceases to be found.Additional COTR TAB Field Acceptance TestingIf any of the acceptance testing measurements for a given equipment group is found not to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the TAB Report data, terminate data verification for all affected data for that group.The affected data for the given group will be disapproved.Make the necessary corrections and prepare a revised TAB Report.Reschedule acceptance testing of the revised report data with the COTR.Prerequisite for ApprovalCompliance with the field acceptance testing requirements of this section is a prerequisite for the final Contracting Officer approval of the TAB Report submitted.MARKING OF SETTINGSUpon the final TAB work approval, permanently mark the settings of HVAC adjustment devices including valves, gauges, splitters, and dampers so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time.Provide permanent markings clearly indicating the settings on the adjustment devices which result in the data reported on the submitted TAB report.MARKING OF TEST PORTSThe TAB team is to permanently and legibly mark and identify the location points of the duct test ports.If the ducts have exterior insulation, make these markings on the exterior side of the duct insulation.Show the location of test ports on the as-built mechanical drawings with dimensions given where the test port is covered by exterior insulation.APPENDICESAppendix AWORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTSAppendix BREPORTS - DALT and TABAppendix CDALT AND TAB SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULE Appendix DREQUIREMENTS FOR DUCT AIR LEAK TESTINGAppendix AWORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTSThe Contractor is responsible for ensuring compliance with all requirements of this specification section.However, the following delineation of specific work items is provided to facilitate and co-ordinate execution of the various work efforts by personnel from separate organizations.ContractorHVAC documentation:Provide pertinent contract documentation to the TAB Firm, to include the following: the contract drawings and specifications; copies of the approved submittal data for all HVAC equipment, air distribution devices, and air/water measuring/balancing devices; the construction work schedule; and other applicable documents requested by the TAB Firm.Provide the TAB Firm copies of contract revisions and modifications as they occur.Schedules: Ensure the requirements specified under the paragraph "DALT and TAB Schedule" are met.Pre-DALT and TAB meeting:Arrange and conduct the Pre-DALT and TAB meeting.Ensure that a representative is present for the sheet metal contractor, the mechanical contractor, the electrical contractor, and the automatic temperature controls contractor.Coordinate Support:Provide and coordinate support personnel required by the TAB Firm in order to accomplish the DALT and TAB field work. Support personnel may include factory representatives, HVAC controls installers, HVAC equipment mechanics, sheet metal workers, pipe fitters, and insulators.Ensure support personnel are present at the work site at the times required.Correct Deficiencies:Ensure the notifications of Construction Deficiencies are provided as specified herein.Refer to the paragraph CONSTRUCTION DEFICIENCIES.Correct each deficiency as soon as practical with the Contracting Officer, and submit revised schedules and other required documentation.Pre-TAB Work Checklists:Complete check out and debugging of HVAC equipment, ducts, and controls prior to the TAB engineer arriving at the project site to begin the TAB work.Debugging includes searching for and eliminating malfunctioning elements in the HVAC system installations, and verifying all adjustable devices are functioning as designed.Include as pre-TAB work checklist items, the deficiencies pointed out by the TAB team supervisor in the design review report.Prior to the TAB field team's arrival, ensure completion of the applicable inspections and work items listed in the TAB team supervisor's DALT and TAB Work Procedures Summary.Do not allow the TAB team to commence TAB field work until all of the following are completed.Give Notice of Testing:Submit advance notice of proportional balancing, Season 1, and Season 2 TAB field work accompanied by completed prerequisite HVAC Work ListInsulation work:Ensure that no insulation is shall not be installed on ducts to be DALT'd until DALT work on the subject ducts is complete.Ensure the duct and piping systems are properly insulated and vapor sealed upon the successful completion and acceptance of the DALT and TAB work.TAB Team SupervisorOverall management:Supervise and manage the overall TAB team work effort, including preliminary and technical DALT and TAB procedures and TAB team field work.Schedule:Ensure the requirements specified under the paragraph "DALT and TAB Schedule" are met.Submittals:Provide the submittals specified herein.Pre-DALT/TAB meeting:Attend meeting with Contractor.Ensure TAB personnel that will be involved in the TAB work under this contract attend the meeting.Design Review Report:Submit typed report describing omissions and deficiencies in the HVAC system's design that would preclude the TAB team from accomplishing the duct leakage testing work and the TAB work requirements of this section.Provide a complete explanation including supporting documentation detailing the design deficiency.State that no deficiencies are evident if that is the case.Support required:Specify the technical support personnel required from the Contractor other than the TAB agency; such as factory representatives for temperature controls or for complex equipment. Inform the Contractor in writing of the support personnel needed and when they are needed.Furnish the notice as soon as the need is anticipated, either with the design review report, or the DALT and TAB Procedures Summary, the during the DALT or TAB field work.Ensure the Contractor is properly notified and aware of all support personnel needed to perform the TAB work.Maintain communication with the Contractor regarding support personnel throughout the duration of the TAB field work, including the TAB field acceptance testing checking.Ensure all inspections and verifications for the Pre-Final DALT and Pre-TAB Checklists are completely and successfully conducted before DALT and TAB field work is performed.Advance Notice:Monitor the completion of the duct system installations and provide the Advance Notice for Pre-Final DALT field work as specified herein.Technical Assistance:Provide technical assistance to the DALT and TAB field work.Deficiencies Notification:Ensure the notifications of Construction Deficiencies are provided as specified ply with requirements of the paragraph CONSTRUCTION DEFICIENCIES.Resolve each deficiency as soon as practical and submit revised schedules and other required documentation.Procedures:Develop the required TAB procedures for systems or system components not covered in the TAB Standard.TAB Team Field LeaderField manager:Manage, in the field, the accomplishment of the work specified in Part 3, EXECUTION.Full time:Be present at the contract site when DALT field work or TAB field work is being performed by the TAB team; ensure day-to-day TAB team work accomplishments are in compliance with this section.Prerequisite HVAC work:Do not bring the TAB team to the contract site until a copy of the prerequisite HVAC work list, with all work items certified by the Contractor to be working as designed, reaches the office of the TAB Agency.Appendix B REPORTS - DALT and TABAll submitted documentation must be typed, neat, and organized.All reports must have a waterproof front and back cover, a title page, a certification page, sequentially numbered pages throughout, and a table of contents.Tables, lists, and diagrams must be titled. Generate and submit for approval the following documentation:DALT and TAB Work Execution ScheduleSubmit a detailed schedule indicating the anticipated calendar date for each submittal and each portion of work required under this section.For each work entry, indicate the support personnel (such as controls provider, HVAC mechanic, etc.) that are needed to accomplish the work.Arrange schedule entries chronologically.DALT and TAB Procedures SummarySubmit a detailed narrative describing all aspects of the DALT and TAB field work to be performed.Clearly distinguish between DALT information and TAB information.Include the following:A list of the intended procedural steps for the DALT and TAB field work from start to finish.Indicate how each type of data measurement will be obtained.Include what Contractor support personnel are required for each step, and the tasks they need to perform.A list of the project's submittals that are needed by the TAB Firm in order to meet this Contract's requirements.The schematic drawings to be used in the required reports, which may include building floor plans, mechanical room plans, duct system plans, and equipment elevations.Indicate intended TAB measurement locations, including where test ports need to be provided by the Contractor.The data presentation forms to be used in the report, with the preliminary information and initial design values filled in.A list of DALT and TAB instruments to be used, edited for this project, to include the instrument name and description, manufacturer, model number, scale range, published accuracy, most recent calibration date, and what the instrument will be used for on this project.A thorough checklist of the work items and inspections that need to be accomplished before DALT field work can be performed.The Contractor must complete, submit, and receive approval of the Completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklist before DALT field work can be accomplished.The checklists specified above shall be individually developed and tailored specifically for the work under this contract.Refer to NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, Section III, "Preliminary TAB Procedures" under the paragraphs titled, "Air Distribution System Inspection" and"Hydronic Distribution System Inspection" for examples of items to include in the checklists.Design Review ReportSubmit report containing the following information:Review the contract specifications and drawings to verify that the TAB work can be successfully accomplished in compliance with the requirements of this section.Verify the presence and location of permanently installed test ports and other devices needed, including gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow control devices, circuit setters, balancing valves, and manual volume dampers.Submit a typed report describing omissions and deficiencies in the HVAC system's design that would preclude the TAB team from accomplishing the DALT work and the TAB work requirements of this section.Provide a complete explanation including supporting documentation detailing the design deficiency.If no deficiencies are evident, state so in the pleted Pre-Final DALT Work ChecklistReport the data for the Pre-Final DALT Report meeting the following requirements:Submit a copy of the approved DALT and TAB Procedures Summary:Provide notations describing how actual field procedures differed from the procedures listed.Report format:Submit a comprehensive report for the DALT field work data using data presentation forms equivalent to the "Air Duct Leakage Test Summary Report Forms" located in the SMACNA 1972 CD.In addition, submit in the report, a marked duct shop drawing which identifies each section of duct tested with assigned node numbers for each section.Node numbers shall be included in the completed report forms to identify each duct section.Calculations:Include a copy of all calculations prepared in determining the duct surface area of each duct test section.Include in the DALT reports copy(s) of the calibration curve for each of the DALT test orifices used for testing.Instruments:List the types of instruments actually used to measure the data.Include in the listing each instrument's unique identification number, calibration date, and calibration expiration date.Instruments are to be calibrated within one year of the date of use in the field; instrument calibration is to be traceable to the measuring standards of the National Institute of Standards and Technology.TAB Supervisor Approval:Include on the submitted report the typed name of the TAB supervisor and the dated signature of the TAB supervisor.Final DALT ReportOn successful completion of all COTR field checks of the Pre-final DALT Report data for all systems, the TABS Supervisor shall assemble, review, sign and submit the Final DALT Report to the Contracting Officer for approval.TAB Reports:Submit TAB Report for Proportional Balancing, Season 1, and Season 2 in the following manner:Procedure Summary:Submit a copy of the approved DALT and TAB Procedures Summary.When applicable, provide notations describing how actual field procedures differed from the procedures listed.Report format:Submit the completed data forms approved in the pre- field TAB Engineering Report completed by TAB field team, reviewed, approved and signed by the TAB supervisor.Bind the report with a waterproof front and back cover.Include a table of contents identifying by page number the location of each report.Report forms and report data shall be typewritten.Handwritten report forms or report data are not acceptable.Temperatures:On each TAB report form reporting TAB work accomplished on HVAC thermal energy transfer equipment, include the indoor and outdoor dry bulb temperature range and indoor and outdoor wet bulb temperature range within which the TAB data was recorded.Include in the TAB report continuous time versus temperature recording data of wet and dry bulb temperatures for the rooms, or zones, as designated in the following list:[ ]Data shall be measured and compiled on a continuous basis for the period in which TAB work affecting those rooms is being done.Data shall be measured/recorded only after the HVAC systems installations are complete, the systems fully balanced and the HVAC systems controls operating in fully automatic mode.Provide a detailed explanation wherever a final measurement did not achieve the required value.Data may be compiled using direct digital controls trend logging where available.Otherwise, the Contractor shall temporarily install calibrated time versus temperature/humidity recorders for this purpose.The HVAC systems and controls shall have been fully operational a minimum of 24 hours in advance of commencing data compilation.The specified data shall be included in the [Season I TAB Report] [Season I and Season 2 TAB Report].Air System Diagrams:Provided updated diagrams with final installed locations of all terminals and devices, any numbering changes, and actual test locations.Air Static Pressure Profiles:Report static pressure profiles for air duct systems including:[AHU-1][RTAC-1][MUA-1][ ].Report static pressure data for all supply, return, relief, exhaust and outside air ducts for the systems listed.The static pressure report data shallinclude, in addition to AABC or NEBB or TABB required data, the following:Report supply fan, return fan, relief fan, and exhaust fan inlet and discharge static pressures.Report static pressure drop across chilled water coils, DX coils, hot water coils, steam coils, electric resistance heating coils and heat reclaim devices installed in unit cabinetry or the system ductwork.Report static pressure drop across outside air, return air, and supply air automatic control dampers, both proportional and two- position, installed in unit cabinetry.Report static pressure drop across air filters, acoustic silencers, moisture eliminators, air flow straighteners, air flow measuring stations or other pressure drop producing specialty items installed in unit cabinetry, or in the system ductwork.Examples of these specialty items are smoke detectors, white sound generators, RF shielding, wave guides, security bars, blast valves, small pipes passing through ductwork, and duct mounted humidifiers.Do not report static pressure drop across duct fittings provided for the sole purpose of conveying air, such as elbows, transitions, offsets, plenums, manual dampers, and branch takes-offs.Report static pressure drop across outside air and relief/exhaust air louvers.Report static pressure readings of supply air, return air, exhaust/relief air, and outside air in duct at the point where these ducts connect to each air moving unit.[f.Duct Transverses:Report duct traverses for main [and branch main] supply, return[, exhaust, relief and outside air] ducts.[This shall include all ducts, including those which lack 7 1/2 duct diameters upstream and 2 1/2 duct diameters downstream of straight duct unobstructed by duct fittings/offsets/elbows.]The TAB Agency shall evaluate and report findings on the duct traverses taken.Evaluate the suitability of the duct traverse measurement based on satisfying the qualifications for a pitot traverse plane as defined by AMCA 203, "Field Measurements", Section 8, paragraph 8.3, "Location of Traverse Plane".]g.Instruments:List the types of instruments actually used to measure the tab data.Include in the listing each instrument's unique identification number, calibration date, and calibration expiration date.Instrumentation, used for taking wet bulb temperature readings shall provide accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent at the measured face velocities.Submit instrument manufacturer's literature to document instrument accuracy performance is in compliance with that specified.Performance Curves: The TAB Supervisor shall include, in the TAB Reports, factory pump curves and fan curves for pumps and fans TAB'd on the job.Calibration Curves:The TAB Supervisor shall include, in the TAB Reports, a factory calibration curve for installed flow control balancing valves, flow venturis and flow orifices TAB'd on the job.Data From TAB Field Work:After completion of the TAB field work, prepare the TAB field data for TAB supervisor's review and approval signature, using the reporting forms approved in the pre-field engineering report.Data required by those approved data report forms shall be furnished by the TAB team.Except as approved otherwise in writing by the Contracting Officer, the TAB work and thereby the TAB report shall be considered incomplete until the TAB work is accomplished to within the accuracy range specified in the paragraph WORKMANSHIP.Appendix CDALT AND TAB SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULEPerform the following items of work in the order listed adhering to the dates schedule specified below.Include the major items listed in this schedule in the project network analysis schedule required by Section 01 3217.00 20 COST-LOADED NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS).Submit TAB Agency and TAB Personnel Qualifications:Within [42] [ ] calendar days after date of contract award.Submit the DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule:within [14] [ ] days after receipt of the TAB agency and TAB personnel qualifications approval.Revise and re-submit this schedule 28 days prior to commencement of DALT work and 28 days prior to the commencement of TAB Season 1 work and TAB Season 2 work.Submit the DALT and TAB Work Procedures Summary:within [14] [ ] days after receipt of the initial approved DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule.Meet with the COTR at the Pre-DALT/TAB Meeting:Within [28] [ ] calendar days after receipt of the approved initial DALT/TAB Execution Schedule.Submit Design Review Report:Within [56] [ ] calendar days after the receipt of the approved initial DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule.[Conduct measurements and submit the Record of Existing Facility Conditions:within [28] [ ] days after receipt of approved DALT and TAB Work Procedures Summary.]Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work:After the completed installation of the HVAC duct system to be DALT'd,submit to the Contracting Officer an Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work accompanied by the completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklist for the subject duct system.Ductwork Selected for DALT:Within 14 calendar days after receiving an acceptable completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklist, the Contracting Officer's technical representative (COTR) will select the project ductwork sections to be DALT'd.DALT Field Work:Within 48 hours of COTR's selection, complete DALT field work on selected project ductwork.Submit Pre-Final DALT Report:Within two working days after completion of DALT field work, submit Pre-final DALT Report. Separate Pre-final DALT reports may be submitted to allow phased testing from system to system.Quality Assurance - COTR DALT Field Checks: Upon approval of the Pre- final DALT Report, the COTR's DALT field check work shall be scheduled with the Contracting Officer.Submit Final DALT Report:Within [14] [ ] calendar days after completion of successful DALT Work Field Check, submit [Season 1 ]TAB report.Advance Notice of [Season 1 ]TAB Field Work:At a minimum of[14][ ] calendar days prior to [Season 1 ]TAB Field Work, submit advance notice of TAB field work accompanied by completed [Season 1]Pre-TAB Work Checklist.[Season 1 ]TAB Field Work:At a minimum of [84][ ] calendar days prior to CCD, [and when the ambient temperature is within Season 1 limits,] accomplish [Season 1 ]TAB field work.Submit [Season 1 ]TAB Report: Within [14] [ ] calendar days after completion of [Season 1 ]TAB field work, submit initial [Season 1 ]TAB report.[Season 1 ]Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Check:[30] [ ] calendar days after initial [Season 1 ]TAB report is approved by the Contracting Officer, conduct [Season 1 ]field plete [Season 1 ]TAB Work:Prior to CCD, complete all TAB work [except Season 2 TAB work] and submit final.Receive the approved TAB report: Within 21 calendar days, receive the report from Contracting Officer approved TAB report.Advance Notice of Season 2 TAB Field Work:At a minimum of [126][ ]calendar days after CCD, submit advance notice of Season 2 TAB field work accompanied by completed Season 2 Pre-TAB Work Checklist.[Season 2 TAB Field Work:Within [14] [ ] calendar days after date of advance notice of Season 2 TAB field work and when the ambient temperature is within Season 2 limits, accomplish Season 2 TAB field work.Submit Season 2 TAB Report:Within [14] [ ] calendar days after completion of Season 2 TAB field work, submit Season 2 TAB report.Season 2 Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Checks:[28] [ ] calendar days after the Season 2 TAB report is approved by the Contracting Officer, conduct Season 2 field plete Season 2 TAB Work:Within [14] [ ] calendar days after the completion of Season 2 TAB field data check, complete all TAB work.]Receive the approved TAB report: Within calendar 21 days, receive the report from Contracting Officer.Appendix DREQUIREMENTS FOR DUCT AIR LEAK TESTINGSYSTEMS[Package Rooftop w/VAV Unit No. [1][ ]][Package Rooftop w/VAV Unit No. [2][ ]][Package Rooftop w/CV Unit No. [1][ ]][Package Rooftop w/CV Unit No. [2] [ ]]Duct System Static Pressure, in inches W.C.for Supply[4][ ][4][ ][2] [ ][2] [ ]for Return[2][ ][2][ ][1] [ ][1] [ ]for Exhaust[ ][ ][ ][ ]for Outside Air[2][ ][2][ ][1] [ ][1] [ ]System Oval/Round Duct and Rectangular Duct SMACNA Seal Classfor SupplyAAAAfor ReturnAAAAfor ExhaustAAAAfor Outside AirAAAASystem Oval/Round Duct SMACNA Leak Classfor Supply[3][ ][3][ ][6] [ ][6] [ ]for Return[6][ ][6][ ][12][ ][12] [ ]for Exhaust[ ][ ][ ][ ]for Outside Air[6][ ][6][ ][12][ ][12] [ ]System Rectangular Duct SMACNA Leak Classfor Supply[6][ ][6][ ][12][ ][12] [ ]for Return[12][ ][12][ ][24][ ][24][ ]for Exhaust[ ][ ][ ][ ]for Outside Air[12][ ][12][ ][24][ ][24] [ ]Duct Test Pressure, in inches W.C.for Supply[4][ ][2][ ][50][ ][2] [ ]for Return[2][ ][2][ ][1] [ ][1] [ ]for Exhaust[ ][ ][ ][ ]for Outside Air[2][ ][2][ ][1] [ ][1] [ ]Appendix DREQUIREMENTS FOR DUCT AIR LEAK TESTINGSYSTEMS[AHU w/ Economizer & CV Unit No. [1][ ]][AHU w/ Economizer & CV Unit No. [2][ ]][Series VAV Terminal Boxes Unit No. [1][ ]][Exhaust Systems Unit No. [1][ ]]Duct System Static Pressure, in millimeters W.C.for Supply[2][ ][2][ ][0.5][ ]n/afor Return[1][ ][1][ ][0.5][ ]n/afor Exhaust[0.5][ ][0.5][ ]n/a[1] [ ]for Outside Air[1][ ][1][ ]n/an/aSystem Oval/Round Duct and Rectangular Duct SMACNA Seal Classfor SupplyAAAAfor ReturnAAAAfor ExhaustAAAAfor Outside AirAAAASystem Oval/Round Duct SMACNA Leak Classfor Supply[6][ ][6][ ]12n/afor Return[12][ ][12][ ]12n/afor Exhaust[12][ ][12][ ]n/a[12] [ ]for Outside Air[12][ ][12][ ]n/an/aSystem Rectangular Duct SMACNA Leak Classfor Supply[12][ ][12][ ]24n/afor Return[24][ ][24][ ]24n/afor Exhaust[24][ ][24][ ]n/a[24] [ ]for Outside Air[24][ ][24][ ]n/an/aDuct Test Pressure, in inches W.C.for Supply[2][ ][2][ ][0.5][ ]n/afor Return[1][ ][1][ ][0.5][ ]n/afor Exhaust[0.5][ ][0.5][ ]n/a[1] [ ]for Outside Air[1][ ][1][ ]n/an/a-- End of Section --SECTION 23 07 00THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMSPART 1GENERALSYSTEM DESCRIPTIONGeneralProvide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as specified herein; factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping, duct or equipment to be insulated.Recycled MaterialsProvide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable, provided that the materials meet all other requirements of this section.The minimum recycled material content of the following insulation are:Rock Wool75 percent slag of weightFiberglass20-25 percent glass cullet by weightRigid Foam9 percent recovered materialSUBMITTALSSubmit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:Submit the three SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and SD- 08 Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each system.Product DataPipe Insulation Systems Duct Insulation SystemsEquipment Insulation Systems Manufacturer's InstructionsPipe Insulation Systems Duct Insulation SystemsEquipment Insulation Systems Closeout SubmittalsReduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for Caulking, Sealant and Adhesive MaterialsRecycled Content for Pipe and Ductwork Insulation MaterialsQUALITY ASSURANCE1.3.1Installer QualificationQualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the last 5 years.DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGMaterials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other contaminants.The Contracting Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty, dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means.Packages or standard containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall have manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and brand, and a description of the material, date codes, and approximate shelf life (if applicable).Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos free.PART 2PRODUCTSPRODUCT SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIAFor products in this section, where applicable and to extent allowed by performance criteria, provide and document the following:Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) for Caulking, Sealant and Adhesive MaterialsFor interior applications, provide caulking, sealant and adhesive materials meeting the reduced VOC requirements as stated within Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING paragraph REDUCE VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (VOC).Recycled Content for Pipe and Ductwork Insulation Materials Provide documentation in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITYREPORTING that the following products meet the recycled content requirements as outlined in this section:Pipe Insulation SystemsDuct Insulation SystemsSTANDARD PRODUCTSProvide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening.Submit a complete list of materials, including manufacturer's descriptive technical literature, performance data, catalog cuts, and installation instructions.The product number, k-value, thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives, sealants and jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included.The product data must be copyrighted, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation.Insulation SystemProvide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA National Insulation Standards plates as supplemented by this specification.Provide field-applied insulation for heating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems that are located within, on, under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing systems.Provide CFC and HCFC free insulation.Surface Burning CharacteristicsUnless otherwise specified, insulation must have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.Flame spread, and smoke developed indexes, shall be determined by ASTM E84 or UL 723.Test insulation inthe same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction.Prepare and mount test specimens according to ASTM E2231.MATERIALSProvide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.2. Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling.Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either wet or dry state.Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C795 requirements.Calcium silicate shall not be used on chilled or cold water systems.Materials shall be asbestos free.Provide product recognized under UL 94 (if containing plastic) and listed in FM APP GUIDE.AdhesivesAcoustical Lining Insulation AdhesiveAdhesive shall be a nonflammable, fire-resistant adhesive conforming to ASTM C916, Type I.Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C195.Lagging AdhesiveLagging is the material used for thermal insulation, especially around a cylindrical object.This may include the insulation as well as the cloth/material covering the insulation.To resist mold/mildew, lagging adhesive shall meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating. Lagging adhesives shall be nonflammable and fire-resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.Adhesive shall be MIL-A-3316, Class 1, pigmented white and be suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for bonding cotton brattice cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for sealing edges of and bonding glass tape to joints of fibrous glass board; for bonding lagging cloth to thermal insulation; or Class 2 for attaching fibrous glass insulation to metal surfaces.Lagging adhesives shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for pipe and duct insulation.Contact AdhesiveAdhesives may be any of, but not limited to, the neoprene based, rubber based, or elastomeric type that have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.The adhesive shall not adversely affect, initially or in service, the insulation to which it is applied, nor shall it cause any corrosive effect on metal to which it is applied.Any solvent dispersing medium or volatile component of the adhesive shall have no objectionable odor and shall not contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride.The dried adhesive shall not emit nauseous, irritating, or toxic volatile matters or aerosols when the adhesive is heated to any temperature up to 212 degrees F.The dried adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant.Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive:Comply with MIL-A-24179, Type II, Class I.Provide product listed in FM APP GUIDE.CaulkingASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.Corner AnglesNominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft backing. Aluminum shall be ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.FittingsFabricated Fittings are the prefabricated fittings for flexible elastomeric pipe insulation systems in accordance with ASTM C1710.Together with the flexible elastomeric tubes, they provide complete system integrity for retarding heat gain and controlling condensation drip from chilled-water and refrigeration systems. Flexible elastomeric, fabricated fittings provide thermal protection (0.25 k) and condensation resistance (0.05 Water Vapor Transmission factor).For satisfactory performance, properly installed protective vapor retarder/barriers and vapor stops shall be used on high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications to reduce movement of moisture through or around the insulation to the colder interior surface.Finishing CementASTM C450: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and finishing cement.All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic stainless steel must comply with ASTM C795.Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass TapeFibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, and glass tape shall have maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.Tape shall be 4 inch wide rolls.Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard. Elastomeric Foam Tape: Black vapor-retarder foam tape with acrylic adhesive containing an anti-microbial additive.StaplesOutward clinching type ASTM A167, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.JacketsAluminum JacketsAluminum jackets shall be corrugated, embossed or smooth sheet,0.016 inch nominal thickness;ASTM B209, Temper H14, Temper H16, Alloy 3003, 5005, or 3105.Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors.Aluminum jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel,0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide for pipe over 12 inch and larger diameter.Aluminum jacket circumferential seam bands shall be 2 by 0.016 inch aluminum matching jacket material.Bands for insulation below ground shall be 3/4 by 0.020 inch thick stainless steel, or fiberglass reinforced tape.The jacket may, at the option of the Contractor, be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or "Z" type longitudinal joint.When the "Z" joint is used, the bands at the circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the joints and hold the jacket in place.Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) JacketsPolyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket and fitting covers shall have high impact strength, ultraviolet (UV) resistant rating or treatment and moderate chemical resistance with minimum thickness 0.030 inch.Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing JacketVapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive, greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive); with 0.0000 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, using the water transmission rate test method; heavy duty, white or natural; and UV resistant.Flexible Elastomeric exterior foam with factory applied, UV Jacket made with a cold weather acrylic adhesive.Construction of laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear resistance and excellent Water Vapor Transmission (WVT) rate.Vapor Barrier/Vapor RetarderApply the following criteria to determine which system is required.On ducts, piping and equipment operating below 100 degrees F or located outside shall be equipped with a vapor barrier.Ducts, pipes and equipment that are located inside and that always operate above 0 degrees F shall be installed with a vapor retarder where required as stated in paragraph VAPOR RETARDER REQUIRED.Vapor Retarder RequiredASTM C921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of25 Beach units is acceptable.Minimum tensile strength,35 pounds/inch width.ASTM C921, Type II, minimum puncture resistance 25 Beach units, tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width.Jackets used on insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for paintingwithout sizing.Based on the application, insulation materials that require manufacturer or fabricator applied pipe insulation jackets are cellular glass, when all joints are sealed with a vapor barrier mastic, and mineral fiber.All non-metallic jackets shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.Flexible elastomerics require (in addition to vapor barrier skin) vapor retarder jacketing for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications.White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)ASJ is for use on hot/cold pipes, ducts, or equipment indoors or outdoors if covered by a suitable protective jacket.The product shall meet all physical property and performance requirements of ASTM C1136, Type I, except the burst strength shall be a minimum of 85 psi.ASTM D2863 Limited Oxygen Index (LOI) shall be a minimum of 31.In addition, neither the outer exposed surface nor the inner-most surface contacting the insulation shall be paper or other moisture-sensitive material.The outer exposed surface shall be white and have an emittance of not less than 0.80.The outer exposed surface shall be paintable.Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic CoatingsVapor BarrierThe vapor barrier shall be self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed white jacket for use on hot/cold pipes.Permeability shall be less than 0.02 when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.Products shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 flame and smoke requirements and shall be UV resistant.Vapor RetarderThe vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and appropriately selected for either outdoor or indoor service.Color shall be white.The water vapor permeance of the compound shall be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mils dry film thickness as determined according to procedure B of ASTM E96/E96M utilizing apparatus described in ASTM E96/E96M.The coating shall be nonflammable, fire resistant type.To resist mold/mildew, coating shall meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating. Coating shall meet MIL-PRF-19565 Type II (if selected for indoor service) and be Qualified Products Database listed.All other application and service properties shall be in accordance with ASTM C647.Laminated Film Vapor RetarderASTM C1136, Type I, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork; where Type II, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable.Vapor retarder shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.Flexible Elastomeric exterior foam with factory applied UV Jacket.Construction of laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear resistance and an excellent WVT rate.Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC) Film Vapor RetarderThe PVDC film vapor retarder shall have a maximum moisture vapor transmission of 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance of 150 Beach units, a minimum tensile strength in any direction of 30 lb/inch when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.Polyvinylidene Chloride Vapor Retarder Adhesive TapeRequirements must meet the same as specified for Laminated Film Vapor Retarder above.Vapor Barrier/Weather BarrierThe vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive laminate -white vapor barrier jacket- superior performance (less than 0.0000 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M).Vapor barrier shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 25 flame and 50 smoke requirements; and UV resistant.Minimum burst strength 185 psi in accordance with TAPPI T403 OM.Tensile strength 68 lb/inch width (PSTC-1000).Tape shall be as specified for laminated film vapor barrier above.Vapor Retarder Not RequiredASTM C921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.10, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable.Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.WireSoft annealed ASTM A580/A580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or 18 gauge.Insulation BandsInsulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.SealantsSealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene-butadiene rubber type, or the butyl type of sealants.Sealants shall have a maximum permeance of 0.02 perms based on Procedure B for ASTM E96/E96M, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMSConform insulation materials to Table 1 andminimum insulation thickness as listed in Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.ply with EPA requirements for material with recycled content in accordance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING, paragraph RECYCLED CONTENT.Limit pipe insulation materials to those listed herein and meeting the following requirements:Aboveground Cold Pipeline ( -30 to 60 deg. F)Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications, shall be as follows:Flexible Elastomeric Cellular InsulationClosed-cell, foam- or expanded-rubber materials containing anti-microbial additive, complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Grade 1, Type I or II.Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials.Type II, Grade 1, for sheet materials.Type I and II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin on one or both sides of the insulation, and require an additional exterior vapor retarder covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications.Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM)ASTM C547.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Do not use in applications exposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones1 through 4.Aboveground Hot Pipeline (Above 60 deg. F)Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall meet the following requirements.Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.Mineral FiberASTM C547, Types I, II or III, supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.Flexible Elastomeric Cellular InsulationClosed-cell, foam- or expanded-rubber materials containing anti-microbial additive, complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Grade 1, Type I or II to 220 degrees F service.Type I for tubular materials. Type II for sheet materials.Phenolic InsulationASTM C1126 Type III to 250 degrees F service shall comply with ASTM C795. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMSFactory Applied InsulationProvide factory-applied ASTM C534/C534M Grade 1, Type II, flexible elastomeric closed cell insulation according to manufacturer's recommendations for insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire-retardant vapor barrier[, with identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value and out-of-package R value].Rigid InsulationCalculate the minimum thickness in accordance with ASHRAE 90.2.Blanket InsulationCalculate minimum thickness in accordance with ASHRAE 90.2.Duct Insulation JacketsAll-Purpose JacketProvide insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire- retardant jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by the service.In exposed locations, provide jacket with a white surface suitable for field painting.Metal JacketsAluminum JacketsASTM B209, Temper H14, minimum thickness of 27 gauge ( 0.016 inch), with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface.Provide smooth surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger.Provide corrugated surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger.Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.Stainless Steel JacketsASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M; Type 304, minimum thickness of 33 gauge (0.010 inch), smooth surface with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface.Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing JacketVapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty white or natural).2.5.3Weatherproof Duct InsulationProvide ASTM C534/C534M Grade 1, Type II, flexible elastomeric cellular insulation, and weatherproofing as specified in manufacturer's instruction. Multi-ply, Polymeric Blend Laminate Jacketing:Construction of laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear resistance and an excellent WVT rate.2.6EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMSInsulate equipment and accessories as specified in Tables 5 and 6.In outside locations, provide insulation 1/2 inch thicker than specified. Increase the specified insulation thickness for equipment where necessary toequal the thickness of angles or other structural members to make a smooth, exterior surface.Submit a booklet containing manufacturer's published installation instructions for the insulation systems in coordination with the submitted MICA Insulation Stds plates booklet.Annotate their installation instructions to indicate which product data and which MICA plate are applicable.The instructions must be copyrighted, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation.A booklet is also required by paragraphs titled:Pipe Insulation Systems and Duct Insulation Systems.PART 3EXECUTIONAPPLICATION - GENERALInsulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and equipment.Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers, etc.The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull apart after one hour, shall be replaced.InstallationExcept as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.Insulation materials shall not be applied until [tests] [tests and heat tracing] specified in other sections of this specification are completed.Material such as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation.Insulation shall be kept clean and dry.Insulation shall not be removed from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each workday.Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use.If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will be rejected, and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite.Joints shall be staggered on multi layer insulation.Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces.Insulation, jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance with MICA Insulation Stds plates except where modified herein or on the drawings.FirestoppingWhere pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above grade floors, and fire rated chase walls, the penetration shall be sealed with fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.The protection of ducts at point of passage through firewalls must be in accordance with NFPA 90A and/or NFPA 90B. All other penetrations, such as piping, conduit, and wiring, through firewalls must be protected with a material or system of the same hourly rating that is listed by UL, FM, or a NRTL.Painting and FinishingPainting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular InsulationInstall flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with seams and joints sealed with rubberized contact adhesive.Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 220 degrees F. Stagger seams when applying multiple layers of insulation.Protect insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have vapor barrier weatherproof jacketing with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry and cured.Adhesive ApplicationApply a brush coating of adhesive to both butt ends to be joined and to both slit surfaces to be sealed.Allow the adhesive to set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces.Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled apart one hour after application.Insulation that can be pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced.Adhesive Safety PrecautionsUse natural cross-ventilation, local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general area (mechanical) ventilation to prevent an accumulation of solvent vapors, keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any heavier-than-air solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces.Gloves and spectacle- type safety glasses are recommended in accordance with safe installation practices.WeldingNo welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written approval of the Contracting Officer. The capacitor discharge welding process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct.Pipes/Ducts/Equipment That Require InsulationInsulation is required on all pipes, ducts, or equipment, except for omitted items as specified.PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATIONInstall pipe insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published installation instructions.Pipe InsulationGeneralPipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier, including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise.Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and using a single cut piece to complete a run.Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used.Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following:Pipe used solely for fire protection.Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures.However, fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain, including the trap, insulated where exposed.Sanitary drain lines.Air chambers.Adjacent insulation.ASME stamps.Access plates of fan housings.Cleanouts or handholes.Pipes Passing Through Walls, Roofs, and Floors Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.Provide an aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 ply standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed with factory applied moisture retarder over the insulation wherever penetrations require sealing.Penetrate Interior WallsThe aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed shall extend 2 inches beyond either side of the wall and shall be secured on each end with a band.Penetrating FloorsExtend the aluminum jacket from a point below the backup material to a point10 inches above the floor with one band at the floor and one not more than 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.Penetrating Waterproofed FloorsExtend the aluminum jacket rom below the backup material to a point 2 inches above the flashing with a band 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.Penetrating Exterior WallsContinue the aluminum jacket required for pipe exposed to weather through the sleeve to a point 2 inches beyond the interior surface of the wall.Penetrating RoofsInsulate pipe as required for interior service to a point flush with the top of the flashing and sealed with flashing sealant.Tightly butt the insulation for exterior application to the top of flashing and interior insulation.Extend the exterior aluminum jacket 2 inches down beyond theend of the insulation to form a counter flashing.Seal the flashing and counter flashing underneath with metal jacketing/flashing sealant.Hot Water Pipes Supplying Lavatories or Other Similar Heated ServiceTerminate the insulation on the backside of the finished wall.Protect the insulation termination with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats (if applicable).Extend the coating out onto the insulation 2 inches and seal the end of the insulation.Overlap glass tape seams 1 inch. Caulk the annular space between the pipe and wall penetration with approved fire stop material.Cover the pipe and wall penetration with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate.The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration at least 3/8 inches.Domestic Cold Water Pipes Supplying Lavatories or Other Similar Cooling ServiceTerminate the insulation on the finished side of the wall (i.e., insulation must cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration).Protect the insulation with two coats of weather barrier mastic (breather emulsion type weatherproof mastic impermeable to water and permeable to air) with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch.Extend the mastic out onto the insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation.The annular space between the outer surface of the pipe insulation and caulk the wall penetration with an approved fire stop material having vapor retarder properties.Cover the pipe and wall penetration with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate.The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration by at least 3/8 inches.Pipes Passing Through HangersInsulation, whether hot or cold application, shall be continuous through hangers.All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP-69.Whenever insulation shows signs of being compressed, or when the insulation or jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield, insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches shall be installed, or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load bearing core) can be used.Horizontal Pipes Larger Than 2 Inches at 60 Degrees F and AboveSupported on hangers in accordance with MSS SP-69, and Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.Horizontal Pipes Larger Than 2 Inches and Below 60 Degrees FSupported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield in accordance with MSS SP-69.An insulation insert of cellular glass, prefabricated insulation pipe hangers, or perlite above 80 degrees F shall be installed above each shield.The insert shall cover not less than the bottom 180-degree arc of the pipe.Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield.When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork dowels orblocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the weight of the pipe from crushing the insulation, as an option to installing insulation inserts.The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert.Vertical PipesSupported with either Type 8 or Type 42 riser clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in accordance with MSS SP-69 covering the 360-degree arc of the insulation.An insulation insert of cellular glass or calcium silicate shall be installed between each shield and the pipe.The insert shall cover the 360-degree arc of the pipe.Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield.When insulation inserts are required inaccordance with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the insulation, as an option instead of installing insulation inserts.The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert.The vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported with hangers located in a horizontal section of the pipe.When the pipe riser is longer than 30 feet, the weight of the pipe shall be additionally supported with hangers in the vertical run of the pipe that are directly clamped to the pipe, penetrating the pipe insulation.These hangers shall be insulated and the insulation jacket sealed as indicated herein for anchors in a similar service.InsertsCovered with a jacket material of the same appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket, overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1-1/2 inches, and seal as required for the pipe jacket.The jacket material used to cover inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to ASTM C1136, Type 1, and is allowed to be of a different material than the adjoining insulation material.Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe InsulationFlexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches and less.Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe.On pipes larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe.Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation.Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping.Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation.Type II requires an additional exterior vapor retarder/barrier covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature applications.Pipes in high abuse areas.In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, and mechanical rooms, aluminum or flexible laminate cladding (comprised of elastomeric, plastic or metal foil laminate) laminated self- adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket, - less than 0.0000 permeability; (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed) aluminumjackets shall be utilized.Pipe insulation to the 6 foot level shall be protected.Pipe Insulation Material and ThicknessPipe insulation materials must be as listed in Table 1 and must meet or exceed the requirements of[ ASHRAE 90.1 - IP][ ASHRAE 90.2].TABLE 1Insulation Material for PipingServiceMaterialSpecificationTypeClassVR/VBReq'dChilled Water (Supply & Return, Dual Temperature Piping, 40 F nominal)Cellular GlassASTM C552II2YesFlexible Elastomeric CellularASTM C534/C534MIYes[Mineral Fiber with Wicking Material][Do not use in applications exposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4.][ASTM C547][I][Yes]Heating Hot Water Supply & Return, Heated Oil (Max 250 F)Mineral FiberASTM C547I1NoCalcium SilicateASTM C533INoCellular GlassASTM C552II2NoFaced Phenolic FoamASTM C1126IIIYesPerliteASTM C610NoFlexible Elastomeric CellularASTM C534/C534MI2NoCold Domestic Water Piping, Makeup Water & Drinking Fountain Drain PipingCellular GlassASTM C552II2NoFlexible Elastomeric CellularASTM C534/C534MINoHot Domestic Water Supply & Recirculating Piping (Max 200 F)Mineral FiberASTM C547I1NoCellular GlassASTM C552II2NoFlexible Elastomeric CellularASTM C534/C534MINoFaced Phenolic FoamASTM C1126IIIYesTABLE 1Insulation Material for PipingServiceMaterialSpecificationTypeClassVR/VBReq'dRefrigerant Suction Piping (35 degrees F nominal)Flexible Elastomeric CellularASTM C534/C534MINoCellular GlassASTM C552II1YesCompressed Air Discharge,250 Degrees FCellular GlassASTM C552IINoMineral FiberASTM C547I1NoCalcium SilicateASTM C533INoFaced Phenolic FoamASTM C1126IIIYesPerliteASTM C610NoFlexible Elastomeric CellularASTM C534/C534MI2NoExposed Lavatory Drains, Exposed Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas for Handicapped PersonnelFlexible Elastomeric CellularASTM C534/C534MINoHorizontal Roof Drain Leaders (Including Underside of Roof Drain Fittings)Flexible Elastomeric CellularASTM C534/C534MINoFaced Phenolic FoamASTM C1126IIIYesCellular GlassASTM C552IIIYesCondensate Drain Located Inside BuildingCellular GlassASTM C552II2NoFlexible Elastomeric CellularASTM C534/C534MINoMedium Temperature Hot Water, Steam and Condensate (251 to 350 Degrees F)Mineral FiberASTM C547I1NoCalcium SilicateASTM C533INoCellular GlassASTM C552I or IINoPerliteASTM C610NoTABLE 1Insulation Material for PipingServiceMaterialSpecificationTypeClassVR/VBReq'dFlexible Elastomeric CellularASTM C534/C534MI2NoFlexible Elastomeric CellularASTM C534/C534MINoNote: VR/VB = Vapor Retarder/Vapor BarrierTABLE 2Piping Insulation Thickness (inch)Do not use integral wicking material inChilled water applications exposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4.ServiceMaterialTube And Pipe Size (inch)<11-<1.51.5-<44-<8> or = >8Chilled Water (Supply & Return, 40 Degrees F nominal)]Cellular Glass1.5222.53Mineral Fiber with Wicking Material11.51.522Flexible Elastomeric Cellular111N/AN/AChilled Water (Supply & Return, , 40 Degrees F nominal)Cellular Glass1.51.51.51.52Flexible Elastomeric Cellular111N/AN/AMineral Fiber with Wicking Material11.51.522Heating Hot Water Supply & Return,(Max 250 F)Mineral Fiber1.51.5222Calcium Silicate2.52.5333Cellular Glass22.5333Perlite2.52.5333Flexible Elastomeric Cellular111N/AN/ACold Domestic Water Piping, Makeup Water & Drinking Fountain Drain PipingCellular Glass1.51.51.51.51.5Flexible Elastomeric Cellular111N/AN/AHot Domestic Water Supply & Recirculating Piping (Max 200 F)Mineral Fiber1111.51.5Cellular Glass1.51.51.522Flexible Elastomeric Cellular111N/AN/ARefrigerant Suction Piping (35 degrees F nominal)Flexible Elastomeric Cellular111N/AN/ACellular Glass1.51.51.51.51.5Compressed Air Discharge, 201 to 250 Degrees FMineral Fiber1.51.52221.5*2*2.5*3*3.5*Calcium Silicate2.53444.5Cellular Glass22.5333Perlite2.53444.5Flexible Elastomeric Cellular111N/AN/AExposed Lavatory Drains, Exposed Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas for Handicapped PersonnelFlexible Elastomeric Cellular0.50.50.50.50.5Horizontal Roof Drain Leaders (Including Underside of Roof Drain Fittings)Cellular Glass1.51.51.51.51.5Flexible Elastomeric Cellular111N/AN/AFaced Phenolic Foam11111Condensate Drain Located Inside BuildingCellular Glass1.51.51.51.51.5Flexible Elastomeric Cellular111N/AN/AFlexible Elastomeric Cellular11N/AN/AN/AAboveground Cold PipelinesThe following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted.This includes but is not limited to the following:Make-up water.Horizontal and vertical portions of interior roof drains.Refrigerant suction lines.Chilled water.Air conditioner condensate drains.g.Exposed lavatory drains and domestic water lines serving plumbing fixtures for handicap persons.Insulation Material and ThicknessInsulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.Factory or Field applied JacketInsulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder jacket/vapor barrier or field applied seal welded PVC jacket or greater than3 ply laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, sliver, white, black and embossed for use with Mineral Fiber, Cellular Glass, and Phenolic Foam Insulated Pipe.Insulation inside the building, to be protected with an aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, Embossed Silver, White & Black, shall have the insulation and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified herein.The aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed)product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed silver, White & Black, shall be installed as specified for piping exposed to weather, except sealing of the laps of the aluminum jacket is not required.In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standardgrade, embossed silver, white & black, shall be provided for pipe insulation to the 6 ft level.Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold PipeApply insulation to the pipe with tight butt joints.Seal all butted joints and ends with joint sealant and seal with a vapor retarder coating, greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape.Longitudinal Laps of the Jacket MaterialOverlap not less than 1-1/2 inches.Provide butt strips 3 inches wide for circumferential joints.Laps and Butt StripsSecure with adhesive and staple on 4 inch centers if not factory self- sealing.If staples are used, seal in accordance with paragraph STAPLES below.Note that staples are not required with cellular glass systems.Factory Self-Sealing Lap SystemsMay be used when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation.Install the lap system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.Use a stapler only if specifically recommended by the manufacturer.Where gaps occur, replace the section or repair the gap by applying adhesive under the lap and then stapling.StaplesCoat all staples, including those used to repair factory self-seal lap systems, with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.Coat all seams, except those on factory self-seal systems, with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.Breaks and Punctures in the Jacket MaterialPatch by wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and secure it with adhesive, staple, and coat with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.Extend the patch not less than 1-1/2 inches past the break.Penetrations Such as ThermometersFill the voids in the insulation and seal with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe InsulationInstall by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping or tubing.Alternately, whenever possible slide un-slit sections over the open ends of piping or tubing.Secure all seams and butt joints and seal with adhesive.When using self seal products only the butt joints shall besecured with adhesive.Push insulation on the pipe, never pulled. Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints.Clean cut all edges.Rough or jagged edges of the insulation are not be permitted.Use proper tools such as sharp knives.Do not stretch Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation around the pipe when used on pipe larger than 6 inches.On pipes larger than 12 inches, adhere sheet insulation directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe.Insulation for Fittings and AccessoriesPipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories.The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and accessories and shall conform to MICA plates except as modified herein:5 for anchors; 10, 11, and 13 for fittings; 14 for valves; and 17 for flanges and unions.Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity.Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used.If nesting size insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter.Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow'.Submit a booklet containing completed MICA Insulation Stds plates detailing each insulating system for each pipe, duct, or equipment insulating system, after approval of materials and prior to applying insulation.The MICA plates shall detail the materials to be installed and the specific insulation application.Submit all MICA plates required showing the entire insulating system, including plates required to show insulation penetrations, vessel bottom and top heads, legs, and skirt insulation as applicable.The MICA plates shall present all variations of insulation systems including locations, materials, vaporproofing, jackets and insulation accessories.If the Contractor elects to submit detailed drawings instead of edited MICA Plates, the detail drawings shall be technically equivalent to the edited MICA Plate submittal.Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges, unions, valves, anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations, seams, joints and insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch, applied with glass tape embedded between coats.Tape seams shall overlap 1 inch.The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe insulation 2 inches.Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and with a2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats.Where fitting insulation butts to pipe insulation, the joints shall be sealed with a vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the jacket of the pipe insulation.Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches from the insulation surface.Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers, and check valves.Optional PVC Fitting CoversAt the option of the Contractor, premolded, one or two piece PVC fitting covers may be used in lieu of the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape. Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the fitting covers for elbows.Insulation segments shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity.The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder tape, adhesive, seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers.Seams in the cover, and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall be sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a continuous vapor seal.Aboveground Hot PipelinesGeneral RequirementsAll hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F, except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted, shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2.This includes but is not limited to the following:Domestic hot water supply & re-circulating pressed air discharge.d.Hot water heating.Insulation shall be covered, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, with a factory applied Type I jacket or field applied aluminum where required or seal welded PVC.Insulation for Fittings and AccessoriesPipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories.The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant.Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers, check valves and other components that would otherwise be hidden from view by the insulation.Precut or PreformedPlace precut or preformed insulation around all fittings and accessories. Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity.Rigid PreformedWhere precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required.Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter.Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow".Piping Exposed to WeatherPiping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for the applicable service inside the building.After this procedure, a laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability (greater than3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed aluminum jacket or PVC jacket shall be applied.PVC jacketing requires no factory-applied jacket beneath it, however an all service jacket shall be applied if factory applied jacketing is not furnished.Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION in PART 3.Aluminum JacketThe jacket for hot piping may be factory applied.The jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and shall be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers.Longitudinal joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock positions.Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall be sealed with metal jacketing/flashing sealant while overlapping to prevent moisture penetration.Where jacketing on piping 60 degrees F and below abuts an un- insulated surface, joints shall be caulked to prevent moisture penetration. Joints on piping above 60 degrees F shall be sealed with a moisture retarder.Insulation for FittingsFlanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and finished as specified for the applicable service.Two coats of breather emulsion type weatherproof mastic (impermeable to water, permeable to air) recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape embedded between coats.Tape overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch and the adjoining aluminum jacket not less than 2 inches.Factory preformed aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above.Molded PVC fitting covers shall be provided when PVC jackets are used for straight runs of pipe.PVC fitting covers shall have adhesive welded joints and shall be weatherproof laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed, and UV resistant.PVC JacketPVC jacket shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded weather tight with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.Installation shall include provision for thermal expansion.DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATIONInstall duct insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published installation instructions.Duct insulation minimum thickness and insulation level must be as listed in Table 3 and must meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.2.Except for oven hood exhaust duct insulation, corner angles shall be installed on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacket.Air conditioned spaces shall be defined as those spaces directly supplied with cooled conditioned air (or provided with a cooling device such as a fan-coil unit) and heated conditioned air (or provided with a heating device such as a unit heater, radiator or convector).Duct Insulation Minimum ThicknessDuct insulation minimum thickness in accordance with Table 4.Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)Cold Air Ducts2.0Relief Ducts1.5Fresh Air Intake Ducts1.5Warm Air Ducts2.0Relief Ducts1.5Fresh Air Intake Ducts1.5Insulation and Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier for Cold Air DuctInsulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall be provided for the following cold air ducts and associated equipment.Supply ducts.Return air ducts.Relief ducts.Flexible run-outs (field-insulated).Plenums.Duct-mounted coil casings.Coil headers and return bends.Coil casings.Fresh air intake ducts.Filter boxes.Mixing boxes (field-insulated).Supply fans (field-insulated).Site-erected air conditioner casings.Ducts exposed to bustion air intake ducts.Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed, minimum density 3/4 pcf, and rigid type where exposed, minimum density 3 pcf.Insulation for both concealed or exposed round/oval ducts shall be flexible type, minimum density 3/4 pcf or a semi rigid board, minimum density 3 pcf, formed or fabricated to a tight fit, edges beveled and joints tightly butted and staggered.Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided with either a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type I jacket or a field applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket coating finish as specified, the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch.Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied Type I or II vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket.Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall penetrations.Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers, shall be continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate formation.Duct insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall cover the collar, neck, and any un-insulated surfaces of diffusers, registers and grills.Vapor retarder/vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation.Sheet Metal Duct shall be sealed in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.Installation on Concealed DuctFor rectangular, oval or round ducts, flexible insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.For rectangular and oval ducts,24 inches and larger insulation shall be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners.Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes.Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners (self stick pins) where used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive. Care shall be taken to ensure vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket joints overlap 2 inches.The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified.Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and trapeze-type duct hangers.Where mechanical fasteners are used, self-locking washers shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary to ensure a secure seal.Staples, tape and seams shall be coated with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the same material as the vapor retarder jacket.The patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration in all directions and shall be secured with tape and staples.Staples and tape joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating..The coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches.Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be extended under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket.Installation on Exposed Duct WorkFor rectangular ducts, rigid insulation shall be secured to the duct by mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not more than 12 inches apart and not more than 3 inches from the edges of the insulation joints.A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger.One row shall be provided for each side of duct less than 12 inches.Mechanical fasteners shall be as corrosion resistant as G60 coated galvanized steel, and shall indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall.Form duct insulation with minimum jacket seams.Fasten each piece of rigid insulation to the duct using mechanical fasteners.When the height of projections is less than the insulation thickness, insulation shall be brought up to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not be carried over.Vapor retarder/barrier jacket shall be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections.When height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried over.Apply insulation with joints tightly butted.Neatly bevel insulation around name plates and access plates and doors.Impale insulation on the fasteners; self-locking washers shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.Seal joints in the insulation jacket with a 4 inch wide strip of tape. Seal taped seams with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.Breaks and ribs or standing seam penetrations in the jacket material shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration and shall be secured with tape and stapled.Staples and joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, the voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetrations sealed with a flashing sealant.Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish.The coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with factory Type I jacket insulation with minimum density of 3/4 pcf, attached as in accordance with MICA standards.Insulation for Warm Air DuctInsulation and vapor barrier shall be provided for the following warm air ducts and associated equipment:.Supply ducts.Return air ducts.Relief air ductsFlexible run-outs (field insulated).Plenums.Duct-mounted coil casings.Coil-headers and return bends.Coil casings.Fresh air intake ducts.Filter boxes.Mixing boxes.Supply fans.Site-erected air conditioner casings.Ducts exposed to weather.Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed, and rigid type where exposed.Insulation on exposed ducts shall be provided with a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type II jacket, or finished with adhesive finish.Flexible type insulation shall be used for round ducts, with a factory-applied Type II jacket.Insulation on concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied Type II jacket.Adhesive finish where indicated to be used shall be accomplished by applying two coats of adhesive with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats.The total dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch.Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings.Duct insulation shall terminate at fire dampers and flexible connections.Installation on Concealed DuctFor rectangular, oval and round ducts, insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.For rectangular and oval ducts 24 inches and larger, insulation shall be secured to the bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more than 18 inches from duct corner.For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes.Fasteners shall be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more than 18 inches from duct corners.The insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners where used. The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified.Insulation shall be carried over standing seams andtrapeze-type hangers.Self-locking washers shall be installed where mechanical fasteners are used and the pin trimmed and bent over.Insulation jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at joints and the lap shall be secured and stapled on 4 inch centers.Installation on Exposed DuctFor rectangular ducts, the rigid insulation shall be secured to the duct by the use of mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not more than 16 inches apart and not more than 6 inches from the edges of the insulation joints.A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger and a minimum of one row for each side of duct less than 12 inches.Duct insulation with factory-applied jacket shall be formed with minimum jacket seams, and each piece of rigid insulation shall befastened to the duct using mechanical fasteners.When the height of projection is less than the insulation thickness, insulation shall be brought up to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not be carried over the projection.Jacket shall be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections.Where the height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried over the projection.Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners; self-locking washers shall be installed and pin trimmed and bent over.Joints on jacketed insulation shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide strip of tape and brushed with vapor retarder coating.Breaks and penetrations in the jacket material shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the jacket.Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration and shall be secured with adhesive and stapled.Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed with tape and brushed with vapor retarder coating.Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with factory Type I jacket insulation, minimum density of 3/4 pcf attached by staples spaced not more than 16 inches and not more than 6 inches from the degrees of joints.Joints shall be sealed in accordance with item "d." above.Duct Test HolesAfter duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable section of this specification for the type of duct insulation to be repaired.Duct Exposed to WeatherInstallationDucts exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished as specified for the applicable service for exposed duct inside the building.After the above is accomplished, the insulation shall then be further finished as detailed in the following subparagraphs.Round DuctLaminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - Less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply, heavy duty, white and natural) membrane shall be applied overlapping material by 3 inches no bands or caulking needed - see manufacturer's recommended installation instructions.Aluminum jacket with factory applied moisture retarder shall be applied with the joints lapped not less than 3 inches and secured with bands located at circumferential laps and at not more than 12 inch intervals throughout.Horizontal joints shall lap down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock position.Joints shall be sealed with metal jacketing sealant to prevent moisturepenetration.Where jacketing abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall be sealed with metal jacketing sealant.FittingsFittings and other irregular shapes shall be finished as specified for rectangular ducts.Rectangular DuctsTwo coats of weather barrier mastic reinforced with fabric or mesh for outdoor application shall be applied to the entire surface.Each coat of weatherproof mastic shall be 1/16 inch minimum thickness.The exterior shall be a metal jacketing applied for mechanical abuse and weather protection, and secured with screws or vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket less than 0.0000 permeability greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black, and embossed or greater than 8 ply, heavy duty white and natural. Membrane shall be applied overlapping material by 3 inches.No bands or caulking needed-see manufacturing recommend installation instructions.EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATIONInstall equipment insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published installation instructions.GeneralRemovable insulation sections shall be provided to cover parts of equipment that must be opened periodically for maintenance including vessel covers, fasteners, flanges and accessories.Equipment insulation shall be omitted on the following:Hand-holes.Boiler manholes.Cleanouts.ASME stamps.Manufacturer's nameplates.Duct Test/Balance Test Holes.Insulation for Cold EquipmentCold equipment below 60 degrees F: Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media below 60 degrees F including the following:Pumps.Refrigeration equipment parts that are not factory insulated.Drip pans under chilled equipment.Cold water storage tanks.Cold and chilled water pumps.Pneumatic water tanks.Air handling equipment parts that are not factory insulated.Expansion and air separation tanks.Insulation TypeInsulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered.Material and thicknesses shall be as shown in Table 5:TABLE 5Insulation Thickness for Cold Equipment (inches)Equipment handling media at indicated temperatureMaterialThickness (inches)35 to 60 degrees FCellular Glass1.5Flexible Elastomeric Cellular11 to 34 degrees FCellular Glass3Flexible Elastomeric Cellular1.5Minus 30 to 0 degrees FCellular Glass3.5Flexible Elastomeric Cellular1.75Pump InsulationInsulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing.The box shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed.Joints between sides and between sides and bottom shall be joined by adhesive with lap strips for rigid mineral fiber and contact adhesive for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation.The box shall conform to the requirements of MICA Insulation Stds plate No. 49 when using flexible elastomeric cellular insulation.Joints between top cover and sides shall fit tightlyforming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover, thus making the top cover removable.Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.Upon completion of installation of the insulation, including removable sections, two coats of vapor retarder coating shall be applied with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats.The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch.A parting line shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation coating.Flashing sealant shall be applied to parting line, between equipment and removable section insulation, and at all penetrations.Other EquipmentInsulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment.To ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not more than 12 inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered with contact adhesive.Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands with suitable corner angles.Cellular glass shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant, and sealed with a vapor retarder coating.Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable.Removable section joints shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap type joint.The entire surface of the removable section shall be finished by applying two coats of vapor retarder coating with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats.The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch.Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.Insulation on equipment with ribs shall be applied over 6 by 6 inches by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place, or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment over the ribs.Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks and 2 by 2 inches washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place on 12 inch centers.Vapor Retarder/Vapor BarrierUpon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be caulked.Two coats of vapor retarder coating or vapor barrier jacket shall be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of open mesh synthetic fabric embedded between the coats.The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch.Flashing sealant or vapor barrier tape shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section insulation.Insulation for Hot EquipmentInsulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media above 60 degrees F including the following:Heat exchangers.Hot water generators.Water heaters.Pumps handling media above 130 degrees F.Hot water storage tanks.Air separation tanks.InsulationInsulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered.Shell and tube-type heat exchangers shall be insulated for the temperature of the shell medium.Insulation thickness for hot equipment shall be determined using Table 6:TABLE 6Insulation Thickness for Hot Equipment (inches)Equipment handling steam or media at indicated pressure or temperature limitMaterialThickness (inches)15 psig or 250 degrees FRigid Mineral Fiber2Flexible Mineral Fiber2Calcium Silicate/Perlite4Cellular Glass3Faced Phenolic Foam1.5Flexible Elastomeric Cellular (<200 F)1200psig or 400 degrees FRigid Mineral Fiber3Flexible Mineral Fiber3Calcium Silicate/Perlite4TABLE 6Insulation Thickness for Hot Equipment (inches)Equipment handling steam or media at indicated pressure or temperature limitMaterialThickness (inches)Cellular Glass4600 degrees FRigid Mineral Fiber5Flexible Mineral Fiber6Calcium Silicate/Perlite6Cellular Glass6600 degrees F:Thickness necessary to limit the external temperature of the insulation to 120 F.Heat transfer calculations shall be submitted to substantiate insulation and thickness selection.Insulation of Boiler Stack and Diesel Engine Exhaust PipeInside mechanical Room, bevel insulation neatly around openings and provide sheet metal insulation stop strips around such openings.Apply a skim coat of hydraulic setting cement directly to insulation.Apply a flooding coat of adhesive over hydraulic setting cement, and while still wet, press a layer of glass cloth or tape into adhesive and seal laps and edges with adhesive.Coat glass cloth with adhesive.When dry, apply a finish coat of adhesive at can-consistency so that when dry no glass weave shall be observed.Provide metal jackets for [stacks] [and] [exhaust pipes] that are located above finished floor and spaces outside [boiler house] [mechanical room].Apply metal jackets directly over insulation and secure with 3/4 inch wide metal bands spaced on 18 inch centers.Do not insulate name plates.Insulation type and thickness shall be in accordance with the following Table 7.TABLE 7Insulation and Thickness forBoiler Stack and Diesel Engine Exhaust PipeService & Surface Temperature Range (Degrees F)MaterialOutside Diameter (Inches)0.25 - 1.251 - 1.673.5-56 - 10>or=11-36Boiler Stack (Up to 400 degrees F)Mineral FiberASTM C585 Class B-3,ASTM C547 Class 1, or ASTM C612 Class 1N/AN/A33.54Calcium Silicate ASTM C533, Type 1N/AN/A33.54Cellular Glass ASTM C552, Type II1.51.51.522.5Boiler Stack (401 to 600 degrees F)Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 Class 2,ASTM C592 Class 1, or ASTM C612 Class 3N/AN/A445Calcium SilicateASTM C533, Type I or IIN/AN/A444Mineral Fiber/CellularGlassComposite:Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 Class 2,ASTM C592 Class 1, or ASTM C612 Class 311112Cellular Glass ASTM C552, Type II22222Boiler Stack (601 to 800 degrees F)Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 Class 3,ASTM C592 Class 1, or ASTM C612 Class 3N/AN/A446Calcium SilicateASTM C533, Type I or IIN/AN/A446TABLE 7Insulation and Thickness forBoiler Stack and Diesel Engine Exhaust PipeService & Surface Temperature Range (Degrees F)MaterialOutside Diameter (Inches)0.25 - 1.251 - 1.673.5-56 - 10> or = 11 - 36Mineral Fiber/Cellular Glass Composite:Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 Class 2,ASTM C592 Class 1, or ASTM C612 Class 322233Cellular Glass ASTM C552, Type II22222Diesel Engine Exhaust (Up to 700 degrees F)Calcium SilicateASTM C533, Type I or II33.5444Cellular Glass ASTM C552, Type II2.5*3.544.56Insulation of PumpsInsulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing.The box shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed.Bottom and sides shall be banded to form a rigid housing that does not rest on the pump.Joints between top cover and sides shall fit tightly.The top cover shall have a joint forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover, making the top cover removable.Two coats of Class I adhesive shall be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats.A parting line shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation coating.The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch.Caulking shall be applied to parting line of the removable sections and penetrations.Other EquipmentInsulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment.To ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not greater than 12 inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered.Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands with suitable corner angles.On high vibration equipment, cellular glass insulation shall be set in a coating of bedding compound as recommended by the manufacturer, and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound.Mineral fiber joints shall be filled with finishing cement.Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable.The removable section joint shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap type joint.Entire surface of the removable section shall be finished as specified.Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.On equipment with ribs, such as boiler flue gas connection, draft fans, and fly ash or soot collectors, insulation shall be applied over 6 by 6 inch by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place, or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment over the ribs.Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks and 2 by 2 inch washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place on 12 inch (maximum) centers.On equipment handling media above 600 degrees F, insulation shall be applied in two or more layers with joints staggered.Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be caulked.Two coats of adhesive shall be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats.The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch.Caulking shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section insulation.Equipment Exposed to WeatherInstallationEquipment exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished in accordance with the requirements for ducts exposed to weather in paragraph DUCT INSULATION INSTALLATION.Optional PanelsAt the option of the Contractor, prefabricated metal insulation panels may be used in lieu of the insulation and finish previously specified.Thermal performance shall be equal to or better than that specified for field applied insulation.Panels shall be the standard catalog product of amanufacturer of metal insulation panels.Fastenings, flashing, and support system shall conform to published recommendations of the manufacturer for weatherproof installation and shall prevent moisture from entering the insulation.Panels shall be designed to accommodate thermal expansion and to support a 250 pound walking load without permanent deformation or permanent damage to the insulation.Exterior metal cover sheet shall be aluminum and exposed fastenings shall be stainless steel or aluminum.-- End of Section --SECTION 230900 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVACPART 1 – GENERALSCOPE OF WORKThe Energy Management Control System/Building Automation System(EMCS/BAS) shall use an open architecture and fully support a multi-vendor environment. The EMCS/BAS system shall support BACnet communication protocol standards and shall have the capability to integrate third- party BACnet IP and MSTP devices and applications. The system shall be designed for use on the Air Force CE-COINE network using industry standard technology compatible with the owner provided network. The system must currently have the Authority to Operate (ATO) on the Keesler AFB CE-COINE. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls-Metasys.The Building Automation System (BAS) contractor shall furnish and install a building automation system, incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and control of the HVAC Systems as herein specified. The control system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of DDC controllers and a web- based operator interface. Depict each mechanical system and building floor plan by a point-and- click graphic.The system shall directly control HVAC equipment as specified in the contract documents unless other wise noted. The system shall use the BACnet protocol for communication between the vendor specific server and all field controllers. Schedules, setpoints, trends, and alarms shall be BACnet objects.All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed specially for this project. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use for at least ten years.BAS contractor shall be responsible for all BAS and Temperature Control low voltage control system wiring for a complete and operable system. All wiring shall be done in accordance with all local and national codes.The system installed shall be fully capable of interfacing to a future enterprise-wide BAS system without the need for any hardware or software additions or without any modifications to the programming installed under this contract. All read/write data including, but not limited to, setpoints, schedules, setpoints, alarm shall be available and addresses deliverable via a standard BACnet auto-discovery.2WORK BY OTHERSMechanical contractor installs all wells, valves, taps, dampers, flow stations, etc. furnished by BAS contractor.Electrical Contractor provides:120V power to all BAS and/or Temperature control panels including 120V circuits to the VAV terminal unit controllers.Wiring of all power feeds through all disconnect starters to electrical motor.Wiring of any remote start/stop switches and manual or automatic motor speed control devices not furnished by BAS contractorDDC Terminal Unit Controllers (VAV Controllers) shall be factory installed by the equipment or DDC controls manufacturer.RELATED WORKThe General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements are part of this specification and shall be utilized in conjunction with this section as part of the contract documents and any subcontracts issued thereunder.The following sections constitute related work:Division 01000General and Special ConditionsDivision 23000MechanicalDivision 24000ElectricalQUALITY ASSURANCEThe BAS system shall be designed, installed, commissioned andserviced by factory trained personnel. BAS contractor shall have an in-place support facility within 60 miles of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and necessary test and diagnostic equipment.The Bidder shall be regularly engaged in the designing, programming, installation and maintenance of BMS systems and shall have a minimum of five (5) years of demonstrated technical expertise and experience with B.M.S. systems similar in size and complexity to this project. The Bidder shall have a minimum 5 year relationship as the local installer for the Product Brand and shall have completed factory training and certification.5SYSTEM PERFORMANCEPerformance Standards. System shall conform to the following minimum standards over network connections. Systems shall be tested using manufacturer's recommended hardware and software for operator workstation (server and browser for web-based systems)Graphic Display. A graphic with 25 dynamic points shall display with current data within 5 sec.Graphic Refresh. A graphic with 25 dynamic points shall update with current data within 5 sec. and shall automatically refresh every 15 sec.Configuration and Tuning Screens. Screens used for configuring, calibrating, or tuning points, PID loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh within 6 sec.Object Command. Devices shall react to command of a binary object within 2 sec. Devices shall begin reacting to command of an analog object within 2 sec.Alarm Response Time. An object that goes into alarm shall be annunciated at the workstation within 10 sec.Performance. Programmable controllers shall be able to completely execute DDC PID control loops at a frequency adjustable down to once per sec. Select execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.6SUBMITTALSProduct Submittal Requirements: Meet requirements of the General Conditions on Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. Provide six copies of shop drawings and other submittals on hardware, software, and equipment to be installed or furnished. Begin no work until submittals have been approved for conformity with design intent. Provide drawings as AutoCAD 2006 (or newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format: .DWG,.DXF, .VSD, or comparable) and 6 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17" paper. Submittal approval does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to supply sufficient quantities to complete work. Provide submittals within 10 weeks of contract award on the following:Complete bill of materials for DDC System Hardware indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number, and relevant technical data of equipment to be used.Manufacturer's description and technical data such as performance curves, product specifications, and installation and maintenance instructions for all other items furnished by Control Contractor.Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel. Show termination numbers.Floor plan schematic diagrams indicating field sensor and controller locations.Riser diagrams showing control network layout, communication protocol, and wire types.Schematic diagrams of control, communication, and power wiring for central system installation. Show interface wiring to control system.Riser diagrams showing control network layout, communication protocol, and wire types.Schematic diagram of each controlled system. Label control points with point names. Graphically show locations of control elements.Instrumentation list (Bill of Materials) for each controlled system. List each control system element in a table. Show element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data sheet plete description of control system operation including sequences of operation. Include and reference schematic diagram of controlled system. List I/O points and software points specified in Section 230900 Sequences of Operation. Indicate alarmed and trended points.Project Record Documents. Submit three copies of record (as-built) documents upon completion of installation for approval prior to final completion. Submittal shall consist of: Project Record Drawings. As-built versions of submittal shop drawings provided as AutoCAD 2006 (or newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format: .DWG,.DXF, .VSD, or comparable) and 6 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17" paper.Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completed versions of reports, checklists, and trend logs used to meet requirements of Section 230900 Control System Demonstration and Acceptance.Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. Printed, electronic, or online help documentation of the following:As-built versions of submittal product data.Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors and service representatives for equipment and control systems.Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems: logging on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing setpoints and variables.Programming manual or set of manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use.Engineering, installation, and maintenance manual or set of manuals that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; how to perform preventive maintenance and calibration; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.Graphic files, programs, and database on magnetic or optical plete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and plete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems, custom programming language, operator workstation or web server software, and graphics software.Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and systems.Training Materials: Provide course outline and materials for each class at least two weeks before first class. Training shall be furnished via instructor-led sessions, computer-based training, or web-based training.WARRANTYWarrant labor and for specified control system free from defects for a period of 1 year after final acceptance. Warrant materials for specified control system free from defects for a period of 3 years after final acceptance. Control system failures during warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to Owner. Respond during normal business hours within 24 hours of Owner's warranty service requestWork shall have a single warranty date, even if Owner receives beneficial use due to early system start-up. If specified work is split into multiple contracts or a multi-phase contract, each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start date and period.PART 2 - PRODUCTSNETWORKING COMMUNICATIONSThe design of the BAS shall network includes one operator’s workstation and all the stand-alone DDC Controllers required to meet the Sequences of Operation at the end of this specification. The network architecture shall consist of one IP level for a base-wide (Management Level Network) Ethernet network and one controller level high speed DDC Controller level network. System shall have the capability to communicate with a BACnet network via BACnet/IP (according to Annex J). A PICS must be provided describing the BACnet, ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, implementationController Level Network: All operator devices shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the controller level network. No hardware or software limits shall be imposed on the number of devices with global access to the network data at any time.Controllers with real-time clocks shall use the BACnet Time Synchronization service. System shall automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an operator-designated controller via the internetwork. If applicable, system shall automatically adjust for daylight saving and standard time.DDC CONTROLLERS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENTDDC Controllers for Air Handling Units, Boilers, Pumps and Chillers shall be a stand-alone, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors including processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output termination points. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of the sequences of operation in thisspecification. Each piece of mechanical equipment, chiller, boiler and Air Handling Units shall each have a standalone DDC controller. These controllers shall also have the following:Local LED status indication for each digital input and output for constant, up-to-date local verification of all point conditions.Local communication access port for connection of a local portable operator’s device. One set of all required cabling shall be included and turned over to the Owner/Operator for connection of a standard laptop type computer and any required software to perform any and all operator functions.DDC Controllers for VAV/CAV terminal units, fan coil units and exhaust fans shall be stand- alone, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors including processors, communication controllers, input/output termination points and integral transducer to measure supply air flow and integral damper actuator with real-time indication of damper position.Each DDC Controller shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace hardware.Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC Controller shall provide both local and remote indication of a detected failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication.Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support any volatile memory for a minimum of 90 days.Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC Controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention.Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC Controller via the local port or from a network operator’s workstation.Provide a separate DDC Controller for each AHU or other HVAC system. It is intended that each unique system be provided with its own point resident DDC Controller.DDC CONTROLLERS RESIDENT SOFTWARE FEATURESGeneral:The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of DDC Controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.All points shall be identified by up to 32 character point name and 32 character point descriptor. The same names shall be used at the PC workstation.All digital points shall have user defined two-state status indication such as summer/winter, alarm/normal or on/off.Control Software Description:The DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:Two-position controlProportional controlProportional plus integral controlProportional, integral, plus derivative controlDDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers shall provide the following energy management routines for the purpose of optimizing energy consumption while maintaining occupant comfort.Start-Stop Time Optimization (SSTO) shall automatically be coordinated with event scheduling. The SSTO program shall start HVAC equipment at the latest possible time that will allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone condition by time of occupancy. The SSTO program shall also shut down HVAC equipment at the earliest possible time before the end of the occupancy period, and still maintain desired comfort conditions.The SSTO program shall operate in both the heating and cooling seasons.It shall be possible to apply the SSTO program to individual fan systems.The SSTO program shall operate on both outside weather conditions as well as inside zone conditions and empirical factors.The SSTO program shall meet the local code requirements for minimum outside air while the building is occupied.Event Scheduling: Provide a comprehensive menu driven program to automatically start and stop designated points or groups of points according to a stored time.It shall be possible to individually command a point or group of points.For points assigned to one common load group, it shall be possible to assign variable time delays between each successive start or stop within that group.The operator shall be able to define the following information:Time, dayCommands such as on, off, auto, and so forth.Time delays between successive commands.There shall be provisions for manual overriding of each schedule by an appropriate operator.It shall be possible to schedule events up to one year in advance.Scheduling shall be calendar based.Holidays shall allow for different schedules.Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover: The system shall provide automatic time adjustment for switching to/from Daylight Savings Time.Night setback control: The system shall provide the ability to automatically adjust setpoints for night control.DDC Controllers shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines. A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers on the network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC and HVAC Mechanical Equipment Controllers on the network. Database shall support 32 character, English language point names, structured for searching and logsA variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or automatically sample, store and display system data for points as specified in the I/O summary.Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point, regardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored in each DDC Controllers point group. Two methods of collection shall be allowed: either by a pre-defined time interval or upon a pre-defined change of value. Sample intervals of l minute to 7 days shall be provided. Each DDC Controller shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 299 data samples. All trend data shall be available for transfer to a Workstation without manual intervention.DDC Controllers shall also provide high resolution sampling capability for verification of control loop performance.DDC Controllers shall be capable of automatically accumulating and storing run-time hours for digital input and output points and automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals for analog and digital pulse input type points, as specified in the point I/O schedule.The peer to peer network shall allow the DDC Controllers to access any data from or send control commands directly to any other DDC Controller or combination of controllers on the network without dependence upon a central or intermediate processing device.WORKSTATION OPERATOR INTERFACEBasic Interface DescriptionThe operator interface software shall be graphically based and shall include at least one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone, graphics for each chilled water and hot water system, and graphics that summarize conditions on each floor of each building included in this contract. Indicate thermal comfort on floor plan summary graphics using dynamic colors to represent zone temperature relative to zone setpoint. The software shall provide, as a minimum, the following functionality:Real-time graphical viewing and control of the BAS environment.Reporting of user defined equipment values, trend values, checkout commissioning settings and notes. Any reports initiated within the system shall automatically be delivered to a text file, .pdf file or Excel formatted file type.Scheduling and override of building operationsCollection and analysis of historical dataPoint database editing, storage and downloading of controller databases.Monitor and real-time reporting of Environmental Index where all zones conditions are monitored and reported as a percentage based upon the amount of time within the current setpoint during occupied hours.Alarm reporting, routing, messaging, and acknowledgment“Navigation tree,” for accessing all system components and status.Definition and construction of dynamic color graphic displays.Online, context-sensitive help, including an index, glossary of terms, and the capability to search help via keyword or phrase.On-screen access to User Documentation, via online help or PDF-format electronic file.Display dynamic trend data graphical plot. Must be able to run multiple plots simultaneously and must be able to plot both real-time and historical trend data.Program editingTransfer trend data to 3rd party spreadsheet softwareScheduling reportsOperator Activity LogOperator-specific password access protection shall be provided to allow the administrator/manager to limit users’ workstation control, display and data base manipulation capabilities as deemed appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. Operator privileges shall "follow" the operator to any workstation logged onto (up to 999 user accounts shall be supported).The workstation software shall also include an application to track the actions of each individual operator, such as alarm acknowledgement, point commanding, schedule overriding, database editing, and logon/logoff.Dynamic Color Graphics application shall include the following:Must include graphic editing and modifying capabilitiesA library of standard control application graphics and symbols must be includedMust be able to command points directly off graphics applicationGraphic display shall include the ability to depict real-time point values dynamically with animation, picture/frame control, symbol association, or dynamic informational text-blocksNavigation through various graphic screens shall be optionally achieved through a hierarchical “tree” structureGraphics viewing shall include zoom capabilitiesReports shall be generated on demand, and directed to printers or a file. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports:A general listing of all or selected points in the networkList of all points currently in alarmList of all points currently in override statusList of all points currently locked on or offUser activity reportScheduling and overrideProvide a calendar type format for simplification of time and date scheduling and overrides of building operations. Provide override access through menu selection, graphical mouse action or function key. Provide the following capabilities as a minimum:Weekly schedulesZone schedulesEvent schedules – an event consists of logical combinations of equipment and/or zonesAbility to schedule for a minimum of up to 365 days in advance in order to accommodate any holidays, shutdowns or any anticipated downtime.Collection and Analysis of Historical DataProvide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and preserve records of system activity over an extended period of time. Any system point may be trended automatically at time-based intervals (up to four time-based definitions per point) or change of value, both of which shall be user-definable. Trend data shall be collected stored on hard disk for future diagnostics and reporting.Trend data reports shall be provided to allow the user to view all trended point data. Reports may be customized to include individual points or predefined groups of selected points. DDC contractor shall provide setup of custom reports including creation of data format templates for monthly or weekly reports.Provide additional functionality that allows the user to view real-time trend data on trend graphical plot displays. A minimum of ten points may be plotted, of either real-time or historical data.Dynamic Color Graphic DisplaysColor graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems and hot water boiler systems, and room level terminal units, shall be provided by the BAS contractor as indicated in the point I/O schedule of this specification to optimize system performance, analysis and speed alarm recognition. Indicate thermal comfort on floor plan summary graphics using dynamic colors to represent zone temperature relative to zone setpoint. Each zone shall be shown on these floorplans.Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations within the system schematics or graphic floor plan displays, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention and without pre-defined screen refresh rates. Refer to the Input/Output Matrix for items to be displayed on the graphics.Colors shall be used to indicate status and change as the status of the equipment changes. Floor plan summary graphics shall utilize dynamic colors to represent real- time zone temperature relative to actual zone setpoint. Each HVAC zone on the floorplan shall have a color indicating its condition such that a color green shall indicate within the current heating and cooling setpoint, blue shall indicate a condition below the current heating setpoint and a color of yellow shall indicate a condition above the current cooling setpoint.System Configuration & DefinitionThe workstation/web server shall store on its hard disk a copy of the current system database, including controller firmware and software. Stored database shall be automatically updated with each system configuration or controller firmware or software work wide control strategies shall not be restricted to a single DDC Controller, but shall be able to include data from any and all other network panels to allow the development of Global control strategies.Point database configuration shall be available to the user within a dedicated point database editor application included in the workstation software. The editor shall allow the user to create, view existing, modify, copy, and delete points from the database.Manual Controller Memory Download. Operators shall be able to download memory from the system database to each controller.Provide a context-sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operating and editing the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen.Alarm ManagementAlarm Routing shall allow the user to send alarm notification to selected printers or workstation location(s) based on time of day, alarm severity, or point type.Alarm Notification shall be presented to each workstation in an “Pop-up window” and shall include the following information for each alarm point: name, value, alarm time & date, alarm status, priority and acknowledgement information.Alarm Display shall have the ability to list & sort the alarms based on alarm status, point name, ascending or descending alarm time.Directly from the Alarm Display, the user shall have the ability to acknowledge, silence the alarm sound, print, or delete each alarm.Alarm messages shall be customizable for each point, or each alarm priority level, to display detailed instructions to the user regarding actions to take in the event of an alarm.FIELD DEVICESProvide instrumentation as required for monitoring, control or optimization functions as required by the sequences of operation and the Input/Output Matrices. All devices and equipment shall be approved on the BAS submittals before installation.Room Temperature/HumidityDigital room sensors shall have LCD display, day / night override button, and setpoint adjustment override buttons. The setpoint adjustment can be software limited by the automation system to limit the amount of room adjustment.Temperature monitoring range+50/104°FAccuracy at calibration point-temp+0.5°FHumidity monitoring range10 to 90% rhAccuracy at calibration point-humidity2%Provide temperature and relative humidity monitoring via one single 2”x4” wall sensor per terminal zone unit.Temperature and RH must be digitally communicated to each controller and back to the central building automation system server. All monitoring points must be available for trending on the building automation system workstation.Each controller performing space temperature and relative humidity monitoring shall have the ability for either monitoring or control purposes. The combination sensors shall have the same appearance as space temperature sensors. Room sensing devices shall be digitally communicating with the zone controller, and multiple sensed values (Temp/RH) should not utilize additional analog inputs on the controller. Room sensor shall be capable of showing or hiding any displayed value.Liquid immersion temperature:Temperature monitoring range+30/250°FOutput signalchanging resistanceAccuracy at Calibration point+0.5°FDuct (single point) temperature:Temperature monitoring range+20/120°FOutput signalchanging resistanceAccuracy at Calibration point+0.5°FDuct Average temperature:Temperature monitoring range+20° +120°FOutput signal4 – 20 mA or 0-5VDCAccuracy at Calibration point+0.5°FSensor Probe Length5’ L (minimum)Outside air temperature:Temperature monitoring range-20°+120° FOutput signal4 – 20 mA or 0-5VDCAccuracy at Calibration point+0.5°FLiquid Differential Pressure TransmitterRanges0-5/30 inches H200-25/150 inches H20 0-125/750 inchesH20Output4 – 20 mA DCCalibration AdjustmentsZero and spanAccuracy+-0.2% of spanLinearity+-0.1% of spanHysteresis+-0.05% of spanDifferential pressure:Unit for fluid flow proof shall be Penn P74.Range8 to 70 psiDifferential3 psiMaximum differential pressure200 psiMaximum pressure325 psiAir Flow Sensors.Set point ranges:0.5” WG to 1.0”1.0” WG to 12.0”Static pressure sensor:Range0 to .5” WG0 to 1” WG0 to 2” WG0 to 5” WG0 to 10” WGOutput Signal4 – 20 mA VDCCombined static error0.5% full rangeOperating Temperature-40? to 175? FAir Pressure Sensors:Range:0 to 0.1 in. water0 to 0.25 in. water0 to 0.5 in. water0 to 1.0 in. water0 to 2.0 in water0 to 5.0 in. water0 to 10.0 in.waterOutput signal4 to 20 mAAccuracy+1.0% of full scaleHumidity Sensors:Range0 to 100% RHSensing ElementBulk PolymerOutput Signal4 – 20 mA DCAccuracyat 77°F + 2% RHInsertion Flow Meters (Equal to Onicon)Sensing MethodImpedance SensingAccuracy+ 2% of ActualReadingOutput Signal4 – 20 mA/0-5V DCPressure to Current TransducerRange3 to 15 psigOutput signal4 – 20 mAAccuracy+ 1% of scale (+ 0.3psig)Control Valves (all control valves shall have electric actuators).Ball Valves, 1/2 through 2 in.:Ball Valves shall have forged brass bodies.Valves shall have available either Chrome Plated Brass Balls or 300 Series Stainless Steel Balls in all sizes.Valves shall have available either Nickel Plated Brass Stems or 300 Series Stainless Steel Stems with a blow-out proof stem design in all sizes.Valves shall have Graphite reinforced Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) seats with Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) O-ring backing.Stem seals shall be double EPDM O-rings.Flow Characterization Disk shall be manufactured from Amodel AS-1145HS Polyphthalamide Resin and rated for 50 psid maximum differential pressure and shall be inserted against the casting of the valve.All ball valves with internal pipe thread end connections shall be rated to 580 psi maximum static pressure at 203°F (95°C) fluid temperature.All ball valves with sweat end connections or press end connection shall be rated to 300 psig maximum static pressure at 203°F (95°C) fluid temperatureAll valves shall be rated for service with hot water, chilled water and 50% glycol solutions.Ball Valves with stainless steel balls and stems shall be rated for use with 15 psig saturated steam.Flow Characteristics shall be equal percentage on the control port. Bypass port on three-way valves shall have linear flow characteristics.Valves shall have a maximum leakage specification of 0.01% of maximum flow for the control port, ANSI/FCI 70-2, Class 4 and 1% of maximum flow, bypass port.Valves shall be maintenance freeValves shall be provided with a 5 year warranty.Valves shall be rated for 200 psid closeoff pressure.Valve actuators shall be UL-recognized or CSA-certified.Valves shall be Johnson Controls VG1000 Series ball valves.Ball Valves, 2-1/2 through 4 in. Flanged:Ball Valves shall have forged brass bodies with ASME Class 150 ductile iron flanges.Valves shall have 300 Series Stainless Steel Balls.Valves shall have 300 Series Stainless Steel Stems with a blow-out proof stem design.Valves shall have Graphite reinforced Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) seats with Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) O-ring backing.Stem seals shall be double EPDM O-rings.Flow Characterization Disk shall be manufactured from Amodel AS-1145HS Polyphthalamide Resin and rated for 50 psid maximum differential pressure.Flow Characteristics shall be equal percentage on the control port. Bypass port on three-way valves shall have linear flow characteristics.Valves shall have a maximum leakage specification of 0.01% of maximum flow for the control port, ANSI/FCI 70-2, Class 4 and 1% of maximum flow, bypass port.All valves shall be rated for service with hot water, chilled water, 50% glycol solutions and rated for use with 25 psig saturated steam.Two-Way Valves shall be rated for 100 psid closeoff pressure and Three-Way Valves shall be rated for 50 psid closeoff pressure.Valves shall be maintenance free.Valves shall be provided with a 5 year warranty.Valve actuators shall be UL-recognized or CSA-certified.Valves shall be Johnson Controls VG1000 Series ball valves.Butterfly Valves, 2 through 20 in. resilient seat ASME Class 125/150 Flanged:Butterfly Valves shall have cast iron bodies meetings ASTM A126 Class B requirements and meet ASME class 125/150 flange requirements and shall be fully lugged.Butterfly Valves seat shall be Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM).Butterfly Valve disk shall be Ductile Iron with Nylon 11 coating.Butterfly Valve stems shall be Stainless Steel.Flow Characteristics shall be equal percentage up to 70° of disk rotation.All valves shall be rated for service with hot water, chilled water and 50% glycol solutions.Valves shall be maintenance free.Valve shall be provided with a 3 year warranty.Valve electric actuators shall be UL-recognized or CSA-certified.Valves shall be Johnson Controls VF Series butterfly valves.Butterfly Valves, High Performance 2-1/2 through 16 in.Butterfly Valves shall have bodies manufactured from Carbon Steel, ASTM A216 GR WCB/A516 GR 70 and shall be fully lugged per ASME Class 150 or ASME Class 300.Butterfly Valves seat assembly shall be RPTFE (reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene) and the seat retainer shall be Carbon Steel, ASTM A516 GR 70Butterfly Valve disk shall be Stainless Steel, ASTM A 351 GR CF8MButterfly Valve stems shall be 17-4 PH Stainless Steel, ASTM A564-Type 630Butterfly Valve Stem Seals shall be One Carbon Fiber Ring and Three TFE RingsFlow Characteristics shall be equal percentage up to 70° of disk rotation.All valves shall be rated for service with hot water, chilled water, 50% glycol solutions and 50 psig saturated steam in modulating service or 150 psig saturated steam in two position service.Butterfly Valves shall meet the performance requirements of ASME Class 150 or Class 300.Valves shall be maintenance free.Valves shall be provided with a 3 year warranty.Valve electric actuators shall be UL-recognized or CSA-certified.Valves shall be Johnson Controls VF Series butterfly valves.Globe Valves, Brass, 1/2 through 2 in.Valves shall have bodies manufactured from a RoHS compliant brass.Valves shall meet the pressure and temperature requirements of ANSI B16.15, Class 250Valve stems shall be a 300 Series Stainless Steel.Valves with brass plug and seat shall have stem seals with Self-Adjusting Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) Ring Pack U-CupsValves with Stainless Steel plug and seat shall valve stem seals with Spring Loaded Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and Elastomer V-RingsValves with brass trim shall have a maximum leakage specification of 0.01% of maximum flow per ANSI/FCI 70-2, Class 4 and valves with stainless steel trim shall have a maximum leakage of 0.05% of maximum flowFlow Characteristics shall be equal percentage for two-way valves and linear for three-way valves.Valves shall be serviceable without being removed from the pipe.Valves shall be provided with a 3 year warranty.Valve electric actuators shall be UL-recognized or CSA-certified.Valves shall be Johnson Controls VG7000 Series globe valves.Globe Valves, Cast Iron, 2-1/2 through 6 in.Valves shall have bodies manufactured from cast iron.Valves shall meet the pressure and temperature requirements of ANSI B16.1, Class 125Valve stems shall be a 316 Series Stainless Steel.Valves shall have stem seals with Ethylene Propylene Terpolymer (EPT) Ring Pack U-CupsValves shall have a maximum leakage specification of 0.1% of maximum flow per ANSI/FCI 70-2, Class 3Flow Characteristics shall be equal modified linear.Valves shall be serviceable without being removed from the pipe.Valves shall be provided with a 3 year warranty.Valve electric actuators shall be UL-recognized or CSA-certified.Valves shall be Johnson Controls VG2000 Series globe valves.Electric Zone Valves, 1/2 through 1-1/4 in.Valves shall have bodies manufactured from Forged Brass.Valves stems shall be brass (Hard Chrome Plated)Valve Actuator shall be UL, cUL listed or CSA certified.Valves shall be rated for service with hot water, chilled water and 50% glycol solutions.Two Position valves shall have models available rated for use with 15 psig saturated steam.Valve Actuator shall be replaceable without removing valve from the pipe.Modulating Valves flow characteristics shall be equal percentageValves shall be provided with a 2 year warranty.Valve actuators shall be UL-recognized or CSA-certified.Valves shall be Johnson Controls J Series electric zone valves.Pressure Independent Valves, 1/2 through 2 in.Valves bodies shall be manufactured from forged brass and shall be nickel platedValves shall have a stem and ball manufactured from chrome plated brassValve seat shall be fiberglass reinforced with Teflon?Characterizing disk shall be brass for 1/2 and 3/4 in. valves, and Tefzel? for sizes 1 through 2 in. valvesValves shall pressure ratings of 600 psi for 1/2, 3/4 and 1 in. size valves, and pressure rating of 400 psi for 1-1/4, 1-1/2 and 2 in. size valvesCloseoff Pressure rating shall be 200 psidValves shall have a maximum leakage specification of 0.01% of maximum flow per ANSI/FCI 70-2, Class 4 with a 50 psid differential pressure applied.Valves shall be maintenance free.Valves shall be provided with a 5 year warranty.Valve actuators shall be UL-recognized or CSA-certified.Control Dampers (all control dampers shall have electric actuators).All automatic dampers shall be sized for the application by the BAS Contractor or as specifically indicated on the Drawings.All dampers used for throttling airflow shall be of the opposed blade type arranged for normally open or normally closed operation, as required. The damper is to be sized so that, when wide open, the pressure drop is a sufficient amount of its close-off pressure drop to shift the characteristic curve to near linear.All dampers used for two-position, open/close control shall be parallel blade type arranged for normally open or closed operation, as required.Damper frames and blades shall be constructed of either galvanized steel or aluminum. Maximum blade length in any section shall be 60”. Damper blades shall be 16-gauge minimum and shall not exceed eight (8) inches in width. Damper frames shall be 16-gauge minimum hat channel type with corner bracing. All damper bearings shall be made of reinforced nylon, stainless steel or oil- impregnated bronze. Dampers shall be tight closing, low leakage type, with synthetic elastomer seals on the blade edges and flexible stainless steel side seals. Dampers of 48”x48” size shall not leak in excess of 8.0 cfm per square foot when closed against 4” w.g. static pressure when tested in accordance with AMCA Std. 500.Airfoil blade dampers of double skin construction with linkage out of the air stream shall be used whenever the damper face velocity exceeds 1500 FPM or system pressure exceeds 2.5” w.g., but no more than 4000 FPM or 6” w.g.Acceptable manufacturer are Johnson Controls VD-1250, VD1630, or VD-1330.One piece rolled blade dampers with exposed or concealed linkage may be used with face velocities of 1500 FPM or below.Acceptable manufacturer: Johnson Controls VD-1620, VD-1320.Multiple section dampers may be jack-shafted to allow mounting of piston pneumatic actuators and direct connect electronic actuators. Each end of the jackshaft shall receive at least one actuator to reduce jackshaft twist.Electric Damper and Valve ActuatorsStall Protection. Mechanical or electronic stall protection shall prevent actuator damage throughout the actuator’s rotation.Spring-return Mechanism. Actuators used for power-failure and safety applications shall have an internal mechanical spring-return mechanism or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). This project requires spring return actuators on the Outside Air Dampers (N.C.) and the Preheat HW control valves on the AHUs (N.O.).Actuators shall be designed for mounting directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkages.All modulating AHU, CHW/HW Plant and terminal unit valve and damper/air valve actuators shall accept a 0–10 Vdc or a 0–20 mA control signal and shall have a 2–10 Vdc or 4–20 mA operating range. No floating motor actuator signals shall be permitted.Manual Positioning. Operators shall be able to manually position each actuator when the actuator is not powered. Non-spring-return actuators shall have an external manual gear release. Spring-return actuators (OA Damper and Preheat HW Valves) with more than 60 in.-lb torque capacity shall have a manual crank.MISCELLANEOUS DEVICESThermostats:Room thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type with adjustable sensitivity.They shall have a bi-metal sensing element capable of responding to a temperature change of one-tenth of one degree. (Provide all thermostats with limit stops to limit adjustments as required.)Thermostats shall be arranged for either horizontal or vertical mounting.In the vertical position thermostat shall fit on a mullion of movable partitions without overlap.Freezestats:Install freezestats downstream of the preheat coil on the AHUs and provide protection for every square foot of coil surface area with one linear foot of element per square foot of coil. Upon detection of low temperature, the freezestats shall stop the associated supply fans and return the automatic dampers to their normal position. Provide manual reset.Firestats:Provide manual reset, fixed temperature line voltage type with a bi-metal actuated switch. Switch shall have adequate rating for required load.Current Sensing Relay:Provide solid-state, adjustable, current operated relay. Provide a relay which changes switch contact state in response to an adjustable set point value of current in the monitored A/C circuit.Adjust the relay switch point so that the relay responds to motor operation under load as an “on” state and so that the relay responds to an unloaded running motor as an “off” state. A motor with a broken belt is considered an unloaded motor.Provide for status device for all fans and pumps.SEQUENCES OF OPERATION - Any input/output points required by the sequence of operation or specific alarms shall be in addition to those I/O points detailed in the Input Output summaries.Units shall run according to its own or the building’s user definable time schedule in the following modes; Occupied Mode: The unit shall maintain a 74°F (adj.) cooling set point and a 69°F (adj.) heating set point and a 60% rh (adj.) high humidity limit. In Unoccupied Mode (night setback), the unit shall maintain an 80°F (adj.) cooling set point and a 60°F (adj.) heating setpoint.Alarms shall be provided as follows:High Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is greater than the cooling set point by a user definable amount (adj.).Low Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is less than the heating set point by a user definable amount (adj.). High Zone Humidity: If the zone humidity is greater than 65% rh (adj.).High Space CO2 Concentration: If the space CO2 concentration is greater than 1000ppm (adj.) when in theroom is in use.Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. Supply Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.Supply Fan VFD Fault: If the VFD alarm/fault digital input is on.Prefilter Change Required: The filter DP switch is in alarm or dirty filter mode.START-UP AND COMMISSIONINGWhen installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify transmission media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing, calibrating, adjusting and final field tests shall be completed by the BAS contractor. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of power.Provide integrated HVAC equipment startup/checkout reports in the BAS graphical operating software which shall archive when each piece of equipment was checked out and calibrated by the BAS contractor. These reports shall automatically archive these reports with the calibration values, variables and settings in the BAS system database.After BAS contractor has completed system start-up and checkout as well as the archiving of the equipment startup/checkout reports in the BAS database, the Owner Training shall be scheduled.ELECTRICAL WIRING AND MATERIALSInstall, connect and wire the items included under this Section. This work includes providing required conduit, wire, fittings, and related wiring accessories. Control and interlock wiring and installation shall comply with national and local electrical codes, Division 24, and manufacturer's recommendations. Where the requirements of Section 23xxx differ from Division 24, Section 23xxx shall take precedence.Provide wiring between thermostats, controllers, all BAS field sensing devices, switches, BAS field control devices and any distributed DDC controllers/BAS panels.Provide conduit and control wiring for devices specified in this Section. EMT conduit shall be utilized for wiring in interior exposed locations and inaccessible interior locations. Rigid metallic conduit shall be used in exterior exposed locations. All conduit, fittings and installation methods shall comply with the applicable sections of the Division 24 specifications for this project.All interior wiring installed in accessible non-exposed locations shall be bundled and supported a minimum of every ten feet of linear run. NEC Class 2 (current-limited) wires not in raceway but in concealed and accessible locations such as return air plenums shall be UL listed for the intended application.Low-voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. Subfuse low-voltage power circuits as required to meet Class 2 current limit. Install Class 1 and Class 2 wiring in separate raceways. Boxes and panels containing high-voltage wiring and equipment shall not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two through relays and transformers.Provide electrical wall box and conduit sleeve/stub-ups for all wall-mounted devices.All wall mounted devices installed by the BAS contractor shall be mounted as located on the drawings and shall be level and located as not to interfere with other wall mounted equipment or building furniture. All conduit and wiring shall be installed in a workmanlike and professional manner and shall be level, plumb and at right angles to building structure and equipment. Straps and support for conduit and wirings shall be made to building structure, not to ductwork or other conduit.Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to structure and spaced according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes shall not be hung on or attached to ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.Use color-coded conductors throughout.Maintain minimum clearance of 6 in. between raceway and high-temperature equipment such as steam pipes or flues.Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 3 ft in length and shall be supported at each end. Do not use flexible metal raceway less than ? in. electrical trade MUNICATION WIRINGCommunication wiring shall be low-voltage Class 2 wiring and shall comply with Article 3.3 (Wiring).During installation do not exceed maximum cable pulling, tension, or bend radius specified by the cable manufacturer.Verify entire network's integrity following cable installation using appropriate tests for each cable.Each run of communication wiring shall be a continuous length without splices when that length is commercially available. Runs longer than commercially available lengths shall have as few splices as possible using commercially available lengths.INSTALLATION OF SENSORSInstall sensors according to manufacturer's recommendations.Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for operating environment.Install room temperature sensors on concealed junction boxes properly supported by wall framing.Use averaging sensors in mixing plenums.Install mixing plenum low-limit sensors in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Support each bend with a capillary clip. Provide 1 ft of sensing element for each 1 ft2 of coil area.Install pipe-mounted temperature sensors in wells. Install liquid temperature sensors with heat- conducting fluid in thermal wells.Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall at designated location with sun shield.Freezestats, high-pressure cut-offs, and other safety switches shall be hard-wired to de-energize equipment as described in the sequence of operation. Switches shall require manual reset. Provide contacts that allow DDC software to monitor safety switch status.ActuatorsGeneral. Mount actuators and adapters according to manufacturer's recommendations.Electric and Electronic Damper Actuators. Mount actuators directly on damper shaft or jackshaft unless shown as a linkage installation. Link actuators according to manufacturer's recommendations.For low-leakage dampers with seals, mount actuator with a minimum 5° travel available for damper seal tightening.To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on normally closed dampers, power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, then tighten linkage.Check operation of damper-actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.Provide necessary mounting hardware and linkages for actuator installation.Valve Actuators. Connect actuators to valves with adapters approved by actuator manufacturer.TRAININGThe BAS contractor shall provide factory trained instructor to give full instruction to designated personnel in the operation of the system installed. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. They shall provide all students with a student binder containing product specific training modules for the system installed. All training shall be held during normal working hours of 8:00 am to 4:30 PM weekdays.Provide 8 hours of training for Owner's designated operating personnel.Training shall include:Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals. Walk-through of the job to locate control components.Operator workstation and peripherals. DDC controller operation/function.Operator controls and functions over the system (i.e. scheduling, alarms, trends, etc.) Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures.Student binder with training modules.Delivery of a CD/DVD which includes a comprehensive User Training and Engineering Training Tutorial. This CD/DVD shall not have a limitation on where or how the disc may be copied or utilized by the Owner or Owner personnel.END OF SECTION 230900SECTION 23 09 23CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTATION & ENERGY MANAGEMENTPart 1 – GeneralTable of ContentsPart 1 – GeneralRelated DocumentsDefinitionsBMS System DescriptionQuality AssuranceReferencesWork By OthersSubmittalsRecord DocumentationWarrantyPart 2 – ProductsSystem ArchitectureOperator WorkstationOperator InterfaceApplication NodesApplication SoftwareField DevicesSpecialty ItemsPart 3 – ExecutionInstallation PracticesTrainingCommissioning RequirementsCoordinationSequencesPoint ListsRelated DocumentsAll work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Building Management System (BMS) Contractor.The work of this Division shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the associated work of other trades. Reference the Division 15 Sections for details.The work of this Division shall be as required by the Specifications, Point Schedules and Drawings.If the BMS Contractor believes there are conflicts or missing information in the project documents, the Contractor shall promptly request clarification and instruction from the design team.DefinitionsAnalog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels. Typically exists within a defined range of limiting values.Binary: A two-state system where an “ON” condition is represented by one discrete signal level and an “OFF” condition is represented by a second discrete signal level.Building Management System (BMS): The total integrated system of fully operational and functional elements, including equipment, software, programming, and associated materials, to be provided by this Division BMS Contractor and to be interfaced to the associated work of other related trades.BMS Contractor: The single Contractor to provide the work of this Division. This Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer, installer, commissioner and ongoing service provider for the BMS work.Control Sequence: An BMS pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms, logical computation, target values and limits as required to attain the defined operational control objectives.Direct Digital Control: The digital algorithms and pre-defined arrangements included in the BMS software to provide direct closed-loop control for the designated equipment and controlled variables. Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and Integral control algorithms together with target values, limits, logical functions, arithmetic functions, constant values, timing considerations and the like.BMS Network: The total digital on-line real-time interconnected configuration of BMS digital processing units, workstations, panels, sub-panels, controllers, devices and associated elements individually known as network nodes. May exist as one or more fully interfaced and integrated sub-networks, LAN, WAN or the like.Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the BMS network.BMS Integration: The complete functional and operational interconnection and interfacing of all BMS work elements and nodes in compliance with all applicable codes, standards and ordinances so as to provide a single coherent BMS as required by this Division.Provide: The term “Provide” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean to furnish, install in place, connect, calibrate, test, commission, warrant, document and supply the associated required services ready for operation.PC: IBM-compatible Personal Computer from a recognized major manufacturerFurnish: The term “Furnish” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean supply at the BMS Contractor’s cost to the designated third party trade contractor for installation. BMS Contractor shall connect furnished items to the BMS, calibrate, test, commission, warrant and document.Wiring: The term “Wiring” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean provide the BMS wiring and terminations.Install: The term “Install” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean receive at the jobsite and mount.Protocol: The term “protocol” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean a defined set of rules and standards governing the on-line exchange of data between BMS network nodes.Software: The term “software” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean all of programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed firmware and project specific digital process programming and database entries and definitions as generally understood in the BMS industry for real-time, on-line, integrated BMS configurations.The use of words in the singular in these Division documents shall not be considered as limiting when other indications in these documents denote that more than one such item is being referenced.Headings, paragraph numbers, titles, shading, bolding, underscores, clouds and other symbolic interpretation aids included in the Division documents are for general information only and are to assist in the reading and interpretation of these Documents.The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this Division: ADC-Analog to Digital ConverterAI-Analog InputAN-Application NodeANSI-American National Standards InstituteAO-Analog OutputASCII-American Standard Code for Information InterchangeASHRAEAmerican Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning EngineersAWG-American Wire GaugeCPU-Central Processing UnitCRT-Cathode Ray TubeDAC-Digital to Analog ConverterDDC-Direct Digital ControlDI-Digital InputDO-Digital OutputEEPROM-Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only MemoryEMI-Electromagnetic InterferenceFAS-Fire Alarm Detection and AnnunciationSystemGUI-Graphical User InterfaceHOA-Hand-Off-AutoID-IdentificationIEEE-Institute of Electrical and Electronics EngineersI/O-Input/OutputLAN-Local Area NetworkLCD-Liquid Crystal DisplayLED-Light Emitting DiodeMCC-Motor Control CenterNC-Normally ClosedNIC-Not In ContractNO-Normally OpenOWS-Operator WorkstationOAT-Outdoor Air TemperaturePC-Personal ComputerRAM-Random Access MemoryRF-Radio FrequencyRFI-Radio Frequency InterferenceRH-Relative HumidityROM-Read Only MemoryRTD-Resistance Temperature DeviceSPDT-Single Pole Double ThrowSPST-Single Pole Single ThrowXVGA-Extended Video Graphics AdapterTBA-To Be AdvisedTCP/IP-Transmission Control Protocol/Internet ProtocolTTD-Thermistor Temperature DeviceUPS-Uninterruptible Power SupplyVAC-Volts, Alternating CurrentVAV-Variable Air VolumeVDC-Volts, Direct CurrentWAN-Wide Area NetworkBMS DescriptionThe Building Management System (BMS) shall be a complete system designed for use with the enterprise IT systems.. This functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. Devices residing on the automation network located in equipment rooms and similar shall be fully IT with the existing local area network. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the EMCS department to ensure that the BMS will perform in the owner’s environment.All points of user interface shall be on standard PCs that communicate with and will be an extension of the existing Metasys ADX OR Siemens server located in building 4705.The work of the single BMS Contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in all Sections of this Division specifications together with the associated Point Sheets and Drawings and the associated interfacing work as referenced in the related documents.The BMS work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals, testing, commissioning, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties, services, and items, even though these may not be specifically mentioned in these Division documents which are required for the complete, fully functional and commissioned BMS.Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. Use only manufacturer employees who are skilled, experienced, trained, and familiar with the specific equipment, software, standards and configurations to be provided for this Project.Manage and coordinate the BMS work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project schedules. Coordinate with the associated work of other trades so as to not impede or delay the work of associated trades.The BMS as provided shall incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated features, functions and services:Operator information, alarm management and control functions.Enterprise-level information and control rmation management including monitoring, transmission, archiving, retrieval, and reporting functions.Diagnostic monitoring and reporting of BMS functions.Offsite monitoring and management access.Energy managementStandard applications for terminal HVAC systems.Quality AssuranceGeneralThe Building Management System Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer- owned branch office that is regularly engaged in the engineering, programming, installation and service of total integrated Building Management Systems.The BMS Contractor shall be a recognized national manufacturer, installer and service provider of BMS.If a franchised dealer is to be considered via addendum, the authorized building control system installer must provide a letter written by a minimum Vice President of Operations for Johnson Controls. This letter must be provided to the engineer along with the other supporting documentation at the time of request for equivalence.The BMS Contractor shall have a branch facility within a 100-mile radius of the job site supplying complete maintenance and support services on a 24 hour, 7- day-a-week basis.As evidence and assurance of the contractor’s ability to support the Owner's system with service and parts, the contractor must have been in the BMS business for at least the last ten (10) years and have successfully completed total projects of at least 10 times the value of this contract in each of the preceding five years.The Building Management System architecture shall consist of the products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of Building Management Systems, and shall be the manufacturer’s latest standard of design at the time of bid.Workplace Safety And Hazardous MaterialsProvide a safety program in compliance with the Contract Documents.The BMS Contractor shall have a corporately certified comprehensive Safety Certification Manual and a designated Safety Supervisor for the Project.The Contractor and its employees and subtrades comply with federal, state and local safety regulations.The Contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors and employees have written safety programs in place that covers their scope of work, and that their employees receive the training required by the OSHA have jurisdiction for at least each topic listed in the Safety Certification Manual.Hazards created by the Contractor or its subcontractors shall be eliminated before any further work proceeds.Hazards observed but not created by the Contractor or its subcontractors shall be reported to either the General Contractor or the Owner within the same day. The Contractor shall be required to avoid the hazard area until the hazard has been eliminated.The Contractor shall sign and date a safety certification form prior to any work being performed, stating that the Contractors’ company is in full compliance with the Project safety requirements.The Contractor’s safety program shall include written policy and arrangements for the handling, storage and management of all hazardous materials to be used in the work in compliance with the requirements of the AHJ at the Project site.The Contractor’s employees and subcontractor’s staff shall have received training as applicable in the use of hazardous materials and shall govern their actions accordingly.Quality Management ProgramDesignate a competent and experienced employee to provide BMS Project Management. The designated Project Manger shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the BMS Contractor. At minimum, the Project Manager shall:Manage the scheduling of the work to ensure that adequate materials, labor and other resources are available as needed.Manage the financial aspects of the BMS Contract.Coordinate as necessary with other trades.Be responsible for the work and actions of the BMS workforce on site.ReferencesAll work shall conform to the following Codes and Standards, as applicable:National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards.National Electric Code (NEC) and applicable local Electric Code.Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing and labels.UL 864 UUKL Smoke ControlUL 268 Smoke Detectors.UL 916 Energy ManagementNFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.NFPA 90A - Standard For The Installation Of Air Conditioning And Ventilating Systems.NFPA 92A and 92B Smoke Purge/Control Equipment.Factory Mutual (FM).American National Standards Institute (ANSI).National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA).Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII).Electronics Industries Association (EIA).Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).Federal Communications Commission (FCC) including Part 15, Radio Frequency Devices.Americans Disability Act (ADA)ANSI/EIA 909.1-A-1999 (LonWorks)24ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 195-2004 (BACnet)In the case of conflicts or discrepancies, the more stringent regulation shall apply.All work shall meet the approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction at the project site.SubmittalsShop Drawings, Product Data, and SamplesSubmittals shall be in accordance with Section 1330.Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such regulations and be approved. Filing shall be at the expense of the BMS Contractor where filing is necessary. Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to the Owner.Prepare an index of all submittals and shop drawings for the installation. Index shall include a shop drawing identification number, Contract Documents reference and item description.The BMS Contractor shall correct any errors or omissions noted in the first review.At a minimum, submit the following:BMS network architecture diagrams including all nodes and interconnections.Systems schematics, sequences and flow diagrams.Points schedule for each point in the BMS, including: Point Type, Object Name, Expanded ID, Display Units, Controller type, and Address.Detailed Bill of Material list for each system or application, identifying quantities, part numbers, descriptions, and optional features.Control Valve Schedules including a separate line for each valve provided under this section and a column for each of the valve attributes: Code Number, Configuration, Fail Position, Pipe Size, Valve Size, Body Configuration, Close off Pressure, Capacity, Valve CV, Design Pressure, and Actuator Type.Details of all BMS interfaces and connections to the work of other trades.Product data sheets or marked catalog pages including part number, photo and description for all products including software.Record DocumentationOperation and Maintenance ManualsThree (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the Owner's Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be furnished on Compact Disc media, and include the following for the BMS provided:Table of contents.As-built system record drawings. PDF type record drawings shall represent the as-built condition of the system and incorporate all information supplied with the approved submittal.Manufacturers product data sheets or catalog pages for all products including software.System Operator’s manuals.Archive copy of all site-specific databases and sequences.BMS network diagrams.Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades.The Operation and Maintenance Manual CD shall be self-contained, and include all necessary software required to access the product data sheets. A logically organized table of contents shall provide dynamic links to view and print all product data sheets. Viewer software shall provide the ability to display, zoom, and search all documents.WarrantyStandard Material and Labor Warranty:Provide a one-year labor and material warranty on the BMS.If within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance of product, upon written notice from the owner, it is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or materials, it shall be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the option of the BMS Contractor at the cost of the BMS Contractor.Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 100 miles of the Project site such that replacement of key parts and labor support, including programming. Warranty work shall be done during BMS Contractor’s normal business hours.2.Part 2 – ProductsGeneral DescriptionThe Building Management System (BMS) shall use an open architecture and fully support a multi- vendor environment. To accomplish this effectively, the BMS shall support open communication protocol standards and integrate a wide variety of third-party devices and applications. The system shall be designed for use on the Internet, or intranets using off the shelf, industry standard technology compatible with other owner provided networks.The Building Management System shall consist of the following:Standalone Network Automation Engine(s)Field Equipment Controller(s)Input/Output Module(s)Local Display Device(s)Portable Operator's Terminal(s)Distributed User Interface(s)Network processing, data storage and communications equipment7.Other components required for a complete and working BMSThe system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, controllers and operator devices, while re- using existing controls equipment.System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution.The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.The System shall maintain all settings and overrides through a system reboot.System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution.Acceptable Manufacturers1) Johnson Controls, MetasysBMS ArchitectureAutomation NetworkThe automation network shall be based on a PC industry standard of Ethernet TCP/IP. Where used, LAN controller cards shall be standard “off the shelf” products available through normal PC vendor channels. No 3rd party BACnet.The BMS shall network multiple user interface clients, automation engines, system controllers and application-specific controllers. Provide application and data server(s) as required for systems operation.All BMS devices on the automation network shall be capable of operating at a communication speed of 100 Mbps, with full peer-to-peer network work Automation Engines (NAE) shall reside on the automation network.The automation network will be compatible with other enterprise-wide networks. Where indicated, the automation network shall be connected to the enterprise network and share resources with it by way of standard networking devices and practices.Control NetworkNetwork Automation Engines (NAE) shall provide supervisoryIntegrationHardwiredAnalog and digital signal values shall be passed from one system to another via hardwired connections.There will be one separate physical point on each system for each point to be integrated between the systems.Direct Protocol (Integrator Panel)The BMS system shall include appropriate hardware equipment and software to allow bi-directional data communications between the BMS system and 3rd party manufacturers’ control panels. The BMS shall receive, react to, and return information from multiple building systems, including but not limited to the chillers, boilers, variable frequency drives, power monitoring system, and medical gas.All data required by the application shall be mapped into the Automation Engine’s database, and shall be transparent to the operator.Point inputs and outputs from the third-party controllers shall have real-time interoperability with BMS software features such as: ControlSoftware, Energy Management, Custom Process Programming, Alarm Management, Historical Data and Trend Analysis, Totalization, and Local Area Network Communications.BACnet Protocol Integration – BACnet (no 3rd party BACnet)The neutral protocol used between systems will be BACnet over Ethernet and comply with the ASHRAE BACnet standard 135-2003.A complete Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) shall be provided for all BACnet system devices.The ability to command, share point object data, change of state (COS) data and schedules between the host and BACnet systems shall be provided.User InterfaceDedicated Web Based User InterfaceWhere indicated on plans the BMS Contractor shall provide and install a personal computer for command entry, information management, network alarm management, and database management functions. All real-time control functions, including scheduling, history collection and alarming, shall be resident in the BMS Network Automation Engines to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability. The computer shall be an extension of the existing Metasys ADX server and shall complete access to the databases and graphic storage files for all buildings.Dedicated User Interface Architecture – The architecture of the computer shall be implemented to conform to industry standards, so that it can accommodate applications provided by the BMS Contractor and by other third party applications suppliers, including but not limited to Microsoft Office Applications. Specifically it must be implemented to conform to the following interface standards.Microsoft Internet Explorer for user interface functionsMicrosoft Office Professional for creation, modification and maintenance of reports, sequences other necessary building management functionsMicrosoft Outlook or other e-mail program for supplemental alarm functionality and communication of system events, and reportsRequired network operating system for exchange of data and network functions such as printing of reports, trends and specific system summariesPC Hardware – The personal computer(s) shall be configured as follows:Memory – 1 GB (512 MB Minimum)CPU– Pentium 4 processor. 2.8 Hz Clock Speed (2.0 GHz minimum)Hard Drive – 80 GB free hard drive space (40GB minimum)Hard drive backup system – CD/RW, DVD/RW or network backup software provided by IT departmentCD ROM Drive – 32X performancePorts – (2) Serial and (1) parallel, (2) USB portsKeyboard – 101 Keyboard and 2 Button MouseCRT configuration – 1-2 CRTs as follows:Each Display – 17” Flat Panel Monitor 1280 x 1024 resolution minimum16 bit or higher color resolutionDisplay card with multiple monitor supportLAN communications – Ethernet communications board; 3Comm or equalOperating System SoftwareWindows XP ProfessionalWhere user interface is not provided via browser, provide complete operator workstation software package, including any hardware or software keys. Include the original installation disks and licenses for all included software, device drivers, and peripherals.Provide software registration cards to the Owner for all included software.Peripheral HardwareReports printer:Printer Make – Hewlett Packard DeskJetPrint Speed – 600 DPI Black, 300 DPI ColorBuffer – 64 K Input Print BufferColor Printing – Include Color KitDistributed Web Based User InterfaceAll features and functions of the dedicated user interface previously defined in this document shall be available on any computer connected directly or via a wide area or virtual private network (WAN/VPN) to the automation network and conforming to the following specifications.The software shall run on the Microsoft Internet Explorer (6.0 or higher) browser supporting the following functions:ConfigurationCommissioningData ArchivingMonitoringCommandingSystem DiagnosticsMinimum hardware requirements:512 MB RAM2.0 GHz Clock Speed Pentium 4 Microprocessor100.0 GB Hard Drive.1 Keyboard with 83 keys (minimum).SVGA 1024x768 resolution display with 64K colors and 16 bit color depthMouse or other pointing deviceUser Interface Application ComponentsOperator InterfaceAn integrated browser based client application shall be used as the user operator interface program.The System shall employ an event-driven rather than a device polling methodology to dynamically capture and present new data to the user.All Inputs, Outputs, Setpoints, and all other parameters as defined within Part 3, shown on the design drawings, or required as part of the system software, shall be displayed for operator viewing and modification from the operator interface software.The user interface software shall provide help menus and instructions for each operation and/or application.The system shall support customization of the UI configuration and a home page display for each operator.The system shall support user preferences in the following screen presentations:AlarmTrendDisplayApplicationsAll controller software operating parameters shall be displayed for the operator to view/modify from the user interface. These include: setpoints, alarm limits, time delays, PID tuning constants, run-times, point statistics, schedules, and so forth.The Operator Interface shall incorporate comprehensive support for functions including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:User access for selective information retrieval and control command executionMonitoring and reportingAlarm, non-normal, and return to normal condition annunciationSelective operator override and other control actionsInformation archiving, manipulation, formatting, display and reportingBMS internal performance supervision and diagnosticsOn-line access to user HELP menusOn-line access to current BMS as-built records and documentationMeans for the controlled re-programming, re-configuration of BMS operation and for the manipulation of BMS database information in compliance with the prevailing codes, approvals and regulations for individual BMS applicationsThe system shall support a list of application programs configured by the users that are called up by the following means:The Tools MenuHyperlinks within the graphics displaysKey sequencesThe operation of the control system shall be independent of the user interface, which shall be used for operator communications only. Systems that rely on an operator workstation to provide supervisory control over controller execution of the sequences of operations or system communications shall not be acceptable.Navigation TreesThe system will have the capability to display multiple navigation trees that will aid the operator in navigating throughout all systems and points connected. At minimum provide a tree that identifies all systems on the networks.Provide the ability for the operator to add custom trees. The operator will be able to define any logical grouping of systems or points and arrange them on the tree in any order. It shall be possible to nest groups within other groups. Provide at minimum 5 levels of nesting.The navigation trees shall be “dockable” to other displays in the user interface such as graphics. This means that the trees will appear as part of the display, but can be detached and then minimized to the Windows task bar or closed altogether. A simple keystroke will reattach the navigation to the primary display of the user interface.AlarmsAlarms shall be routed directly from Network Automation Engines to PCs and servers. It shall be possible for specific alarms from specific points to be routed to specific PCs and servers. The alarm management portion of the user interface shall, at the minimum, provide the following functions:Log date and time of alarm occurrence.Generate a “Pop-Up” window, with audible alarm, informing a user that an alarm has been received.Allow a user, with the appropriate security level, to acknowledge, temporarily silence, or discard an alarm.Provide an audit trail on hard drive for alarms by recording user acknowledgment, deletion, or disabling of an alarm. The audit trail shall include the name of the user, the alarm, the action taken on the alarm, and a time/date stamp.Provide the ability to direct alarms to an e-mail address or alphanumeric pager. This must be provided in addition to the pop up window described above. Systems that use e-mail and pagers as the exclusive means of annunciating alarms are not acceptable.Any attribute of any object in the system may be designated to report an alarm.The BMS shall annunciate diagnostic alarms indicating system failures and non-normal operating conditions.The BMS shall allow a minimum of 4 categories of alarm sounds customizable through user defined wav.files.The BMS shall annunciate application alarms at minimum, as required by Part 3.Reports and SummariesReports and Summaries shall be generated and directed to the user interface displays, with subsequent assignment to printers, or disk. As a minimum, the system shall provide the following reports:All points in the BMSAll points in each BMS applicationAll points in a specific controllerAll points in a user-defined group of pointsAll points currently in alarmAll points locked outAll BMS schedulesAll user defined and adjustable variables, schedules, interlocks and the like.Summaries and Reports shall be accessible via standard UI functions and not dependent upon custom programming or user defined HTML pages.Selection of a single menu item, tool bar item, or tool bar button shall print any displayed report or summary on the system printer for use as a building management and diagnostics tool.The system shall allow for the creation of custom reports and queries via a standard web services XML interface and commercial off-the-shelf software such as Microsoft Access, Microsoft Excel, or Crystal Reports.Provide the capability to view, command and modify large quantities of similar data in tailored summaries created online without the use of a secondary application like a spreadsheet. Summary definition shall allow up to seven user defined columns describing attributes to be displayed including custom column labels. Up to 100 rows per summary shall be supported. Summary viewing shall be available over the network using a standard Web browser.Provide a focused set of reports that includes essential information required for effective management of energy resources within the facility. Energy reports shall be configurable from predefined, preconfigured templates. Required includes but shall not be limited to:Energy Overview Load Profile Simple Energy Cost Consumption Equipment Runtime Electrical Energy Energy ProductionReports shall be selectable by date, time, area and device. Each report shall include a color visual summary of essential energy information.SchedulesA graphical display for time-of-day scheduling and override scheduling of building operations shall be provided. At a minimum, the following functions shall be provided:Weekly schedulesException SchedulesMonthly calendarsWeekly schedules shall be provided for each group of equipment with a specific time use schedule.It shall be possible to define one or more exception schedules for each schedule including references to calendarsMonthly calendars shall be provided that allow for simplified scheduling of holidays and special days for a minimum of five years in advance. Holidays and special days shall be user-selected with the pointing device or keyboard, and shall automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the exception schedules.Changes to schedules made from the User Interface shall directly modify the Network Automation Engine schedule database.Schedules and Calendars shall comply with ASHRAE SP135/2003 BACnet Standard.Selection of a single menu item or tool bar button shall print any displayed schedule on the system printer for use as a building management and diagnostics tool.Software shall be provided to configure and implement optimal start and stop programming based on existing indoor and outdoor environmental conditions as well as equipment operating historyPasswordMultiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to user interface control, display, and database manipulation capabilities deemed appropriate for each user, based on an assigned password.Each user shall have the following: a user name (accept 24 characters minimum), a password (accept 12 characters minimum), and access levels.The system shall allow each user to change his or her password at will.When entering or editing passwords, the system shall not echo the actual characters for display on the monitor.A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported individually or in any combination as follows:Level 1 = View DataLevel 2 = CommandLevel 3 = Operator OverridesLevel 4 = Database ModificationLevel 5 = Database ConfigurationLevel 6 = All privileges, including Password Add/ModifyA minimum of 100 unique passwords shall be supported.Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Display of menu selections shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.The system shall automatically generate a report of log-on/log-off and system activity for each user. Any action that results in a change in the operation or configuration of the control system shall be recorded, including: modification of point values, schedules or history collection parameters, and all changes to the alarm management system, including the acknowledgment and deletion of alarms.Screen ManagerThe User Interface shall be provided with screen management capabilities that allow the user to activate, close, and simultaneously manipulate a minimum of 4 active display windows plus a network or user defined navigation tree.Dynamic Color GraphicsThe graphics application program shall be supplied as an integral part of the User Interface. Browser or Workstation applications that rely only upon HTML pages shall not be acceptable.The graphics applications shall include a create/edit function and a runtime function. The system architecture shall support an unlimited number of graphics documents (graphic definition files) to be generated and executed.The graphics shall be able to display and provide animation based on real- time data that is acquired, derived, or entered.Graphics runtime functions – A maximum of 16 graphic applications shall be able to execute at any one time on a user interface or workstation with 4 visible to the user. Each graphic application shall be capable of the following functions:All graphics shall be fully scalableThe graphics shall support a maintained aspect ratio.Multiple fonts shall be supported.Unique background shall be assignable on a per graphic basis.The color of all animations and values on displays shall indicate if the status of the object attribute.Operation from graphics – It shall be possible to change values (setpoints) and states in system controlled equipment by using drop-down windows accessible via the pointing deviceGraphic editing tool – A graphic editing tool shall be provided that allows for the creation and editing of graphic files. The graphic editor shall be capable of performing/defining all animations, and defining all runtime binding.The graphic editing tool shall in general provide for the creation and positioning of point objects by dragging from tool bars or drop-downs and positioning where required.In addition, the graphic editing tool shall be able to add additional content to any graphic by importing backgrounds in the SVG, BMP or JPG file formats.Aliasing – Many graphic displays representing part of a building and various building components are exact duplicates, with the exception that the various variables are bound to different field values. Consequently, it shall be possible to bind the value of a graphic display to aliases, as opposed to the physical field tags.Historical trending and data collectionEach Automation Engine shall store trend and point history data for all analog and digital inputs and outputs, as follows:Any point, physical or calculated, may be designated for trending. Three methods of collection shall be allowed:Defined time interval Upon a change of valueEach Automation Engine shall have the capability to store multiple samples for each physical point and software variable based upon available memory, including an individual sample time/date stamp. Points may be assigned to multiple history trends with different collection parameters.Trend and change of value data shall be stored within the engine and uploaded to a dedicated trend database or exported in a selectable dataformat via a provided data export utility. Uploads to a dedicated database shall occur based upon one of the following: user-defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers are full. Exports shall be as requested by the user or on a time scheduled basis.The system shall provide a configurable data storage subsystem for the collection of historical data. Data can be stored in either Microsoft Access or SQL database format.Trend data viewing and analysisProvide a trend viewing utility that shall have access to all database points.It shall be possible to retrieve any historical database point for use in displays and reports by specifying the point name and associated trend name.The trend viewing utility shall have the capability to define trend study displays to include multiple trendsDisplays shall be able to be single or stacked graphs with on-line selectable display characteristics, such as ranging, color, and plot style.Display magnitude and units shall both be selectable by the operator at any time without reconfiguring the processing or collection of data. This is a zoom capability.Display magnitude shall automatically be scaled to show full graphic resolution of the data being displayed.Trend studies shall be capable of calculating and displaying calculated variables including highest value, lowest value and time based accumulation.The Display shall support the user’s ability to change colors, sample sizes, and types of markers.Database ManagementWhere a separate SQL database is utilized for information storage the System shall provide a Database Manager that separates the database monitoring and managing functions by supporting two separate windows.Database secure access shall be accomplished using standard SQL authentication including the ability to access data for use outside of the Building Automation application.The database managing function shall include summarized information on trend, alarm, event, and audit for the following database management actions:BackupPurgeRestoreThe Database Manager shall support four tabs:Statistics – shall display Database Server information and Trend, Alarm (Event), and Audit information on the Metasys Databases.Maintenance – shall provide an easy method of purging records from the Metasys Server trend, alarm (event), and audit databases by supporting separate screens for creating a backup prior to purging, selecting the database, and allowing for the retention of a selected number of day’s data.Backup – Shall provide the means to create a database backup file and select a storage location.Restore – shall provide a restricted means of restoring a database by requiring the user to log into an Expert Mode in order to view the Restore screen.The Status Bar shall appear at the bottom of all Metasys Database Manager Tabs and shall provide information on the current database activity. The following icons shall be provided:ReadyPurging Record from a databaseAction FailedRefreshing StatisticsRestoring databaseShrinking a databaseBacking up a databaseResetting internet information ServicesStarting the Metasys Device ManagerShutting down the Metasys Device ManagerAction successfulThe Database Manager monitoring functions shall be accessed through the Monitoring Settings window and shall continuously read database information once the user has logged in.The System shall provide user notification via taskbar icons and e-mail messages when a database value has exceeded a warning or alarm limit.The Monitoring Settings window shall have the following sections:General – Shall allow the user to set and review scan intervals and start times.Email – Shall allow the user to create and review e-mail and phone text messages to be delivered when a Warning or Alarm is generated.Warning – shall allow the user to define the Warning limit parameters, set the Reminder Frequency, and link the e-mail message.Alarm – shall allow the user to define the Alarm limit parameters, set the Reminder Frequency, and link the e-mail message.Database login – Shall protect the system from unauthorized database manipulation by creating a Read Access and a Write Access for each of the Trend, Alarm (Event) and Audit databases as well as an Expert Mode required to restore a database.The Monitoring Settings Taskbar shall provide the following informational icons:Normal – Indicates by color and size that all databases are within their limits.Warning - Indicates by color and size that one or more databases have exceeded their Warning limit.Alarm - Indicates by color and size that one or more databases have exceeded their Alarm limit.The System shall provide user notification via Taskbar icons and e-mail messages when a database value has exceeded a warning or alarm limit.Demand Limiting and Load RollingThe System shall provide a Demand Limiting and Load Rolling program for the purpose of limiting peak energy usage and reducing overall energy consumption.The System shall support both Sliding Window and Fixed Window methods of predicting demand.The System shall support three levels of sensitivity in the Sliding Window demand calculations for fine tuning the system.Low Setting – Sheds loads later and over the shortest amount of time. Maximizes the time the equipment is on.Medium Setting – Sheds loads earlier over a longer amount of time than the Low Setting. Increases the time the equipment is on and decreases the probability of exceeding the Tariff Target over the Low Setting.High Setting – Sheds loads earlier over a longer amount of time than the Medium Setting. Minimizes the probability of exceeding the Tariff Target.The System shall have both a Shed Mode and a Monitor Only Mode of operation.When the Shed Mode is engaged, the System shall actively control the Demand.When the Monitor Mode is engaged, the System will simulate the shedding action but will not take any action.The Demand Limiting program shall monitor the energy consumption rate and compare it to a user defined Tariff Target. The system shall maintain consumption below the target by selectively shedding loads based upon a user defined strategy.The Demand Limiting program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 10 separate Load Priorities. Each load shall be user assigned to a Load Priority.The Demand Limiting program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 12 separate Tariff Targets defining the maximum allowed average power during the current interval.The System shall support a Maximum Shed Time for each load as determined by the user. The system shall restore the load before the Maximum Shed time has expired.The System shall support a Minimum Shed Time for each load as determined by the user. The system shall not restore the load sooner than the Minimum Shed Time has expired.The System shall support a Minimum Release Time for each load as determined by the user. The System shall not shed the load until it has been off for the Minimum Release time.The System shall support three user defined options if the meter goes unreliable.Shedding – The currently shed loads will be released as their Maximum shed Times expire.Maintain the Current Shed Rate – The System will use the Demand Limiting shed rate that was present when the meter went unreliable.Use Unreliable Meter Shed Rate – the system will control to a user defined Unreliable Shed Rate target.The Load Rolling program shall sum the loads currently shed and compare it to a user defined Load Rolling Target. The system shall maintain consumption below the target by selectively shedding loads based upon a user defined Load Priority.The Load Rolling program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 10 separate Load Priorities. Each load shall be user assigned to a Load Priority.The Load Rolling program shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 12 separate Tariff Targets defining the amount of power by which the demand must be reduced.The System shall provide the user with a Load Tab that displays all of the Demand Limiting and Load Rolling parameters for any selected load.The System shall provide the user with a Load Summary that displays all of the loads associated with the Demand Limiting and Load Rolling programs. Status Icons for each load shall indicate:Load is OfflineLoad is DisabledLoad is ShedLoad is LockedLoad is in Comfort OverrideThe Load Summary shall include a Load Summary Runtime view listing the following load conditions:Load PriorityShed StrategyLoad RatingPresent ValueIneligibility StatusActive TimerTime RemainingLast Shed TimeNetwork Automation Engines (NAE)Network Automation EngineThe Network Automation Engine (NAE) shall be a fully user-programmable, supervisory controller. The NAE shall monitor the network of distributed application-specific controllers, provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a peer-to-peer basis with other Network Automation Engines.Automation network – The NAE shall reside on the automation network and shall support a subnet of system controllers.User Interface – Each NAE shall have the ability to deliver a web based User Interface (UI) as previously described. All computers connected physically or virtually to the automation network shall have access to the web based UI.The web based UI software shall be imbedded in the NAE. Systems that require a local copy of the system database on the user’s personal computer are not acceptable.The NAE shall support up a minimum of four (4) concurrent users.The web based user shall have the capability to access all system data through one NAE.Remote users connected to the network through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or telephone dial up shall also have total system access through one NAE.Systems that require the user to address more than one NAE to access all system information are not acceptable.The NAE shall have the capability of generating web based UI graphics. The graphics capability shall be imbedded in the NAE.Systems that support UI Graphics from a central database or require the graphics to reside on the user’s personal computer are not acceptable.The web based UI shall support the following functions using a standard version of Microsoft Internet Explorer:ConfigurationCommissioningData ArchivingMonitoringCommandingSystem DiagnosticsSystems that require workstation software or modified web browsers are not acceptable.The NAE shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems.Processor – The NAE shall be microprocessor-based with a minimum word size of 32 bits. The NAE shall be a multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time digital control processor. Standard operating systems shall be employed. NAE size and capability shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this Specification.Memory – Each NAE shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system, databases, and control programs, and to provide supervisory control for all control level devices.Hardware Real Time Clock – The NAE shall include an integrated, hardware- based, real-time clock.The NAE shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions:Power - On/OffEthernet Traffic – Ethernet Traffic/No Ethernet TrafficEthernet Connection Speed – 10 Mbps/100 MbpsFC Bus A – Normal Communications/No Field CommunicationsFC Bus B – Normal Communications/No Field CommunicationsPeer Communication – Data Traffic between NAE DevicesRun – NAE Running/NAE in Startup/NAE Shutting Down/Software Not RunningBat Fault – Battery Defective, Data Protection Battery Not Installed24 VAC – 24 VAC Present/Loss Of 24VACFault – General FaultModem RX – NAE Modem Receiving DataModem TX – NAE Modem Transmitting DataCommunications Ports – The NAE shall provide the following ports for operation of operator Input/Output (I/O) devices, such as industry-standard computers, modems, and portable operator’s terminals.Two (2) USB portTwo (2) URS-232 serial data communication portTwo (2) RS-485 portOne (1) Ethernet portDiagnostics – The NAE shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The Network Automation Engine shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions, or repeated failures to establish communication.Power Failure – In the event of the loss of normal power, The NAE shall continue to operate for a user adjustable period of up to 10 minutes after which there shall be an orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent the loss of database or operating system software.During a loss of normal power, the control sequences shall go to the normal system shutdown conditions. All critical configuration data shall be saved into Flash memory.Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off-time delay, the controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention through a normal soft-start sequence.Certification – The NAE shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).Controller network – The NAE shall support the following communication protocols on the controller network:The NAE shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network.The NAE shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.The NAE shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC).A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the NAE.The Conformance Statements shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.The NAE shall support a minimum of 100 control devices.The NAE shall support LonWorks enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver FTT10.All LonWorks controls devices shall be LonMark certified.The NAE shall support a minimum of 255 LonWorks enabled control devices.The NAE shall support the Johnson Controls N2 Field Bus.The NAE shall support a minimum of 100 N2 control devices.The Bus shall conform to Electronic Industry Alliance (EIA) Standard RS-485.The Bus shall employ a master/slave protocol where the NAE is the master.The Bus shall employ a four (4) level priority system for polling frequency.The Bus shall be optically isolated from the NAE.The Bus shall support the Metasys Integrator work Control Engine (NCE 25XX)The Network Control Engine (NCE) shall be a fully user-programmable, supervisory controller. The NCE shall monitor the network of distributed application-specific controllers, provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a peer-to-peer basis with other Network Automation Engines.The Network Control Engine (NCE) shall be a fully user-programmable, digital controller that includes a minimum of 33 I/O points.Automation Network – The NCE shall reside on the automation network and shall support a subnet of 32 Field controllers.User Interface – Each NCE shall have the ability to deliver a web based User Interface (UI) as previously described. All computers connected physically or virtually to the automation network shall have access to the web based UI.The web based UI software shall be imbedded in the NCE. Systems that require a local copy of the system database on the user’s personal computer are not acceptable.The NCE shall support a minimum of two (2) concurrent users.The NCE shall have the capability of generating web based UI graphics. The graphics capability shall be imbedded in the NCE.Systems that support UI Graphics from a central database or require the graphics to reside on the user’s personal computer are not acceptable.The web based UI shall support the following functions using a standard version of Microsoft Internet Explorer:ConfigurationCommissioningData ArchivingMonitoringCommandingSystem DiagnosticsSystems that require workstation software or modified web browsers are not acceptable.The NCE shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems.The NCE shall employ a finite state control engine to eliminate unnecessary conflicts between control functions at crossover points in their operational sequences. Suppliers using non-state based DDC shall provide separate control strategy diagrams for all controlled functions in their submittals.The NCE shall be factory programmed with a continuous adaptive tuning algorithm that senses changes in the physical environment and continually adjusts loop tuning parameters appropriately. Controllers that require manual tuning of loops or perform automatic tuning on command only, shall not be acceptable.The NCE shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.The NCE shall support the following number and types of inputs and outputs:Ten Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following:Analog Input, Voltage ModeAnalog Input, Current ModeAnalog Input, Resistive ModeBinary Input, Dry Contact Maintained ModeBinary Input, Pulse Counter ModeEight Binary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the following:Dry Contact Maintained ModePulse Counter ModeFour Analog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the followingAnalog Output, Voltage ModeAnalog Output, Current ModeSeven Binary Outputs - shall output the following:24 VAC TriacFour Configurable Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the following:Analog Output, Voltage ModeBinary Output, 24 VAC Triac ModeThe NCE shall have the ability to monitor and control a network of sensors and actuators over a Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus).The SA Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus supporting BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.The SA Bus shall support a minimum of 10 devices.The SA Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 1,200 Ft. between the NCE and the furthest connected device.The NCE shall have the capability to execute complex control sequences involving direct wired I/O points as well as input and output devices communicating over the Field Trunk or the SA Bus.The NCE shall support, but not be limited to, the following applications:Central Equipment including chillers and boilersLighting and electrical distributionBuilt-up air handling units for special applicationsPower generation and energy monitoring equipmentInterfaces to security and fire detection systemsThe NCE shall support a Local Controller Display (DIS1710) either as an integral part of the NCE or as a remote device communicating over the SA Bus.The Display shall use a BACnet Standard SSPC-135, clause 9 Master- Slave/Token-Passing protocol.The Display shall allow the user to view monitored points without logging into the system.The Display shall allow the user to view and change setpoints, modes of operation, and parameters.The Display shall provide password protection with user adjustable password timeout.The Display shall be menu driven with separate paths for:Input/OutputParameter/SetpointOverridesThe Display shall use easy-to-read English text messages.The Display shall allow the user to select the points to be shown and in what order.The Display shall support a back lit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with adjustable contrast and brightens and automatic backlight brightening during user interaction.The display shall be a minimum of 4 lines and a minimum of 20 characters per lineThe Display shall have a keypad with no more than 6 keys.The Display shall be panel mountable.The NCE shall be microprocessor-based with a minimum word size of 32 bits. The NAE shall be a multi-tasking, multi-user, and real-time digital control processor. Standard operating systems shall be employed. NCE size and capability shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this Specification.The NCE shall employ an industrial single board computer.Each NCE shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system, databases, and control programs, and to provide supervisory control for all control level devices.The NCE shall include an integrated, hardware-based, real-time clock.The NCE shall employ nonvolatile Flash memory to store all programs and data. The NCE shall employ a data protection battery to save data and power the real time clock when primary power is interrupted.The NCE shall provide removable, color coded, screw terminal blocks for 24 VAC power, communication bus and I/O point field wiring.The NCE shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions:PowerFaultSA BusFC BusModem TXModem RXBattery FaultEthernet10 LNK100 LNKRunPeer ComCommunications Ports – The NCE shall provide the following ports for operation of operator Input/Output (I/O) devices, such as industry-standard computers, modems, and portable operator’s terminals.USB portRS-232 serial data communication portRS-485 portRJ-45 Ethernet portRJ-12 jackDiagnostics – The NCE shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis, and diagnosis of all panel components. The NetworkControl Engine shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions, or repeated failures to establish communication.Power Failure – In the event of the loss of normal power, The NCE shall continue to operate for a user adjustable period of up to 10 minutes after which there shall be an orderly shutdown of all programs to prevent the loss of database or operating system software.During a loss of normal power, the control sequences shall go to the normal system shutdown conditions. All critical configuration data shall be saved into Flash memory.Upon restoration of normal power and after a minimum off-time delay, the controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention through a normal soft-start sequence.Certification – The NCE shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).File E107041, CCN PAZX, UL 916, Energy Management Equipment. FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class AField Controller Bus – The NCE shall support the following communication protocols on the Field Controller Bus:The NCE shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network.The NCE shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.The NAE shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC).A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the NCE.The Conformance Statements shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.The NCE shall support a minimum of 32 control devices.The NCE shall support LonWorks enabled devices using the Free Topology Transceiver FTT10 on the Field Controller Bus (LonWorks Network).All LonWorks controls devices shall be LonMark certified.The NCE shall support a minimum of 32 LonWorks enabled control devices.The NCE shall support the N2 devices on the Field Controller Bus (Johnson Controls N2 Bus).The NCE shall support a minimum of 32 N2 control devices.The Bus shall conform to Electronic Industry Alliance (EIA) Standard RS-485.The Bus shall employ a master/slave protocol where the NCE is the master.The Bus shall employ a four (4) level priority system for polling frequency.The Bus shall be optically isolated from the NCE.The Bus shall support the Metasys Integrator System.DDC System ControllersField Equipment ControllerThe Field Equipment Controller (FEC) shall be a fully user-programmable, digital controller that communicates via BACnet MS/TP protocol.The FEC shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC- 135, Clause 9 on the controller network.The FEC shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.The FEC shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the FEC.The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.The FEC shall employ a finite state control engine to eliminate unnecessary conflicts between control functions at crossover points in their operational sequences. Suppliers using non-state based DDC shall provide separate control strategy diagrams for all controlled functions in their submittals.Controllers shall be factory programmed with a continuous adaptive tuning algorithm that senses changes in the physical environment and continually adjusts loop tuning parameters appropriately. Controllers that require manual tuning of loops or perform automatic tuning on command only shall not be acceptable. The FEC shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.The FEC shall include a removable base to allow pre-wiring without the controller.The FEC shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions:Power OnPower OffDownload or Startup in progress, not ready for normal operationNo FaultsDevice FaultField Controller Bus - Normal Data TransmissionField Controller Bus - No Data TransmissionField Controller Bus - No CommunicationSensor-Actuator Bus - Normal Data TransmissionSensor-Actuator Bus - No Data TransmissionSensor-Actuator Bus - No CommunicationThe FEC shall accommodate the direct wiring of analog and binary I/O field points.The FEC shall support the following types of inputs and outputs:Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following:Analog Input, Voltage ModeAnalog Input, Current ModeAnalog Input, Resistive ModeBinary Input, Dry Contact Maintained ModeBinary Input, Pulse Counter ModeBinary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the following:Dry Contact Maintained ModePulse Counter ModeAnalog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the followingAnalog Output, Voltage ModeAnalog Output, current ModeBinary Outputs - shall output the following:24 VAC TriacConfigurable Outputs - shall be capable of the following:Analog Output, Voltage ModeBinary Output ModeThe FEC shall have the ability to reside on a Field Controller Bus (FC Bus).The FC Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus supporting BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.The FC Bus shall support communications between the FECs and the NAE.The FC Bus shall also support Input/Output Module (IOM) communications with the FEC and with the NAE.The FC Bus shall support a minimum of 100 IOMs and FECs in any combination.The FC Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 15,000 Ft. between the FEC and the furthest connected device.f.The FEC shall have the ability to monitor and control a network of sensors and actuators over a Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus).The SA Bus shall be a Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus supporting BACnet Standard Protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9.The SA Bus shall support a minimum of 10 devices per trunk.The SA Bus shall operate at a maximum distance of 1,200 Ft. between the FEC and the furthest connected device.The FEC shall have the capability to execute complex control sequences involving direct wired I/O points as well as input and output devices communicating over the FC Bus or the SA Bus.The FEC shall support, but not be limited to, the following:Chilled water/central plant automation applications including but not limited to the selection and sequencing of up to 8 chillers of different sizes (constant or variable speed capacity control), 8 primary and secondary chilled water pumps, as well as selection and sequencing of cooling towers and bypass valve. Sequencing of the devices shall consider user-defined efficiency ratings, runtime equalization and number-of- starts/number-of -stops.Heating central plant applicationsBuilt-up air handling units for special applicationsTerminal unitsSpecial programs as required for systems controlThe FEC shall support a Local Controller Display (DIS1710) either as an integral part of the FEC or as a remote device communicating over the SA Bus.The Display shall use a BACnet Standard SSPC-135, clause 9 Master- Slave/Token-Passing protocol.The Display shall allow the user to view monitored points without logging into the system.The Display shall allow the user to view and change setpoints, modes of operation, and parameters.The Display shall provide password protection with user adjustable password timeout.The Display shall be menu driven with separate paths for:Input/OutputParameter/SetpointOverridesThe Display shall use easy-to-read English text messages.The Display shall allow the user to select the points to be shown and in what order.The Display shall support a back lit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with adjustable contrast and brightens and automatic backlight brightening during user interaction.The display shall be a minimum of 4 lines and a minimum of 20 characters per lineThe Display shall have a keypad with no more than 6 keys.The Display shall be panel mountable.Field DevicesInput/Output ModuleThe Input/Output Module (IOM) provides additional inputs and outputs for use in the FEC.The IOM shall communicate with the FEC over the FC Bus or the SA Bus.The IOM shall support BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135, Clause 9 on the controller network.The IOM shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL Label.The IOM shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall be provided for the FEC.The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to bidding.The IOM shall be assembled in a plenum-rated plastic housing with flammability rated to UL94-5VB.The IOM shall have a minimum of 4 points to a maximum of 17 points.The IOM shall support the following types of inputs and outputs:Universal Inputs - shall be configured to monitor any of the following:Analog Input, Voltage ModeAnalog Input, Current ModeAnalog Input, Resistive ModeBinary Input, Dry Contact Maintained ModeBinary Input, Pulse Counter ModeBinary Inputs - shall be configured to monitor either of the following:Dry Contact Maintained ModePulse Counter ModeAnalog Outputs - shall be configured to output either of the followingAnalog Output, Voltage ModeAnalog Output, current ModeBinary Outputs - shall output the following:24 VAC TriacConfigurable Outputs - shall be capable of the following:Analog Output, Voltage ModeBinary Output ModeThe IOM shall include troubleshooting LED indicators to identify the following conditions:Power OnPower OffDownload or Startup in progress, not ready for normal operationNo FaultsDevice FaultNormal Data TransmissionNo Data TransmissionNo CommunicationSystem ToolsSystem Configuration ToolThe Configuration Tool shall be a software package enabling a computer platform to be used as a stand-alone engineering configuration tool for a Network Automation Engine (NAE) or a Network Integration Engine (NIE).The configuration tool shall provide an archive database for the configuration and application data.The configuration tool shall have the same look-and-feel at the User Interface (UI) regardless of whether the configuration is being done online or offline.The configuration tool shall include the following features:Basic system navigation tree for connected networksIntegration of Metasys N1, LonWorks, and BACnet enabled devicesCustomized user navigation treesPoint naming operating parameter settingGraphic diagram configurationAlarm and event message routingGraphical logic connector tool for custom programmingDownloading, uploading, and archiving databasesThe configuration tool shall have the capability to automatically discover field devices on connected buses and networks. Automatic discovery shall be available for the following field devices:BACnet DevicesLonWorks devicesN2 Bus devicesMetasys N1 networksThe configuration tool shall be capable of programming the Field Equipment Controllers.The configuration tool shall provide the capability to configure, simulate, and commission the Field Equipment Controllers.The configuration tool shall allow the FECs to be run in Simulation Mode to verify the applications.The configuration tool shall contain a library of standard applications to be used for configuration.The configuration tool shall be capable of programming the field devices.The configuration tool shall provide the capability to configure, simulate, and commission the field devices.The configuration tool shall allow the field devices to be run in Simulation Mode to verify the applications.The configuration tool shall contain a library of standard applications to be used for configurationA wireless access point shall allow a wireless enabled portable PC to make a temporary Ethernet connection to the automation network.The wireless connection shall allow the PC to access configuration tool through the web browser using the User Interface (UI).The wireless use of configuration tool shall be the same as a wired connection in every respect.The wireless connection shall use the Bluetooth Wireless Technology.Input DevicesGeneral RequirementsInstallation, testing, and calibration of all sensors, transmitters, and other input devices shall be provided to meet the system requirements.Temperature SensorsGeneral Requirements:Sensors and transmitters shall be provided, as outlined in the input/output summary and sequence of operations.The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type, and shall be either two-wire 1000 ohm nickel RTD, or two-wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD.The following point types (and the accuracy of each) are required, and their associated accuracy values include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire, and A to D conversion:Point TypeAccuracyChilled Water+ .5?F.Room Temp+ .5?F.Duct Temperature+ .5?F.All Others+ .75?F.Thermo wellsWhen thermo wells are required, the sensor and well shall be supplied as a complete assembly, including wellhead and Greenfield fitting.Thermo wells shall be pressure rated and constructed in accordance with the system working pressure.Thermo wells and sensors shall be mounted in a threadolet or 1/2” NFT saddle and allow easy access to the sensor for repair or replacement.Thermo wells shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel.Outside Air SensorsOutside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield.Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate that surrounds the sensor element.Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient temperatures.Humidity SensorsThe sensor shall be a solid-state type, relative humidity sensor of the Bulk Polymer Design. The sensor element shall resist service contamination.The humidity transmitter shall be equipped with non-interactive span and zero adjustments, a 2-wire isolated loop powered, 4-20 mA, 0-100% linear proportional output.The humidity transmitter shall meet the following overall accuracy, including lead loss and Analog to Digital conversion. 3% between 20% and 80% RH @ 77 Deg F unless specified elsewhere.Outside air relative humidity sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover. The transmitter shall be installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure with sealtite fittings and stainless steel bushings.A single point humidity calibrator shall be provided, if required, for field calibration. Transmitters shall be shipped factory pre-calibrated.Duct type sensing probes shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel, and shall be equipped with a neoprene grommet, bushings, and a mounting bracket.Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson ControlsDifferential Pressure TransmittersGeneral Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements:Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100% pressure over-range without damage, and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a momentary 40% over-range input.Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output signal.Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow sensing device, and shall be supplied with Tee fittings and shut-off valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines to allow the balancing Contractor and Owner permanent, easy-to-use connection.A minimum of a NEMA 1 housing shall be provided for the transmitter. Transmitters shall be located in accessible local control panels wherever possible.Low Differential Water Pressure Applications (0” - 20” w.c.)The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4 to 20 mA output in response to variation of flow meter differential pressure or water pressure sensing points.The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span adjustments that are adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications:.01-20” w.c. input differential pressure range.4-20 mA output.Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown.Reference Accuracy: +0.2% of full span.Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra and Mamac.Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21” w.c.)The differential pressure transmitter shall meet the low pressure transmitter specifications with the following exceptions:Differential pressure range 10” w.c. to 300 PSI.Reference Accuracy: +1% of full span (includes non-linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability).Standalone pressure transmitters shall be mounted in a bypass valve assembly panel. The panel shall be constructed to NEMA 1 standards. The transmitter shall be installed in the panel with high and low connections piped and valved. Air bleed units, bypass valves, and compression fittings shall be provided.Acceptable Manufacturers: Setra and Mamac.Flow MonitoringWater Flow MonitoringWater flow meters shall be electromagnetic type with integral microprocessor-Based electronics. The meter shall have an accuracy of 0.25%.Acceptable manufacturers: OniconPower Monitoring DevicesCurrent Measurement (Amps)Current measurement shall be by a combination current transformer and a current transducer. The current transformer shall be sized to reduce the full amperage of the monitored circuit to a maximum 5 Amp signal, which will be converted to a 4-20 mA DDC compatible signal for use by the Facility Management System.Current Transformer – A split core current transformer shall be provided to monitor motor amps.Operating frequency – 50 - 400 Hz.Insulation – 0.6 Kv class 10Kv BIL.UL recognized.Five amp secondary.Select current ration as appropriate for application.Acceptable manufacturers: Veris IndustriesCurrent Transducer – A current to voltage or current to mA transducer shall be provided. The current transducer shall include:6X input over amp rating for AC inrushes of up to 120 amps.Manufactured to UL 1244.Accuracy: +.5%, Ripple +1%.Minimum load resistance 30kOhm.Input 0-20 Amps.Output 4-20 mA.Transducer shall be powered by a 24VDC regulated power supply (24 VDC +5%).Acceptable manufacturers: Veris IndustriesRefrigerant Leak DetectorsThe refrigerant leak detector shall be a standalone device and shall provide a SPDT output to directly energize the refrigeration room exhaust ventilation fans. The detector shall include a sensor or sensors connected to a control panel. Two relay contacts at the control panel shall provide trouble and alarm indication to the Facility Management System. The alarm relay contact shall also directly energize the exhaust fans.The refrigerant leak detector shall sense the type of refrigerant used in the specified chillers. Multiple sensors shall be required to detect different refrigerants and/or provide proper sensing coverage for the area of the refrigeration room.Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson ControlsStatus and Safety SwitchesGeneral RequirementsSwitches shall be provided to monitor equipment status, safety conditions, and generate alarms at the BMS when a failure or abnormal condition occurs. Safety switches shall be provided with two sets of contacts and shall be interlock wired to shut down respective equipment.Current Sensing SwitchesThe current sensing switch shall be self-powered with solid-state circuitry and a dry contact output. It shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current sensing circuit, adjustable trip point, solid state switch, SPDT relay, and an LED indicating the on or off status. A conductor of the load shall be passed through the window of the device. It shall accept over- current up to twice its trip point range.Current sensing switches shall be used for run status for fans, pumps, and other miscellaneous motor loads.Current sensing switches shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only when the motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or coupling shall indicate a negative run status.Acceptable manufacturers: Veris IndustriesWater Flow SwitchesWater flow switches shall be equal to the Johnson Controls P74.Output DevicesActuatorsGeneral RequirementsDamper and valve actuators shall be electronic and/or pneumatic, as specified in the System Description section.Electronic Valve ActuatorsElectronic valve actuators shall be manufactured by the valve manufacturer.Each actuator shall have current limiting circuitry incorporated in its design to prevent damage to the actuator.Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the sequence of operations. Actuators shall provide the minimum torque required for proper valve close-off against the system pressure for the required application. The valve actuator shall be sized Based on valve manufacturer’s recommendations for flow and pressure differential. All actuators shall fail in the last position unless specified with mechanical spring return in the sequence of operations. The spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the valves, as required. All direct shaft mount rotational actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction.Modulating Actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC and 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA and the actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC. The feedback signal shall be independent of the input signal, and may be used to parallel other actuators and provide true position indication. The feedback signal of each valve actuator (except terminal valves) shall be wired back to a terminal strip in the control panel for trouble-shooting purposes.Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply and be UL listed. Butterfly isolation and other valves, as specified in the sequence of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to indicate open/closed position or be hard wired to start/stop the associated pump or chiller.Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson ControlsControl RelaysControl Pilot RelaysControl pilot relays shall be of a modular plug-in design with retaining springs or clips.Mounting Bases shall be snap-mount.DPDT, 3PDT, or 4PDT relays shall be provided, as appropriate for application.Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120VAC.Relays shall have an integral indicator light and check button.Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson Controls, LectroLighting Control RelaysLighting control relays shall be latching with integral status contacts.Contacts shall be rated for 20 amps at 277 VAC.The coil shall be a split low-voltage coil that moves the line voltage contact armature to the ON or OFF latched position.Lighting control relays shall be controlled by:Pulsed Tri-state Output – Preferred method.Pulsed Paired Binary Outputs.A Binary Input to the Facility Management System shall monitor integral status contacts on the lighting control relay. Relay status contacts shall be of the “dry-contact” type.The relay shall be designed so that power outages do not result in a change-of-state, and so that multiple same state commands will simply maintain the commanded state. Example: Multiple OFF command pulses shall simply keep the contacts in the OFF position.Control ValvesAll automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning and provide near linear heat transfer control. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe open, closed, or in their last position. All valves shall operate in sequence with another valve when required by the sequence of operations. All control valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer, and shall be guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling loads, as specified. All control valves shall be suitable for the system flow conditions and close against the differential pressures involved. Body pressure rating and connection type (sweat, screwed, or flanged) shall conform to the pipe schedule elsewhere in this Specification.Chilled water control valves shall be modulating plug, ball, and/or butterfly, as required by the specific application. Modulating water valves shall be sized per manufacturer’s recommendations for the given application. In general, valves (2 or 3-way) serving variable flow air handling unit coils shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 5 PSI. Valves (3-way) serving constant flow air handling unit coils with secondary circuit pumps shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to 25% the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 2 PSI. Mixing valves (3-way) serving secondary water circuits shall be sized for a pressure drop of no less than 5 PSI. Valves for terminal reheat coils shall be sized for a 2 PSIG pressure drop, but no more than a 5 PSI drop.Ball valves shall be used for hot and chilled water applications, water terminal reheat coils, radiant panels, unit heaters, package air conditioning units, and fan coil units except those described hereinafter.Modulating plug water valves of the single-seat type with equal percentage flow characteristics shall be used for all special applications as indicated on the valve schedule. Valve discs shall be composition type. Valve stems shall be stainless steel.Butterfly valves shall be acceptable for modulating large flow applications greater than modulating plug valves, and for all two-position, open/close applications. In-line and/or three-way butterfly valves shall be heavy-duty pattern with a body rating comparable to the pipe rating, replaceable lining suitable for temperature of system, and a stainless steel vane. Valves for modulating service shall be sized and travel limited to 50 degrees of full open. Valves for isolation service shall be the same as the pipe. Valves in the closed position shall be bubble-tight.Acceptable manufacturers: Johnson ControlsElectronic Signal Isolation TransducersA signal isolation transducer shall be provided whenever an analog output signal from the BMS is to be connected to an external control system as an input (suchas a chiller control panel), or is to receive as an input signal from a remote system.The signal isolation transducer shall provide ground plane isolation between systems.Signals shall provide optical isolation between systems.Acceptable manufacturers: Advanced Control TechnologiesExternal Manual Override StationsExternal manual override stations shall provide the following:An integral HAND/OFF/AUTO switch shall override the controlled device pilot relay.A status input to the Facility Management System shall indicate whenever the switch is not in the automatic position.A Status LED shall illuminate whenever the output is ON.An Override LED shall illuminate whenever the HOA switch is in either the HAND or OFF position.Contacts shall be rated for a minimum of 1 amp at 24 VAC.Miscellaneous DevicesVariable Frequency Motor Speed Control DrivesThe BMS Contractor shall furnish Yaskawa variable speed drives with bypass and Bacnet communications cards for all applications required a new VFD. All VFD’s are to be connected to the Metasys Bacnet MS/TP communications trunk.Local Control PanelsAll control panels shall be factory constructed, incorporating the BMS manufacturer’s standard designs and layouts. All control panels shall be UL inspected and listed as an assembly and carry a UL 508 label listing compliance. Control panels shall be fully enclosed, with perforated sub-panel, hinged door, and slotted flush latch.In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s), display module as specified and indicated on the plans, and I/O devices—such as relays, transducers, and so forth—that are not required to be located external to the control panel due to function. Where specified the display module shall be flush mounted in the panel face unless otherwise noted.All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provide via removable or fixed screw terminals.Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All provided terminal strips and wiring shall be UL listed, 300-volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring.All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped.A convenience 120 VAC duplex receptacle shall be provided in each enclosure, fused on/off power switch, and required transformers.Power SuppliesDC power supplies shall be sized for the connected device load. Total rated load shall not exceed 75% of the rated capacity of the power supply.2.Input: 120 VAC +10%, 60Hz.Output: 24 VDC.Line Regulation: +0.05% for 10% line change.Load Regulation: +0.05% for 50% load change.Ripple and Noise: 1 mV rms, 5 mV peak to peak.An appropriately sized fuse and fuse block shall be provided and located next to the power supply.A power disconnect switch shall be provided next to the power supply.ThermostatsElectric room thermostats of the heavy-duty type shall be provided for unit heaters, cabinet unit heaters, and ventilation fans, where required. All these items shall be provided with concealed adjustment. Finish of covers for all room- type instruments shall match and, unless otherwise indicated or specified, covers shall be manufacturer’s standard finish.3.Part 3 – Performance / ExecutionBMS Specific RequirementsGraphic DisplaysProvide a color graphic system flow diagram display for each building’s chilled water system components of the virtual central energy plant with all points. Color code rooms and zones with numbered designations.User shall access the various system schematics via a graphical penetration scheme and/or menu selection. .Installation PracticesBMS WiringAll conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the Building Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the BMS Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 16 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of Division 16 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this section.All BMS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with BMS manufacturer recommendations.The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the design responsibility of the BMS Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the BMS Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected components.Class 2 WiringAll Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise specified.Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations. Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5’ from the building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for thisapplication. Wiring shall be installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local code requirements.Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables, panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.BMS Line Voltage Power Source120-volt AC circuits used for the Building Management System shall be taken from panel boards and circuit breakers provided by Division 16.Circuits used for the BMS shall be dedicated to the BMS and shall not be used for any other purposes.DDC terminal unit controllers may use AC power from motor power circuits.BMS RacewayAll wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in this specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2”.All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.PenetrationsProvide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated BMS conduits and raceways.All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using approved fire resistive sealant.All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or enclosed raceway.Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true, and square..BMS Identification StandardsNode Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location.Cable types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and troubleshooting.BMS Panel InstallationThe BMS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not less than 2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each cabinet shall be anchored per the manufacturer’s recommendations.The BMS contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other trades and electrical and mechanical contractors.Input DevicesAll Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendationLocate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.HVAC Input Devices – Genera1All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation.Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.The mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as temperature wells, pressure taps, etc.Outside Air SensorsSensors shall be mounted on the North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact or located in a continuous intake flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions accurately.Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover.Water Differential Pressure SensorsDifferential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow-sensing device.Differential pressure transmitters shall be supplied with tee fittings and shut-off valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines.The transmitters shall be installed in an accessible location wherever possible.Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21” w.c.):Air bleed units, bypass valves and compression fittings shall be provided.Water Differential Pressure Status Switches:Install with shut off valves for isolation.HVAC Output DevicesAll output devices shall be installed per the manufacturers recommendation. The mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as control valves, pressure wells, etc.Actuators: All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the maximum system shut-off pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a smooth fashion through the entire stroke.Control Valves: Shall be sized for proper flow control with equal percentage valve plugs. The maximum pressure drop for water applications shall be 5 PSI. The maximum pressure drop for steam applications shall be 7 PSI.Electronic Signal Isolation Transducers: Whenever an analog output signal from the Building Management System is to be connected to an external control system as an input (such as a chiller control panel), or is to receive as an input a signal from a remote system, provide a signal isolation transducer. Signal isolation transducer shall provide ground plane isolation between systems. Signals shall provide optical isolation between systemsTrainingThe BMS contractor shall provide the following training services:Three days of on-site orientation by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of the specific installation details of the project. This orientationshall, at a minimum, consist of a review of the project as-built drawings, the BMS software layout and naming conventions, and a walk through of the facilities to identify panel and device locations.SequencesAHU UnitsSUPPLY FAN CONTROL: The variable speed supply fan will be started based on occupancy schedule. When the supply fan status indicates the fan started, the control sequence will be enabled. The supply fan will modulate to maintain the discharge static pressure at a setpoint of 3.0” wc (adjustable) at a sensor location of 2/3 down the longest duct run. upon a loss of airflow, the system will automatically restart.DAMPER CONTROL: When the ahu is enabled, the outdoor air and return air dampers shall modulate to maintain the minimum outside quantity (as measured by a flow station). When the ahu is shut off, the outside air damper shall close.ECONOMIZER CONTROL: When the ahu is enabled, the outdoor air is 55F or less, humidity is less than 60%, the return dampers and outside air dampers shall modulate to maintain the supply air temperature at 55F (adj.). If there is a call for cooling and the supply air temperature is falling below 55F (adj) with outside air dampers modulating to minimum, then at an ambient temperature of 45F (adj) the pre-heat coil shall modulate in sequence with the outside air dampers to maintain 55F (adj). When the ahu is shut off, the outside air damper shall close.TEMPERATURE CONTROL: the unit will modulate the cooling coil control valve and heating water control valve in sequence to maintain a supply air temperature (adjustable) of 55F. The DDC controller will initially modulate the cooling coil control valve. The DDC system shall monitor the temperature following the cooling coil (s) per ahu, and if the temperature drops lower than 36 F, the hot water valve is open, the ahu shall be shut down, the cooling valves shall close, the hot water valve will be open with hot water pump operational, and the outside air damper shall close.OCCUPIED MODE: The occupancy mode will be controlled via a network input. The occupancy mode can also be overridden by a network input.UNOCCUPIED MODE: the unit will remain on during unoccupied periods.COOLING COIL: The cooling coil(s) will modulate to maintain the temperature setpoint. when the unit is shutdown, the cooling coil will be commanded to a preset position should the outdoor air temperature fall below the low outdoor air temperature setpoint. Upon a loss of airflow, the cooling coil will be off.SAFETIES: Each ahu shall have a discharge air and a return air duct smoke detector and shall be wired to shut the unit down in the event that smoke is detected. Each ahu shall also be wired to shut down in the event of the fire alarm system goes into an alarm condition. Each unit shall have a freezstat to stop fan and close osa dampers. Each unit shall have over pressure switch on supply fan to stop fan when duct pressures exceed a set point.Chilled Water System:System enable: The ddc system shall start a chiller by first energizing the primary chilled water pump and opening the chiller isolation control valve. When the flow switch proves flow to the primary chiller, the chiller shall start using it’s internal controls and shall modulate capacity to maintain a 42 f leaving water temperature set point (adjustable), if the primary chiller fails to start after a 5 minute time period from the time the flow switch proves water flow, then the ddc system shall disable the chiller and shall alarm the operators in building 4705. The ddc system shall then start the lag chiller in the same sequence as the primary chiller. The ddc system shall monitor the status condition and the alarm condition of both chillers through either a direct bacnet ms/tp communication or using hardwired points to the ddc controller directly. When in mode 1, the chillers will cycle to provide cooling to the building and to the vcep. In mode 2, the chillers shall be commanded off, the chiller isolation valves shall be closed, and the vcep shall provide the chilled water to the building. In mode 3, the vcep is isolated from the building and the local chillers shall provide chilled water to the building. Sheet m10 shows the valve positions required for each mode of operationSECONDARY PUMP CONTROL: the secondary chilled water pump p-3 will be started when the building calls for cooling. The ddc system shall modulate the speed of the secondary chilled water pump to maintain the building chilled water differential pressure set point. If the pump status does not match the command, an alarm will be generated and the pump will be stopped. Upon loss of status, the pump will restart after the system reset is activated. The ddc system shall also monitor a differential pressure switch at the primary chilled water pump and shall disable the primary chilled water pump if the differential pressure is below 10 psi (adjustable).CHILLER CONTROL: Upon a call for cooling, the DDC system shall start the primary chilled water pump p-Once the primary chilled water pump status indicates the pump is in operation, the DDC system shall start the lead air cooled chiller. The air cooled chiller shall operate on it’s own controls and the DDC system shall monitor the chiller status and alarm status and shall notify the operator of any alarms on the existing server. if the lead chiller is unable to maintain the chilled water temperature set point, the system shall energize the lag chiller. if the system senses that the lead chiller does not start upon a signal to energize, the system shall start the lag chiller and shall notify the operators in building 4705.Hot Water System:SYSTEM ENABLE: The heating system will automatically start when the system enable is "on". when the system enable is "off", the heating system will be disabled.BOILER CONTROL: this system consists of two boilers. The ddc system shall energize the boiler control system upon a call for heat. Both boilers shall be controlled by it’s own internal controls. A single primary hot water pump (per boiler) shall be started by the boiler manufacturer’s controls (and not through the ddc system). The boilers own internal controls shall modulate to maintain supply water temperature delivered to the building hot water loop (set at 155 deg f). Boiler 1 shall be the lead boiler and boiler 2 shall be the lag boiler. If boiler 1 cannot maintain the set point for more than 15 minutes (adjustable) or goes into alarm for more than 5 minutes (adjustable), boiler 2 shall be enabled.SECONDARY HOT WATER PUMP CONTROL: When the system is enabled, the secondary hot water pump will be started with the boiler system. The ddc system shall monitor the hot water system differentialpressure and shall modulate the speed of the secondary hot water pump to maintain the hot water system differential pressure set point (adjustable). After the boiler system is commanded off, the pump will continue to run for a short time (adjustable) to dissipate the heat. If the pump status does not match the command, an alarm will be generated and the pump will be stopped. upon loss of status, the pump will restart after the system reset is activated.The DDC system shall monitor the hot water supply temperature, the hot water return temperature and shall monitor the boilers through the factory provided bacnet ms/tp communications cards.If the boiler command does not match status, an alarm shall be generated at the emcs.VAV BoxesOCCUPIED MODE: When the zone temperature is between the occupied heating and cooling setpoints (inside of the bias), the primary air damper will be at the minimum cfm and there will be no mechanical heating. On a rise in zone temperature above the cooling setpoint, the primary air damper will increase the cfm and there will be no mechanical heating. On a drop in zone temperature below the heating setpoint, the reheat coil will be used to maintain the zone temperature and the damper is controlled to provide a minimum cfm.UNOCCUPIED MODE: When in this mode, while the zone temperature is between the unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints (inside of the bias), the primary air damper will be at the minimum cfm and there will be no mechanical heating. on a rise in zone temperature above the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the primary air damper will increase the cfm (if available) and there will be no mechanical heating. on a drop in zone temperature below the unoccupied heating setpoint, the reheat coil will be used to maintain the zone temperature and the primary air damper will be at the minimum cfm.DISCHARGE AIR TEMP SENSOR: A discharge air temp sensor is provided on each box for monitoring purposes.OCCUPANCY CONTROL: A temporary occupancy button on the zone sensor will place the box in occupied mode for an adjustable length of time.UNIT ENABLE: A network unit enable signal will control the mode of the WORK WARMUP-COOLDOWN: Warmup-cooldown modes will be activated by a network command. When the zone temperature is below the effective heating setpoint, the box will use warm air flow, then reheat coil to maintain the zone temperature. When the box is satisfied the flow will remain at the warm up minimum position until the warm command has been removed.ADDITIONAL POINTS MONITORED BY THE FMS:Discharge air smoke alarm (da-sd)Low temperature alarm (lt-a)Force Protection - Emergency Stop Button (BIG RED BUTTON):Furnish and install an emergency stop “big red button”, per government standards, in enclosure with clear polycarbonate cover; location to be determined by government. The controls contractor is to extendcontrol wire from the emergency stop button to existing fans (MCC where applicable), and from all air handlers or air moving devices. All control wire to be installed in raceway per div 16 raceway requirements. Controls contractor to furnish and install all relays compatible with fan starters/vfd and through DDC for each ahu. Activation of the emergency stop button shall cause the osa dampers to close and exhaust/supply fans turn off. All noted mechanical equipment shall remain off until the pushbutton has been manually reset. The DDC shall have feed back with both the emergency stop button and osa dampers. Coordinate force protection work with electrical contractor, and coordinate button location with government. A “virtual” red button will also be required.SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTSPART 1GENERALSection 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMSapply to work specified in this section.SUBMITTALSSubmit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:Shop DrawingsRecord DrawingsProduct DataGalvanized Steel Ductwork Materials Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings Turning VanesFlexible Connectors Flexible Duct Materials Power Operated DampersFire Dampers and Wall Collars Gravity Backdraft and Relief Dampers Manual Volume DampersTest ReportsDuctwork Leakage TestsOperation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals Power Operated DampersFire Dampers and Wall CollarsRECORD DRAWINGSProvide record drawings with current factual information.Include deviations from, and amendments to, the drawings and concealed or visible changes in the work, for medium/high pressure ductwork systems.Label drawings "As-Built".PART 2PRODUCTSInclude the manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site information within material, equipment, and fixture lists.SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONMATERIALSGalvanized Steel Ductwork MaterialsProvide hot-dip galvanized carbon steel ductwork sheet metal of lock-forming quality, with regular spangle-type zinc coating, conforming to ASTM A924/A924M and ASTM A653/A653M, Designation G90.Treat duct surfaces to be painted by apostatizing.Conform toASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966 for sheet metalgages and reinforcement thickness.Low pressure ductwork minimum standards are:MINIMUM SHEET METAL GAGE DUCT WIDTHINCHESGAGE0 - 122613 - 302431 - 6022Brazing MaterialsProvide silicon bronze brazing materials conforming to AWS A5.8/A5.8M.Mill-Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting MaterialsConform to ASTM A36/A36Mfor mill-rolled structural steel and, wherever in contact with sheet metal ducting galvanize to commercial weight of zinc or coated with materials conforming to ASTM A123/A123M [SSPC Painting Manual].In lieu of mill-rolled structural steel, submit for approval equivalent strength, proprietary design, rolled-steel structural support PONENTSRound Sheet Metal Duct FittingsSubmit offset fitting configurations for approval.Shop fabricate fittings.2.3.1.1Fittings ConstructionManufacture as separate fittings, not as tap collars welded or brazed into duct sections.Provide two-piece type miter elbows for angles less than 31 degrees, three- piece type for angles 31 through 60 degrees, and five-piece type for angles61 through 90 degrees.Ensure centerline radius of elbows is 1-1/2 times fitting cross section diameter.Provide conical type crosses, increasers, reducers, reducing tees, and 90- degree tees.Ensure cutouts in fitting body are equal to branch tap dimension or, where smaller, excess material is flared and rolled into smooth radius nozzle configuration.Round, High-Pressure, Double-Wall Sheet Metal Ducts Shop fabricate ducts and fittings.Construction comprises of an airtight, vapor barrier, outer pressure shell, a 1 inch insulation layer, and a metal inner liner that completely covers the insulation throughout the system.Provide insulation conforming to NFPA 90A and ASTM C1071 for thermal conductivity in accordance with ASTM D257.ReinforcementSupport inner liners of both duct and fittings by metal spacers welded in position to maintain spacing and concentricity.FittingsSubmit offset fitting configurations for approval.Make divided flow fittings as separate fittings, not tap collars into duct sections, with the following construction requirements:Sound, airtight, continuous welds at intersection of fitting body and tapTap liner securely welded to inner liner, with weld spacing not to exceed 3 inchesPack insulation around the branch tap area for complete cavity filling.Carefully fit branch connection to cutout openings in inner liner without spaces for air erosion of insulation and without sharp projections that cause noise and airflow disturbance.Continuously braze seams in the pressure shell of fittings.Protect galvanized areas that have been damaged by welding with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.Construct two-piece type elbows for angles through 35 degrees, three-piece type for angles 36 through 71 degrees, and five-piece type for angles 72 through 90 degrees.Turning VanesProvide double-wall type turning vanes, commercially manufactured for high- velocity system service.DampersConstruct low pressure drop, high-velocity manual volume dampers, and high- velocity fire dampers in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.Flexible Connectors For Sheet MetalUse UL listed connectors, 30-ounce per square yard, waterproof, fire- retardant, airtight, woven fibrous-glass cloth, double coated with chloroprene.Clear width, not including clamping section, is 6 to 8 inches.Duct HangersFor duct hangers in contact with galvanized duct surfaces, provide galvanized steel painted with inorganic zinc.Mill-Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting MaterialsProvide mill-rolled structural steel conforming to ASTM A36/A36M. Whenever in contact with sheet metal ducting, provide galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.In lieu of mill-rolled structural steel, submit equivalent strength, proprietary-design, rolled-steel structural support systems for approval.Flexible Duct MaterialsEnsure flexible duct connectors comply with NFPA 90A, and conform with UL 181, Class 1 material.Provide wire-reinforced cloth duct consisting of a chloroprene fibrous-glass cloth bonded to and supported by a corrosion-protected spring steel helix.Fabric may be a laminate of metallic film and fibrous glass.Ensure working pressure rating of ducting is not less than three times maximum system pressure, and the temperature range is minus 20 to plus 175 degrees F.Provide wire-reinforced fibrous-glass duct consisting of a minimum 1 pound/cubic foot density fibrous glass, bonded to and supported by corrosion-protected spring helix.Vapor barriers are a minimum of 4 mil, pigmented polyvinylchloride film.Ensure duct is bendable without damage through 180 degrees with an inside bend radius not greater than two duct diameters.Thermal conductivity is not greater than 0.23 Btu per hour per square foot per degrees F at 75 degrees F mean temperature.Ensure permeance is not greater than 0.10 perm.Working pressure range is fromminus 1/2 inchwg to plus 2 inches wg.Working temperature ranges from minus20 to plus 250 degrees F.Minimum sustained velocity without delamination is 2,400 fpm.Use materials conforming to NFPA 90A.Manual Volume DampersConform to SMACNA 1966 for volume damper construction.Equip dampers with an indicating quadrant regulator with a locking feature externally located and easily accessible for adjustment and standoff brackets to allow mounting outside external insulation.Where damper rod lengths exceed 30 inches, provide a regulator at each end of damper shaft.2.3.12.1Damper ConstructionProvide all damper shafts with two-end bearings.Ensure splitter damper is 22-gage sheet metal and is 2 gages heavier than duct in which installed].Hinges are1/8 inch thick door type.Provide a full length damper shaft and extend it beyond the damper blade. use a 3/8 inch square shaft for damper lengths up to 20 inches and a 1/2 inch square shaft for damper lengths 20 inches and larger.Where necessary to prevent damper vibration or slippage, provide adjustable support rods with locking provisions external to duct at damper blade end.Provide dampers in ducts having a width perpendicular to the axis of the damper that is greater than 12 inches of multiblade type having a substantial frame with blades fabricated of 16-gage metal.Provide blades not exceeding 10 inches in width and 48 inches in length, welded to 1/2 inch diameter shafts.Ensure dampers greater than [48] [ ] inches in width are made in two or more sections with intermediate mullions, each section being mechanically interlocked with the adjoining section or sections.Provide blades with oil-impregnated sintered bronze bearings and connect so that adjoining blades rotate in opposite directions.2.3.13Gravity Backdraft And Relief DampersConstruct frames of not less than 1-1/2- by 4 inch reinforced 16-gage galvanized carbon steel.Solidly secure frames and mullions in place and seal with elastomer caulking against air bypass.Provide shaft bearings with oil-impregnated bronze.Equip counterbalanced dampers with fixed or adjustable counterbalancing weights.2.3.13.1Blade ConstructionMaximum blade width is 9 inches, and maximum blade length is 36 inches. Blade material is 16-gage galvanized steel alloy aluminum 18-gage AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel.Provide blades with mechanically retained seals and 90-degree limit stops.Blades linked together for relief service dampers are to open not less than30 degrees on 0.05 inch wg differential pressure.Power-Operated DampersEnsure dampers conform to applicable requirements specified under Section 23 09 33.00 40 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC.Fire Dampers And Wall CollarsEnsure fire damper locations are in accordance with NFPA 90A. Provide fire dampers in ductwork at firewall barriers.Construct and label fire dampers in accordance with UL 555 to provide damper and mounting fire-resistance that equals or exceeds fire-resistance of the construction in which installed.For link loads in excess of 20 pounds, provide UL-approved quartzoid links.Construct wall collars in accordance with UL 555.PART 3EXECUTIONPREPARATIONFor sheet metal surfaces to be painted, and surfaces to which adhesives are to be applied, clean surface of oil, grease, and deleterious substances.Ensure strength is adequate to prevent failure under service pressure or vacuum created by fast closure of duct devices.Provide leaktight, automatic relief devices.Construction StandardsProvide sheet metal construction in accordance with the recommendations for best practices in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, SMACNA 1966, NFPA 90A, and ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32.Design and fabricate supplementary steel in accordance with AISC 360 and AISC 325.Where construction methods for certain items are not described in the referenced standards or herein, perform the work in accordance with recommendations for best practice defined in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK.INSTALLATIONWhen furnishing the listing of product installations for medium/high pressure ductwork systems include identification of at least 5 units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum period of 5 years.Include purchaser, address of installation, service organization, and date of installation.Fabricate airtight and include reinforcements, bracing, supports, framing, gasketing, sealing, and fastening to provide rigid construction and freedom from vibration, airflow-induced motion and noise, and excessive deflection at specified maximum system air pressure and velocity.Provide offsets and transformations as required to avoid interference with the building construction, piping, or equipment.Make plenum anchorage provisions, sheet metal joints, and other areas airtight and watertight by caulking mating galvanized steel and concrete surfaces with a two-component elastomer.JointingEnclose dampers located behind architectural intake or exhaust louvers by a rigid sheet metal collar and sealed to building construction with elastomers for complete air tightness.Provide outside air-intake ducts and plenums made from sheet metal with soldered watertight joints.DuctsWherever ducts pass through firewalls or through walls or floors dividing conditioned spaces from unconditioned spaces, provide a flanged segment in that surface during surface construction.Where interiors of ducting may be viewed through air diffusion devices, construct the viewed interior with sheet metal and paint flat black.APPLICATIONLow Pressure Sheet Metal DuctsWeld angle iron frames at corners and ends, whenever possible.Rivet or weld angle iron reinforcements to ducts not more than 6 incheson center, with not less than [wo points of attachment.Spot welding, where used, is 3 inches on center.Seal standard seam joints with an elastomer compound to comply with SMACNA 1966 Seal Class A, B or C as applicable.Limit crossbreaking to 4 feet and provide on all ducts 8 inches wide and wider.Provide bead reinforcement in lieu of crossbreaking where panel popping may occur.Where rigid insulation is applied, crossbreaking is not required.Longitudinal Duct Seams Provide Pittsburgh lock corner seams.Joints and GasketsBolt companion angle flanges together with 1/4 inch diameter bolts and nuts spaced 6 inches on center.Gasket flanged joints with chloroprene full-face gaskets 1/8 inch thick, with Shore A 40 durometer hardness.Use one piece gaskets, dovetailed at joints.Flexible Duct JointsBetween flexible duct without sheet metal collars and round metal ductwork connections make joints by trimming the ends, coating the inside of the flexible duct for a distance equal to depth of insertion with elastomer caulk, and by securing with sheet metal screws or binding with a strap clamp.Square ElbowsProvide single-vane duct turns in accordance with SMACNA 1966, use on ducts12 inches in width and narrower.Provide double-vane duct turns in accordance with SMACNA 1966.]3.3.1.5Radius ElbowsConform to SMACNA 1966 for radius elbows.Provide an inside radius equal to the width of the duct.Where installation conditions preclude use of standard elbows, the inside radius may be reduced to a minimum of 0.25 times duct width and install turning vanes in accordance with the following schedule.RADIUS OF TURNINGWIDTH OF ELBOWSVANES IN PERCENT OF DUCT WIDTH INCHESVANE NO. 1VANE NO. 2VANE NO. 3Up to 1656----17 to 484373--49 and over375583Where two elbows are placed together in the same plane in ducts 30 inches wide and larger, continue the guide vanes through both elbows rather than spaced in accordance with above schedule.Outlets, Inlets, And Duct BranchesInstall branches, inlets, and outlets so that air turbulence is reduced to a minimum and air volume properly apportioned.Install adjustable splitter dampers at all supply junctions to permit adjustment of the amount of air entering the branch.Wherever an air-diffusion device is shown as being installed on the side, top, or bottom of a duct, and whenever a branch takeoff is not of the splitter type; provide a commercially manufactured 45 degree side-take-off (STO) fitting with manual volume damper to allow adjustment of the air quantity and to provide an even flow of air across the device or duct it services.Where a duct branch is to handle more than 25 percent of the air handled by the duct main, use a complete 90-degree increasing elbow with an inside radius of 0.75 times branch duct width.Size of the leading end of the increasing elbow within the main duct with the same ratio to the main duct size as the ratio of the related air quantities handled.Where a duct branch is to handle 25 percent or less of the air handled by the duct main, construct the branch connection with a 45 degree side take- off entry in accordance with SMACNA 1966.Duct TransitionsWhere the shape of a duct changes, ensure the angle of the side of the transition piece does not exceed 15 degrees from the straight run of duct connected thereto.Where equipment is installed in ductwork, ensure the angle of the side of the transition piece from the straight run of duct connected thereto doesnot exceed 15 degrees on the upstream side of the equipment and 22-1/2 degrees on the downstream side of the equipment.Branch ConnectionsConstruct radius tap-ins in accordance with SMACNA 1966.Access OpeningsConstruct access door in accordance with SMACNA 1966, except that sliding doors may be used only for special conditions upon prior approval.Provide double-panel type doors.Install access doors and panels in ductwork [upstream from coils] [upstream and downstream from coils] [adjacent to fire dampers] [at controls or at any item requiring periodic inspection, adjustment, maintenance, or cleaning] [where indicated], and every 20 feet for indoor air quality housekeeping purposes.Minimum access opening size is 18x18 inches, unless precluded by duct dimensions or otherwise indicated.Make airtight access doors that leak by adding or replacing hinges and latches or by construction of new doors adequately reinforced, hinged, and latched.Plenum ConstructionProvide intake and discharge plenum companion angle joints with the following minimum thickness of materials:LONGESTSHEETANGLESMETALREINFORCEMENTSIDEUSS GAGECOMPANION ANGLESINCHES, 24 INCHES ONINCHESALL SIDESINCHESCENTER MAXIMUMTo 48201-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/81-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/849to84182by2by1/82by2by3/1685to120162by2by1/82by2by1/8121 and larger142 by 2 by 3/162 by 2 by 3/16At the floor line and other points where plenums join masonry construction, bolt panels12 inches on center to 2- by 2- by 3/16 inch thick hot-dip galvanized steel angle that has been secured to the masonry with masonry anchors and bolts 24 inches on center and caulked tight to the masonry.Anchor panels to curbing by not less than 2- by 2- by 3/16 inch thick hot- dip galvanized steel angle iron.Concrete curbing includes angle iron nosing with welded studs for the anchoring of panels.Level nosing at curb height within plus or minus 1/16 inch.Weld and grind miter corners for angle iron and channel iron.Plenum Door ConstructionConstruct plenum access doors in accordance with SMACNA 1966 except that access doors smaller than man-access doors have door openings framed with angle iron that is one commercial size smaller than the specified panel reinforcement.Ensure man-access door size conforms to per SMACNA 1966 and paragraph ACCESS OPENINGS.Insulated and uninsulated construction is per SMACNA 1966.Frame door openingswith channel iron.Frame doors with angle iron.Size channel iron and angle iron approximately the same size as specified panel reinforcement.Manual Volume DampersProvide balancing dampers of the splitter, butterfly, or multilouver type, to balance each respective main and branch duct.For dampers regulated through ceilings provide a regulator concealed in a box mounted in the ceiling, with a cover finish aesthetically compatible with ceiling surface.Where ceiling is of removable construction, set regulators above the ceiling, and mark the location on ceiling in a manner acceptable to the Contracting Officer.Flexible Connectors For Sheet MetalConnect air handling equipment, ducts crossing building expansion joints, and fan inlets and outlets to upstream and downstream components by treated woven-cloth connectors.Install connectors only after system fans are operative, and vibration isolation mountings have been adjusted.When system fans are operating, ensure connectors are free of wrinkle caused by misalignment or fan reaction.Width of surface is curvilinear.3.3.2Rectangular Sheet Metal Ducts3.3.2.1Medium-Pressure Gages, Joints, And ReinforcementEnsure minimum sheet metal gages, joints, and reinforcements between joints are in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16,ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.Ensure sheet metal minimum thickness, transverse reinforcement between joints, and joints of ducts are in accordance with the following:SHEETLONGESTMETALREINFORCEMENT ANGLES SIDEGAGECOMPANION ANGLEINCHES, 24 INCHES ONINCHESALL SIDESINCHESCENTER MAXIMUM(BACK TO BACK)97 to 108162 by 2 by 1/8,Two 2 by 2 by 1/8,two tie rodstwo tie rods alongalong angleangle109 to 132162 by 2 by 3/16, two tie rods along angleTwo 2 by 2 by 3/16, two tie rods along angle133 and longer142 by 2 by 3/16, with tie rodsevery 48 inchesTwo 2 by 2 by 3/16, with tie rods every48 inches3.3.2.Duct Branch TransitionWhere a duct branch handles over 25 percent of the air transported by the duct main, use a complete 90-degree increasing, with an inside radius of0.75 times duct branch width.Ensure the size of the trailing end of the increasing elbow within the main duct is in the same ratio to the main duct size as the ratio of the relative air quantities handled.Where a duct branch is to handle 25 percent or less of the air handled by the duct main, provide a branch connection with an inside radius of 0.75 times branch duct width, a minimum arc length of 45 degrees, and an outside radius of 1.75 times duct branch width.Place arc tangent to duct main.Round Sheet Metal DuctsDuct Gages And ReinforcementSheet metal minimum thickness, joints, and reinforcement between joints shall be in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.Provide ducts with supplemental girth angle supports, riveted with [solid rivets 6 inches on center] [tack welded] [brazed] to duct.Locate girth angles as follows:DIAMETER, INCHESREINFORCEMENT-MAXIMUM SPACING, INCHES25to361-1/4 by 1-1/4, 1/8 inches on centerthick,7237to501-1/4 by 1-1/4, 1/8 inches on centerthick,6051to601-1/2 by 1-1/2, 1/8 inches on centerthick,48Bolt heads and nuts shall be hex-shaped, 5/16 inch diameter for ducts up to50 inch diameter, and 3/8 inch diameter for 51 inch diameter ducts and larger.[Continuously weld] [Braze] flanges to duct on outside of duct and intermittently welded with 1 inch welds every4 inches on inside joint face. Remove excess filler metal from inside face.Protect galvanized areas that have been damaged by welding with manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant coating.Duct JointsProvide duct joints manufactured by machine, with spiral locksets to and including 60 inch diameters, and to dimensional tolerances compatible with fittings provided.Draw band girth joints are not acceptable.Prepare slip joints by coating the male fitting with elastomer sealing materials, exercising care to prevent mastic from entering fitting bore, leaving only a thin annular mastic line exposed internally.Use sheet metal screws to make assembly rigid, not less than four screws per joint, maximum spacing 6 inches.Do not use pop rivets.Tape and heat seal all joints.Duct TransitionsWhere the shape of a duct changes, ensure the angle of the side of the transition piece does not exceed 15 degrees from the straight run of duct connected thereto.Where equipment is installed in ductwork, ensure the angle of the side of the transition piece from the straight run of duct connected thereto does not exceed 15 degrees on the upstream side of the equipment and 22-1/2 degrees on the downstream side of the equipment.Duct SupportsInstall duct support in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.Meet the minimum size for duct hangers as specified in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.Provide two hangers where necessary to eliminate sway.Support attachment to duct surfaces by [solid rivet] [bolt] [welding] 4 inches on center.Take the following into account in selection of a hanging system:Location and precedence of work under other sectionsInterferences of various piping and electrical conduitEquipment,and building configurationStructural and safety factor requirementsVibration, and imposed loads under normal and abnormal service conditionsSupport sizes, configurations, and spacing are given to show the minimal type of supporting components required.If installed loads are excessive for the specified hanger spacing, hangers, and accessories [provide heavier- duty components] [reduce hanger spacing].After system startup, replace any duct support device which, due to length, configuration, or size, vibrates or causes possible failure of a member, or the condition otherwise be alleviated.Exercise special care to preclude cascade-type failures.Do not hang ductwork and equipment from roof deck, piping, or other ducts or equipment.Maximum span between any two points is 10 feet, with lesser spans as required by duct assemblies, interferences, and permitted loads imposed.Where support from metal deck systems is involved, coordinate support requirements with installation of metal deck.Double-wall DuctsProvide round, double-wall duct supports as recommended by the manufacturer except that minimum hanger ring and strap size is 1-1/2 inches by 1/8 inch.HangarsAttach hanger rods, angles, and straps to beam clamps.Receive approval from the Contracting Officer for concrete inserts, masonry anchors, and fasteners for the application.Hardened high-carbon spring-steel fasteners fitted onto beams and miscellaneous structural steel are acceptable upon prior approval of each proposed application and upon field demonstration of conformance to specification requirements.Make fasteners from steel conforming to AISI Type [1055] [1070], treated and finished in conformance with SAE AMS 2480, Type Z (zinc phosphate base), Class 2 (supplementary treatment).Verify a 72-hour load-carrying capacity by a certified independent laboratory.Where ductwork system contains heavy equipment, excluding air-diffusion devices and single-leaf dampers, hang such equipment independently of the ductwork by means of rods or angles of sizes adequate to support the load.Sufficiently cross-brace hangers to eliminate swaying both vertically and laterally.InstallationEnsure hanger spacing gives a 20-to-1 safety factor for supported load. Maximum load supported by any two fasteners is 100 pounds.Install hangers on both sides of all duct turns, branch fittings, and transitions.Friction rod assemblies are not acceptable.Strap-type HangarsSupport rectangular ducts up to 36 inches by strap-type hangers attached at not less than three places to not less than two duct surfaces in different planes.Perforated strap hangers are not acceptable.Trapeze HangarsSupport rectangular ducting, 36 inches and larger, by trapeze hangers. Support ducts situated in unconditioned areas and required to have insulation with a vapor-sealed facing on trapeze hangers.Space hangers far enough out from the side of the duct to permit the duct insulation to be placed on the duct inside the trapeze.Do not penetrate the vapor-sealed facing with duct hangers.Where trapeze hangers are used, support the bottom of the duct on angles sized as follows:WIDTH OF DUCT, INCHESMINIMUM BOTTOM ANGLE SIZE, INCHES30and smaller1-1/4by1-1/4by1/831to 481-1/2by1-1/2by1/849to 721-1/2by1-1/2by3/1673 to 962 by 2 by 1/497 and wider3 by 3 by 1/4PurlinsDo not support ducting, when supported from roof purlins, at points greater than one-sixth of the purlin span from the roof truss.Do not exceed 400 pounds load per hanger when support is from a single purlin or 800 pounds when hanger load is applied halfway between purlins by means of auxiliary support steel provided under this section.When support is not halfway between purlins, the allowable hanger load is the product of 400 times the inverse ratio of the longest distance of purlin-to-purlin spacing.When the hanger load exceeds the above limits, provide reinforcing of purlin(s) or additional support beam(s).When an additional beam is used, have the beam bear on the top chord of the roof trusses, and also bear over the gusset plates of top chord.Stabilize the beam by connection to roof purlin along bottom flange.Purlins used for supporting fire-protection sprinkler mains, electrical lighting fixtures, electrical power ducts, or cable trays are considered fully loaded.Provide supplemental reinforcing or auxiliary support steel for these purlins.Flexible Connectors For Steel MetalConnect air-handling equipment, ducts crossing building expansion joints, and fan inlets and outlets to upstream and downstream components by treated woven-cloth connectors.Install connectors only after system fans are operative and all vibration isolation mountings have been adjusted.When system fans are operating, ensure connectors are free of wrinkles caused by misalignment or fan reaction.Width of surface is curvilinear.Insulation Protection AnglesProvide galvanized 20-gage sheet, formed into an angle with a 2 inch exposed long leg with a 3/8 inchstiffening break at outer edge, and with a variable concealed leg, depending upon insulation thickness.Install angles over all insulation edges terminating by butting against a wall, floor foundation, frame, and similar construction.Fasten angles in place with blind rivets through the protection angle, insulation, and sheetmetal duct or plenum.Install angles after final insulation covering has been applied.Duct Probe AccessProvide holes with neat patches, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on caps for air-balancing pitot tube access.Provide extended-neck fittings where probe access area is insulated.Openings In Roofs And WallsBuilding openings are fixed and provide equipment to suit.FIELD QUALITY CONTROLFire Damper TestsPerform operational tests on each fire damper in the presence of the Contracting Officer by enervating a fusible link with localized heat. Provide new links and install after successful testing.Ductwork Leakage TestsConduct complete leakage test of new ductwork in accordance with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.Perform tests prior toinstalling ductwork insulation.InspectionInspect ductwork in accordance with SMACNA 1987.DUCTWORK CLEANING PROVISIONSProtect open ducting from construction dust and debris in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer.Clean dirty assembled ducting by subjecting all main and branch interior surfaces to airstreams moving at velocities two times specified working velocities, at static pressures within maximum ratings.This may be accomplished by:filter-equipped portable blowers which remain the Contractor's property; wheel-mounted, compressed-air operated perimeter lances which direct the compressed air and which are pulled in the direction of normal airflow; or other means approved by the Contracting Officer.Use water- and oil- free compressed air for cleaning ducting.After construction is complete, and prior to acceptance of the work, remove construction dust and debris from exterior surfaces.[Clean in conformance with SMACNA 1987.OPERATION AND MAINTENANCESubmit 6 copies of the operation and maintenance manuals 30 calendar days prior to testing the medium/high pressure ductwork systems.Update data and resubmit for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to contract completion.Ensure Operation and Maintenance Manuals are consistent with manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures and safety precautions.-- End of Section --SECTION 23 36 00.00 40AIR TERMINAL UNITS05/16PART 1GENERALSection 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMSapplies to work specified in this section.REFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.AIR DIFFUSION COUNCIL (ADC)ADC Standards Manual(2008; 5th Edition) Flexible Duct PerformanceInstallation StandardsAIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)AHRI 880 I-P(2011) Performance Rating of Air Terminals ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)ASTM C1071(2016) Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)ASTM E84(2018) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsNATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 70(2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2; TIA17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6; TIA 17-7;TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10; TIA 17-11; TIA17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA 17-14) NationalElectrical CodeNFPA 90A(2018) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating SystemsUNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)UL 181(2013; Reprint Apr 2017) UL Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air ConnectorsUL 486A-486B(2013; Reprint Jan 2016) Wire ConnectorsADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSCoordinate layout and installation of air terminal units and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, communication and security systems,and partition assemblies.1.2.1Pre-Installation MeetingsSubmit itemized lists for all materials, equipment, and fixtures to be incorporated in the work 30 days prior to commencement of work.Ensure list includes manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site information.Submit product data for each type of air terminal unit indicated, including rated capacities, furnished specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories:e.Shutoff Single-Duct Air Terminal UnitsSubmit shop drawings which detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.Include a schedule showing unique model designation, room location, model number, size, and accessories furnished.Include wiring diagrams to show power, signal, and control wiring.Provide units with the configuration, capacity, and static-pressure characteristics indicated.Ensure dimensional data stated constitutes nominal sizing, which has been adjusted by the manufacturer when necessary to accommodate acoustic material thickness.Ensure units proposed are identical to units having at least 2 years of proven satisfactory field service.Provide certification that units and the list of spare parts are ADC Standards Manual tested and rated.SUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance to Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Records of Existing ConditionsSD-02 Shop DrawingsShutoff Single-Duct Air Terminal Units; G SD-03 Product DataShutoff Single-Duct Air Terminal Units; G SD-10 Operation and Maintenance DataOperation and Maintenance Manuals SD-11 Closeout SubmittalsRecord DrawingsQUALITY CONTROLIndicate on drawings the size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air terminal units that are based on the specific system indicated.Conform to NFPA 70, Article 100 for electrical components, devices, and accessories.List and label items as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.Ensure Air Terminals are certified under the AHRI 880 I-P Certification Program and carry the ARI Seal.PART 2PRODUCTSEQUIPMENTVerification of PerformanceRate air terminal units according to AHRI 880 I-P.Shutoff Single-Duct Air Terminal UnitsConfigurationProvide a volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components located inside a protective metal shroud.CasingProvide 0.034-inch casing.Ensure the casing includes an integral mixing baffle to efficiently mix the hot and cold airstream.Casing LiningProvide 3/4-inch] thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct casing lining complying with ASTM C1071.Secure with adhesive.Cover liner with nonporous foil.Attach a 3/4-inch adhesive of polyurethane foam insulation complying with UL181 erosion requirements, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25, and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E84.Coat any cut edges of fiberglass exposed to the airstream with NFPA 90A approved seal.For the air inlet provide round stub connection for duct attachment.For the air outlet provide s-slip and drive connections.Provide removable panels for access to diverter and other parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket.Regulator AssemblyProvide galvanized-steel components with key damper blades onto shaft with nylon-fitted pivot points located inside unit casing.Automatic Flow-Control AssemblyMatch combined spring rates for each volume-regulator size with machined dashpot for stable operation.Provide factory-calibrated and field- adjustable assembly with shaft extension for connection to externally mounted control actuator.Volume DamperProvide a galvanized steel volume damper with peripheral gasket and self- lubricating bearings. Select Damper Position, normally closed.Hot-Water Heating CoilProvide a copper tube, mechanically expanded into aluminum-plate fins; leak tested underwater to 200 psig; and factory installed.DDC ControlsProvide bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor-based controller. Provide with room sensor that is compatible with temperature controls specified.Damper ActuatorsProvide a 24 V, powered closed, powered open damper actuator.Terminal Unit ControllerProvide a pressure independent, [variable-air][constant] volume controller with electronic airflow transducers factory calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes.Include the following features:Proportional, plus integral control of room temperatureTime-proportional reheat-coil controlOccupied and unoccupied operating modeRemote reset of airflow or temperature set pointsAdjusting and monitoring with portable terminalRoom SensorProvide a wall mounting room sensor, with temperature set-point adjustment and access for connection of portable operator terminal.Control SequenceMake suitable for operation with duct pressures between 0.25 and 3.0-inch wg inlet static pressure.Provide a factory-mounted and -piped, 5-micron filter; velocity-resetting, adjustable, high-limit control, with amplifying relay.Provide a system-powered, wall-mounting thermostat.PART 3EXECUTIONINSTALLATIONInstall air terminal units level and plumb, and in accordance with NFPA 90A. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.IdentificationLabel each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.ConnectionsCoordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings and with requirements specified in piping systems.Install piping adjacent to air terminal units to allow service and maintenance.3.1.2.1Hot-Water PipingConnect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.Connect ducts to air terminal units. Ground units with electric heating coils.Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.FIELD QUALITY CONTROLPerform the following field tests and inspections and prepare a test report.After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.Leak TestAfter installation, fill water coils and test for leaks.Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.Operational TestAfter electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.Test and adjust controls and safeties.Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.SYSTEM STARTUPEngage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup plete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following:Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer to achieve proper performance.Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.Verify that control connections are complete.Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESOperation and MaintenanceSubmit 6 copies of the operation and maintenance manuals 30 calendar days prior to testing the following items.Update and re-submit data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to contract completion.Concurrently, submit record drawings providing current factual information, including deviations and amendments to the drawings, and concealed and visible changes in the work.DemonstrationEngage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.-- End of Section --SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLESPART 1GENERALADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSSection 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMSapplies to work specified in this section.SUBMITTALSSubmit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:Product DataEquipment and Performance Data Operation and Maintenance DataPART 2PRODUCTSPERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSCertify air diffusion devices having been tested and rated in accordance withChapter 19-ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16-ASHRAE FUN IP, and ASHRAE 113, where such certification is required.Submit equipment and performance data for air-diffusion devices consisting of sound data in terms of Noise Criteria (NC) index for the capacity range of the device. Where space or sound data are not specified or indicated, assume PONENTSAir Diffusion Device ConstructionPreclude flutter, rattle, or vibration on air-diffusion device construction and mounting.Refer to Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT for vibration isolation considerations.Modify devices and provide accessories necessary for mounting in indicated surface construction.Select color from manufacturer's standard color chart which indicates the manufacturer's standard color selections and finishes for air-diffusion devices.Provide supply diffusers with combination damper and equalizing grid. Ensure dampers are extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.Ensure air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments can be made from the face of the device.Make volume adjustments by tamper-deterring device.Provide gaskets for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished surfaces.Include within the material, equipment, and fixture lists the manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site information.Types of Air Diffusion DevicesType DSAProvide type DSA supply diffuser, square with fourexpanding flared members to provide radically diffused discharge air.Arrange flared members to provide a minimum of four air paths which simultaneously diffuse air at 20 to 50 fpm.Include pattern adjustments horizontal, vertical projection, and an intermediate position or range.Provide a baked enamel finish. Provide aluminum construction.Provide integral extended surface to fit into module of lay-in ceiling.Type GSProvide type GS supply grill double deflection type with adjustable face bars parallel to short dimension and adjustable rear bars parallel to long dimension.Provide a baked enamel finish. Provide aluminum construction.Provide integral extended surface to fit into module of lay-in ceiling.Type GRProvide type GR return grills, ?” egg crate Provide a baked enamel finish.Provide integral extended surface to fit into module of lay-in ceiling.PART 3EXECUTION3.1INSTALLATIONInstall equipment as indicated and specified and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.Mount wall-mounted supply registers 6 inches below ceiling.Mount wall-mounted return registers 6 inches above the finished floor.Submit installation drawings for air-diffusion devices.Indicate on drawings overall physical features, dimensions, ratings, service requirements, and equipment weights.3.1.1Operations and Maintenance ManualsProvide operation and maintenance manuals consistent with manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures and safety precautions.-- End of Section --SECTION 23 52 00PART 1GENERALREFERENCESHEATING BOILERS04/08The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL, INC. (AMCA)AMCA 801(2001; R 2008) Industrial Process/Power Generation Fans:Specification GuidelinesAMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)ANSI Z21 .13/CSA 4.9(2017; Errata 2018) Gas-Fired Low PressureSteam and Hot Water Boilers AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)AWWA C606(2015) Grooved and Shouldered Joints AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)AWS A5.8/A5.8M(2011; Amendment 2012) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze WeldingAWS B2 .2/B2 .2M(2016) Specification for Brazing Procedure and Performance QualificationASMEINTERNATIONAL(ASME)ASME81.20.l(2013) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)ASME816.3(2016) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300ASME816.4(2011) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 125 and 250ASME816.5(2017) Pipe Flanges and Flanged FittingsNPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch StandardASME816.9(2018) Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding FittingsASME816.11(2016) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and ThreadedASME816.15(2013) Cast Copper Alloy Threaded FittingsClasses 125 and 250ASME 816.18(2018) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure FittingsASME 816.22(2013) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure FittingsASME 816.26(2013) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper TubesASME 816.34(2017) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding EndASME 816.39(2014) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250,and 300ASME 831.1(2016; Errata 2016) Power PipingASME 831.5(2016) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer ComponentsASME 840.100(2013) Pressure Gauges and Gauge AttachmentsASME BPVC SEC IV(2017) BPVC Section IV-Rules for Construction of Heating BoilersASME BPVC SEC IX(2017; Errata 2018) BPVC SectionIX-Welding, Brazing and Fusing QualificationsASME BPVC SEC VIII Dl(2017) BPVC Section VIII-Rules forConstruction of Pressure Vessels Division 1ASME CSD-1(2016) Control and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired BoilersASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)ASTM A53/A53M(2018) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and SeamlessASTM Al05/A105M(2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping ApplicationsASTM A167(2011) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-ResistingChromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and StripASTM Al83(2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and NutsASTM Al93/Al93M(2017) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel BoltingMaterials for High-Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose ApplicationsASTM A234/A234M(2018) Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature ServiceASTM A515/A515M(2017) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature ServiceASTM A516/A516M(2017) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature ServiceASTM A536(1984; R 2014) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron CastingsASTM B32(2008; R 2014) Standard Specification for Solder MetalASTM B62(2017) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal CastingsASTM B75/B75M(2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper TubeASTM BBS(2016) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water TubeASTM B813(2016) Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy TubeASTM B828(2016) Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and FittingsASTM 01784(2011) Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) CompoundsASTM D2000(2012; R 2017) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive ApplicationsCOPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)CDA A4015(2016; 14/17) Copper Tube Handbook EXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (EJMA)EJMA Stds(2015) (10th Ed) EJMA Standards HYDRONICS INSTITUTE DIVISION OF AHRI (HYI)HYI-005(2008) I=B=R Ratings for Boilers, Baseboard Radiation and Finned Tube (Commercial)MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)MSS SP-25(2013) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and UnionsMSS SP-58(2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and InstallationMSS SP-70(2011) Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsMSS SP-71(2011; Errata 2013) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsMSS SP-72(2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General ServiceMSS SP-78(2011) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsMSS SP-80(2013) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check ValvesMSS SP-85(2011) Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded EndsMSS SP-110(2010) Ball Valves Threaded,Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared EndsNATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)NEMA MG 1(2016; SUPP 20162018) Motors and Generators NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION(NFPA)NFPA 54(2018) National Fuel Gas CodeU.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)Energy Star(1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System (FEMP)UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)UL 795(2016) UL Standard for SafetyCommercial-Industrial Gas Heating EquipmentUL 1738(2010; Reprint Nov 2014) Venting Systems for Gas-Burning Appliances, Categories II, III and IVUL FLAMMABLE & COMBUSTIBLE(2012) Flammable and Combustible Liquidsand Gases Equipment DirectorySUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control rmation only.Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail DrawingsSD-03 Product Data Materials and Equipment Spare PartsWater Treatment System Boiler Water Treatment Heating System Tests Fuel System TestsWelding Qualifications Field Instructions TestsSD-06 Test Reports Heating System Tests Fuel System TestsWater Treatment Testing SD-07 CertificatesBoltsSD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Instructions; GWater Treatment System; G SD-11 Closeout SubmittalsIndoor Air Quality During Construction; SQUALITY ASSURANCESubmit a copy of qualified welding procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of welding operations.Boilers and piping shall be welded and brazed in accordance with qualified procedures using performance-qualified welders and welding operators.Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX.Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.l.Notify the Contracting Officer 24 hours in advance of tests, and the tests shall be performed at the work site if practical.The welder or welding operator shall apply the personally assigned symbol near each weld made as a permanent record.DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGProtect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.EXTRA MATERIALSSubmit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of the detail drawings and no later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy.Submit Detail Drawings consisting of equipment layout including installation details and electrical connection diagrams; combustion and safety control diagrams; ductwork layout showing the location of supports and hangers, typical hanger details, gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity classification, and static pressure and seal classifications; and piping layout showing the location of guides and anchors, the load imposed on each support or anchor (not required for radiant floor tubing), and typical support details.Include on the drawings any information required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit and to show equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances required for operation and maintenance.Include in the data a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 and 3 years of service.PART 2PRODUCTSMATERIALS AND EQUIPMENTStandard ProductsProvide mat erials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at leastyears prior to bid opening.Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site.Submit manufacturer's catalog data included with the detail drawings for the following:Data showing model, size, options, etc., that are intended for consideration.Data submitted shall be adequate to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements.Data shall include manufacturer's written installation instructions and manufacturer' s recommendations for operation and maintenance clearances for thefollowing:(1) Boilers(8) Water Treatment SystemAsbestos ProhibitionAsbestos and asbestos-containing products will not be allowed.NameplatesSecure a plate to each major component of equipment containing the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number.Also, display an Energy Star label as applicable.Each pressure vessel shall have an approved ASME stamp.BOILERSEach boiler shall have the output capacity in British thermal units per hour (Btuh) as indicated when fired with the specified fuels.The boiler shall be furnished complete with the gasburning equipment, boiler fittings and trim, automatic controls, forced draft fan, electrical wiring, insulation, piping connections, and protective jacket.The boiler shall be completely assembled and tested at the manufacturer's plant.Boiler auxiliaries including fans, motors, drives, and similar equipment shall be provided with at least 10 percent excess capacity to allow for field variations in settings and to compensate for any unforeseen increases in pressure losses in appurtenant piping and ductwork.However, the boiler safety devices shall not be sized for a 10 percent excess capacity.The boiler and its accessories shall be designed and installed to permit ready accessibility for operation, maintenance, and service.Boilers shall be designed, constructed, and equipped in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IV. Each boiler shall be of the condensing type and designed for waterservice as specified herein.The boiler capacity shall be based on the ratings shown in HYI- 005 or as certified by the American Boiler Manufacturers Association, or American Gas Association.2.2.1Condensing BoilerEach boiler shall be a self-contained packaged type, complete with accessories, mounted on a structural steel base or a steel base which is integral to the boiler shell.Each boiler shall conform to the commercial design used by the manufacturer and shall permit free thermal expansion without placing undue stress on any part of the boiler.Each boiler which experiences the formation of condensate within the flue gas shall be specifically designed for condensing application.Each boiler shall withstand the corrosive effects of condensate for each part which may be in contact with the condensate at all possible operating conditions.Each boiler shall be provided with a separate air intake, exhaust, and condensate drain.Each boiler shall be designed to withstand the water temperature differentials anticipated at the required operating conditions without experiencing any damage due to thermal shock.Hot Water Heating BoilersThe hot water heating boiler shall be capable of operating at the specified maximum continuous capacity without damage or deterioration to the boiler, its setting, firing equipment, or auxiliaries.The rated capacity shall be the capacity at which the boiler will operate continuously while maintaining at least the specified minimum efficiency.The boiler design conditions shall be as follows:Boiler design pressure 30 psig ..Hot water temperature 180 degrees F.Temperature differential between boiler discharge and system return 20 degrees F.Water pressure drop 3psig.Outdoor ambient air temperature 95 degrees F (max), 25 degrees F (min).Site elevation 25 feet.Maximum continuous capacity 2,375,000 Btuh.Rated capacity 2.500,000 Btuh.2.3 BurnersFUEL BURNING EQUIPMENT2.3.lGasControlsBurners shall be UL approved mechanical draft burners with all air necessary for combustion supplied by a blower where the operation is coordinated with the burner.Burner shall be provided complete with fuel supply system in conformance with the following safety codes or standards :Gas-fired units with inputs greater than 400,000 Btuh per combustion chamber shall conform to UL 795.Gas fired units less than 12,500,000 Btuh input shall conform to AN SI Z21.13/CSA 4 .9.2.3.2Draft FansFans conforming to AMCA 801 forced-draft shall be furnished as an integral part of boiler design.Fans shall be centrifugal with backward-curved bladesor axial flow type.Each fan shall be sized for output volume and static pressure rating sufficient for pressure losses, excess air requirements at the burner, leakages, temperature, and elevation corrections for worst ambient conditions, all at full combustion to meet net-rated output at normal firing conditions, plus an overall excess air volume of 10 percent against a 20 percent static overpressure.Noise levels for fans shall not exceed 85 decibels in any octave band at a 3 foot station.Forced draft fan bearings shall be air cooled.2.3.2.1Draft FanControlForced-draft centrifugal fans shall have variable speed control where indicated. use with combustion control equipment.2.3.2.2Draft Fan Drivesinlet vane controls or shall have Inlet vanes shall be suitable forFans shall be driven by electric motors. enclosed fan cooledElectric motor shall be totallyCOMBUSTION CONTROL EQUIPMENTCombustion control equipment shall be provided as a system by a single manufacturer.Field installed automatic combustion control system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and under the direct supervision of a representative of the control manufacturer. The boiler water temperature shall be controlled by a water temperature controller.2.4. 12.4.2Boiler Combustion Controls and PositionersGas boiler units shall be provided with modulating combustion controls with gas pilot or spark ignition.Modulating controls shall beprovided with a means for manually controlling the firing rate.2.4.3 Combustion Safety Controls and EquipmentCombustion safety controls and equipment shall be UL listed, microprocessor-based distributed process controller.The system shall include mounting hardware, wiring and cables, and associated equipment.The controller shall be mounted completely wired, programmed, debugged, and tested to perform all of its functions.The controller shall process the signals for complete control and monitoring of the boiler.This shall include maintaining boiler status, starting and stopping all control functions, sequencing control functions and signaling alarm conditions.The program shall be documented and include cross references in description of coils and contacts.Microprocessor shall be able to perform self diagnostics and contain a message center to provide operator with status and failure mode information.Controllers for each boiler shall be mounted on a separate, free standing panel adjacent to the boiler or for packaged boilers on the boiler supporting structure.Control systems and safety devices for automatically fired boilers shall conform to ASME CSD-1.Electrical combustion and safety controls shall be rated at 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz and shall be connected as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.A 4 inch diameter alarm bell shall be provided and shall be located where indicated or directed.The alarm bell shall ring when the boiler is shut down by any safety control orinterlock.Indicating lights shall be provided on the control panel.A red light shall indicate flame failure, and a green light shall indicate that the main fuel valve is open.The following shutdown conditions shall require a manual reset before the boiler can automatically recycle:a .Flame failure .b .Failure to establish pilot flame .c.Failure to establish main flame. d .Low-water cutoff.e . High temperature cutoff.2.4.3.1Low-water CutoffLow water cutoff shall be float actuated switch or electrically actuated probe type low-water cutoff.Float chamber shall be provided with a blow-down connection.Cutoff shall cause a safety shutdown and sound an alarm when the boiler water level drops below a safe minimum level.A safety shutdown due to low water shall require manual reset before operation can be resumed and shall prevent recycling of the burner.The cutoff shall be in strict accordance to ASME CSD-1.2.5PUMPS2.5.lHot Water and Boiler Circulating PumpsCirculating pumps for hot water shall be electrically driven single-stage centrifugal type and have a capacity not less than indicated.Boiler circulating pumps shall be supported by the piping on which installed and shall be closed-coupled shaft.The boiler circulating pumps shall be vertical split case type.Hot water circulating pumps shall be supported [on a concrete foundation with a cast iron or structural steel base and shall have a closed-coupled shaft.The hot water circulating pumps shall be horizontal split case type.The pump shaft shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant alloy steel, sleeve bearings and glands of bronzedesigned to accommodate a mechanical seal, and the housing of close-grained cast iron.Pump seals shall be capable of withstanding 240 degrees F temperature without external cooling.The motor shall have sufficient power for the service required, shall be of a type approved by the manufacturer of the pump, shall be suitable for the available electric service, and shall conform to the requirements of paragraph ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.Each pump suction and discharge connection shall be provided with a pressure gauge as specified.The boiler circulating pump discharge heater shall be provided with a flow switch.Flow switch unit shall be a self-contained swinging vane type to indicate fluid flow.Switch shall be a SPOT with 120-volt, 15-ampere rating.COLD WATER CONNECTIONSConnections shall be provided which includes consecutively in line a strainer, reduced pressure principle backflow preventers, and water pressure regulator in that order in the direction of the flow.The reduced pressure principle backf low preventers shall be provided as indicated and in compliance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.Cold water fill connections shall be made to the water supply system as indicated.Necessary pipe, fittings, and valves required for water connections between the boiler and cold water main shall be provided as shown.The pressure regulating valve shall be of a type that will not stick or allow pressure to build up on the low side.The valve shall be set to maintain a terminal pressure of approximately 5 psi in excess of the static head on the system and shall operate within a 2 psi tolerance regardless of cold water supply piping pressure and without objectionable noise under any condition of operation.AIR HANDLING UNITSAir handling units and associated equipment shall be in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIESBoiler fittings and accessories shall be installed with each boiler in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IV, unless otherwise specified.2.8.lDirect VentsDirect venting shall be used for condensing type boilers.Both the air intake and exhaust vents shall be sized and located as indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the boiler manufacturer.A separate combustion air intake vent and exhaust vent shall be provided for each boiler.2.8.1.1Combustion Air Intake VentThe combustion air intake piping shall be constructed of Schedule 40 PVC in accordance with ASTM 01784. The vent shall be suitable for the temperature at the boiler combustion air intake connection point. Each intake shall be provided complete with bird screen.2.8.1.2Exhaust VentThe exhaust vent piping shall be constructed of Schedule 40 CPVC or stainless steel conforming to UL 1738 and the boiler manufacturer's recommendations. Plastic materials polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone(PES) are forbidden to be used for vent piping of combustion gases.The exhaust vent shall be suitable for the maximumanticipated boiler exhaust temperature and shall withstand the corrosive effects of the condensate.A 0.3125 inch diameter hole shall be provided in the stack not greater than 6 inches from the boiler flue outlet for sampling of the exit gases.A method shall be provided to seal the hole to prevent exhaust gases from entering the boiler room when samples are not being taken.Each exhaust stack shall be provided complete with bird screen.2.8.2Expansion TankThe hot water pressurization system shall include a diaphragm-type expansion tank which will accommodate the expanded water of the system generated within the normal operating temperature range, limiting the pressure increase at all components in the system to the maximum allowable pressure at those components.The only air in the system shall be the permanent sealed-in air cushion contained in the diaphragm-type tank.The sizes shall be as indicated.The expansion tank shall be welded steel, constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII Dl for a working pressure of 125 psi and precharged to the minimum operating pressure.The tank's air chamber shall be fitted with an air charging valve and pressure gauge.The tank shall be supported by steel legs or bases for vertical installation or steel saddles for horizontal installations.The tank shall have lifting rings and a drain connection. All components shall be suitable for a maximum operating temperature of 250 degrees F.2 . 8 . 3Air SeparatorExternal air separation tank shall be steel, constructed, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VII I 01 for a working pressure of 125 psi.The capacity of the air separation tank indicated is minimum.Steel Pipe and FittingsSteel PipeSteel pipe shall be ASTM A53 /A53M, Type E or S, Grade A or B, black steel, standard weight.Steel Pipe FittingsFittings shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25 so as to permanently identify the manufacturer.Steel FlangesFlanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc. shall be in accordance with ASME 816.5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25.Flange material shall conform to ASTM A105/Al 05M.Flanges for high temperature water systems shall be serrated or raised-face type.Blind flange material shall conform to ASTM A516/A516M cold service and ASTM A5 15/A515M for hot service.Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with material conforming to ASTM Al 93/A19 3M.Submit written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts furnished comply with the requirements of this specification.The certification shall include illustrations of product markings, the date of manufacture, and the number of each type of bolt to be furnished based on this certification.Welded FittingsWelded fittings shall conform to ASTM A234 /A234M with WPA marking. Buttwelded fittings shall conform to ASME Bl6.9, and socket-welded fittings shall conform to ASME Bl6.11.Cast-Iron FittingsFittings shall be ASME B16. 4, Class 125, type required to match connecting piping.2 . 8 . 4 . 6Malleable-Iron FittingsFittings shall be ASME B16.3, type as required to match connecting piping.UnionsUnions shall be ASME 816.39, Class 150.ThreadsPipe threads shall conform to ASME 81.20.1.Grooved Mechanical fittingsJoints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 125 psig service and shall be the product of the same manufacturer.Fitting and coupling houses shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536.Gaskets shall be molded synthetic rubber with central cavity, pressure responsive configuration and shall conform to ASTM 02000 for circulating medium up to230 degrees F.Grooved joints shall conform to AWWA C606.Coupling nuts and bolts shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A183.Copper Tubing and FittingsCopper TubingTubing shall be ASTM 888, Type K or L.Adapters for copper tubing shall be brass or bronze for brazed fittings.Solder-Joint Pressure FittingsWrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME 816.22 and ASTM 875/875M.Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME 816.18 and ASTM 8828.Flared FittingsCast copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME 816.26 and ASTM 862 .AdaptersAdapters may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment.Extracted brazed tee joints produced with an acceptable tool and installed as recommended by the manufacturer may be used.Threaded FittingsCast bronze threaded fittings shall conform to ASME Bl6.15.Brazing MaterialBrazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M .Brazing FluxFlux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing material.Flux shall be as follows:lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium borides, and contain fluorides.Silver brazing materials shall be in accordance with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.Solder MaterialSolder metal shall conform to ASTM B32 95-5 tin-antimony .Solder FluxFlux shall be either liquid or paste form, non-corrosive and conform to ASTM B813.Grooved Mechanical FittingsJoints and fittings shall be designed for not less than [ 125 psig] service and shall be the product of the same manufacturer.Fitting and coupling houses shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536.Gaskets shall be molded synthetic rubber with central cavity, pressure responsibleconfiguration and shall conform to ASTM D2000, for circulating medium up to230 degrees F.Grooved joints shall conform to AWWA C606.Coupling nuts and bolts shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM Al83.2.8.6Dielectric Waterways and FlangesDielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping.Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping.Dielectric waterways shall include dielectric unions to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals.Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways.2 . 8 . 7Flexible Pipe ConnectorsFlexible pipe connectors shall be designed for 125 psi or 150 psi service. Connectors shall be installed where indicated.The flexible section shall be constructed of rubber, tetrafluoroethylene resin, or corrosion-resisting steel, bronze, monel, or galvanized steel.Materials used and the configuration shall be suitable for the pressure, vacuum, and temperature medium.The flexible section shall be suitable for service intended and may have threaded, welded, soldered, flanged, or socket ends.Flanged assemblies shall be equipped with limit bolts to restrict maximum travel to the manufacturer's standard limits.Unless otherwise indicated, the length of the flexible connectors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the service intended. Internal sleeves or liners, compatible with circulating medium, shall be provided when recommended by themanufacturer.Covers to protect the bellows shall be provided whereindicated.2.8.8Pipe SupportsPipe supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 .2 .8.9Pipe Expansion1Expansion LoopsExpansion loops and offsets shall provide adequate expansion of the main straight runs of the system within the stress limits specified in ASME B31.l . The loops and offsets shall be cold-sprung and installed where indicated.Pipe guides and anchors shall be provided as indicated.Expansion JointsExpansion joints shall provide for either single or double slip of the connected pipes, as required or indicated, and for not less than the transverse indicated.The joints shall be designed for a hot water working pressure not less than 30 psig and shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of EJMA Stds and ASME B31 .l.End connection shallbe flanged. Anchor bases or support bases shall be provided as indicated or required.Sliding surfaces and water wetted surfaces shall be chromium plated or fabricated of corrosion resistant steel.Initial setting shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to compensate for an ambient temperature at time of installation.Pipe alignment guides shall be installed as recommended by the joint manufacturer, but in any case shall not be more than 5 feet from expansion joint, except in lines 4 inches or smaller guides shall be installed not more than 2 feet from the joint.Service outlets shall be provided where indicated.2.8.9.2.1Bellows-Type jointBellows-type joints shall be flexible, guided expansion joints. The expansion element shall be stabilized corrosion resistant steel.Bellows-type expansion joints shall conform to the applicable requirements of EJMA Stds and ASME B31.l with internal lines.Guiding of piping on both sides of expansion joint shall be in accordance with the published recommendations of the manufacturer of the expansion joint.The joints shall be designed for the working temperature and pressure suitable for the application but shall not be less than 150 psig.ValvesValves shall be Class 125 and shall be suitable for the application. Grooved ends in accordance with AWWA C606 may be used for water service only.Valves in nonboiler external piping shall meet the material, fabrication and operating requirements of ASME B31.l.The connection type of all valves shall match the same type of connection required for the piping on which installed.Gate ValvesGate valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80 bronze rising stem, threaded, solder, or flanged ends.Gate valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-70 cast iron bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, flanged, or threaded ends.Globe ValvesGlobe valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80, bronze, threaded, soldered, or flanged ends.Globe valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-85, cast iron, bronze trim, flanged, or threaded ends.Check ValvesCheck valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80, bronze, threaded, soldered, or flanged ends.Check valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-71, cast iron, bronze trim, flanged, or threaded ends.Angle ValvesAngle valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80 bronze, threaded, soldered, or flanged ends.Angle valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-85, cast iron, bronze trim, flanged, or threaded ends.Ball ValvesBall valves 1/2 inch and larger shall conform to [MSS SP-72] [or]MSS SP-110], ductile iron or bronze, threaded, soldered, or flanged ends.Plug ValvesPlug valves 2 inch and larger shall conform to MSS SP-78.Plug valves smaller than 2 inch shall conform to ASME 816.34.Grooved End ValvesValves with grooved ends in accordance with AWWA C606 may be used if the valve manufacturer certifies that their performance meets the requirements of the standards indicated for each type of valve.Balancing ValvesBalancing valves shall have meter connections with positive shutoff valves.An integral pointer shall register the degree of valve opening. Valves shall be calibrated so that flow rate can be determined when valve opening in degrees and pressure differential across valve is known.Eachbalancing valve shall be constructed with internal seals to prevent leakage and shall be supplied with preformed insulation.Valves shall be suitable for 250 degrees F temperature and working pressure of the pipe in which installed.Valve bodies shall be provided with tapped openings and pipe extensions with shutoff valves outside of pipe insulation.The pipe extensions shall be provided with quick connecting hose fittings for a portable meter to measure the pressure differential.One portable differential meter shall be furnished.The meter suitable for the operating pressure specified shall be complete with hoses, vent, and shutoff valves, and carrying case.In lieu of the balancing valve with integral metering connections, a ball valve or plug valve with a separately installed orifice plate or venturi tube may be used for balancing.Automatic Flow Control ValvesIn lieu of the specified balancing valves, automatic flow control valvesmay be provided to maintain constant flow and shall be designed to be sensitive to pressure differential across the valve to provide the required opening.Valves shall be selected for the flow required and provided with a permanent nameplate or tag carrying a permanent record of thefactory-determined flow rate and flow control pressure levels.Valves shall control the flow within 5 percent of the tag rating.Valves shall be suitable for the maximum operating pressure of 125 psi or 150 percent of the system operating pressure, whichever is greater.Where the available system pressure is not adequate to provide the minimum pressure differential that still allows flow control, the system pump head capability shall be increased.Valves shall be suitable for 250 degrees F temperature service.Valve materials shall be same as specified for the heating system check, globe, angle, and gate valves.Valve operator shall be the electric motor type[ or pneumatic type as applicable].Valve operator shall be capable of positive shutoff against the system pumphead.Valve bodies shall be provided with tapped openings and pipe extensions with shutoff valves outside of pipe insulation.The pipe extensions shall be provided with quick connecting hose fittings for a portable meter to measure the pressure differential across the automatic flow control valve.A portable meter shall be provided with accessory kit as recommended for the project by the automatic valve manufacturer.Butterfly ValvesButterfly valves shall be 2-flange type or lug wafer type, and shall be bubbletight at 150 psig.Valve bodies shall be cast iron, malleable iron, or steel.ASTM Al67, Type 404 or Type 316, corrosion resisting steel stems, bronze, or corrosion resisting steel discs, and synthetic rubber seats shall be provided.Valves smaller than 8 inches shall have throttling handles with a minimum of seven locking positions.Valves 8 inches and larger shall have totally enclosed manual gear operators with adjustable balance return stops and position indicators.Valves in insulated lines shall have extended neck to accommodate insulation thickness.Drain valvesDrain valves shall be provided at each drain point of blowdown as recommended by the boiler manufacturer.Piping shall conform to ASME BPVC SEC IV and ASTM A5 3/A53M.Safety ValvesSafety valves shall have steel bodies and shall be equipped with corrosion-resistant trim and valve seats.The valves shall be properly guided and shall be positive closing so that no leakage can occur.Adjustment of the desired back-pressure shall cover the range between 2 and 10 psig.The adjustment shall be made externally, and any shafts extending through the valve body shall be provided with adjustable stuffing boxes having renewable packing.Boiler safety valves of proper size and of the required number, in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IV, shall be installed so that the discharge will be through piping extended [to the blowoff tank] [to a location as indicated] .[Each discharge pipe for steam service shall be provided with a drip pan elbow to prevent accumulation of water on the valve.A slip joint shall be provided between drip pan elbow and riser.] [Each discharge pipe for hot water service shall be pitched away from the valve seat.]StrainersBasket and "Y" type strainers shall be the same size as the pipelines in which they are installed.The strainer bodies shall be heavy and durable, fabricated of cast iron, and shall have bottoms drilled and tapped with a gate valve attached for blowdown purposes.Strainers shall be designed for 125 psig service and 180 degrees F.The bodies shall have arrows clearly cast on the sides indicating the direction of flow.Each strainer shall be equipped with an easily removable cover and sediment screen.The screen shall be made of 22 gauge thick brass sheet with small perforations numbering not less than 400/square inch to provide a net free area through the basket of at least 3.30 times that of the entering pipe.The flow shall be into the screen and out through the perforations.Pressure GaugesGauges shall conform to ASME B4 0.100 and shall be provided with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shutoff valve.Minimum dial size shall be 3-1/2 inches.A pressure gauge shall be provided for each boiler in a visible location on the boiler.Pressure gauges shall be provided with readings in psi.Pressure gauges shall have an indicating pressure range that is related to the operating pressure of the fluid in accordance with the following table:Operating Pressure (kPa) (psi) 519-1030 76-150105-518 16-75Pressure Range (kPa) (psi)0-1400 0-2000-690 0-10014-1042-150-210 0-30 (retard)ThermometersThermometers shall be provided with wells and separable corrosion-resistant steel sockets.Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.Thermometers for [inlet water and outlet water for each hot water boiler] [the feedwater for each steam boiler] shall be provided in a visible location on the boiler.Thermometers shall have brass, malleable iron, or aluminum alloy case and frame, clear protective face, permanently stabilized glass tube with indicating-fluid column, white face, black numbers, and a minimum 9 inch scale.The operating range of the thermometers shall be 32-212 degrees F.The thermometers shall be provided with readings in degrees F.Air Vents2.8.14.lManual Air VentsManual air vents shall be brass or bronze valves or cocks suitable for the pressure rating of the piping system and furnished with threaded plugs or caps.2.8.14.2Automatic Air VentsAutomatic air vents shall be 3/4 inch quick-venting float and vacuum air valves.Each air vent valve shall have a large port permitting the expulsion of the air without developing excessive back pressure, a noncollapsible metal float which will close the valve and prevent the lossof water from the system, an air seal that will effectively close and prevent the re-entry of air into the system when subatmospheric pressures prevail therein, and a thermostatic member that will close the port against the passage of steam from the system.The name of the manufacturer shall be clearly stamped on the outside of each valve.The air vent valve shall be suitable for the pressure rating of the piping system.ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTElectric motor-driven equipment shall be provided complete with motors, motor starters, and necessary control devices.Electrical equipment, motor control devices, motor efficiencies and wiring shall be as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.Motors which are not an integral part of a packaged boiler and which are integral in size shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.Motors which are an integral part of the packaged boiler shall be the highest efficiency available by the manufacturer of the packaged boiler.Motor starters shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protections and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified.Starters shall be furnished in general purposeenclosures.Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices but not shown shall be provided.Motor RatingsMotors shall be suitable for the voltage and frequency provided.Motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be three-phase, unless otherwise indicated.Motors shall be of sufficient capacity to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating on the motor.Motor ControlsMotor controllers shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protection.Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any wiring required to such devices shall be provided.Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state variable-speed controllers may be provided to accomplish the same function.Solid state variable speed controllers shall be utilized for fractional through 10 hp ratings.Adjustable frequency drives shall be used for larger motors.INSULATIONShop and field-applied insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.TOOLSSpecial tools shall be furnished.Special tools shall include uncommon tools necessary for the operation and maintenance of boilers, burners, pumps, fans, controls, meters, special piping systems, and other equipment.Small hand tools shall be furnished within a suitable cabinet, mounted where directed.PART 3EXECUTIONEXAMINATIONAfter becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work or ordering any materials.ERECTION OF BOILER AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENTBoiler and auxiliary equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.Proper provision shall be made for expansion and contraction between boiler foundation and floor.This joint shall be packed with suitable nonasbestos rope and filled with suitable compound that will not become soft at a temperature of 100 degrees F. Boilers and firing equipment shall be supported from the foundations by structural steel completely independent of all brickwork. Boiler supports shall permit free expansion and contraction of each portion of the boiler without placing undue stress on any part of the boiler or setting.Boiler breeching shall be as indicated with full provision for expansion and contraction between all interconnected components.PIPING INSTALLATIONUnless otherwise specified, nonboiler external pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1.Pipe installed shall be cut accurately to suit field conditions, shall be installed without springing or forcing, and shall properly clear windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation will not be permitted.Pipes shall be free of burrs, oil, grease and other foreign material and shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction without damaging the building structure, pipe, pipe joints, or pipe supports.Changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller will be permitted provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed. The centerline radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe.Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be accepted.Vent pipes shall be carried through the roof as directed and shall be properly flashed.Unless otherwise indicated, horizontal supply mains shall pitch down in the direction of flow with a grade of not less than 1 inch in 40 feet.Open ends of pipelines and equipment shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt or other foreign materials out of the systems. Pipe not otherwise specified shall be uncoated.Unless otherwise specified or shown, final connections to equipment shall be made with malleable-iron unions for steel pipe 2-1/2 inches or less in diameter and with flanges for pipe 3 inches or more in diameter.Unions for copper pipe or tubing shall be brass or bronze.Reducing fittings shall be used for changes in pipe sizes.In horizontal hot water lines, reducing fittings shall be eccentric type to maintain the top of the lines at the same level to prevent air binding.Hot Water Piping and FittingsPipe shall be black steel or copper tubing.Fittings for steel piping shall be black malleable iron or cast iron to suit piping.Fittings adjacent to valves shall suit valve material.Grooved mechanical fittings will not be allowed for water temperatures above 230 degrees F.Vent Piping and FittingsVent piping shall be black steel.Fittings shall be black malleable iron or cast iron to suit piping.Gauge PipingPiping shall be copper tubing .JointsJoints between sections of steel pipe and between steel pipe and fittings shall be threaded, grooved, flanged or welded as indicated or specified. Except as otherwise specified, fittings 1 inch and smaller shall be threaded; fittings 1-1/4 inches and up to but not including 3 inches shall be either threaded, grooved, or welded; and fittings 3 inches and larger shall be either flanged, grooved, or welded.Pipe and fittings 1-1/4 inchesand larger installed in inaccessible conduit or trenches beneath concrete floor slabs shall be welded.Connections to equipment shall be made with black malleable-iron unions for pipe 2-1/2 inches or smaller in diameter and with flanges for pipe 3 inchesor larger in diameter.Joints between sections of copper tubing or pipe shall be flared, soldered, or brazed.Threaded JointsThreaded joints shall be made with tapered threads properly cut and shall be made perfectly tight with a stiff mixture of graphite and oil or with polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied to the male threads only and in no case to the fittings.Welded JointsWelded joints shall be in accordance with paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS unless otherwise specified.Changes in direction of piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be permitted.Branch connections may be made with either welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings, either being acceptable without size limitation.Branch outlet fittings, where used, shall be forged, flared for improved flow characteristics where attached to the run, reinforced against external strains, and designed to withstand full pipe bursting strength.Socket weld joints shall be assembled so that the space between the end of the pipe and the bottom of the socket is no less than 1/16 inch and no more than1/8 inch.Grooved Mechanical JointsGrooved mechanical joints may be provided for hot water systems in lieu of unions, welded, flanged, or screwed piping connections in low temperature hot water systems where the temperature of the circulating medium does not exceed 230 degrees F.Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions.Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer.The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application.Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances.Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations.Mechanical joints shall use rigid mechanical pipe couplings, except at equipment connections.At equipment connections, flexible couplings may be used.Coupling shall be of the bolted type for use with grooved end pipes, fittings, valves, and strainers.Couplings shall be self-centering and shall engage in awatertight couple .Flared and Brazed Copper Pipe and TubingTubing shall be cut square, and burrs shall be removed. Both inside of fittings and outside of tubing shall be cleaned thoroughly with sand cloth or steel wire brush before brazing.Annealing of fittings and hard-drawn tubing shall not occur when making connections.Installation shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted.Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2 .2/B2 .2M and CDA A 4015 with flux.Copper-to-copper joints shall include the use of copper-phosphorous or copper-phosphorous-silver brazing metal withoutflux.Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorous,copper-phosphorous-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.Joints for flared fittings shall be of the compression pattern.Swing joints or offsets shall be provided in all branch connections, mains, and risers to provide for expansion and contraction forces without undue stress to the fittings or to short lengths of pipe or tubing.Flared or brazed copper tubing to pipe adapters shall be provided where necessary for joining threaded pipe to copper tubing.Soldered JointsSoldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for lines 2 inches and smaller.Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 andCDA A40 15 .Copper Tube Extracted JointAn extruded mechanical tee joint may be made in copper tube.Joint shall be produced with an appropriate tool by drilling a pilot hole and drawing out the tube surface to form a collar having a minimum height of three times the thickness of the tube wall.To prevent the branch tube from being inserted beyond the depth of the extracted joint, dimpled depth stops shall be provided.The branch tube shall be notched for proper penetration into fitting to assure a free flow joint.Extracted joints shall be brazed using a copper phosphorous classification brazing filler metal.Soldered joints will not be permitted.Flanges and UnionsFlanges shall be faced true, provided with 1/16 inch thick gaskets, and made square and tight.Where steel flanges mate with cast-iron flanged fittings, valves, or equipment, they shall be provided with flat faces and full face gaskets.Union or flange joints shall be provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each piece of equipment or material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control valves, and other similar items.Dielectric pipe unions shall be provided between ferrous and nonferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion.The dielectric unions shall have metal connections on both ends.The ends shall be threaded, flanged, or brazed to match adjacent piping.The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below 1 percent of the galvanic current which would exist upon metal-to-metal contact.Gaskets, flanges, and unions shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.Branch Connections3.3.6.1Branch Connections for Hot Water SystemsBranches from the main shall pitch up or down as shown to prevent air entrapment.Connections shall ensure unrestricted circulation, eliminate air pockets, and permit complete drainage of the system.Branches shall pitch with a grade of not less than 1 inch in 10 feet.When indicated, special flow fittings shall be installed on the mains to bypass portions of the water through each radiator.Special flow fittings shall be standard catalog products and shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer.3.3.7SupportsHangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain.Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers.Threaded rods which are used for support shall not be formed or bent. Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floors or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer.3.3.7.1Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and SupportsPipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58, except as modified herein.3.3.7.1.lTypes 5, 12, and 26Use of Types 5, 12, and 26 is prohibited .Type 3Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe which has a vapor barrier.Type 3 may be used on insulated pipe that does not have a vapor barrier if clamped directly to the pipe, if the clamp bottom does not extend through the insulation, and if the top clamp attachment does not contact the insulation during pipe movement.Type 18Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed.Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.Type 19 and 23 C-ClampsTorque Type 19 and 23 C-clamps in accordance with MSS SP-58 and have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer.Field fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.Type 20 AttachmentsType 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.Type 24Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.Horizontal Pipe SupportsHorizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-58 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping.Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves.Vertical Pipe SupportVertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, and at intervals of not more than 15 feet, not more than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations.Type 35 GuidesType 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene(PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided where required to allow longitudinal pipe movement.Lateral restraints shall be provided as required.Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.Where steel slides do not require provisions for restraint of lateral movement, an alternate guide method may be used.On piping 4 inches and larger, a Type 39 saddle may be welded to the pipe and freely rested on a steel plate.On piping under 4 inches, a Type 40 protection shield may be attached to the pipe or insulation and freely rested on a steel slide plate.Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, the Type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe.The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.Horizontal Insulated PipeExcept for Type 3, pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation.Structural Steel AttachmentsStructural steel attachments and brackets required to support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided under this section.Material and installation shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.Pipe hanger loads suspended from steel joistbetween panel points shall not exceed 50 pounds.Loads exceeding 50 pounds shall be suspended from panel points.3.3.7.2Multiple Pipe RunsIn the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member.Spacing of the base support member shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for any individual pipe in the multiple pipe run.The clips or clamps shall be rigidly attached to the common base member.Aclearance of 1/8 inch shall be provided between the pipe insulation and the clip or clamp for piping which may be subjected to thermal expansion.AnchorsAnchors shall be provided where necessary to localize expansion or to prevent undue strain on piping.Anchors shall consist of heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping and attaching anchor braces, unless otherwise indicated.Anchor braces shall be installed in the most effective manner to secure the desired results, using turnbuckles where required.Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where they will injure the structure or adjacent construction during installation or by the weight of expansion of the pipeline.ValvesValves shall be installed where indicated, specified, and required for functioning and servicing of the systems.Valves shall be safely accessible.Swing check valves shall be installed upright in horizontal lines and in vertical lines only when flow is in the upward direction.Gate and globe valves shall be installed with sterns horizontal or above. Valves to be brazed shall be disassembled prior to brazing and all packing removed.After brazing, the valves shall be allowed to cool before reassembling.Pipe SleevesPipe passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors or roofs shall be provided with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction.A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed as indicated where membranes are involved.Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members except where indicated or approved.Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed.Each sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor, or roof.Sleeves through walls shall be cut flush with wall surface.Sleeves through floors shall [be cut flush with floor surface] [extend above top surface of floor a sufficient distance to allow proper flashing or finishing] .Sleeves through roofs shall extend above the top surface of roof at least 6 inches for proper flashing orfinishing.Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be sized to provide a minimum clearance of 1/4 inch between bare pipe and sleeves or between jacket over insulation and sleeves.Sleeves in waterproofing membrane floors, bearing walls, and wet areas shall be galvanized steel pipe orcast-iron pipe.Sleeves in nonbearing walls, floors, or ceilings may be galvanized steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, or galvanized sheet metal withlock-type longitudinal seam.Except in pipe chases or interior walls, the annular space between pipe and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve in nonfire rated walls shall be sealed as indicated and specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.Metal jackets shall be provided over insulation passing through exterior walls, firewalls, fire partitions, floors, or roofs.a . Metal jackets shall not be thinner than 0.006 inch thick aluminum, if corrugated, and 0.016 inch thick aluminum, if smooth.b .Secure metal jackets with aluminum or stainless steel bands not less than 3/8 inch wide and not more than 8 inches apart.When penetrating roofs and before fitting the metal jacket into place, a 1/2 inch wide strip of sealant shall be run vertically along the inside of the longitudinal joint of the metal jacket from a point below the backupmaterial to a minimum height of 36 inches above the roof.If the pipe turns from vertical to horizontal, the sealant strip shall be run to a point just beyond the first elbow.When penetrating waterproofing membrane for floors, the metal jacket shall extend from a point below the back-up material to a minimum distance of 2 inches above the flashing.For other areas, the metal jacket shall extend from a point below the backup material to a point 12 inches above material to a minimum distance of 2 inches above the flashing.For other areas, the metal jacket shall extend from a point below the backup material to a point 12 inches above the floor; when passing through walls above grade, the jacket shall extend at least 4 inches beyond each side of the wall.Pipes Passing Through Waterproofing MembranesIn addition to the pipe sleeves referred to above, pipes passing through waterproofing membranes shall be provided with a 4 pound lead flashing or a16 ounce copper flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe and shall set over the membrane in a troweled coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend above the roof or floor a minimum of 10 inches.The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe or between the flashing and themetal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as indicated.Pipes up to and including 10 inches in diameter which pass through waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs, flashing clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts.Waterproofing membrane shall be clamped into place and sealant shall be placed in the caulking recess.Optional Modular Mechanical Sealing AssemblyAt the option of the Contractor, a modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in the annular space between the sleeve and conduit or pipe in lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing specified above.The seals shall include interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe/conduit and sleeve with corrosion-protected carbon steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates.The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut.After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe/conduit and the sleeve.Each seal assembly shall be sized asrecommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe/conduit and sleeve involved .Optional CounterflashingAs alternates to caulking and sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may consist of standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in diameter, lead flashing sleeve for dry vents with the sleeve turned down into the pipe to form a waterproof joint, or a tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe, sealed as indicated.Fire SealWhere pipes pass through firewalls, fire partitions, or floors, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.Balancing ValvesBalancing valves shall be installed as indicated.Thermometer WellsProvide a thermometer well in each return line for each circuit in multicircuit systems.Air VentsInstall air vents in piping at all system high points.The vent shall remain open until water rises in the tank or pipe to a predetermined level at which time it shall close tight.An overflow pipe from the vent shall be run to a point designated by the Contracting Officer's representative. The inlet to the air vent shall have a gate valve or ball valve.EscutcheonsProvide escutcheons at all finished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or insulated, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms.Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be chromium-plated iron or chromium-plated brass, either one-piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrews.DrainsA drain connection with a 1 inch gate valve or 3/4 inch hose bib shall be installed at the lowest point in the return main near the boiler.In addition, threaded drain connections with threaded cap or plug shall be installed on the heat exchanger coil on each unit heater or unit ventilator and wherever required for thorough draining of the system.Strainer Blow-Down PipingStrainer blow-down connections shall be fitted with a black steel blow-down pipeline routed to an accessible location and provided with a blow-down valve.Direct Venting fo Combustion Intake Air and Exhaust AirThe intake air and exhaust vents shall be installed in accordance with N FPA 54 and boiler manufacturer's recommendations.The exhaust vent shall be sloped 1/4 inch/ft toward the boiler's flue gas condensate collection point.GAS FUEL SYSTEMGas piping, fittings, valves, regulators, tests, cleaning, and adjustments shall be in accordance with the Section 23 11 25 FACILITY GAS PIPING. Submit proposed test schedules for the heating system and fuel system tests, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.NFPA 54 shall be complied with unless otherwise specified.Burners, pilots, and all accessories shall be listed in UL FLAMMABLE & COMBUSTIBLE.The fuel system shall be provided with a gas tight, manually operated, UL listed stop valve at the gas-supply connections, a gas strainer, a pressure regulator, pressure gauges, a burner-control valve, a safety shutoff valvesuitable for size of burner and sequence of operation, and other components required for safe, efficient, and reliable operation as specified.Approved permanent and ready facilities to permit periodic valve leakage tests on the safety shutoff valve or valves shall be provided.COLOR CODE MARKING AND FIELD PAINTINGColor code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.Ferrous metal not specified to be coated at the factory shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Exposed pipe covering shall be painted as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.Aluminum sheath over insulation shall not be painted.MANUFACTURER'S SERVICESProvide the services of a manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment specified to supervise the installing, adjusting, and testing of the equipment.TEST OF BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIESBackflow prevention assemblies shall be tested in accordance with Section22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.HEATING SYSTEM TESTSSubmit the Qualifications of the firms in charge of installation and testing as specified.Submit a statement from the firms proposed to prepare submittals and perform installation and testing, demonstrating successful completion of similar services of at least five projects of similar size or scope, at least 2 weeks prior to the submittal of any other item required by this section.Before any covering is installed on pipe or heating equipment, the entire heating system's piping, fittings, and terminal heating units shall be hydrostatically tested and proved tight at a pressure of 1.5 times the design working pressure, but not less than 100 psi.Submit proposed test procedures for the heating system tests and fuel system tests, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.a .Before pressurizing system for test, items or equipment (e.g., vessels, pumps, instruments, controls, relief valves) rated for pressures below the test pressure shall be blanked off or replaced with spool pieces.b .Before balancing and final operating test, test blanks and spool pieces shall be removed; and protected instruments and equipment shall be reconnected.With equipment items protected, the system shall be pressurized to test pressure.Pressure shall be held for a period of time sufficient to inspect all welds, joints, and connections for leaks, but not less than 2 hours.No loss of pressure will be allowed.Leaks shall be repaired and repaired joints shall be retested.Repair joints shall not be allowed under the floor for floor radiant heating systems.If a leak occurs in tubing located under the floor in radiant heating systems, the entire zone that is leaking shall be replaced.If any repair is made above the floor for floor radiant heating systems, access shall be provided for the installed joint. Caulking of joints shall not be permitted.System shall be drained and after instruments and equipment are reconnected, the system shall be refilled with service medium and maximum operating pressure applied.The pressure shall be held while inspecting these joints and connections for leaks.The leaks shall be repaired and the repaired joints retested.Upon completion of hydrostatic tests and before acceptance of the installation, submit test reports for the heating system tests.Upon completion of testing complete with results, balance the heating system in accordance with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS and operating tests required to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operational efficiency.The operating test shall cover a period of at least 24 hours for each system, and shall include, as a minimum, the following specific information in a report, together with conclusions as to the adequacy of the system:a .Certification of balancing.b .Time, date, and duration of test.c .Outside and inside dry bulb temperatures.d .Temperature of hot water supply leaving boiler.Temperature of heating return water from system at boiler inlet.Quantity of water feed to boiler.g .Boiler make, type, serial number, design pressure, and rated capacity. h .Fuel burner make, model, and rated capacity; ammeter and voltmeterreadings for burner motor.Circulating pump make, model, and rated capacity, and ammeter and voltmeter readings for pump motor during operation.Flue-gas temperature at boiler outlet.Percent carbon dioxide in flue-gas .Grade or type and calorific value of fuel.3.9CLEANING3 . 9 .1Boilers and PipingAfter the hydrostatic tests have been made and before the system is balanced and operating tests are performed, the boilers and piping shall be thoroughly cleaned by filling the system with a solution consisting of either 1 pound of caustic soda or 1 pound of trisodium phosphate per 50 gallons of water.The proper safety precautions shall be observed in the handling and use of these chemicals. The water shall be heated to approximately 150 degrees F and the solution circulated in the system for a period of 48 hours.The system shall then be drained and thoroughly flushed out with fresh water. Strainers and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned.Prior to operating tests, air shall be removed from all water systems by operating the air vents.FIELD TRAININGConduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer.The training period shall consist of a total of 8 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests.The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved operation and maintenance manuals, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations and boiler safety devices.Submit system layout diagrams that show the layout of equipment, piping, and ductwork and typed condensed operation manuals explaining preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal, safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system, framed under glass or laminated plastic, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.After approval, these items shall be posted where directed.Submit six complete operation and maintenance instructions listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 2 weeks prior to field training.The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, simplified wiring and control diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and recommended service organization (including address and telephone number) for each item of equipment.Each service organization shall be capable of providing 4 hour onsite response to a service call on an emergency basis.ct .Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to date of proposed conduction of the training course.FUEL SYSTEM TESTS3.ll.1Gas System TestThe gas fuel system shall be tested in accordance with the test procedures outlined in NFPA 54.End of SectionSECTION 23 64 26CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1GENERALREFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4(2015) Relief Valves for Hot Water SupplySystems AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)AWWA C606(2015) Grooved and Shouldered Joints AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)AWS A5.8/A5.8M(2011; Amendment 2012) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze WeldingAWS BRH(2007; 5th Ed) Brazing HandbookAWS D1.1/D1.1M(2015; Errata 1 2015; Errata 2 2016)Structural Welding Code - SteelAWS Z49.1(2012) Safety in Welding and Cutting and Allied ProcessesASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)ASME B1.20.1(2013) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)ASME B16.1(2015) Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, and 250ASME B16.11(2016) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and ThreadedASME B16.18(2018) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure FittingsASME B16.21(2016) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe FlangesASME B16.22(2013) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure FittingsASME B16.26(2013) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper TubesASME B16.3(2016) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300ASME B16.39(2014) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300ASME B16.9(2018) Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding FittingsASME B31.9(2017) Building Services PipingASME B40.100(2013) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments ASME BPVC SEC IX(2017; Errata 2018) BPVC Section IX-Welding,Brazing and Fusing QualificationsASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)ASTM A106/A106M(2018) Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature ServiceASTM A183(2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and NutsASTM A47/A47M(1999; R 2018; E 2018) Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron CastingsASTM A53/A53M(2018) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and SeamlessASTM A536(1984; R 2014) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron CastingsASTM A653/A653M(2018) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip ProcessASTM A733(2016) Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe NipplesASTM B117(2016) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) ApparatusASTM B32(2008; R 2014) Standard Specification for Solder MetalASTM B42(2015a) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard SizesASTM B62(2017) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal CastingsASTM B75/B75M(2011) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper TubeASTM B813(2016) Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy TubeASTM B88(2016) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water TubeASTM D2000(2012; R 2017) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive ApplicationsASTM D3308(2012; R 2017) PStandard Specification for TFE Resin Skived TapeASTM D520(2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust PigmentASTM D596(2001; R 2011) Reporting Results of Analysis of WaterASTM E84(2018a) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsASTM F1120(1987; R 2015) Standard Specification for Circular Metallic Bellows Type Expansion Joints for Piping ApplicationsASTM F1199(1988; R 2015) Cast (All Temperatures and Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line Strainers (150 psig and 150 degrees F Maximum)ASTM F2389(2017a) Standard Specification for Pressure- rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping SystemsEXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (EJMA)EJMA Stds(2015) (10th Ed) EJMA Standards HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI)HI 1.1-1.2(2014) Rotodynamic (Centrifugal) Pump for Nomenclature and DefinitionsMANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)MSS SP-110(2010) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared EndsMSS SP-25(2013) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and UnionsMSS SP-58(2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and InstallationMSS SP-67(2017; Errata 1 2017) Butterfly ValvesMSS SP-69(2003; Notice 2012) Pipe Hangers and Supports- Selection and Application (ANSI Approved American National Standard)MSS SP-70(2011) Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsMSS SP-71(2011; Errata 2013) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsMSS SP-72(2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt- Welding Ends for General ServiceMSS SP-78(2011) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsMSS SP-80(2013) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check ValvesMSS SP-85(2011) Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded EndsNATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)NEMA 250(2018) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)NEMA MG 1(2016; SUPP 2016) Motors and GeneratorsNEMA MG 11(1977; R 2012) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase MotorsNATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 90A(2018) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating SystemsNSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)NSF/ANSI 14(2018) Plastics Piping System Components and Related MaterialsSYSTEM DESCRIPTIONProvide the water systems having the minimum service (design) temperature- pressure rating indicated.Provision of the piping systems, including materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the required and advisory provisions of ASME B31.9 except as modified or supplemented by this specification section or design drawings. This specification section covers the water systemspiping which is located within, on, and adjacent to building(s) within the building(s) 5 foot line.SUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-03 Product DataGrooved Mechanical Connections For Steel; G Grooved Mechanical Connections For Copper; G Calibrated Balancing Valves; GAutomatic Flow Control Valves; G Pump Discharge ValveWater Pressure Reducing Valve Pressure Relief ValveCombination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves Expansion Joints; GPumps; GCombination Strainer and Pump Suction Diffuser Expansion TanksAir Separator TanksWater Treatment Systems; GProposed water treatment plan including a layout, control scheme, a list of existing make-up water conditions including the items listed in paragraph WATER ANALYSIS", a list of chemicals, the proportion of chemicals to be added, the final treated water conditions, and a description of environmental concerns for handling the chemicals.SD-06 Test ReportsPiping Welds NDE Report Pressure Tests Reports; GReport shall be provided in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets.In the reports, document all phases of the tests performed.Include initial test summaries, all repairs/adjustments made, and the final test results.deficiencies during the first year of service.SD-07 CertificatesEmployer's Record Documents (For Welding) Welding Procedures and QualificationsCertificates shall be submitted for the following items showing conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section.SD-08 Manufacturer's InstructionsLesson plan for the Instruction Course; G SD-10 Operation and Maintenance DataRequirements for data packages are specified Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, except as supplemented and modified by this specification section.Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified, with operation and maintenance data packages.Include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, a recommended spare parts list for 1 year of operation, and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced on a routine basis.Submit a list of qualified permanent service organizations with operation and maintenance data packages.Include service organization addresses and service area or expertise.The service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and be able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.Water Treatment Systems; GAn operation manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal shutdown.Include testing procedures used in determining water quality.A maintenance manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide.Calibrated Balancing Valves, Data Package 3; G Automatic Flow Control Valves, Data Package 3; G Pump Discharge Valve, Data Package 2; GWater Pressure Reducing Valve, Data Package 3; G Pressure Relief Valve, Data Package 2; GCombination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves, Data Package 2; GExpansion Joints, Data Package 2; G Pumps, Data Package 3; GCombination Strainer and Pump Suction Diffuser, Data Package 2; G Expansion Tanks, Data Package 2; GAir Separator Tanks, Data Package 2; GMODIFICATIONS TO REFERENCESIn each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears.Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.DefinitionsFor the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall."Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer."For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer."For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor."References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."Administrative InterpretationsFor ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply.These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project.References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.SAFETY REQUIREMENTSExposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices.Safety devices shall be installed so that proper operation of equipment is not impaired.DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGProtect stored items from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.Proper protection and care of all material both before and during installation shall be the Contractor's responsibility.Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at theContractor's expense.During installation, cap piping and similar openings to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.Any porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew will be replaced at the Contractor's expense.Non-porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew will be disinfected and cleaned prior to installation.PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONSVerification of DimensionsThe Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.DrawingsBecause of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required.The Contractor shall carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.AccessibilityInstall all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible.Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.PART 2PRODUCTSSTANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTSMaterials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening.The two year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.The 2 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures.Products having less than a 2 year field service record shall be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown.System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations.These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.STEEL PIPINGWater piping shall be steel pipe or copper tubing.Provide steel piping with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150 degrees F, the pressure rating is 175 psig.PipeSteel pipe, conform to ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grades A orB.Do not use Type F pipe.Fittings and End Connections (Joints)Piping and fittings 1 inch and smaller shall have threaded connections. Piping and fittings larger than 1 inch and smaller than 3 inches shall have either threaded, grooved, or welded connections.Piping and fittings 3 inches and larger shall have grooved, welded, or flanged connections.The manufacturer of each fitting shall be permanently identified on the body of the fitting in accordance with MSS SP-25.Threaded ConnectionsUse threaded valves and pipe connections conforming to ASME B1.20.1. Used threaded fitting conforming to ASME B16.3. Use threaded unions conforming to ASME B16.39. Use threaded pipe nipples conforming to ASTM A733.Flanged ConnectionsFlanges shall conform to ASME B16.1, Class 125.Gaskets shall be nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring type.These gaskets shall contain aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadeine rubber (SBR) or nitrile butadeine rubber (NBR).Bolts, nuts, and bolt patterns shall conform to ASME B16.1.Welded ConnectionsWelded valves and pipe connections (both butt-welds and socket-welds types) shall conform to ASME B31.9.Butt-welded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.9.Socket-welded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.11.Welded fittings shall be identified with the appropriate grade and marking symbol.Grooved Mechanical Connections For SteelRigid grooved mechanical connections may only be used in serviceable aboveground locations where the temperature of the circulating medium does not exceed 230 degrees F.Flexible grooved connections shall be used only as a flexible connector with grooved pipe system.Unless otherwise specified, grooved piping components shall meet the corresponding criteria specified for the similar welded, flanged, or threaded component specified herein.Each grooved mechanical joint shall be a system, including coupling housing, gasket, fasteners, all furnished by the same manufacturer.Joint installation shall be in compliance with joint manufacturer's written instructions.Use fitting and coupling houses of malleable iron conforming to ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12; or steel conforming ASTM A106/A106M, Grade B or ASTM A53/A53M.Use gaskets of molded synthetic rubber with central cavity, pressure responsive configuration and conforming to ASTM D2000 Grade No. 2CA615A15B44F17Z for circulating medium up to 230 degrees F or Grade No. M3BA610A15B44Z for circulating medium up to 200 degrees F.Grooved mechanical connections shall conform to AWWA C606.Coupling nuts and bolts shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A183.Pipe connections and fittings shall be the product of the same manufacturer.Provide joint installation be in compliance with joint manufacturer's written instructions.Dielectric Waterways and FlangesProvide dielectric waterways with a water impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to 1 percent of short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint.When dry, insulation barrier shall be able to withstand a 600-volt breakdown test.Provide dielectric waterways constructed of galvanized steel and have threaded end connections to match connecting piping.Dielectric waterways shall be suitable for the required operating pressures and temperatures.Provide dielectric flanges with the same pressure ratings as standard flanges and provide complete electrical isolation between connecting pipe and/or equipment as described herein for dielectric waterways.POLYPROPYLENE PIPINGPipePolypropylene pipe shall be Schedule 40, copolymer, and shall meet ASTM F2389 and NSF/ANSI 14.FittingsFittings shall meet ASTM F2389 and NSF/ANSI 14 and shall be NSF listed for the service intended. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall bear the NSF seal "NSF-PW."Polypropylene fittings shall conform to dimensional requirements of Schedule40.Polypropylene piping that will be exposed to UV light shall be provided with a Factory applied UV resistant coating.COPPER TUBINGProvide copper tubing and fittings with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150 degrees F., the pressure rating is 175 psig.TubeUse copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, Type L or M for aboveground tubing, and Type K for buried tubing.Fittings and End Connections (Solder and Flared Joints)Wrought copper and bronze solder joint pressure fittings, including unions ands flanges, shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B75/B75M.Provide adapters as required.Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings ,including unions and flanges, shall conform to ASME B16.18.Cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26 and ASTM B62.ASTM B42 copper pipe nipples with threaded end connections shall conform to ASTM B42.Copper tubing of sizes larger than 4 inches shall have brazed joints.Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment.Extracted brazed tee joints may be used if produced with an acceptable tool and installed in accordance with tool manufacturer's written procedures.Grooved Mechanical Connections For CopperRigid grooved mechanical connections may only be used in serviceable aboveground locations where the temperature of the circulating medium does not exceed 230 degrees F.Flexible grooved connections shall be used only as a flexible connector with grooved pipe system.Unless otherwise specified, grooved piping components shall meet the corresponding criteria specified for the similar welded, flanged, or threaded component specified herein.Each grooved mechanical joint shall be a system, including coupling housing, gasket, fasteners, all furnished by the same manufacturer.Joint installation shall be in compliance with joint manufacturer's written instructions.Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536.Provide gaskets for use in grooved joints shall constructed of molded synthetic polymer of pressure responsive design and shall conform to ASTM D2000 for circulating medium up to 230 degrees F. Provide grooved joints in conformance with AWWA C606.SolderProvide solder in conformance with ASTM B32, grade Sb5, tin-antimony alloy. Solder flux shall be liquid or paste form, non-corrosive and conform to ASTM B813.Brazing Filler MetalFiller metal shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, Type BAg-5 with AWS Type 3 flux, except Type BCuP-5 or BCuP-6 may be used for brazing copper-to-copper joints.VALVESProvide valves with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150 degrees F, the pressure rating is 175 psig.Valves in sizes larger than 1 inch and used on steel pipe systems, may be provided with rigid grooved mechanical joint ends.Such grooved end valves shall be subject to the same requirements as rigid grooved mechanical joints and fittings and, shall be furnished by the same manufacturer as the grooved pipe joint and fitting system.Gate ValveGate valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80 Class 125 and shall be bronze with wedge disc, rising stem and threaded, soldered, or flanged ends.Gate valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-70, Class 125, cast iron with bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, and flanged or threaded ends.Globe and Angle ValveGlobe and angle valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80, Class 125. Globe and angle valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-85, Class 125.Check ValveCheck valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80.Check valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-71, Class 125.Butterfly ValveButterfly valves shall conform to MSS SP-67, Type 1 and shall be either the wafer or lug type.Valves smaller than 8 inches shall have throttling handles with a minimum of seven locking positions.Valves 8 inches and larger shall have totally enclosed manual gear operators with adjustable balance return stops and position indicators.Plug ValvePlug valves 2 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-78, have flanged or threaded ends, and have cast iron bodies with bronze trim.Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with NPT connections for black steel pipe and brazed connections for copper tubing.Valve shall be lubricated, non- lubricated, or tetrafluoroethylene resin-coated type.Valve shall be resilient, double seated, trunnion mounted with tapered lift plug capable of 2-way shutoff.Valve shall operate from fully open to fully closed by rotation of the handwheel to lift and turn the plug.Valves 8 inches or larger shall be provided with manual gear operators with position indicators.Ball ValveFull port design.Ball valves 1/2 inch and larger shall conform to MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110 and shall be cast iron or bronze with threaded, soldered, or flanged ends.Valves 8 inches or larger shall be provided with manual gear operators with position indicators.Ball valves may be provided in lieu of gate valves.Square Head CocksProvide copper alloy or cast-iron body with copper alloy plugs, suitable for125 psig water working pressure.Calibrated Balancing ValvesCopper alloy or cast iron body, copper alloy or stainless internal working parts.Provide valve calibrated so that flow can be determined when thetemperature and pressure differential across valve is known.Valve shall have an integral pointer which registers the degree of valve opening.Valve shall function as a service valve when in fully closed position.Valve shall be constructed with internal seals to prevent leakage and shall be supplied with preformed insulation.Provide valve bodies with tapped openings and pipe extensions with positive shutoff valves outside of pipe insulation.The pipe extensions shall be provided with quick connecting hose fittings for a portable differential pressure meter connections to verify the pressure differential. Provide metal tag on each valve showing the gallons per minute flow for each differential pressure reading.Automatic Flow Control ValvesValve shall automatically maintain the constant flow indicated on the design drawings.Valve shall modulate by sensing the pressure differential across the valve body.Valve shall be selected for the flow required and provided with a permanent nameplate or tag carrying a permanent record of the factory-determined flow rate and flow control pressure levels.Provide valve that controls the flow within 5 percent of the tag rating.Valve materials shall be the same as specified for the ball or plug valves.Provide valve that are electric type as indicated.Valve shall be capable of positive shutoff against the system pump head, valve bodies shall be provided with tapped openings and pipe extensions with shutoff valves outside of pipe insulation.The pipe extensions shall be provided with quick connecting hose fittings and differential meter, suitable for the operating pressure specified.Provide the meter complete with hoses, vent, integral metering connections, and carrying case as recommended by the valve manufacturer.Pump Discharge ValveValve shall shall perform the functions of a nonslam check valve, a manual balancing valve, and a shutoff.Valve shall be of cast iron or ductile iron construction with bronze and/or stainless steel accessories.Provide an integral pointer on the valve which registers the degree of valve opening.Flow through the valve shall be manually adjustable from bubble tight shutoff to full flow.Valves smaller than 2 inches shall have NPT connections.Valves 2 inches and larger shall have flanged or grooved end connections.Valve design shall allow the back seat for the stem to be replaced in the field under full line pressure.Pressure Relief ValveValve shall prevent excessive pressure in the piping system when the piping system reaches its maximum heat buildup.Valve, ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 and shall have cast iron bodies with corrosion resistant internal working parts. The discharge pipe from the relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet unless otherwise bination Pressure and Temperature Relief ValvesANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4, copper alloy body, automatic re-seating, test lever, and discharge capacity based on AGA temperature steam rating.Float ValveAngle pattern.Valve bodies 3 inches nominal pipe size and smaller shall be bronze.Valve bodies larger than 3 inches shall be cast iron or bronze.Steel parts shall be corrosion resistant. Where float rods are extended for tank applications, extension shall be properly supported and guided to avoid bending of float rod or stressing of valve pilot linkage.Drain ValvesValves, MSS SP-80 gate valves.Valve shall be manually-operated, 3/4 inch pipe size and above with a threaded end connection.Provide valve with a water hose nipple adapter.Air Venting ValvesManually-operated general service type air venting valves, brass or bronze valves that are furnished with threaded plugs or caps.Automatic type air venting shall be the ball-float type with brass/bronze or brass bodies, 300 series corrosion-resistant steel float, linkage and removable seat.Air venting valves on water coils shall have not less than 1/8 inch threaded end connections.Air venting valves on water mains shall have not less than 3/4 inch threaded end connections.Air venting valves on all other applications shall have not less than 1/2 inch threaded end connections.Vacuum Relief Valves ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4PIPING ACCESSORIESStrainerStrainer, ASTM F1199, except as modified and supplemented in this specification.Strainer shall be the cleanable, basket or "Y" type, the same size as the pipeline.Strainer bodies shall be fabricated of cast iron with bottoms drilled, and tapped.Provide blowoff outlet with pipe nipple, gate valve, and discharge pipe nipple.The bodies shall have arrows clearly cast on the sides indicating the direction of flow.Provide strainer with removable cover and sediment screen.The screen shall be made of minimum 22 gauge brass sheet, with small perforations numbering not less than 400 per square inch to provide a net free area through the basket of at least 3.30 times that of the entering pipe.The flow shall be into the screen and out through the perforations.Cyclonic SeparatorMetal- bodied, with removal capability of removing solids 45 microns/325 mesh in size and heavier than 1.20 specific gravity, maximum pressure drop of 5 psid, with cleanout bination Strainer and Pump Suction DiffuserAngle type body with removable strainer basket and internal straightening vanes, a suction pipe support, and a blowdown outlet and plug.Strainer shall be in accordance with ASTM F1199, except as modified and supplementedby this specification.Unit body shall have arrows clearly cast on the sides indicating the direction of flow.Strainer screen shall be made of minimum 22 gauge corrosion-resistant steel, with small perforations numbering not less than 400 per square inch to provide a net free area through the basket of at least 3.30 times that of the entering pipe.Flow shall be into the screen and out through the perforations. Provide an auxiliary disposable fine mesh strainer which shall be removed 30 days after start-up.Provide warning tag for operator indicating scheduled date for removal.Casing shall have connection sizes to match pump suction and pipe sizes, and be provided with adjustable support foot or support foot boss to relieve piping strains at pump suction.Provide unit casing with blowdown port and plug.Provide a magnetic insert to remove debris from system.Flexible Pipe ConnectorsProvide flexible bronze or stainless steel piping connectors with single braid.Equip flanged assemblies with limit bolts to restrict maximum travel to the manufacturer's standard limits.Unless otherwise indicated, the length of the flexible connectors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the service intended.Internal sleeves or liners, compatible with circulating medium, shall be provided when recommended by the manufacturer.Provide covers to protect the bellows where indicated.Pressure and Vacuum GaugesGauges, ASME B40.100 with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shut-off valve.Provide gauges with 4.5 inch dial, brass or aluminum case, bronze tube, and siphon. Gauge shall have a range from 0 psig to approximately 1.5 times the maximum system working pressure.Each gauge range shall be selected so that at normal operating pressure, the needle is within the middle-third of the range.Temperature GaugesTemperature gauges, shall be the industrial duty type and be provided for the required temperature range.Provide gauges with fixed thread connection, dial face gasketed within the case; and an accuracy within 2 percent of scale range. Gauges shall have Fahrenheit scale in 2 degree graduations scale (black numbers) on a white face.The pointer shall be adjustable.Rigid stem type temperature gauges shall be provided in thermal wells located within 5 feet of the finished floor.Universal adjustable angle type or remote element type temperature gauges shall be provided in thermal wells located 5 to 7 feet above the finished floor or in locations indicated.Remote element type temperature gauges shall be provided in thermal wells located 7 feet above the finished floor or in locations indicated.Stem Cased-GlassStem cased-glass case shall be polished stainless steel or cast aluminum, 9 inches long, with clear acrylic lens, and non-mercury filled glass tube with indicating-fluid column.Bimetallic DialBimetallic dial type case shall be not less than 3-1/2 inches, stainless steel, and shall be hermetically sealed with clear acrylic lens.Bimetallic element shall be silicone dampened and unit fitted with external calibrator adjustment.Liquid-, Solid-, and Vapor-Filled DialLiquid-, solid-, and vapor-filled dial type cases shall be not less than 3- 1/2 inches, stainless steel or cast aluminum with clear acrylic lens.Fill shall be nonmercury, suitable for encountered cross-ambients, and connecting capillary tubing shall be double-braided bronze.Thermal WellThermal well shall be identical size, 1/2 or 3/4 inch NPT connection, brass or stainless steel.Where test wells are indicated, provide captive plug- fitted type 1/2 inch NPT connection suitable for use with either engraved stem or standard separable socket thermometer or thermostat.Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.Extended neck thermal wells shall be of sufficient length to clear insulation thickness by 1 inch.Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and SupportsPipe hangers, inserts, guides, and supports:to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.EscutcheonsProvide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces.Secure plates in place by internal spring tension or set screws.Provide polished stainless steel plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces.Provide paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.Expansion JointsFlexible Ball TypeFlexible ball expansion joints shall be capable of 360 degrees rotation plus15 degrees angular flex movement.Joints shall be constructed of carbon steel with the exterior spherical surface of carbon steel balls plated with a minimum 5 mils of hard chrome in accordance with EJMA Stds.Joint end connections shall be threaded for piping 2 inches or smaller.Joint end connections larger than 2 inches shall be grooved, flanged, or beveled for welding.Provide joint with pressure-molded composition gaskets suitable for continuous operation at twice design temperature.Bellows TypeBellows expansion type joints, ASTM F1120 with Type 304 stainless steel corrugated bellows, reinforced with equalizing rings, internal sleeves, and external protective covers.Joint end connections shall be grooved, flanged, or beveled for welding.Guiding of piping on both sides of expansion joint shall be in accordance with the published recommendations of the manufacturer of the expansion joint.PUMPSPumps shall be the electrically driven, non-overloading, centrifugal type which conform to HI 1.1-1.2.Pumps shall be selected at or within 5 percent of peak efficiency.Pump curve shall rise continuously from maximum capacity to shutoff.Pump motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1, be open, and have sufficient horsepower for the service required.Pump motor shall have the required capacity to prevent overloading with pump operating at any point on its characteristic curve.Pump speed shall not exceed 3,600 rpm, except where the pump head is less than 60 feet of water, the pump speed shall not exceed 1,750 rpm.Pump motor shall be equipped with an across- the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with "START- STOP" switch in the cover.ConstructionEach pump casing shall be designed to withstand the discharge head specified plus the static head on system plus 50 percent of the total, but not less than 125 psig.Pump casing and bearing housing shall be close grained cast iron.High points in the casing shall be provided with manual air vents; low points shall be provided with drain plugs.Provide threaded suction and discharge pressure gage tapping with square-head plugs.Impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced.Impeller, impeller wearing rings, glands, casing wear rings, and shaft sleeve shall be bronze. Shaft shall be carbon or alloy steel, turned and ground.Bearings shall be ball-bearings, roller-bearings, or oil-lubricated bronze-sleeve type bearings, and be efficiently sealed or isolated to prevent loss of oil or entrance of dirt or water.Pump and motor shall be mounted on a common cast iron base having lipped edges and tapped drainage openings or structural steel base with lipped edges or drain pan and tapped drainage openings.Pump shall be provided with steel shaft coupling guard.Base-mounted pump, coupling guard, and motor shall each be bolted to a fabricated steel base which shall have bolt holes for securing base to supporting surface. Pump shall be accessible for servicing without disturbing piping connections.Shaft seals shall be mechanical-seals or stuffing-box type.Mechanical Shaft SealsSeals shall be single, inside mounted, end-face-elastomer bellows type with stainless steel spring, brass or stainless steel seal head, carbon rotating face, and tungsten carbide or ceramic sealing face.Glands shall be bronze and of the water-flush design to provide lubrication flush across the face of the seal.Bypass line from pump discharge to flush connection in gland shall be provided, with filter or cyclone particle separator in line.Stuffing-Box Type SealsStuffing box shall include minimum 4 rows of square, impregnated TFE (Teflon) or graphite cord packing and a bronze split-lantern ring.Packing gland shall be bronze interlocking split type.EXPANSION TANKSTank shall be welded steel, constructed for, and tested to pressure- temperature rating of 125 psi at 150 degrees F. Provide tanks precharged to the minimum operating pressure.Tank shall have a replaceable polypropylene or butyl lined diaphragm which keeps the air charge separated from the water; shall be the captive air type.Tanks shall accommodate expanded water of the system generated within the normal operating temperature range, limiting this pressure increase at all components in the system to the maximum allowable pressure at those components.Each tank air chamber shall be fitted with a drain, fill, an air charging valve, and system connections.Tank shall be supported by steel legs or bases for vertical installation or steel saddles for horizontal installations.The only air in the system shall be the permanent sealed-in air cushion contained within the expansion tank.AIR SEPARATOR TANKSExternal air separation tank shall have an internal design constructed of stainless steel and suitable for creating the required vortex and subsequent air separation.Tank shall be steel, constructed for, and tested to pressure-temperature rating of 125 psi at 150 degrees F.Tank shall have tangential inlets and outlets connections, threaded for 2 inches and smaller and flanged for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger.Air released from a tank shall be to the atmosphere.Tank shall be provided with a blow-down connection.Design to separate air from water and to direct released air to automatic air vent.Unit shall be of one piece cast-iron construction with internal baffles and two air chambers at top of unit; one air chamber shall have outlet to expansion tank and other air chamber shall be provided with automatic air release device. Tank shall be steel, constructed for, and tested to a ANSI Class 125 pressure-temperature rating.]2.10WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMSWhen water treatment is specified, the use of chemical-treatment products containing equivalent chromium (CPR) is prohibited.Water AnalysisConditions of make-up water to be supplied to the condenser and chilled water systems were reported in accordance with ASTM D596 and are as follows:Date of Sample[ ]Temperature[ ] degrees FSilica (Sino 2)[ ] pp (mg/1)Insoluble[ ] pp (mg/1)Iron and Aluminum Oxides[ ] pp (mg/1)Calcium (Ca)[ ] pp (mg/1)Magnesium (Mg)[ ] pp (mg/1)Sodium and Potassium (Nan and AK)[ ] pp (mg/1)Carbonate (HO 3)[ ] pp (mg/1)Sulfate (SO 4)[ ] pp (mg/1)Chloride (JCL)[ ] pp (mg/1)Nitrate (NO 3[ ] pp (mg/1)Turbidity[ ] unitpH[ ]Residual Chlorine[ ] pp (mg/1)Total Alkalinity[ ] PM (me/1Non-Carbonate Hardness[ ] PM (me/1Total Hardness[ ] PM (me/1Dissolved Solids[ ] pp (mg/1)Fluorine[ ] pp (mg/1)Conductivity[ ] McMahon/cmChilled and Condenser WaterWater to be used in the chilled and condenser water systems shall be treated to maintain the conditions recommended by this specification as well as the recommendations from the manufacturers of the condenser and evaporator coils.Chemicals shall meet all required federal, state, and local environmental regulations for the treatment of evaporator coils and direct discharge to the sanitary sewer.Water Treatment ServicesThe services of a company regularly engaged in the treatment of condenser water systems shall be used to determine the correct chemicals required, the concentrations required, and the water treatment equipment sizes and flow rates required.The company shall maintain the chemical treatment and provide all chemicals required for the condenser water systems for a period of 1 year from the date of occupancy.The chemical treatment and services provided over the 1 year period shall meet the requirements of this specification as well as the recommendations from the manufacturers of the condenser and evaporator coils.Acid treatment and proprietary chemicals shall not be used.Chilled Water SystemA shot feeder shall be provided on the chilled water piping as indicated. Size and capacity of feeder shall be based on local requirements and water analysis.The feeder shall be furnished with an air vent, gauge glass, funnel, valves, fittings, and piping.Condenser WaterThe water treatment system shall be capable of automaticallyfeeding chemicals and bleeding the system to prevent corrosion, scale, and biological formations.Automatic chemical feed systems shall automatically feed chemicals into the condenser water based on varying system conditions.Chemical Feed PumpOne pump shall be provided for each chemical feed tank.The chemical feed pumps shall be positive displacement diaphragm type.The flow rate of the pumps shall be adjustable from 0 to 100 percent while in operation.The discharge pressure of pumps shall not be less than 1.5 times the line pressure at the point of connection.The pumps shall be provided with a pressure relief valve and a check valve mounted in the pump discharge.TanksTwo chemical tanks shall be provided.The tanks shall be constructed of high density polyethylene with a hinged cover.The tanks shall have sufficient capacity to require recharging only once per 7 days during normal operation.A level indicating device shall be included with each tank.An electric agitator shall be provided for each tank.Injection AssemblyAn injection assembly shall be provided at each chemical injection point along the condenser water piping as indicated.The injection assemblies shall be constructed of stainless steel.The discharge of the assemblies shall extend to the centerline of the condenser water piping.Each assembly shall include a shutoff valve and check valve at the point of entrance into the condenser water line.Water MeterWater meters shall be provided with an electric contacting register and remote accumulative counter.The meter shall be installed within the make- up water line, as indicated.TimersTimers shall be of the automatic reset, adjustable type, and electrically operated.The timers shall be suitable for a 120 volt current.The timers shall be located within the water treatment control panel.Water Treatment Control PanelThe control panel shall be a NEMA 12 enclosure suitable for surface mounting.The panel shall be constructed of steel with a hinged door and lock.The panel shall contain a laminated plastic nameplate identifying each of the following functions:Main power switch and indicating lightMAN-OFF-AUTO selector switchIndicating lamp for bleed-off valveIndicating lamp for each chemical feed pumpSet point reading for each timerChemical PipingThe piping and fittings shall be constructed of schedule 80 PVCsuitable for the water treatment chemicals.Sequence of OperationThe chemicals shall be added based upon sensing the make-up water flow rate and activating appropriate timers.A separate timer shall be provided for each chemical.The blow down shall be controlled based upon the make-up water flow rate and a separate timer.The system shall contain an adjustable valve for continuous blow down.The flow rate from the appropriate chemical tanks shall be manually set at the metering pump for continuous chemical feed.The injection of the chemical required for biological control shall be controlled by a timer which can be manually set for proper chemical feed. Timer set points, blow down rates, and chemical pump flow rates shall be determined and set by the water treatment company.Test KitsOne test kit of each type required to determine the water quality as outlined within the operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided.Bleed LineA bleed line with a flow valve of the needle-valve type sized for the flow requirement or fixed orifice shall be provided in the pump return to the tower.The bleed line shall be extended to the nearest drain for continuous discharge.ELECTRICAL WORKProvide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers indicated as part of motor control centers.Provide electrical equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided.For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers including the required monitors and timed restart.Provide high efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11.Provide polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors, including motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1.Provide motors inaccordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop.Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and other necessary appurtenances.Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.[Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state variable-speed controllers may be provided to accomplish the same function. Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated 10 hp or less and adjustable frequency drives for larger motors.][Provide variable frequency drives for motors as specified in Section 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS.]PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENTNew equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.Factory Painting SystemsManufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided.The factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test.Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test, the acceptance criteria shall be as follows:immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen.If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.Shop Painting Systems for Metal SurfacesClean, retreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted.Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces.Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare metal.Where hot-dip galvanized steel has been cut, resulting surfaces with no galvanizing shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to ASTM D520, Type I.Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry.Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.Temperatures Between 120 and 400 degrees F:Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.Temperatures Greater Than 400 degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.FACTORY APPLIED INSULATIONFactory insulated items installed outdoors are not required to be fire- rated.As a minimum, factory insulated items installed indoors shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 150.Factory insulated items (no jacket) installed indoors and which are located in air plenums, in ceiling spaces, and in attic spaces shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50.Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be determined by ASTM E84.Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction.Material supplied by a manufacturer with a jacket shall be tested as a composite material.Jackets, facings, and adhesives shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.NAMEPLATESMajor equipment including pumps, pump motors, expansion tanks, and air separator tanks shall have the manufacturer's name, type or style, model or serial number on a plate secured to the item of equipment.The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.Plates shall be durable and legible throughout equipment life and made of stainless steel.Plates shall be fixed in prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts.RELATED COMPONENTS/SERVICESDrain and Make-Up Water PipingRequirements for drain and make-up water piping and backflow preventer is specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.Field Applied InsulationRequirements for field applied insulation is specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.Field PaintingRequirements for painting of surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting of items only primed at the factory, are specified in Section 09 90 00PAINTS AND COATINGS.2.15.3.1Color Coding For Hidden PipingA color coding scheme for locating hidden piping shall be in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERALPURPOSEC:\SISGML\JOBS\ALLEEHALL17071\prntdata\Word\.doc.PART 3EXECUTIONINSTALLATIONCut pipe accurately to measurements established at the jobsite, and work into place without springing or forcing, completely clearing all windows, doors, and other openings.Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation is not permitted without written approval.Cut pipe or tubing square, remove burrs by reaming, and fashion to permit free expansion and contraction without causing damage to the building structure, pipe, joints, or hangers.Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior to the date the connections are required.Obtain approval before interrupting service.Furnish materials required to make connections into existing systems and perform excavating, backfilling, compacting, and other incidental labor as required.Furnish labor and tools for making actual connections to existing systems.WeldingProvide welding work specified this section for piping systems in conformance with ASME B31.9, as modified and supplemented by this specification section and the accompanying drawings.The welding work includes: qualification of welding procedures, welders, welding operators, brazers, brazing operators, and nondestructive examination personnel; maintenance of welding records, and examination methods for welds.Employer's Record Documents (For Welding)Submit for review and approval the following documentation.This documentation and the subject qualifications shall be in compliance with ASME B31.9.List of qualified welding procedures that is proposed to be used to provide the work specified in this specification section.List of qualified welders, brazers, welding operators, and brazing operators that are proposed to be used to provide the work specified in this specification section.List of qualified weld examination personnel that are proposed to be used to provide the work specified in this specification section.Welding Procedures and QualificationsSpecifications and Test Results:Submit copies of the welding procedures specifications and procedure qualification test results for each type of welding required.Approval of any procedure does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing acceptable welds.Submit this information on the forms printed in ASME BPVC SEC IX or their equivalent.Certification:Before assigning welders or welding operators to the work, submit a list of qualified welders, together with data and certification that each individual is performance qualified as specified.Do not start welding work prior to submitting welder, and welding operator qualifications.The certification shall state the type of welding and positions for which each is qualified, the code and procedure under which each is qualified, date qualified, and the firm and individual certifying the qualification tests.Examination of Piping WeldsConduct non-destructive examinations (NDE) on piping welds and brazing and verify the work meets the acceptance criteria specified in ASME B31.9.NDE on piping welds covered by ASME B31.9 is visual inspection only.Submit a piping welds NDE report meeting the requirements specified in ASME B31.9.Welding SafetyWelding and cutting safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.Directional ChangesMake changes in direction with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller is permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide weep bends are formed.Mitering or notching pipe or other similar construction to form elbows or tees is not permitted.The centerline radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe.Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations is not acceptable.Functional RequirementsPitch horizontal supply mains down in the direction of flow as indicated. The grade shall not be less than 1 inch in 40 feet.Reducing fittings shall be used for changes in pipe sizes.Cap or plug open ends of pipelines and equipment during installation to keep dirt or other foreign materials out of the system.Pipe not otherwise specified shall be uncoated.Connections to appliances shall be made with malleable iron unions for steel pipe 2-1/2 inches or less in diameter, and with flanges for pipe 3 inches and above in diameter.Connections between ferrous and copper piping shall be electrically isolated from each other with dielectric waterways or flanges.Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements.Pipe and fittings installed in inaccessible conduits or trenches under concrete floor slabs shall be welded.Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit into space allotted and allow adequate acceptable clearances for installation, replacement, entry, servicing, and maintenance.Electric isolation fittings shall be provided between dissimilar metals.Fittings and End ConnectionsThreaded ConnectionsThreaded connections shall be made with tapered threads and made tight with PTFE tape complying with ASTM D3308 or equivalent thread-joint compound applied to the male threads only.Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is made.Brazed ConnectionsBrazing, AWS BRH, except as modified herein.During brazing, the pipe and fittings shall be filled with a pressure regulated inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of scale.Before brazing copper joints, both the outside of the tube and the inside of the fitting shall be cleaned with a wire fitting brush until the entire joint surface is bright and clean.Do not use brazing flux.Surplus brazing material shall be removed at all joints.Steel tubing joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.Piping shall be supported prior to brazing and not be sprung or forced.Welded ConnectionsBranch connections shall be made with welding tees or forged welding branch outlets.Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale and foreign matter before the piping is assembled.During welding, the pipe and fittings shall be filled with an inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of scale.Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.9.Weld defects shall be removed and rewelded at no additional cost to the Government.Electrodes shall be stored and dried in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M or as recommended by the manufacturer.Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.Grooved Mechanical ConnectionsPrepare grooves in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer.The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, or narrow-land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application.Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances.Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint.Flared ConnectionsWhen flared connections are used, a suitable lubricant shall be used between the back of the flare and the nut in order to avoid tearing the flare while tightening the nut.Flanges and UnionsExcept where copper tubing is used, union or flanged joints shall be provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each piece of equipment or material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control valves, and other similar items.Flanged joints shall be assembled square end tight with matched flanges, gaskets, and bolts.Gaskets shall be suitable for the intended application.ValvesIsolation gate or ball valves shall be installed on each side of each piece of equipment, at the midpoint of all looped mains, and at any other points indicated or required for draining, isolating, or sectionalizing purpose.Isolation valves may be omitted where balancing cocks are installed to provide both balancing and isolation functions.Each valve except check valves shall be identified.Valves in horizontal lines shall be installed with stems horizontal or above.Air VentsAir vents shall be provided at all high points, on all water coils, and where indicated to ensure adequate venting of the piping system.DrainsDrains shall be provided at all low points and where indicated to ensure complete drainage of the piping.Drains shall be accessible, and shall consist of nipples and caps or plugged tees unless otherwise indicated.Flexible Pipe ConnectorsConnectors shall be attached to components in strict accordance with the latest printed instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight joint.Hangers, when required to suspend the connectors, shall be of the type recommended by the flexible pipe connector manufacturer and shall be provided at the intervals recommended.Temperature GaugesTemperature gauges shall be located on coolant supply and return piping at each heat exchanger, on condenser water piping entering and leaving a condenser, at each automatic temperature control device without an integral thermometer, and where indicated or required for proper operation of equipment.Thermal wells for insertion thermometers and thermostats shall extend beyond thermal insulation surface not less than 1 inch.Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and SupportsPipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP- 69, except as supplemented and modified in this specification section.Pipe hanger types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustmentafter erection while still supporting the load.Piping subjected to vertical movement, when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures, shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers.HangersType 3 shall not be used on insulated piping.Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.InsertsType 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed.Continuous inserts which allow more adjustments may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.C-ClampsType 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and have both locknuts and retaining devices, furnished by the manufacturer.Field- fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.Angle AttachmentsType 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.Saddles and ShieldsWhere Type 39 saddle or Type 40 shield are permitted for a particular pipe attachment application, the Type 39 saddle, connected to the pipe, shall be used on all pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is60 degrees F or higher.Type 40 shields shall be used on all piping less than 4 inches and all piping 4 inches and larger carrying medium less than60 degrees F.A high density insulation insert of cellular glass shall be used under the Type 40 shield for piping 2 inches and larger.Horizontal Pipe SupportsHorizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping.Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves.[Pipe hanger loads suspended from steel joist with hanger loads between panel points in excess of 50 pounds shall have the excess hanger loads suspended from panel points.]Vertical Pipe SupportsVertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, and at intervals of not more than 15 feet, not more than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations.Multiple Pipe RunsIn the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member.Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacingrequired for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run3.1.10.9Structural AttachmentsAttachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices.Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5.Supports shall not be attached to metal decking.Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floors or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer.Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.Structural steel brackets required to support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided under this section.Material used for support shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.Building Surface PenetrationsSleeves shall not be installed in structural members except where indicated or approved.Except as indicated otherwise piping sleeves shall comply with requirements specified.Sleeves in nonload bearing surfaces shall be galvanized sheet metal, conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, Coating Class G-90,20 gauge.Sleeves in load bearing surfaces shall be uncoated carbon steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, [Schedule 30][Schedule 20][Standard weight].Sealants shall be applied to moisture and oil-free surfaces and elastomers to not less than 1/2 inch depth.Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members.Refrigerated SpaceRefrigerated space building surface penetrations shall be fitted with sleeves fabricated from hand-lay-up or helically wound, fibrous glass reinforced polyester or epoxy resin with a minimum thickness equal to equivalent size Schedule 40 steel pipe.Sleeves shall be constructed with integral collar or cold side shall be fitted with a bonded slip-on flange or extended collar.In the case of masonry penetrations where sleeve is not cast-in, voids shall be filled with latex mixed mortar cast to shape of sleeve and flange/external collar type sleeve shall be assembled with butyl elastomer vapor barrier sealant through penetration to cold side surface vapor barrier overlap and fastened to surface with masonry anchors.Vapor barrier sealant shall be applied to finish warm side insulation surface.Warm side of penetrating surface shall be insulated beyond vapor barrier sealed sleeve insulation for a distance which prevents condensation. Wires in refrigerated space surface penetrating conduit shall be sealed with vapor barrier plugs or compound to prevent moisture migration through conduit and condensation therein.General Service AreasEach sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface.Pipes passing through concrete or masonry wall or concrete floors or roofs shall be provided with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction.Sleeves shall be of such size as to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch all-around clearance between bare pipe and sleeves or between jacketed-insulation and sleeves.Except in pipechases or interior walls, the annular space between pipe and sleeve or between jacket over-insulation and sleeve shall be sealed in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.Waterproof PenetrationsPipes passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane shall be installed through a .17 ounce copper sleeve, or a 0.032 inch thick aluminum sleeve, each within an integral skirt or flange.Flashing sleeve shall be suitably formed, and skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe and be set over the roof or floor membrane in a troweled coating of bituminous cement.The flashing sleeve shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 2 inches above the roof or floor penetration.The annular space between the flashing sleeve and the bare pipe or between the flashing sleeve and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as indicated.Penetrations shall be sealed by either one of the following methods.Waterproofing Clamping Flange:Pipes up to and including 10 inches in diameter passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs, flashing clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Waterproofing membrane shall be clamped into place and sealant shall be placed in the caulking recess.Modular Mechanical Type Sealing Assembly:In lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange, a modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed.Seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe/conduit and sleeve with corrosion protected carbon steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates.Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut.After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe/conduit seal between the pipe/conduit and the sleeve.Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe/conduit and sleeve involved.The Contractor electing to use the modular mechanical type seals shall provide sleeves of the proper diameters.Fire-Rated PenetrationsPenetration of fire-rated walls, partitions, and floors shall be sealed as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.EscutcheonsFinished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or insulated, pass through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms, shall be provided with escutcheons.Where sleeves project slightly from floors, special deep-type escutcheons shall be used.Escutcheon shall be secured to pipe or pipe covering.INSTALLATION FOR POLYPROPYLENE PIPINGLocationsPlastic pipe to include polypropylene shall not be installed in air plenums. Plastic pipe to include polypropylene shall not be installed in a pressure piping system in buildings greater than three stories including any basement levels.Pipe JointsJoints for polypropylene pipe and fittings shall be made by heat fusion welding socket-type or butt-fusion type fittings and shall comply with ASTM F2389.Joint surfaces shall be clean and free from moisture, and shall be undisturbed until cool.Overheating PrecautionsAdequate provisions shall be taken to ensure that the pipe does not exceed operating temperatures recommended by the manufacturer.This includes a safeguard provision from preventing a pump from running with zero flow, if such operation could overheat the pipe beyond pipe manufacturer's recommendations.If heat tracing is permitted elsewhere in the specifications, ensure that the heat tracing is installed per piping manufacturer's recommendations to prevent overheating of the pipe.Testing and FlushingPressure test shall be conducted for 15 minutes at 1.5 times the operating pressure or 150 psi, whichever is greater, with no observable loss in pressure.Water, rather than air, must be used for pressure testing plastic pipe.After satisfactory pressure test is obtained, flush piping system using a minimum velocity of 4 fps through all portions of the piping system. Flushing shall be continued until discharge water shows no discoloration and strainers are no longer collecting dirt and other foreign materials.Upon completion of flushing, drain all water from system at low points, and remove/clean/replace strainers.ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONInstall electrical equipment in accordance with NFPA 70 and manufacturers instructions.CLEANING AND ADJUSTINGPipes shall be cleaned free of scale and thoroughly flushed of all foreign matter.A temporary bypass shall be provided for all water coils to prevent flushing water from passing through coils.Strainers and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned.Prior to testing and balancing, air shall be removed from all water systems by operating the air vents.Temporary measures, such as piping the overflow from vents to a collecting vessel shall be taken to avoid water damage during the venting process.Air vents shall be plugged or capped after the system has been vented.Control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to setting indicated or directed.FIELD TESTSField tests shall be conducted in the presence of the QC Manager or his designated representative to verify systems compliance withspecifications. Any material, equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor.Equipment and Component IsolationPrior to testing, equipment and components that cannot withstand the tests shall be properly isolated.Pressure TestsEach piping system , except for polypropylene piping, shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure not less than 188 psig for period of time sufficient to inspect every joint in the system and in no case less than 2 hours.Test pressure shall be monitored by a currently calibrated test pressure gauge.Leaks shall be repaired and piping retested until test requirements are met.No leakage or reduction in gage pressure shall be allowed.Leaks shall be repaired by rewelding or replacing pipe or fittings. Caulking of joints will not be permitted.Concealed and insulated piping shall be tested in place before concealing.Submit for approval pressure tests reports covering the above specified piping pressure tests; describe the systems tested, test results, defects found and repaired, and signature of the pressure tests' director.Obtain approval from the QC Manager before concealing piping or applying insulation to tested and accepted piping.Condenser Water Quality Test ReportsThe condenser water system shall be analyzed by the water treatment company a minimum of once a month for a period of one year after system acceptance. Submit for approval the specified condenser water quality test reports.The analysis and resulting reports shall include the following information recorded in accordance with ASTM D596.Date of Sample[ ]Temperature[ ] degrees FSilica (Sino 2)[ ] pp (mg/1)Insoluble[ ] pp (mg/1)Iron and Aluminum Oxides[ ] pp (mg/1)Calcium (Ca)[ ] pp (mg/1)Magnesium (Mg)[ ] pp (mg/1)Sodium and Potassium (Nan and AK)[ ] pp (mg/1)Carbonate (HO 3)[ ] pp (mg/1)Sulfate (SO 4)[ ] pp (mg/1)Chloride (JCL)[ ] pp (mg/1)Nitrate (NO 3[ ] pp (mg/1)Turbidity[ ] unitpH[ ]Residual Chlorine[ ] ppm (mg/1)Total Alkalinity[ ] epm (meq/1)Non-Carbonate Hardness[ ] epm (meq/1)Total Hardness[ ] epm (meq/1)Dissolved Solids[ ] ppm (mg/1)Fluorine[ ] ppm (mg/1)Conductivity[ ] microhm/cmRelated Field Inspections and TestingPiping WeldsExamination of Piping Welds is specified in the paragraph EXAMINATION OF PIPING WELDS (above).HVAC TABRequirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of HVAC water piping, and associated equipment is specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.Coordinate with the TAB team, and provide support personnel and equipment as specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC to assist TAB team to meet the TAB work requirements.3.6INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNELFurnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the chilled-hot water, and.Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be instructed in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.Submit a lesson plan for the instruction course for approval.The lesson plan and instruction courseshall be based on the approved operation and maintenance data and maintenance manuals.Conduct a training course for the operating staff and maintenance staff selected by the Contracting Officer.Give the instruction during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation.The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be one man-day. continuous man-days].Use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction and the other time for instruction at the location of equipment or system.When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.[3.7ONE-YEAR INSPECTION REPORT FOR COOLING WATERAt the conclusion of the one year period, each connecting cooling tower inspect for problems due to corrosion, scale, and biological growth.If the equipment is found not to conform to the manufacturers recommended conditions, and the water treatment company recommendations have been followed; the water treatment company shall provide all chemicals and labor for cleaning or repairing the equipment as required by the manufacturer's recommendations.]-- End of Section --REPAIR HVAC TRAINING HALL FACILITY B4331, KEESLER AFB, MSMAHG071039SECTION 23 73 13.00 40MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS05/17PART 1GENERALREFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL, INC. (AMCA)AMCA99(2016) Standards HandbookAMCA211(2013; Rev 2017) Certified Ratings ProgramProduct Rating Manual for Fan AirPerformanceAMCA300(2014) Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of FansAIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)AHRI430I-P(2014) Performance Rating of Central Station Air-handling Unit Supply FansAHRI431SI(2014) Performance Rating of Central Station Air-handling Unit Supply FansAHRI880I-P(2011) Performance Rating of Air TerminalsAHRI881SI(2011) Performance Rating of Air TerminalsAMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONINGENGINEERS (ASHRAE)ASHRAE 51(2016) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance RatingASHRAE 52.2(2012) Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle SizeASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)ASTM A653/A653M(2018) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) orZinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip ProcessASTM Bll7(2016) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) ApparatusINTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)ISO 21940-11(2016) Mechanical vibration -- Rotor balancing -- Part 11: Procedures and Tolerances for Rotors with Rigid BehaviorNATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION(NEMA)NEMA MG 1(2016; SUPP 20162018) Motors and Generators NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 90A(2018) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating SystemsUNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)UL 900(2015) Standard for Air Filter UnitsSUBMITTALSGovernment submittals approval. SUBMITTALapproval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00PROCEDURES:SD-02 Shop Drawings Installation Drawings ; GFabrication and Connection Drawings; G SD-03 Product DataEquipment and Performance Data; GAir Filter Gauges ; GSD-07 CertificatesList of Product Installations Certificates of Conformance ; G Unit CabinetFanDrain Pans InsulationPlenumsSpare PartsSD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance ManualsSD-11 Closeout Submittals WarrantyQUALITY CONTROLSubmit a list of product installations for air-handling units showing a minimum of five installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for at least 5 years.Provide a list that includes the purchaser, address of installation, service organization, and date of installation.Certification of ConformanceSubmit certificates of conformance for the following items, showing conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section:Unit CabinetFanDrain PansInsulationDELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGDeliver, handle, and store equipment and accessories in a manner that prevents damage or deformity.WARRANTYFinal acceptance is dependent upon providing the warranty, based on approved sample warranty, to the Contracting Officer, along with final test reports.Ensure that the warranty is valid for at least 2 years from the date of project closeout, showing Government as the warranty recipient.PART 2PRODUCTSSYSTEM DESCRIPTIONSubmit equipment and performance data for air-handling units, including use life, total static pressure and coil face area classifications, and performance ratings.Submit all required fabrication and connection drawings and obtain approval from the Contracting Officer before the start of work shown on these drawings.Submit drawings and manuals that include a spare parts data sheet, with manufacture's recommended stock PONENTSAir-Handling Unit (AHU)Provide a central-station type, factory-fabricated, and sectionally assembled AHU.Provide AHU that includes components and auxiliaries in accordance with AHRI 430 I-P.Balance the AHU fan and motor according to ISO 21940-11.Ensure that the total static pressure and coil face area classification conforms to AMCA 99.Fans with enlarged outlets are not permitted .Unit CabinetClass A and Class B CabinetsProvide an AHU cabinet suitable for the pressure class shown and has leaktight joints, closures, penetrations, and access provisions.Provide a cabinet that does not expand or contract perceptibly when fans are starting or stopping and that does not pulsate during operation.Reinforce cabinet surfaces with deflections in excess of 0.004167 of unsupported span before acceptance.Stiffen pulsating panels, which produce low-frequency noise due to diaphragming of unstable panel walls, to raise the natural frequency to an easily attenuated level.Fabricate the enclosure from continuoushot-dipped-galvanized steel no lighter than 20 gauge thickness, to match the industry standard.Provide mill-galvanized sheet-metal that conforms to ASTM A653/A653M and that is coated with not less than 1.25 ounces of zinc per square foot of a two-sided surface.Provide mill-rolled structural-steel that is hot-dip-galvanized or primed and painted.Corrosion-protect cut edges, burns, and scratches in galvanized surfaces. Provide primed and painted black carbon steel cabinet construction that complies with this specification.Provide removable panels to acce--SS--Ene Ynferior-or t he unit cabinet. Provide seams that are welded, bolted, or gasketed and sealed with a rubber-based mastic. Make entire cabinet floor and ceilinghot-dipped-galvanized steel.Provide removable access doors on both sides of all access, filter, and fan sections for inspection and maintenance.Class C CabinetsProvide an AHU cabinet that is suitable for the pressure class shown and has leaktight joints, closures, penetrations, and access provisions.Provide a cabinet that does not expand or contract perceptibly when the fans are starting or stopping and that does not pulsate during operation. Reinforce cabinet surfaces with deflections in excess of 0.002778 of unsupported span before acceptance by the Contracting Officer.Stiffen pulsating panels, which produce low-frequency noise due to diaphragming ofunstable panel walls, to raise the natural frequency to an easily attenuated level.Provide the enclosure that is fabricated from mill-galvanized or primed and painted carbon sheet steel.Providemill-galvanized sheet metal that conforms to ASTM A65 3/A653M and that is coated with not less than 1.25 ounces of zinc per square foot of atwo-sided surface.Provide mill-rolled structural steel that is hot-dip galvanized or primed and painted.Corrosion-protect edges, burns, and scratches in galvanized surfaces.Provide primed and painted black carbon steel cabinet construction that complies with this specification.Provide removable panels to access the interior of the unit cabinet. Provide seams that are welded, bolted, or gasketed and sealed with a rubber-based mastic.Make the entire cabinet floor and ceiling hot-dipped galvanized steel.Provide removable access doors on both sides of all access, filter, and fan sections for inspection and maintenance.Cabinet ConstructionWhere the cabinet size is such that personnel access is possible, strengthen the cabinet floor to permit entry without damaging any component.Hinge and latch the access doors and panels sufficiently close together to preclude leaks caused by distortion, and effectively gasket.Interior surfaces of cabinets that are constructed of intact mill-galvanized steel require no further protection.Provide cabinets with exterior surfaces constructed of mill-galvanized-steel that are left unpainted.Provide cabinets and casings that are double-walled with 2 inch insulation.Provide a galvanizedinterior wall.Weigh the fan and motor assembly at the AHU manufacturer's factory for isolator selection.Statically and dynamically balance fan section assemblies, including fan wheels, shafts, bearings, drives, belts, isolation bases, and isolators.Allow isolators to free-float when performing fan balance.Measure vibration at each fan shaft bearing in horizontal, vertical, and axial directions.Factory install all motors on slide bases to permit adjustment of belt tension-.-------Provide heavy-duty, open drip-proof, three-phase fan motors, operable at460 volts (V), 60 hertz (Hz).Provide high-efficiency motors.Refer to specification Section 26 05 70.00 40 HIGH VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES and Section 26 05 71.00 40 LOW VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES.Provide a marine-type, vapor-proof service light in the fan segment. Provide a 100 watt (W) service light that is wired to an individual switch and operates on 115 V, single-phase, 60 Hz service that is separate from the main power to the AHU.Provide a single 115 V outlet at the light switch.FanEnsure that fan wheels are dynamically and statically balanced at the factory.Provide a fan with RPM that is 25 percent less than the first critical speed.Provide a fan shaft that is solid, ground and polished steel and coated with a rust inhibitor.Provide V-belt-driven fans that are designed for 50 percent overload capacity.For variable air volume AHUs that are provided with variable-frequency drives, have their fans balanced over the entire range of operation (20 percent to 100 percent RPM) .Balancing fans of only 100 percent design of RPM is not acceptable for AHUs to be used with variable-frequency drives.Mount fans on isolation bases.Internally mount motors on the same isolation bases and internally isolate fans and motors.Install flexible canvas ducts or a vibration absorbent fan discharge seal between the fan and casings to ensure complete isolation.Provide flexible canvas ducts that comply with NFPA 90A.Provide an overall fan-section depth that is equal to or greater than the manufacturer's free-standing fan.Locate the fan inlet where it provides not less than one-half fan-wheel diameter clearance from the cabinet wall or the adjacent fan inlet where double wheels are permitted.Mount the AHU fan drive external to the casing.Install the AHU fan motor and drive inside the fan cabinet.Provide a motor that conforms to NEMA MG 1 and is installed on an adjustable base. Provide an access door of adequate size for servicing the motor and drive. Provide a belt guard inside the cabinet or interlock the access door with the supply fan so that power to the fan is interrupted when the access door is opened.Drain PansProvide intermediate-coil, 3 inch deep drip pans for each tiered coil bank.Extend the top pan 12 inches beyond the face of the coil, and extend the bottom pan not less than 24 inches beyond the face of thecoil.Where more than two pans are used, make the pan extension proportional. Make adequate supports from the same type of material as the pans or fromhot-dip galvanized angle iron with isolation at the interface.Use 22-gauge,AISI Type 304, corrosion-resistant steel for pan material, withsilver-soldered -joint-s .-- Minimum --si-ze of the-drain opening- is- -1--±/4 inches. Pipe the pan to the drain.Extend the integral cabinet drain pan under all areas where condensate is collected and make it watertight with welded or brazed joints, piped to the drain.Provide corrosion protection in condensate collection areas, and insulate against sweating.Provide minimum 14-gauge sheet metal; however 16-gauge double-drain-pan construction is also acceptable.Provide cooling coil ends that are enclosed by the cabinet and are factory insulated against sweating or drain to a drain pan.Provide drain pans that are double-pan construction, thermally isolated from the exterior casing with 1 inch thick fiberglass insulation.Provide drain pans that slope to the drain and drain substantially dry by gravityalone when the drains are open.Provide pans that have a double slope to the drain point.PlenumsProvide plenums in the following minimum widths:6 inches for mounting temperature controls and to separate two or more coils of different size that are mounted in series14 inches between face and bypass dampers and upstream accessories and at change in cross-section24 inches for access sectionsCoilsCoil SectionProvide a coil section that encases cooling coils and drain pipes.Arrange coils for horizontal air flow.Provide intermediate drain pans for multiple-coils pletely enclose coil headers with the insulated casing with only the connections extending through the cabinet.Coil Pressure and Temperature RatingsEnsure that the coils are designed for the following fluid operating pressures and temperatures:SERVICEPRESSURETEMPERATUREHot Water200 PSI250 degrees FChilled Water200 PSI40 degrees FProvide coils that are air-pressure-tested under water at the following minimum pressures:---sERVTC:EPRESSUREWater (hot and chilled)250 PSICoil CasingsProvide coils that are factory-tested, dehydrated, vacuum-tested, purged with inert gas, and sealed before shipped to the job site.Provide stainless-steel casings.Provide cast iron, brass, or copper coil headers.Fit water coil headers with 0.25 inch ips spring-loaded plug drains and vent petcocks.Provide automatic air vents with ball-type isolation valves for each coil that is piped to the drain pan.Chilled Water CoilsProvide 0.625 inch outside diameter copper tubing for coils. that are aluminum and mechanically bonded by tubing expansion maximum spacing of 12 fins per 1 inch unless otherwise noted. coils that have supply and return connections on the same end. maximum of four coil rows.Provide fins with aProvide Provide a2 . 2 . 6 . 5Hot Water CoilsProvide heating coils that have copper tubing aluminum fins .2.2.7Filters2.2.7.1Filter HousingProvide factory-fabricated filter sections of the same construction and finish as the unit casings.Provide filter sections that have filter guides and full height, double-wall, hinged, and removable access doors for filter removal.Provide air sealing gaskets to prevent air bypass around filters.Provide visible identification on media frames showing the model number and airflow direction.Where a filter bank is indicated or required, provide a means of sealing to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.Ensure that the filters perform in accordance with ASHRAE 52 .2.2 .2 .7 .2Replaceable Air FiltersSelect filters conforming to UL 900, Class 1. Ensure that when clean filters are exposed to flame, the filters do not contribute fuel when attacked by flame and emit only negligible amount of smoke. ProvideOutside Air Filtersceable media, 2 inch thickness, size as indicatedProvide an extended-surface, factory-assembled air filters with supported cartridges.Provide extended surface filter units fabricated for disposal when the dust-load limit is reached as indicated by maximum (final) pressure drop.Filter Classification:UL-approved for Class 1 or 2 conforming to UL 900. Filter Grades, Nominal Efficiency and Application:.Grade B :80 to 85 percent nominal efficiency outfitterGrade D:25 to 30 percent nominal efficiency prefilterFilter Media:Grade B Supported (Rigid Pleated) Type:Provide media that is composed of high-density glass fibers.Use fastening methods to maintain pleat shape, seal aluminum separators in a proper enclosing frame to ensure that there is no air leakage for the life of filter.Staples and stays are prohibited.Grade D Type:Provide media that is composed of synthetic/natural fibers. Bond a metal grid backing to the air leaving side of the media to maintain uniform pleat shape and stability for proper airflow and maximum dust loading.Provide a media frame that is constructed of high-strength, moisture-resistant fiber or beverage board.Bond the pleated media pack on all four edges to ensure that there is no air leakage for the life of thefilter.Staples and stays are prohibited.Filter Efficiency and Arrestance:Determine the efficiency and arrestance of filters in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2 Standard Atmospheric dust spot efficiency and synthetic dust weight arrestance that is not less than the following:Initial Efficiency(Percent)Average Efficiency(Percent)Final Efficiency (Percent)Grade B587998Grade DLess than 202289Maximum initial and final resistance and inches of water gauge for each filter cartridge when operated at a face velocity of 500-feet per minute are as follows:InitialResistanceFinal ResistanceGrade B, Rigid Pleated0.601.00Grade D, 2-inches deep0.320.70Dust-Holding Capacity:When tested to 1.00 inch w.g. at 500 feet per minute face velocity, provide a dust-holding capacity from each 24 inch by24 inch (face area) filter that is at least equal to the values listed below.For other filter sizes, provide a dust-holding capacity that is proportionally higher or lower.Grade B, Rigid Pleated Grade D, 2 inches Deep Grade D, 4 inches Deep6.17 ounces2.29 ounces10.58 ouncesMinimum Media Area:Provide a minimum net effective area in square feet for each 24 inch by 24 inch (face area) filter at 500 feet per minute face velocity of at least the values listed below.For other filter sizes, prov-ide a n:et effective me-dia-that-is proporti-ona-11y - higher or lower;Grade B, Rigid Pleated Grade D, 2-inches Deep57.014.8Air Filter GaugesProvide manometer air filter gauges of the inclined tube differential type that have solid acrylic plastic construction with a built-in level vial and with an adjustable mirror-polished scale.Equip gauges with vent valves for zeroing and over-pressure safety traps.Ensure that the gauge range is adequate for the particular installation.Provide one air filter gauge at each filter bank.PART 3EXECUTIONPREPARATIONCoordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads, variable frequency drives, control, and electrical requirements.INSTALLATIONInstall equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.Provide installation drawings in accordance with referenced standards in this section.3.2.1Temporary Construction FiltersHave temporary construction filters in place during normal building construction whenever the AHUs are run for general ventilation, building dehumidification, or other purposes during construction.Install two layers of blanket filter at a time.Replace temporary construction filters as required during construction and after duct system cleaning is completed.After systems have been cleaned and temporary construction filters are removed, and before test and balance operations are started, install a set of final filters.Avoid loading the filter with construction dust; do not have final filters in place while general building construction is taking place.Clean the permanent filter bank before testing and balancing.The maximum number of coil rows is six.Maximum number of fins per inch is ten.Provide variable air volume (VAV) terminal units that are certified by AHRI 880 I-P and UL-listed.3.3.1AHO Testing CONTROLConduct performance test and rate the AHO and components in accordance with AMCA 211, AMCA 300, and ASHRAE 51.Provide AHO ratings in accordance with AHRI 430 I-P.Provide final test reports to the Contracting Officer.Provide reports with a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the system name, date, and the words "Final Test Reports - Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."Perform AHO start-up in the presence of the Contracting Officer.CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESOperation And MaintenanceSubmit operation and maintenance manuals before testing the AHUs.Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days before contract completion.AcceptanceWith the warranty, provide a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the system name, date, and the words "Equipment Warranty" - "Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."-- End of Section --SECTION 26 00 00.00 20BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 0 7 / 0 6PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)ASTM D709(2017) Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting MaterialsINSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)IEEE 100(2000; Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards TermsIEEE C2(2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017)National Electrical Safety CodeIEEE C57.12.28(2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted EquipmentEnclosure IntegrityIEEE C57.12.29(2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted EquipmentEnclosure Integrity for Coastal EnvironmentsNATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)NEMA 250(2014) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 70(2017) National Electrical CodeRELATED REQUIREMENTSThis section applies to certain sections of Division 02, EXISTING CONDITIONS Division 11, EQUIPMENT, Divisions 22 and 23, PLUMBING and HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING. This section applies to all sections of Division 26 , ELECTRICAL , of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. This section has been incorporated into, and thus, does not apply to, and is not referenced in the following sections.Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMSection 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTINGDEFINITIONSUnless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE 100.The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types.The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products, systems, installation procedures, equipment, and test methods.ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICSElectrical characteristics for this project are existing and shall be 480/277 or 120/208 volts secondary, three phase, four wire.ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATIONSubmittals required in other sections that refer to this section must conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.1.5.1Shop Drawings (SD-02)Include detailed and dimensioned Shop Drawings or manufacturer's data sheet with specific model and part numbers indicating kind, weight and thickness of materials, method of fitting and fastening parts together, location and number of sockets, size of lamps, and complete details of method of fitting suspension and fastening fixtures in place.QUALITY ASSURANCERegulatory RequirementsIn each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.Standard ProductsProvide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.Alternative QualificationsProducts having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.Material and Equipment Manufacturing DateProducts manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.WARRANTYThe equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONSProvide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include the following:Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment.Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures.Safety precautions.The procedure in the event of equipment failure.Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment.Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATEEach item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATESASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with blackcenter core.Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTSElectrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified herein.INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNELWhere specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with equipment or system. When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1FACTORY APPLIED FINISHElectrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements specified in the technical sections.PART 3 EXECUTIONFIELD APPLIED PAINTINGPaint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in the section specifying the associated electrical equipment.FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTINGProvide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two metal screws or two rivets-- End of Section --PART 1 GENERALREFERENCESSECTION 26 05 00.00 40 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL0 8 / 1 6The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)ASCE 7(2017) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other StructuresASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)ASTM D709(2017) Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting MaterialsELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ALLIANCE (EIA)EIA 480(1981) Toggle Switches INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)IEEE Stds Dictionary(2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossaryof Terms & Definitions INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)ICC/ANSI A117.1(2009) Accessible and Usable Buildings and FacilitiesNATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)ANSI Z535.1(2017) Safety ColorsANSI/NEMA OS 1(2013) Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box SupportsANSI/NEMA OS 2(2013) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box SupportsNEMA 250(2014) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)NEMA FB 1(2014) Standard for Fittings, Cast MetalBoxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and CableNEMA KS 1(2013) Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V Maximum)NEMA PB 1(2011) PanelboardsNEMA RN 1(2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal ConduitNEMA TC 2(2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) ConduitNEMA TC 3(2016) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and TubingNEMA VE 1(2017) Metal Cable Tray SystemsNEMA WD 1(1999; R 2015) Standard for General Color Requirements for Wiring DevicesNEMA WD 6(2016) Wiring Devices Dimensions SpecificationsNATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 70(2017; National Electrical CodeUNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)UL 1(2005; Reprint Aug 2017) UL Standard for Safety Flexible Metal ConduitUL 1242(2006; Reprint Mar 2014) Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -- SteelUL 489(2016) UL Standard for Safety Molded-CaseCircuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker EnclosuresUL 6(2007; Reprint Nov 2014) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-SteelUL 797(2007; Reprint Mar 2017) UL Standard for Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing -- SteelUL 870(2016) UL Standard for Safety Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated FittingsDEFINITIONSUnless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary.The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types.SUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-01 Preconstruction SubmittalsMaterial, Equipment, and Fixture Lists SD-03 Product DataConduits and Raceways; G Wire and Cable; G Switches; GOutlet Boxes, Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes; G Circuit Breakers; GPanelboards; GLamps and Lighting Fixtures; GSD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Manufacturer's InstructionsPART 2 PRODUCTSEQUIPMENTProvide the standard cataloged materials and equipment of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. For material, equipment, and fixture lists submittals, show manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site.Conduits and RacewaysElectrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)Ensure EMT is in accordance with UL 797 and is zinc coated steel. Provide zinc-coated couplings and connectors that are raintight, gland compression type with insulation throat. Crimp, spring, or setscrew type fittings are not acceptable.Flexible Metallic ConduitEnsure flexible metallic conduit is galvanized steel and complies with UL 1.Ensure fittings for flexible metallic conduit are specifically designed for such conduit.Provide liquidtight flexible metallic conduit with a protective jacket of PVC extruded over a flexible interlocked galvanized steel core to protect wiring against moisture, oil, chemicals, and corrosive fumes.Ensure fittings for liquidtight flexible metallic conduit are specifically designed for such conduit.Wireways and Auxiliary GuttersEnsure wireways and auxiliary gutters are a minimum 4 by 4-inch trade size conforming to UL 870.Wire and CableUse copper 600-volt type THHN for conductors installed in conduit. Ensure all conductors AWG No. 8 and larger, are stranded. All conductors smaller than AWG No. 8 are stranded or solid.Ensure flexible cable is Type SO and contains a grounding conductor with green insulation.Ensure conductors installed in plenums are marked plenum rated.SwitchesSafety SwitchesEnsure safety switches comply with NEMA KS 1, and are the heavy-duty type with enclosure, voltage, current rating, number of poles, and fusing as indicated on the drawings. Ensure switch construction is such that, when the switch handle in the "ON" position, the cover or door cannot be opened. Cover release device is coinproof and so constructed that an external tool is used to open the cover. Make provisions to lock the handle in the "OFF" position. Ensure the switch is not capable of being locked in the "ON" position.Provide switches of the quick-make, quick-break type and terminal lugs for use with copper conductors.Ensure safety color coding for identification of safety switches conforms to ANSI Z535.1.Toggle SwitchesEnsure toggle switches comply with EIA 480, control incandescent, mercury, and fluorescent lighting fixtures and are the heavy duty, general purpose, noninterchangeable flush-type.Provide commercial grade toggle switches, [single] [double]-pole, [three] [four]-way two-position devices rated 20 amperes at 277 volts,60 hertz alternating current (ac) only.Ensure all toggle switches are products of the same manufacturer.Outlet Boxes, Pull Boxes and Junction BoxesEnsure outlet boxes for use with conduit systems are in accordance with NEMA FB 1 and ANSI/NEMA OS 1 and are not less than 1-1/2 inches deep.Furnish all pull and junction boxes with screw-fastened covers.PanelboardsProvide circuit breaker type lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1. Bolt circuit breakers to the bus. Plug-in circuit breakers are not acceptable. Provide copper buses of the rating indicated on the drawings, with main lugs or main circuit breaker. Provide all panelboards for use on grounded ac systems with a full-capacity isolated neutral bus and a separate grounding bus bonded to the panelboard enclosure. Ensure panelboard enclosures are NEMA 250, Type 1, in accordance with NEMA PB 1. Provide enclosure fronts with latchable hinged doors.Circuit BreakersEnsure circuit breaker interrupting rating is not less than those indicated and in no event less than 10,000 amperes root-mean-square (rms) symmetrical at [208] [240] volts, respectively. Provide multipole circuit breakers of the common-trip type with a single handle. Molded case circuit breakers are bolt-on type conforming to UL 489.Lamps and Lighting FixturesManufacturers and catalog numbers shown on the drawings are indicative of the general type desired and are not intended to restrict the selection to fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fixtures with the same salient features and equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics, of equal finish and quality, are acceptable. Provide lamps of the proper type and wattage for each fixture.Ensure ballasts and/or drivers have a high power factor and are energy efficient. Provide ballasts and/or drivers with a Class P terminal protective device for 120/ 277-volt operationManufacturer's NameplateEnsure each item of equipment has a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent is not acceptable.PART 3 EXECUTIONPREPARATIONSubmit manufacturer's instructions including special provisions required toinclude impedances, hazards and safety precautions.Clean and paint conduit, supports, fittings, cabinets, pull boxes, and racks as specified in these spec sectionsProtect metallic materials against corrosion. Provide equipment enclosures with the standard finish by the manufacturer when used for most indoor installations.INSTALLATIONConduits, Raceways and FittingsEnsure that conduit runs between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fitting does not contain more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends, including those bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting.Do not install crushed or deformed conduit. Avoid trapped conduit runs where possible. Take care to prevent the lodgment of foreign material in the conduit, boxes, fittings, and equipment during the course of construction. Clear any clogged conduit of obstructions or replace conduit.Conduit and raceway runs concealed in or behind walls, above ceilings, or exposed on walls and ceilings 5 feet or more above finished floors and not subject to mechanical damage may be electrical metallic tubing (EMT).Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)Ground EMT in accordance with NFPA 70, using pressure grounding connectors especially designed for EMT.Flexible Metallic ConduitUse flexible metallic conduit to connect recessed fixtures from outlet boxes in ceilings, transformers, and other approved assemblies.Use bonding wires in flexible conduit as specified in NFPA 70, for all circuits. Flexible conduit is not considered a ground conductor.Make electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment with flexible metallic conduit.Use liquidtight flexible metallic conduit in wet and oily locations and to complete the connection to motor-driven equipment.Splices and ConnectorsMake all splices in AWG No. 8 and smaller with approved insulated electrical typeMake all splices in AWG No. 6 and larger with bolted clamp-type connectors. Wrap joints with an insulating tape that has an insulation and temperature rating equivalent to that of the conductor.Color code feeder and branch circuit conductors as follows:CONDUCTORCOLOR ACPhase ABrown 277v / Black 120vPhase BOrange 277v / Red 120vPhase CYellow 277v / Blue 120vNeutral[White][Natural Gray]Equipment Grounds[Green][Green with Yellow Stripe]Use conductors up to and including AWG No. 2 that are manufactured with colored insulating materials. For conductors larger than AWG No. 2, have ends identified with color plastic tape in outlet, pull, or junction boxes.Splice in accordance with the NFPA 70. Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made and at the equipment terminal of each conductor. Match terminal and conductor identification as indicated.Where several feeders pass through a common pullbox, tag the feeders to clearly indicate the electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.Safety SwitchesSecurely fasten switches to the supporting structure or wall, utilizing a minimum of four 1/4 inch bolts. Do not use sheet metal screws and small machine screws for mounting. Do not mount switches in an inaccessible location or where the passageway to the switch may become obstructed. Mounting height 5 feet above floor level, when possible.Wiring DevicesWall SwitchesInstall wall switches so that when device plates are applied, the plates are aligned vertically to within 1/16 inch.Bond ground terminal of each flush-mounted receptacle to the outlet box with an approved green bonding jumper when used with dry wall type construction.Device PlatesInstall stainless steel plates at all devices.Boxes and FittingsProvide pullboxes where necessary in the conduit system to facilitatethan three right-angle bends, install a pullbox at a convenient intermediate location.Securely mount boxes and enclosures to the building structure using supports that are independent of the conduit entering or leaving the boxes.Select the mounting height of wall-mounted outlet and switch boxes, as measured between the bottom of the box and the finished floor, in accordance with ICC/ANSI A117.1 and at 48” above finished floor.Lamps and Lighting FixturesInstall new lamps of the proper type and wattage in each fixture. Securely fasten fixtures and supports to structural members and install parallel and perpendicular to major axes of structures.PanelboardsSecurely mount panelboards so that the top operating handle does not exceed 72-inches above the finished floor. Do not mount equipment within 36-inches of the front of the panel. Ensure directory card information is complete and legible.Field Fabricated NameplatesEnsure nameplates conform to ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device, as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription identifies the function and, when applicable, the position. Provide nameplates that are melamine plastic, 0.125-inch thick, white with black center core and a matte finish surface with square corners. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates is 1 by 2.5 inches. Lettering is a minimum of 0.25-inch high normal block style.Identification Plates and WarningsProvide identification plates for lighting and power panelboards, motor control centers, all line voltage heating and ventilating control panels, fire detector and sprinkler alarms, door bells, pilot lights, disconnect switches, manual starting switches, and magnetic starters. Attach identification plates to process control devices and pilot lights.Install identification plates for all line voltage enclosed circuit breakers, identifying the equipment served, voltage, phase(s) and power source. For circuits 480 volts and above, install conspicuously located warning signs in accordance with OSHA requirements.-- End of Section --PART 1 GENERALREFERENCESSECTION 26 05 19.10 10 INSULATED WIRE AND CABLE 0 5 / 1 6The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE 1202(2006; R 2012; CORR 1 2012)Flame-Propagation Testing of Wire and Cable INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)ICEA S-58-679(2014) Control, Instrumentation and Thermocouple Extension Conductor IdentificationNATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659(2014) Standard for Nonshielded CablesRated 2001-5000 Volts for use in the Distribution of Electric EnergyNATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 70(2017; National Electrical CodeUNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)UL 2556(2015) UL Standard for Safety Wire and Cable Test MethodsUL 44(2018) Thermoset-Insulated Wires and CablesUL 83(2017) UL Standard for Safety Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and CablesSUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designationSD-03 Product Data Wire and Cable; G Conductors; GCable Manufacturing Data SD-06 Test ReportsTest Report(s), Inspection Report(s), and Verification Report(s); GDELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGFurnish cables on reels or coils. Each cable and the outside of each reel or coil, must be plainly marked or tagged to indicate the cable length, voltage rating, conductor size, and manufacturer's lot number and reel number. Each coil or reel of cable must contain only one continuous cable without splices. Cables for exclusively dc applications, as specified in paragraph "High-Voltage Test Source," must be identified as such. Shielded cables rated 2,001 volts and above must be reeled and marked in accordance with NEMA WC 26, as applicable. Reels must remain the property of the Contractor.PART 2 PRODUCTSMATERIALSWire TableFurnish wire and cable in accordance with the requirements of the wire table below, conforming to the detailed requirements specified herein.Rated Circuit VoltagesAll power wire and cable must have minimum rated circuit voltages in accordance with NEMA WC 70, ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659, orNEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 as applicable. Power wire and cable for circuit voltages rated 0-600 volts must be rated not less than 600 volts. Control wire and cable must have minimum rated circuit voltages in accordance with NEMA WC 57, but must be rated 600 volts if routed in raceway with other conductors that are rated 600 volts.ConductorsMaterial for ConductorsConductors must conform to all the applicable requirements of NEMA WC 57, NEMA WC 70, ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659, or NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 asapplicable. Copper conductors must be annealed copper material and they may be bare, or tin- or lead-alloy-coated, if required by the type of insulation used.Size10 AWG for current transformer secondary circuits; No. 14 AWG for potential transformer, relaying, and control circuits; No. 16 AWG for annunciator circuits; and No. 19 AWG for alarm circuits. Minimum wire sizes for rated circuit voltages of 2,001 volts and above must not be less than those listed for the applicable voltage in ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96- 659 or NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639, as applicable.StrandingConductor stranding classes cited herein must be as defined for control conductors in NEMA WC 57 or as defined for 0-2,000 volts power conductors in NEMA WC 70, as applicable. Lighting conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller must be solid or have Class B stranding. Any conductors used between stationary and moving devices, such as hinged doors or panels, must have Class H or K stranding. All other conductors must have Class B or C stranding, except that conductors as shown, or in the schedule, as No. 12 AWG may be 19 strands of No. 25 AWG, and conductors shown as No. 10 AWG may be 19 strands of No. 22 AWG. Conductor stranding classes for circuit voltages 2,001 volts and above must be as defined inANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659 and NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639, as applicable.Conductor ShieldingUse conductor shielding conforming to NEMA WC 57 for control wire and cable as applicable.Separator TapeWhere conductor shielding, strand filling, or other special conductor treatment is not required, a separator tape between conductor and insulation is permitted.InsulationInsulation MaterialUnless specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70, wires in conduit, other than service entrance, must be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL83. Insulation for control wire and cable must meet the requirements of NEMA WC 57. Insulation requirements for wire and cable rated less than 2,000 volts must meet the requirements of NEMA WC 70. Insulation requirements for wire and cable rated 2,001-5,000 volts must meet the requirements of ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659. Insulation requirements for wire and cable rated 5,001 volts and greater must meet the requirements of NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639.Insulation ThicknessThe insulation thickness for each conductor must be based on its rated circuit voltage.2.1.4.2.1Power Cables, 2,000 Volts and BelowThe insulation thickness for single-conductor and multiple-conductor power cables rated 2,000 volts and below must be as required by NEMA WC 70, as applicable. Some thicknesses of NEMA WC 70 will be permitted only for single-conductor cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulatedcables without a jacket. NEMA WC 70 ethylene-propylene rubber-insulated conductors must have a jacket.JacketsAll cables must have jackets meeting the requirements of NEMA WC 57,NEMA WC 70, ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659, and NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639,as applicable, and as specified herein. Individual conductors of multiple- conductor cables must be required to have jackets only if they are necessary for the conductor to meet other specifications herein. Jackets of single-conductor cables and of individual conductors of multiple- conductor cables, except for shielded cables, must be in direct contact and adhere or be vulcanized to the conductor insulation. Multiple- conductor cables and shielded single-conductor cables must be provided with a common overall jacket, which must be tightly and concentrically formed around the core. Repaired jacket defects found and corrected during manufacturing are permitted if the cable, including jacket, afterward fully meets these specifications and the requirements of the applicable standards.Jacket MaterialThe jacket must be one of the materials listed below. Polyvinyl chloride compounds will not be permitted.Variations from the materials required below will be permitted only if approved for each specific use, upon submittal of sufficient data to prove that they exceed all specified requirements for the particular application.2.1.5.1.1General UseHeavy-duty black neopreneNEMA WC 70,ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659, or NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639Heavy-duty chlorosulfonated polyethyleneNEMA WC 57, NEMA WC 70,ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659, or NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639Jacket ThicknessThe minimum thickness of the jackets must be not less than 80 percent of the respective nominal thicknesses specified below.2.1.5.2.1Single-Conductor CablesSingle-conductor cables must have a jacket thickness as specified in NEMA WC 57, NEMA WC 70, ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659, orNEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 as applicable.2.1.6Metal-Clad CableMC cable is only allowed for connection to light fixtures, 6 foot maximum length.CABLE IDENTIFICATIONColor-CodingInsulation of individual conductors of multiple-conductor cables must be color-coded in accordance with ICEA S-58-679, except that colored braids will not be permitted. Only one color-code method must be used for each cable construction type. Control cable color-coding must be in accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method as follows: . Power cable color-coding for 120 volt system must be black for Phase A, red for Phase B, blue for Phase C, white for grounded neutral, and green for an insulated grounding conductor, if included. Power cable color-coding for 277 volt system must be brown for Phase A, orange for Phase B, yellow for Phase C, gray for grounded neutral, and green with stripe for an insulated grounding conductor, if included.CablingIndividual conductors of multiple-conductor cables must be assembled with flame-and moisture-resistant fillers, binders, and a lay conforming to NEMA WC 57, NEMA WC 70, ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659, orNEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639. Flat twin cables are prohibited. Fillers must be used in the interstices of multiple-conductor round cables with a common covering where necessary to give the completed cable a substantially circular cross section. Fillers must be non-hygroscopic material, compatible with the cable insulation, jacket, and other components of the cable. The rubber-filled or other approved type of binding tape must consist of a material that is compatible with the other components of the cable and must be lapped at least 10 percent of its width.Dimensional ToleranceThe outside diameters of single-conductor cables and of multiple-conductor cables must not vary more than 5 percent and 10 percent, respectively, from the manufacturer's published catalog data.PART 3 EXECUTIONINSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONSSubmit cable manufacturing data as requested. The following information must be provided by the cable manufacturer for each size, conductor quantity, and type of cable furnished:Minimum bending radius, in inches - For multiple-conductor cables, this information must be provided for both the individual conductors and the multiple-conductor cable.Pulling tension and sidewall pressure limits, in pounds.Upon request, compatibility of cable materials and construction with specific materials and hardware manufactured by others must be stated. Also, if requested, recommendations must be provided for various cable operations, including installing, splicing, terminating, etc.TEST REPORT(S), INSPECTION REPORT(S), AND VERIFICATION REPORT(S)Cable DataDo not begin any wire and cable fabrication until materials are submitted and approved by the Contracting Officer. Submit cable data for approval including, but not limited to, dimensioned sketches showing cable construction and sufficient additional data to show that wire and cable meet the requirements of this Section.Inspection and TestsInspection and tests of wire and cable furnished under these specifications must be made by and at the plant of the manufacturer, and the manufacturer must provide certification and certification reports of completed inspections and completed tests. The Government may require or perform further tests before or after installation. Testing in general must comply with NEMA WC 57, NEMA WC 70, ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659, orNEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 as applicable. Specific tests required for particular materials, components, and completed cables must be as specified in the sections of the above standards applicable to those materials, components, and cable types. Tests must also be performed in accordance with the additional requirements specified below. Submit (7) certified copies of test reports.Flame TestsAll single-conductor cable assemblies must pass either the vertical cable tray flame tests required by ICEA T-30-520 (stated in, but not required by NEMA WC 70), the vertical tray flame propagation test requirements of UL 1685 and IEEE 1202, the wire and cable burning characteristics test of the UL 2556 VW-1 Test, or (for control cables only) the flame test as required by NEMA WC 57. If such tests, however, have previously been made on identical cables, these tests need not be repeated. Instead, certified reports of the original qualifying tests must be submitted. In this case the reports furnished under paragraph "Reports," must include information, identify critical information, and verify that all of each cable's materials, construction, and dimensions are the same as those in the qualifying tests.Independent TestsThe Government may make visual inspections, continuity or resistance checks, insulation resistance readings, power factor tests, or dc high potential tests at field test values. A cable's failure to pass thesetests and inspections, or failure to produce readings consistent with acceptable values for the application, will be grounds for rejection of the cable.ReportsFurnish results of tests. No wire or cable must be shipped until authorized. Lot number and reel or coil number of wire and cable tested must be indicated on the test reports.WIRE TABLEItem No.Size, AWG or kcmilNo. of Conds.Rated Circuit VoltageStrandingCommentsQuantity, lin ftClass [ ] stranding may be substitutedfor [] where indicatedby "*".-- End of Section --SECTION 26 05 71.00 40LOW VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 0 2 / 1 7PART 1 GENERALSection 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies towork specified in this section.1.1 REFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)ANSI C12.1(2008) Electric Meters Code for Electricity MeteringASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)ASTM A240/A240M(2017) Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General ApplicationsASTM A48/A48M(2003; R 2012) Standard Specification for Gray Iron CastingsASTM D877/D877M(2013) Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk ElectrodesELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ALLIANCE (EIA)EIA 443(1979) NARM Standard for Solid State Relays ServiceINSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)IEEE C37.17(2012) Standard for Trip Devices for AC and General-Purpose DC Low-Voltage Power Circuit BreakersIEEE C37.90(2005; R 2011) Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated With Electric Power ApparatusIEEE C63.2(2009) Standard for Electromagnetic Noiseand Field Strength Instrumentation, 10 Hz to40 GHz - SpecificationsIPC - ASSOCIATION CONNECTING ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES (IPC)IPC D330(1992) Design Guide ManualNATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)ANSI C78.23(1995; R 2003) American National Standard for Incandescent Lamps - Miscellaneous TypesNEMA 250(2014) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)NEMA AB 3(2013) Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their ApplicationNEMA FU 1(2012) Low Voltage Cartridge FusesNEMA ICS 1(2000; R 2015) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General RequirementsNATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 70(2017 National Electrical Code UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)UL20(2010; Reprint Feb 2012) General-Use Snap SwitchesUL489(2016) UL Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker EnclosuresUL50(2015) UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,Non-Environmental ConsiderationsUL508(1999; Reprint Oct 2013) Industrial Control Equipment1.2SUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that reviews the submittal for the Government.:SD-02 Shop Drawings Connection Diagrams; GFabrication Drawings; G Control Devices; GProtective Devices; GSD-03 Product Data Fuses; GMotor Controllers; G Instrument Transformers; G Enclosures; GCircuit Breakers; GControl Devices; G Time Switches; GSD-06 Test ReportsFinal Test Reports; GSD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Manual Motor Controllers; G Magnetic Motor Controllers; G Combination Motor Controllers; G Circuit Breakers; GTime Switches; GPART 2 PRODUCTSSYSTEM DESCRIPTIONSubmit connection diagrams showing the relations and connections of control devices and protective devices by showing the general physical layout of all controls, the interconnection of one system (or portion of system) with another, and internal tubing, wiring, and other devices.Submit fabrication drawings for control devices and protective devices consisting of fabrication and assembly details performed in the factory.EQUIPMENTMotor ControllersConform to NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and UL 508 for motor controllers. Ensure controllers have thermal overload protection in each phase.Manual Motor ControllersProvide full-voltage, manually operated manual motor controllers for thesquirrel-cage induction motors.Provide single-throw, single- or double-pole, three-position controllers rated at not more than 1 horsepower at 115 V and 230 V single-phase.Include a supporting base or body of electrical insulating material with enclosed switching mechanism, yoke, thermal-overload relay, and terminal connectors. Provide controllers that clearly indicate operating condition: on, off, or tripped.Provide toggle- or key-operated-type manual motor controllers as indicated and arrange them so that they are lockable with a padlock in the "OFF" position.Provide recessed manual motor controllers for single-speed, fractional- horsepower, squirrel-cage induction motors. Include a single controller and indicating light in a 4-inch-square wall outlet box; for flush-wiring devices, include matching corrosion-resistant steel flush cover plates.Provide surface-mounted manual motor controllers for single-speed, fractional-horsepower squirrel-cage induction motors that include a single controller and indicating light in a NEMA 250, Type 1, general- purpose enclosure.Provide recessed and surface-mounted manual motor controllers for two-speed, fractional-horsepower, squirrel-cage induction motors; include two controllers, two indicating lights, and a selector switch in amultiple-gang wall outlet box for flush-wiring devices, with matching corrosion-resistant steel flush cover plates. Provide surface-mounted manual motor controllers for two-speed, fractional-horsepower, squirrel-cage induction motors; include two controllers, two indicating lights, and a selector switch in a NEMA 250, Type 1, general-purpose enclosure.Magnetic Motor ControllersFull-Voltage ControllersProvide full-voltage, full-magnetic devices for the control and protection of single- and three-phase, 60 Hz, squirrel-cage induction motors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and UL 508 for magnetic motor controllers.Ensure that the operating coil assembly operates satisfactorily between 85 percent and 110 percent of rated coil voltage. Provide 120 V, 60 Hz motor control circuits.Provide the controllers with two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary contacts rated according to NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2, in addition to the sealing-in contact for the control circuits.Provide solderless pressure wire terminal connectors for line and load connections to the controllers.Include three manual-reset thermal-overload devices for overcurrent protection, one in each pole of the controller. Provide thermal-overload relays of the melting-alloy type with continuous-current ratings and service-limit current ratings. Ensure that ratings have a plus or minus 15 percent adjustment to compensate for ambient operating conditions.power to the holding coil of the electromagnet. After the controller has tripped from overload, ensure that resetting the motor-overload device does not restart the motor.Provide an enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250, Type 1.Reduced-Voltage StartersConform to the requirements for full-voltage controllers for reduced-voltage starters, except for voltage, and to the following additional requirements:Fully protect the motor during all phases of motor starting with an overload device in each motor leg. Rate the starter contacts to withstand the switching surges during selector to fullvoltage. Provide a starter that contains the sensing and timing devices necessary to monitor motor operation and select the correct time for selector to full voltage.Ensure adequate ventilation of resistors and autotransformers used for starting. Ventilate solid-state starters for starting cycles as well as any follow-on restart-run cycles. Operate external control circuits or solid-state starters at a maximum of 120 V ac.For solid-state starters, provide adjustable starting torque from 0 percent to 50 percent of applied voltage, minimum. Provide autotransformer starters with a minimum of three taps above 50 percent reduced bination Motor ControllersThe following requirements are in addition to the requirements specified for magnetic motor controller:Provide combination motor controllers for the control and protection of single- and three-phase, 60 Hz ac squirrel-cage induction motors with branch-circuit disconnecting and protective devices in accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6.For combination motor controllers, include magnetic motor controllers and molded-case circuit breakers or motor circuit protectors (MCPs) in metal enclosures in accordance with NEMA 250 or motor control center draw-out assemblies with control-powertransformers, selector switches, pushbuttons, and indicating lights as follows:Provide full-voltage, full-magnetic devices as specified in this section under paragraph REMOTE-CONTROL STATION ENCLOSURES for magnetic motor controllers and enclosures.Provide thermal-magnetic breakers as specified in paragraph MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS for molded-case circuit breakers.Manufacturer's standard MCPs may be used in lieu of molded-case circuit breakers.Provide control-power transformers 120 V ac maximum, selector switches, pushbuttons, and pilot lights as required.Identify combination motor controllers with identification plates affixed to the front cover of the controller.Nonreversing Combination Motor ControllersThe following requirements are in addition to the requirements for magnetic motor controllers:For the control and protection of single-speed squirrel-cage induction motors, include a magnetic controller with molded-case circuit breaker or MCPs with selector switch or start/stop pushbutton and indicating light in the cover of the enclosure.Provide rating of [single] [and] [three]-phase, single-speed, full-voltage magnetic controllers for nonplugging and nonjogging duty in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.Provide wiring and connections for full-voltage, single-speed magnetic controllers in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.Reversing Combination Motor ControllersThe following requirements are in addition to the requirements for magnetic motor controllers:For the control and protection of single-speed squirrel-cage induction motors, include two interlocked magnetic controllers with molded-case circuit breaker or MCPs, with selector switch or forward/reverse/stop pushbutton and two indicating lights in the cover of the enclosure. Provide indicating lights to identify the forward and reverse running connection of the motor controller.Provide rating of [single] [and] [three]-phase, single-speed, full-voltage magnetic controllers for plug-stop, plug-reverse, or jogging duty in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.Provide wiring and connections for full-voltage, single-speed magnetic controllers in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.Two-Speed Combination Motor ControllersThe following requirements are in addition to the requirements for magnetic motor controllers:For the control and protection of single- and two-winding, two- speed, three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors, include two magnetic controllers with molded-case circuit breaker or MCPs, with selector switch or fast/slow/stop pushbutton and two indicating lights in the cover of the enclosure. Provide indicating lights to identify the high- and low-speed running connection of the motor controller.Provide rating of three-phase, two-speed, full-voltage magnetic controllers for nonplugging and nonjogging duty for constant- and variable-torque motors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.Provide rating of three-phase, two-speed, full-voltage magnetic controllers for nonplugging and nonjogging duty for constant-Provide rating of three-phase, two-speed, full-voltage magnetic controllers for plug-stop, plug-reverse, or jogging duty for constant-torque, variable-torque, and constant-horsepower motors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.2.2.2Circuit BreakersProvide circuit breakers that conform to UL 489 and NEMA AB 3.2.2.2.1Molded-Case Circuit BreakersProvide molded-case, manually operated, trip-free circuit breakers, with inverse-time thermal-overload protection and instantaneous magnetic short- circuit protection as required. Completely enclose circuit breakers in a molded case, with a factory-sealed, calibrated sensing element to prevent tampering.Locate thermal-magnetic tripping elements in each pole of the circuit breaker, and provide inverse-time-delay thermal-overload protection and instantaneous magnetic short-circuit protection. Provide an instantaneous magnetic tripping element that is adjustable and accessible from the front of the breaker on frame sizes larger than 100 A.Size the breaker as required for the continuous-current rating of the circuit. Provide the breaker class as required.Provide sufficient interrupting capacity of the panel and lighting branch circuit breakers to successfully interrupt the maximum short-circuit current imposed on the circuit at the breaker terminals. Provide circuit breaker interrupting capacities with a minimum of 10,000 A and that conform to NEMA AB 3.Provide the common-trip-type multipole circuit breakers having a single operating handle and a two-position on/off indication. Provide circuit breakers with temperature compensation for operation in an ambient temperature of 104 degrees F. Provide circuit breakers that have root mean square (rms) symmetrical interrupting ratings sufficient to protect the circuit being supplied. Interrupting ratings may have selective-type tripping (time delay, magnetic, thermal, or ground fault).Provide a phenolic-composition breaker body capable of having such accessories as handle-extension, handle-locking, and padlocking devices attached where required.For meter circuit disconnects, provide circuit breakers of the motor- circuit-protector type that meet the applicable requirements of NFPA 70.For service disconnection, provide enclosed circuit-breakers with external handles for manual operation. Provide sheet-metal enclosures with hinged covers suitable for surface mounting.FusesProvide a complete set of fuses for all switches and switchgear. Ensure that fuses have a voltage rating of not less than the circuit voltage.clearing or melting time of fuses unless written permission is first obtained from the Contracting Officer.Provide nonrenewable-cartridge-type fuses for ratings 30 A, 125 V or less. Provide renewable-cartridge-type fuses for ratings above 30 A 600 V or less with time-delay dual elements, except where otherwise indicated. Ensure that fuses conform to NEMA FU 1.Install special fuses such as extra-high interrupting-capacity fuses, fuses for welding machines, and capacitor fuses where required. Do not use plug fuses.Label fuses showing UL class, interrupting rating, and time-delay characteristics, when applicable.Provide porcelain fuse holders when field-mounted in a cabinet or box. Do not use fuse holders made of such materials as ebony asbestos, Bakelite, or pressed fiber for field installation.Control Devices2.2.4.1Magnetic ContactorsProvide magnetic contactors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2 as required for the control of low-voltage, 60-Hz, tungsten-lamp loads, fluorescent-lamp loads, resistance-heating loads, and the primary windings of low-voltage transformers.Provide core-and-coil assembly that operates satisfactorily with coil voltage between 85 percent and 110 percent of its voltage rating.Provide contactors that are designed with a normally open holding-circuit auxiliary contact for control circuits, with a rating in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.Furnish solderless pressure wire terminal connectors, or make available for line and load connections to contactors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.Provide magnetic contactors with a rating in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.2.2.5FinishProtect metallic materials against corrosion. Provide equipment with the standard finish by the manufacturer when used for most indoor installations.2.3 COMPONENTS2.3.1 Enclosures2.3.1.1Equipment EnclosuresProvide enclosures for equipment in accordance with NEMA 250.Contain equipment that is installed inside clean, dry locations in a NEMAContain equipment that is installed in wet locations in a NEMA Type 4, watertight, corrosion-resistant, sheet-steel enclosure. Construct the enclosure to prevent entrance of water when tested in accordance withPART 3 EXECUTIONINSTALLATIONClearly list fuse information on equipment drawings.Install control devices and protective devices that are not factory- installed in equipment, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Field-adjust the devices. Perform operation tests on the control and protective devices. Conform requirements for installation of control and protective devices to NFPA 70, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2.FIELD QUALITY CONTROL3.2.1TestsDemonstrate the operation and controls of protective devices of non-factory-installed equipment.Verify tap settings of instrumentation, potential, and current transformers.Perform dielectric tests on insulating oil in oil circuit breakers before the breakers are energized. Test oil in accordance with ASTM D877/D877M, and provide breakdown voltage that is not less than 25,000 V. Provide manufacturer certification that the oil contains no PCB's, and affix a label to that effect on each breaker tank and on each oil drum containing the insulating oil.Field-adjust reduced-voltage starting devices to obtain optimum operating conditions. Provide test meters and instrument transformers that conform to ANSI C12.1 and IEEE C57.13.Do not energize control and protective devices until the results of the recorded test data have been approved by the Contracting Officer. Provide final test reports with a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the system name, date, and the words final test reports to the Contracting Officer for approval.-- End of Section --PART 1 GENERALREFERENCESSECTION 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM0 8 / 1 9The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)ASTM B1(2013) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper WireASTM B8(2011; R 2017) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or SoftASTM D709(2017) Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting MaterialsINSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)IEEE 100(2000; Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards TermsIEEE C2(2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017)National Electrical Safety Code INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)NETA ATS(2017; Errata 2017) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and SystemsNATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)ANSI C12.7(2014) Requirements for Watthour Meter SocketsANSI C80.1(2005) American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC) Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)ANSI C80.5(2015) American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum ConduitNEMA 250(2018) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)NEMA FU 1(2012) Low Voltage Cartridge FusesNEMA KS 1(2013) Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 VNEMA MG 11(1977; R 2012) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase MotorsNEMA RN 1(2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Conduit and Intermediate Metal ConduitNEMA WD 1(1999; R 2015) Standard for General Color Requirements for Wiring DevicesNEMA WD 6(2016) Wiring Devices Dimensions SpecificationsNEMA Z535.4(2011; R 2017) Product Safety Signs and LabelsNATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 70(2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2;TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6;TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10;TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA 17-14; TIA 17-15; TIA 17-16; TIA 17-17 )National Electrical CodeNFPA 70E(2018; TIA 18-1; TIA 81-2) Standard forElectrical Safety in the Workplace UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)UL 1(2005; Reprint Aug 2017) UL Standard for Safety Flexible Metal ConduitUL 5(2016) UL Standard for Safety Surface Metal Raceways and FittingsUL 5A(2015) Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and FittingsUL 6(2007; Reprint Nov 2014) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-SteelUL 6A(2008; Reprint Nov 2014) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless SteelUL 20(2010; Reprint Feb 2012) General-Use Snap SwitchesUL 44(2018) UL Standard for Safety Thermoset-Insulated Wires and CablesUL 50(2015) UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,Non-Environmental ConsiderationsUL 67(2018; Reprint Mar 2019) UL Standard for Safety PanelboardsThermoplastic-Insulated Wires and CablesUL 360(2013; Reprint Nov 2018) UL Standard for Safety Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal ConduitUL 467(2013; Reprint Jun 2017) UL Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding EquipmentUL 486A-486B(2018) UL Standard for Safety Wire ConnectorsUL 486C(2018) UL Standard for Safety Splicing Wire ConnectorsUL 489(2016) UL Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker EnclosuresUL 498(2017; Reprint Dec 2018) UL Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles Control EquipmentUL 510(2017) UL Standard for Safety Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating TapeUL 514A(2013; Reprint Aug 2017) UL Standard for Safety Metallic Outlet BoxesUL 514B(2012; Reprint Nov 2014) Conduit, Tubing and Cable FittingsUL 514C(2014; Reprint Nov 2018) UL Standard for Safety Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush- Device Boxes, and CoversUL 651(2011; Reprint Nov 2018) UL Standard for Safety Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and FittingsUL 797(2007; Reprint Mar 2017) UL Standard for Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing -- SteelUL 817(2015; Reprint May 2017) UL Standard for Safety Cord Sets and Power-Supply CordsUL 870(2016; Reprint Mar 2019) UL Standard for Safety Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated FittingsUL 943(2016; Reprint Feb 2018) UL Standard for Safety Ground-Fault Circuit-InterruptersUL 1063(2017) UL Standard for Safety Machine-Tool Wires and CablesUL 1569(2018) UL Standard for Safety Metal-Clad CablesConduitUL 4248-1(2017) UL Standard for Safety FuseholdersPart 1: General RequirementsUL 4248-12(2018) UL Standard for Safety FuseholdersPart 12: Class RDEFINITIONSUnless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE 100.SUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are [for Contractor Quality Control approval.][for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-02 Shop Drawings Panelboards; GSD-03 Product Data Circuit Breakers; G Switches; GCombination Motor Controllers; GManual Motor Starters; G SD-07 CertificatesFuses; GSD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Electrical Systems; GQUALITY ASSURANCEFusesSubmit coordination data as specified in paragraph, FUSES of this section.Regulatory RequirementsIn each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" or "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references insimilar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.Standard ProductsProvide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship and:Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.Alternative QualificationsProducts having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.Material and Equipment Manufacturing DateProducts manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable.MAINTENANCEElectrical SystemsSubmit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein. Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design, operation, and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building. Include the following:Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system.Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC, covered elsewhere).Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment.WARRANTYProvide equipment items supported by service organizations that are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENTAs a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70 for all materials, equipment, and devices.CONDUIT AND FITTINGS Conform to the following:Rigid Metallic Conduit ANSI C80.1, UL 6.Rigid Nonmetallic ConduitPVC Type EPC-40[, and EPC-80] in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)UL 797, ANSI C80.3.Flexible Metal Conduit UL 1.Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel UL 360.Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal ConduitUL 514B. Ferrous fittings: cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514B.Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.Fittings for EMT Steel compression type.Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic ConduitNEMA TC 3 for PVC[ and NEMA TC 14 for fiberglass], and UL 514B.Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit UL 1660.2.3 OPEN TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE SUPPORT2.6.1Cable SupportsProvide closed ring cable supports, j-hooks, or straps.OUTLET BOXES AND COVERSUL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. UL 514C, if nonmetallic.Outlet Boxes Provide the following:Standard type 4 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep or 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep.CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXESUL 50; volume greater than 100 cubic inches, NEMA Type 1 enclosure; sheet steel, hot-dip, zinc-coated. Where exposed to wet, damp, or corrosive environments, NEMA Type [3R][4X][ ][as indicated].WIRES AND CABLESProvide wires and cables in accordance applicable requirements of NFPA70 and UL for type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Do not use wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site.Conductors Provide the following:Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise.Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter: stranded.Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter: solid.Conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3: stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise.Equipment Manufacturer RequirementsWhen manufacturer's equipment requires copper conductors at the terminations or requires copper conductors to be provided between components of equipment, provide copper conductors or splices, splice boxes, and other work required to satisfy manufacturer's requirements.Aluminum ConductorsAluminum conductors are not allowed.Minimum Conductor SizesProvide minimum conductor size in accordance with the following:Branch circuits: No. 12 AWG.Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits: No. 14 AWG.Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits: No. 16 AWG.Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits: No.22 AWG.Digital low voltage lighting control (DLVLC) system at 24 Volts or less: Category 5, 5e, or 6 cables in EMT conduit and in accordance with manufacturer requirements.Color CodingProvide color coding for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors.Ground and Neutral ConductorsProvide color coding of ground and neutral conductors as follows:Grounding conductors: Green.Neutral conductors: White.Exception, where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals color coding: white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each.Ungrounded ConductorsProvide color coding of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems as follows:208/120 volt, three-phasePhase A - blackPhase B - redPhase C - blue480/277 volt, three-phasePhase A - brownPhase B - orangePhase C - yellow120/240 volt, single phase: Black and redOn three-phase, four-wire delta system, high leg: orange, as required by NFPA 70.InsulationUnless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, provide power and lighting wires rated for 600-volts, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83 or Type XHHW conforming to UL 44], except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83; remote-control and signal circuits: Type TW or TF, conforming to UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90- degree Centigrade (C) conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.Bonding ConductorsASTM B1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter; ASTM B8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger diameter.Metal-Clad CableUL 1569; NFPA 70, Type MC cable.MC cable shall only be installed for lighting “fixture whips”, maximum 6 feet in length.SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTSUL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes. Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires: insulated, pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.DEVICE PLATES Provide the following:UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed.For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls: zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges.For nonmetallic boxes and fittings, other suitable plates may be provided.Plates on finished walls: satin finish stainless steel.Screws: machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate.Sectional type device plates are not be permitted.Plates installed in wet locations: gasketed and UL listed for "wet locations."SWITCHESToggle SwitchesNEMA WD 1, UL 20, single pole, double pole, totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw. Include the following:Handles: brown thermoplastic.Wiring terminals: screw-type, side-wired.Contacts: silver-cadmium and contact arm - one-piece copper alloy.Switches: rated quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, with current rating and number of poles indicated.Disconnect SwitchesNEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where switches are rated higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches.Utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses for fused switches, unless indicated otherwise. Provide horsepower rated for switches serving as the motor-disconnect means. Provide switches in NEMA 1 or 3R per NEMA ICS 6.FUSESNEMA FU 1. Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch as indicated. Provide fuses with a voltage rating not less than circuit voltage.FuseholdersProvide in accordance with UL 4248-1.Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R)UL 198M, Time delay. Provide only Class R associated fuseholders in accordance with UL 4248-12.PANELBOARDSProvide panelboards in accordance with the following:UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicatedPanelboards for use as service disconnecting means: additionally conform to UL 869A.Panelboards: circuit breaker-equipped.Designed such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL."Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings.Use of "Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable.Main breaker: "separately" buss mountedWhere "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers.Directories: indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard.Directories: indicate source of service to panelboard (e.g., PanelPA served from Panel MDP).Provide new directories for existing panels modified by this project as indicated. Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering.Panelboards: listed and labeled for their intended use.Panelboard nameplates: provided in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.EnclosureProvide panelboard enclosure in accordance with the following:UL 50.Cabinets mounted outdoors or flush-mounted: hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.Cabinets: painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING.Outdoor cabinets: NEMA 3R raintightFront edges of cabinets: form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard front.All cabinets: fabricated such that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet deviates from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch.Holes: provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted cabinets, with outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets with a 1/2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface.Flush doors: mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed.Each door: fitted with a combined catch and lock latch.Keys: two provided with each lock, with all locks keyed alike.Finished-head cap screws: provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets.Panelboard BusesSupport bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Design main buses and back pans so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet.[ In addition to equipment grounding bus, provide second "isolated" ground bus, where indicated.]Circuit BreakersUL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker will be mounted. Breaker terminals: UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided. Where indicated on the drawings, provide circuit breakers with shunt trip devices. Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable.2.11.3.1Multipole BreakersProvide common trip-type with single operating handle. Design breaker such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.MOTOR CONTROLLERSProvide motor controllers in accordance with the following:UL 508, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2Provide controllers with thermal overload protection in each phase, and one spare normally open auxiliary contact, and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact.Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage.Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.When used with pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, provide a hand/off/automatic selector switch with the controller.Connections to selector switch: wired such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in "hand" position.Safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts, and motor overload protective devices: connected in motor control circuit in "hand" and "automatic" positions.Control circuit connections to hand/off/automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device: made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer's approved wiring diagram.Provide selector switch with the means for locking in any position.Provide a disconnecting means, capable of being locked in the open position, for the motor that is located in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location. As an alternative, provide a motor controller disconnect, capable of being locked in the open position, to serve as the disconnecting means for the motor if it is in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location.Overload protective devices: provide adequate protection tomotor windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type; and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case.Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker: interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit breaker is in "off" position.LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTSProvide circuit breakers, disconnecting means, and other devices that are electrical energy-isolating capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147, NFPA 70E and 29 CFR 1910.303. Comply with requirements of Division 23, "Mechanical" for mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment.FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATESProvide field fabricated nameplates in accordance with the following:ASTM D709.Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings.Each nameplate inscription: identify the function and, when applicable, the position.Nameplates: melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.Surface: matte finish. Corners: square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core.Minimum size of nameplates: one by 2.5 inches.Lettering size and style: a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.WARNING SIGNSProvide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and NEMA Z535.4 for panelboards. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer. Provide marking that is clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.FIRESTOPPING MATERIALSProvide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.WIREWAYSUL 870. Material: steel epoxy painted 16 gauge for heights and depths up to 6 by 6 inches, and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by 12 inches. Provide NEMA 1 or 3R enclosure per NEMA ICS 6.SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICESProvide parallel type surge protective devices (SPD) which comply with UL 1449 at the panelboards. Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. SPD must have the same short-circuit current rating as the protected equipment and shall not be installed at a point of system where the available fault current is in excess of that rating. Use Type 1 or Type 2 SPD and connect on the load side of a dedicated circuit breaker. Submit performance and characteristic curves.Provide the following modes of protection:FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS-Phase to phase ( L-L )Each phase to neutral ( L-N ) [Neutral to ground ( N-G )] [Phase to ground ( L-G )]MaximumL-G Protection Rating:[700V for 120V, single phase system] [1,000V for 120/240V, single phase system] [700V for 120/240V, three phase system] [700V for 208Y/120V, three phase system] [1,200V for 480Y/277V, three phase system]Maximum L-L Voltage Protection Rating:[1,200V for 120/240V, three phase system] [1,200V for 208Y/120V, three phase system] [1,800V for 480Y/277V, three phase system]Provide SPDs. Maximum L-N, L-G, and N-G Voltage Protection Rating: [700V for 120V, single phase system] [700Vfor 120/240V, single phase system] [700V for 208Y/120V, three phase system] [1,200V for 480Y/277V, three phase system]Maximum L-L Voltage Protection Rating: [1,200V for 120V, single phase system][1,200V for 120/240V, single phase system] [1,200V for 208Y/120V, three phase system] [2,000V for 480Y/277V, three phase system]The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating for L-N and L- G modes of operation: 120 percent of nominal voltage for 240 volts and below; 115 percent of nominal voltage above 240 volts to 480 volts.FACTORY APPLIED FINISHProvide factory-applied finish on electrical equipment in accordance with the following:NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein.Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures: thoroughly cleaned followed by a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting.Exterior surfaces: free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections.Interior surfaces: receive not less than one coat of corrosion- resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice.Exterior surfaces: primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish.Equipmentlocatedindoors:ANSILightGray,andequipmentlocated outdoors:ANSI Light Gray.Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1INSTALLATIONElectrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces: conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.3.1.1.1LabelsWherever work results in disconnect devices, as permitted by NFPA 70, label each enclosure. Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.Wiring MethodsProvide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise. Grounding conductor: separate from electrical system neutral conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways.Shared neutral, ormulti-wire branch circuits, are not permitted with arc-fault circuit interrupters.Minimum conduit size: 1/2 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits. Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings: made with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts, with metal conduit extending through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches. Firestop conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated floors in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.Pull WireInstall pull wires in empty conduits.Pull wire:plastic having minimum 200-pound force tensile strength.Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at eachend of pull wire.Metal-Clad CableInstall in accordance with NFPA 70, Type MC cable.Install only for connections to light fixtures.Conduit InstallationUnless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project.Restrictions Applicable to EMTDo not install underground.Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious materials.Do not use in areas subject to physical damage including but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT.Do not use in hazardous areas.Do not use outdoors.Do not use in fire pump rooms.Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic ConduitPVC Schedule 40.Do not use indoors, where subject to physical damage, including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, fire pump rooms, and where restrictions are applying to both PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80.Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise.PVC Schedule 40 and Schedule 80.Do not use indoors, where subject to physical damage.Do not use in hazardous (classified) areas.Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions, or fire-rated floors.Restrictions Applicable to Flexible ConduitUse only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High- altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).Conduit Through Floor SlabsWhere conduits rise through floor slabs, do not allow curved portion of bends to be visible above finished slab. Utilize galvanized rigid conduit for floor penetrations.Conduit SupportSupport conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, threaded rod conduit hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not exceed one-fourth proof test load for load applied to fasteners. Provide vibration resistant and shock-resistant fasteners attached to concrete ceiling. Do not cut main reinforcing bars for any holes cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joints. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction, run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support system. Conduit and box systems: supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and(b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed. Do not sharesupporting means between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Coordinate installation with above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations.Support exposed risers in wire shafts of multistory buildings by U-clamp hangers at each floor level and at 10 foot maximum intervals. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction.Directional Changes in Conduit RunsMake changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes, fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of obstructions.Locknuts and BushingsFasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least minimum single locknut and bushing. Provide locknuts with sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.Flexible ConnectionsProvide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size: 1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible metallic conduit in wet and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, movement or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections.Boxes, Outlets, and SupportsProvide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes for metallic raceways: cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and walkways, and when specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations: sheet steel, and nonmetallic boxes may be used with nonmetallic conduit system. Provide each box with volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures: minimum 4 inches square, or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations, as approved. Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls: square-cornered, tile-type, or standard boxes having square-cornered, tile- type covers. Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature; provide readily removable fixtures for access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel.In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box, and support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from box.When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting reinforcing steel.BoxesBoxes for use with raceway systems: minimum 1 1/2 inches deep, except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets: minimum 4 inches square, except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters outlet.Pull BoxesConstruct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70Conductor IdentificationProvide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice, or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter, provide color coding by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation. For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, provide color coding by plastic- coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates; or heat shrink-type sleeves.Marking StripsProvide marking strips for identification of power distribution cables in accordance with the following:Provide white or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to each terminal block, for wire designations.Use permanent ink for the wire numbersProvide reversible marking strips to permit marking both sides,or provide two marking strips with each block.Size marking strips to accommodate the two sets of wire numbers.Assign a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 to each device to which a connection is made. Mark each device terminal to which a connection is made with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams.The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard practice; however, provide additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits for the Government's wire designations.Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along with any rearrangement of points required.SplicesMake splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation.Covers and Device PlatesInstall with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations.Electrical PenetrationsSeal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance- rated walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.Grounding and BondingProvide in accordance with NFPA 70.Provide ground conductor in each raceway.Equipment ConnectionsProvide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications and are provided under the section specifying the associated equipment.Repair of Existing WorkPerform repair of existing work, demolition, and modification of existing electrical distribution systems.Demo all electrical, low voltage, lifesafety systems as noted on drawings.Protect existing work in walls or in areas outside of scope.Maintain circuit continuity for existing circuits passing through areas of work.Schedule outages with contracting officer minimum of (10) days in advance.WorkmanshipLay out work in advance. Exercise care where cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces is necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical work. Repair damage to buildings, piping, and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved.Existing Concealed Wiring to be RemovedDisconnect existing concealed wiring to be removed from its source. Remove conductors; cut conduit flush with floor, underside of floor, and through walls; and seal openings.Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution SystemRemoval of existing electrical distribution system equipment includes equipment's associated wiring, including conductors, cables, exposed conduit, surface metal raceways, boxes, and fittings, back to equipment's power source or as indicated.Continuation of ServiceMaintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Maintain existing circuits of equipment energized. Restore circuits wiring and power which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition back to original condition.Surge Protective DevicesConnect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source, keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible. Maximum allowed lead length is 3 feet avoiding 90 degree bends.FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTINGProvide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.WARNING SIGN MOUNTINGProvide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.FIELD APPLIED PAINTINGPaint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Where field painting of enclosures for panelboards, load centers or the like is specified to match adjacent surfaces, to correct damage to the manufacturer's factory applied coatings, or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria, provide manufacturer's recommended coatings and apply in accordance to manufacturer's instructions.FIELD QUALITY CONTROLFurnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results. Give Contracting Officer (5) working days notice prior to each test.Devices Subject to Manual OperationOperate each device subject to manual operation at least five times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.600-Volt Wiring TestTest wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist.Phase Rotation TestPerform phase rotation test to ensure proper rotation of service power prior to operation of new or reinstalled equipment using a phase rotation meter. Follow the meter manual directions performing the test.-- End of Section --SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 PANELBOARDS08/19PART 1 GENERALSection 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS appliesto work specified in this section.1.1 REFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)ASTM D1535(2014; R 2018) Standard Practice for Specifying Color by the Munsell SystemELECTRONIC COMPONENTS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (ECIA)ECIA RS-416(1974; R 1981) Filters for Radio InterferenceECIA/IS 46(1987) Test Procedure for Resistance to Soldering (Vapor Phase Technique) for Surface Mount DevicesINSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C2(2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017)National Electrical Safety Code NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION (NASA)RCBEA GUIDE(2004) NASA Reliability Centered Building and Equipment Acceptance GuideNATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)NEMA 250(2018) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)NEMA AB 3(2013) Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their ApplicationNEMA PB 1(2011) Panelboards NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 70(2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2;TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6;TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10;TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA 17-14; TIA 17-15; TIA 17-16; TIA 17-17 )National Electrical CodeNFPA 70E(2018; TIA 18-1; TIA 81-2) Standard forElectrical Safety in the WorkplaceU.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)MIL-HDBK 232(1987; Rev A; Notice 1 1988; Notice 22000; Notice 3 2014) Red/Black Engineering - Installation GuidelinesU.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)FED-STD-595(Rev C; Notice 1) Colors Used in Government ProcurementUNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)UL50(2015) UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,Non-Environmental ConsiderationsUL67(2018; Reprint Mar 2019) UL Standard for Safety PanelboardsUL489(2016) UL Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker EnclosuresUL869A(2006) Reference Standard for Service EquipmentUL943(2016; Reprint Feb 2018) UL Standard for Safety Ground-Fault Circuit-InterruptersUL1283(2017) UL Standard for Safety Electromagnetic Interference FiltersUL1449(2014; Reprint Jul 2017) UL Standard for Safety Surge Protective DevicesUL1699(2017) UL Standard for Safety Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters1.2SUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-03 Product Data Panelboards; GSD-06 Test ReportsAcceptance Tests; GSD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Manufacturer's InstructionsQUALITY CONTROLRegulatory RequirementsIn each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Ensure equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship are in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70, IEEE C2 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.Standard ProductsProvide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Provide products which have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. Ensure the 2-year period includes applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. Ensure the product has been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items must be products of a single manufacturer.Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not to be used, unless specified otherwise.PART 2 PRODUCTSPANELBOARDSProvide panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1, UL 67, and UL 50. Ensure panelboards for use as service equipment are also in accordance with UL 869A. Ensure panelboards have current rating, number of phases, and number of wires as indicated or specified herein. Ensure panelboards are rated for 120/208-volt, three-phase or 277/480-volt, three-phase, 60-hertz. Ensure each panelboard, as a complete unit, has a short-circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating indicated, but in no case less than 10,000 amperes symmetrical.Provide panelboards with bolt-on circuit breakers only. Use of plug-in style breaker is not permitted. Ensure panelboards are designed such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units orobtaining required clearance. Provide main circuit breakers mounted to buss and branch breakers with current ratings as indicated. Use of sub- feed breakers is not acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers.Submit detail drawings and manufacturer's standard product data for panelboards. Detail drawings consist of fabrication and assembly drawings for all parts of the work in sufficient detail to verify conformity with all requirements. Ensure drawings for panelboards indicate details of bus layout, overall physical features, dimensions, ratings, service requirements, and weights of PONENTSEnclosureEnsure panelboard enclosures are NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R as indicated and in accordance with UL 50 and NEMA PB 1.Provide surface mounted panelboard cabinets as indicated. Ensure cabinets are constructed of 12 gauge sheet steel and hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Ensure front of cabinet is form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel for supporting the panelboard front. Provide panelboard cabinets fabricated such that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet deviates from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch.Provide door-in-door style cover where entire front is hinged on one side with a piano hinge for the full height and keyed latch opposite the hinged side. Provide side gutters in enclosure measuring minimum 5.75 inches for routing of wiring. Where panelboards are installed flush with the walls, ensure that the hinged front can be opened without damage to the adjacent wall surfaces. Ensure circuit breaker access doors are equipped with pin- tumbler cylinder locks. Ensure all locks provided, including locks for hinged covers, are identically keyed and properly tagged. Provide two keys for each enclosure.Finish panelboards with baked enamel. Finish color is ASTM D1535 No.61 gray conforming to FED-STD-595.Panelboard BusesProvide copper buses of the rating indicated, with main lugs or main circuit breaker. Provide all panelboards for use on grounded ac systems with a separate grounding bus in accordance with UL 67 bonded to the panelboard enclosure. Ensure grounding bus is a solid bus bar of rectangular cross section equipped with binding screws for the connection of equipment grounding conductors.Provide bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers that are the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. Ensure single-phase, three- wire panelboard busing is such that when any two adjacent single-pole breakers are connected to opposite phases, two-pole breakers can be installed in any location. Ensure that three-phase, four-wire panelboard busing is such that when any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three different phases, two- or three-pole breakers can be installed at any location. Ensure current-Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Design main buses and back pans so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping.Circuit BreakersProvide circuit breakers that conform to UL 489 and NEMA AB 3 with frame a trip ratings as indicated.Provide bolt-on type, molded-case, manually operated, trip-free circuit breakers, with inverse-time thermal-overload protection and instantaneous magnetic short-circuit protection. Completely enclose circuit breakers in a molded case, with a factory-sealed, calibrated sensing element to prevent tampering. Plug-in type, tandem, and half-size circuit breakers are not permitted.Provide inverse-time-delay thermal-overload protection and instantaneous magnetic short-circuit protection.Provide sufficient interrupting capacity of the panel and lighting branch circuit breakers to successfully interrupt the maximum short-circuit current imposed on the circuit at the breaker terminals. Provide circuit breaker interrupting capacities with a minimum of 10,000 A and that conform to NEMA AB 3. Series rating of circuit breakers or overcurrent protective devices to achieve indicated interrupt rating is not permitted.Provide the common-trip-type multipole circuit breakers having a single operating handle and a two-position on/off indication. Provide circuit breakers with temperature compensation for operation in an ambient temperature of 104 degrees F. Provide circuit breakers that have root mean square (rms) symmetrical interrupting ratings sufficient to protect the circuit being supplied. Interrupting ratings may have selective-type tripping (time delay, magnetic, thermal, or ground fault).Provide a phenolic-composition breaker body capable of having such accessories as handle-extension, handle-locking, and padlocking devices attached where required to meet lock-out/tag-out requirements of NFPA 70E.When multiple wires per phase are specified, furnish the circuit breakers with connectors made to accommodate multiple wires.Ensure circuit breaker spaces called out on the drawings are complete with mounting hardware to permit ready installation of the circuit breakers.Multipole BreakersProvide common trip-type with single operating handle. Design breaker such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.Circuit Breakers for HVAC EquipmentProvide circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual) marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.Directory Card and HolderProvide a directory card on the inside of hinged fronts and doors under non-flammable plastic in a metal frame, with spaces for circuit numbers and load supplied. Where hinged fronts or doors are not required, provide the directory card under plastic in a metal frame mounted on the left- hand side of the front trim. Ensure the directory card includes type written designations identifying each branch circuit with its respective and numbered circuit breaker.Surge Protective DevicesProvide parallel type surge protective devices (SPD) which comply with UL 1449 at the, panelboards. Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. Use Type 1 or Type 2 SPD and connect on the load side of a dedicated circuit breaker. Ensure SPDs are of the Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) type and rated have fault current rating equal to or greater than the rating of the device to be protected. Where internal fuses are used, ensure fuses will allow maximum rated surge to pass without operating fuse.Provide SPDs that are external to the equipment to be protected. Ensure factory installed SPDs are supplied through a dedicated circuit breaker. Install SPD parallel to equipment to be protected and as close as possible to minimize wire length between SPD and equipment to be protected.Provide the following modes of protection:FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS-Phase to phase ( L-L )Each phase to neutral ( L-N ) [Neutral to ground ( N-G )] [Phase to ground ( L-G )]Maximum L-L Voltage Protection Rating: [1,200V for 120V, single phase system][1,200V for 120/240V, single phase system] [1,200V for 208Y/120V, three phase system] [1,200V for 480Y/277V, three phase system]Provide SPDs. Maximum L-N, L-G, and N-G Voltage Protection Rating: [700V for 120V, single phase system][700V for 120/240V, single phase system] [700V for 208Y/120V, three phase system] [1,200V for 480Y/277V, three phase system]Maximum L-L Voltage Protection Rating: [1,200V for 120V, single phase system][1,200V for 120/240V, single phase system] [1,200V for 208Y/120V, three phase system] [2,000V for 480Y/277V, three phase system]Precautionary LabelTo ensure persons are aware of immediate or potential hazard in the application, installation, use, or maintenance of panelboards, conspicuously mark each panelboard on the trim or dead front shield with the text (or equivalent) DANGER symbol. If the panel is supplied with adoor, ensure the label is visible when the door is in the open position.Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and NEMA Z535.4 for panelboards. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer. Provide marking that is clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.2.3TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS Provide panelboards in compliance with UL 67.PART 3 EXECUTIONINSTALLATIONInstall panelboards in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Fully align and mount panels so that the height of the top operating handle does not exceed 72 inches above the finished floor.Ensure directory-card information is typewritten in capital letters to indicate loads served by each circuit and is mounted in holders behind protective covering.FIELD QUALITY CONTROLDo not energize panelboards until the recorded test data has been submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer.Provide test equipment, labor, and personnel as required to perform the acceptance tests as specified. Record and submit test data. Include the location and identification of panelboards and megohm readings versus time.Conduct continuity and insulation tests on the panelboards after the installation has been completed and before the panelboard is energized. Document results as pass-fail.Conduct insulation tests on 480-volt panelboards using a 1,000-volt insulation-resistance test set. Record readings every minute until three equal and consecutive readings have been obtained. Ensure resistance between phase conductors and between phase conductors and ground is not less than 50 megohms.Conduct phase-rotation tests on all panelboards using a phase-rotation indicating instrument. Perform phase rotation of electrical connections to connected equipment in a clockwise direction, facing the source.CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESSubmit manufacturer's instructions for panelboards including special provisions required to install equipment components and system packages. Provide special notices details impedances, hazards and safety precautions.-- End of Section --SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 0 5 / 1 6PART 1 GENERALREFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)ASHRAE 90.1 - IP(2013) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential BuildingsASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)ASTM A580/A580M(2018) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel WireASTM A641/A641M(2009a; R 2014) Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel WireASTM A653/A653M(2018) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) orZinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip ProcessASTM A1008/A1008M(2016) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake HardenableASTM B164(2003; R 2014) Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and WireASTM B633(20152019) Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and SteelASTM D4674 REV A(2002; R 2010) Standard Practice for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Exposed to Indoor Office EnvironmentsILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY (IES)IES HB-10(2011; Errata 2015) IES Lighting HandbookIES LM-79(2008) Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting ProductsIES LM-80(2015) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light SourcesIES RP-16(2010; Addendum A 2008; Addenda B 2009; Addendum C 2016) Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating EngineeringIES TM-21(2011; Addendum B 2015) Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light SourcesINSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)IEEE 100(2000; Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards TermsIEEE C2(2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017)National Electrical Safety CodeIEEE C62.41(1991; R 1995) Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power CircuitsIEEE C62.41.1(2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power CircuitsIEEE C62.41.2(2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits Requirements for Wiring DevicesNATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 70(2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2;TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6;TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10;TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA 17-14; TIA 17-15; TIA 17-16; TIA 17-17 )National Electrical CodeNFPA 101(2018; TIA 18-1; TIA 18-2; TIA 18-3) LifeSafety CodeU.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)DOD 8500.01(2014) CybersecurityDOD 8510.01(2014; Change 1-2016; Change 2-2017) RiskManagement Framework (RMF) for DoD Information Technology (IT)UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)UL 20(2010; Reprint Feb 2012) General-Use Snap SwitchesUL 94(2013; Reprint Sep 2017) UL Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices andUL508Appliances(2018) UL Standard for Safety IndustrialControl EquipmentUL844(2012; Reprint Oct 2017Mar 2019) UL Standard for Safety Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) LocationsUL916(2007; Reprint Aug 2014) Standard for Energy Management EquipmentUL924(2016; Reprint May 2018) UL Standard for Safety Emergency Lighting and Power EquipmentUL1472(2015) UL Standard for Safety Solid-State Dimming ControlsUL1598(2008; Reprint Oct 2012) LuminairesUL2043(2013) Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed inAir-Handling SpacesUL8750(2015; Reprint Aug 2018) UL Standard for Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting ProductsRELATED REQUIREMENTSMaterials not considered to be luminaires or luminaire accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.DEFINITIONSUnless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, must be as defined in IEEE 100 and IES RP-16.For LED luminaire light sources, "Useful Life" is the operating hours before reaching 70 percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70) with no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions. This is also know as 70 percent "Rated Lumen Maintenance Life" as defined in IES LM-80.For LED luminaires, "Luminaire Efficacy" (LE) is the appropriate measure of energy efficiency, measured in lumens/watt. This is gathered from LM-79 data for the luminaire, in which absolute photometry is used to measure the lumen output of the luminaire as one entity, not the source separately and then the source and housing together.Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current.SUBMITTALSGovernment approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.] Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Data, drawings, and reports must employ the terminology, classifications and methods prescribed by the IES HB-10 as applicable, for the lighting system specified. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:SD-02 Shop Drawings Luminaire Drawings; GOccupancy/Vacancy Sensor Coverage Layout; G SD-03 Product DataLuminaires; G Light Sources; GDrivers, Ballasts and Generators; G LED Luminaire Warranty; GLuminaire Design Data; G Vacancy Sensors; GDimming Controllers (Dimmers); G Exit Signs; GEmergency Lighting Unit (EBU); G LED Emergency Drivers; G Occupancy Sensors; GSD-06 Test ReportsLED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report; G LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report; G LED Light Source - IES TM-21 Test Report; G Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Verification Tests; G Energy Efficiency; GSD-07 CertificatesLuminaire Useful Life Certificate; GLED Driver and Dimming Switch Compatibility Certificate; GQUALITY CONTROLLuminaire DrawingsInclude dimensions, accessories, and installation and constructiondetails. Photometric data, including zonal lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized candlepower distribution data must accompany shop drawings.Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Coverage LayoutProvide floor plans showing coverage layouts of all devices using manufacturer's product information.LED Driver and Dimming Switch Compatibility CertificateSubmitcertificationfromtheluminaire,driver,ordimmerswitch manufacturer that ensures compatibility and operability between devices.Luminaire Design DataProvide safety certification and file number for the luminaire family that must be listed, labeled, or identified per the NFPA 70 (NEC). Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include: CSA (Canadian Standards Association), ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), and UL (Underwriters Laboratories).Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire in accordance with IES TM-21. Data used for projections must be obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80.LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test ReportSubmit test report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire. Include all applicable and required data as outlined under "14.0 Test Report" in IES LM-79.LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test ReportSubmit report on manufacturer's standard production LED light source (package, array, or module). Include all applicable and required data as outlined under "8.0 Test Report" in IES LM-80.LED Light Source - IES TM-21 Test ReportSubmit test report on manufacturer's standard production LED light source (package, array or module). Include all applicable and required data, as well as required interpolation information as outlined under "7.0 Report" in IES TM-21.Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Verification TestsSubmit test report outlining post-installation coverage and operation of sensors.Test LaboratoriesTest laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports must be one of the following:National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program for both LM-79 and LM-80 testing.One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy - LED Lighting Facts Approved Testing Laboratories List at for LM-79 testing.One of the EPA-Recognized Laboratories listed at for LM-80 testing.Regulatory RequirementsIn each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship must be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70, unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.Standard ProductsProvide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products must have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. The two- year period must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product must have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the two-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items must be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.Alternative QualificationsProducts having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.Material and Equipment Manufacturing DateProducts manufactured more than six months prior to date of delivery to site must not be used, unless specified otherwise.Energy EfficiencySubmit data indicating lumens per watt efficacy and color rendering index of light source.WARRANTYSupport all equipment items by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactoryservice to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.LED Luminaire WarrantyProvide a written 5 year on-site replacement warranty for material, fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes transportation, removal, and installation of new products.Include finish warranty to include failure and substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking, or fading.Material warranty must include:All drivers.Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy. Provide the Contracting Officer with signed warranty certificates prior to final payment.1.6.1.1Provide Luminaire Useful Life CertificateSubmit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected useful life of the luminaires provided. The useful life must be directly correlated from the IES LM-80 test data using procedures outlined in IES TM-21. Thermal properties of the specific luminaire and local ambient operating temperature and conditions must be taken into consideration.PART 2 PRODUCTSPRODUCT COORDINATIONProducts and materials not considered to be luminaires, luminaire controls, or associated equipment are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Luminaires, luminaire controls, and associated equipment for exterior applications are specified in Section 2656 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING.LUMINAIRESUL 1598, NEMA C82.77, and UL 8750. Provide luminaires as indicated in luminaire schedule and NL plates or details on project plans. Provide luminaires complete with light sources of quantity, type, and wattage indicated. Provide all luminaires of the same type by the same manufacturer. Luminaires must be specifically designed for use with the driver, ballast or generator and light source provided.LED LuminairesProvide luminaires complete with power supplies (drivers) and light sources. Provide design information including lumen output and design life in luminaire schedule on project plans for LED luminaires. LED luminaires must meet the minimum requirements in the following table:LUMINAIRE TYPEMINIMUMLUMINAIREMINIMUM COLOR RENDERINGEFFICACY(LE)INDEX(CRI)LED TROFFER -x 4x 22 x 490LPW80LED Downlight50LPW90LED Track or Accent40LPW80LED Low Bay/High Bay80LPW70LED Linear Ambient80LPW80LED luminaires must also meet the following minimum requirements:Luminaires must have a minimum 5 year manufacturer's warranty.Luminaires must have a minimum L70 lumen maintenance value of 50,000 hours as calculated by IES TM-21, with data obtained per IES LM-80 requirements.Luminaire drive current value must be identical to that provided by test data for luminaire in question.Luminaires must be tested to IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 standards, with the results provided as required in the Submittals paragraph of this specification.Luminaires must be listed with the DesignLights Consortium 'Qualified Products List' when falling into category of "General Application" luminaires, i.e. Interior Directional, Display Case, Troffer, Linear Ambient, or Low/High Bay. Requirements are shown in the Designlights Consortium "Technical Requirements Table" at For-Lighting-Products/jgwf-7qrr.Provide Department of Energy 'Lighting Facts' label for each luminaire.DRIVERS, BALLASTS and GENERATORS2.3.1 LED DriversNEMA SSL 1, UL 8750.LED drivers must be electronic, UL Class 1, constant-current type and comply with the following requirements:Output power (watts)and luminous flux (lumens) as shown in luminaire schedule for each luminaire type to meet minimum luminaire efficacy (LE) value provided.Power Factor (PF) greater than or equal to 0.9 over the full dimming range when provided.Current draw Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 20 percent.Class A sound rating.Operable at input voltage of 120-277 volts at 60 hertz.Minimum 5 year manufacturer's warranty.RoHS compliant.Integral thermal protection that reduces or eliminates the output power if case temperature exceeds a value detrimental to the driver.UL listed for dry or damp locations typical of interior installationsNon-dimmable or fully-dimmable using 0-10V control as indicated in luminaire schedule.LIGHT SOURCESNEMA ANSLG C78.377, NEMA SSL 3. Provide type and wattage as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans.LED Light SourcesCorrelated Color Temperature (CCT) of 3500 degrees K.Minimum Color Rendering Index (CRI) R9 value of 80.High power, white light output.RoHS compliant.LIGHTING CONTROLSASHRAE 90.1 - IP ASHRAE 189.1. Provide network certification for all networked lighting control systems and devices per requirements of DOD 8500.01 and DOD 8510.01.Toggle SwitchesProvide only where noted on drawings.Dimming Controllers (Dimmers)UL 1472, UL 20, IEEE C62.41, NEMA SSL 7A. 120/277 V[0-10 V] dimmers mustprovide flicker-free, continuously variable light output throughout the dimming range. Provide radio frequency interference suppression integral to device. Provide device with a vertical slider, paddle, rotary button, or push buttons type control, with finish to match switches and outlets in same area. Provide back box in wall with sufficient depth to accommodate body of switch and wiring. Devices must be capable of operating at their full rated capacity regardless of being single or ganged-mounted, and be compatible with three-way and four-way switching scenarios. Dimmers must be capable of controlling 0-10 volt LED drivers. Ensure compatibility of dimmer with separate power packs when utilized for lighting control.Dimmers and the ballasts or drivers they control, must be provided from the same manufacturer, or tested and certified as compatible for use together. Provide NEMA SSL 7A -compliant devices.Sensors for Lighting ControlIEEE C62.41, NEMA WD 1, UL 94, UL 916, UL 508, ASTM D4674 REV A.Occupancy SensorsProvide occupancy sensors with coverage patterns as indicated on project plans. Provide no less quantity of sensors as shown on plans, but add additional sensors when required to fulfill coverage requirement for the specific model sensor provided. Sensor must be provided with an adaptive learning function that automatically sets sensor in optimum calibration in a set period of time after installation and a non-volatile memory that saves settings after a power outage. Provide sensors designed for ceiling, wall or wall-box installation as indicated. Operating voltage must be 120[277] volts.Operating voltage must be 24V in conjunction with a control system or separate power pack which interacts with luminaire being controlled.Provide housing of high-impact, injection-molded thermoplastic with a multi-segmented lens for PIR and dual technology sensors. Sensor operation requires movement to activate luminaires controlled, and turns luminaires off after a set time of inactivity.Provide integral photocell mounted in occupancy sensor housing when indicated.Passive Infrared (PIR) SensorsProvide ceiling or wall-mounted PIR sensors meeting the following requirements:Temperature compensated, dual element sensor and a multi-element fresnel lens (Poly IR4 material).Technology to optimize automatic time delay to fit occupant usage patterns.No minimum load requirement for line voltage sensors and be capable of switching from zero to 800 W at 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz and from zero to 1200 W at 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz. Control voltage sensors must not exceed a maximum load requirement of 20 mA at 24VDC.Time delay of five to 30 minutes in increments of five minutes with a walk through and test mode set by DIP switch.LED indicator that remains active during occupancy.Built-in light level sensor that is operational from 8 to 180 foot-candles.Coverage pattern tested to NEMA WD 7 standards.Standard five year warranty and be UL listedNo leakage current to load when in the off mode.Dual Technology SensorsProvide dual technology sensors that meet the requirements for PIR sensors and ultrasonic sensors indicated above. If either the passive infrared or ultrasonic sensing registers occupancy, the luminaires must remain on.Power Packs for SensorsUL 2043, CEC Title 24, ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Power packs used to provide power to one or more lighting control sensors must meet the following requirements:Input voltage - 120-277 VAC; output voltage - 24 VDC at 225 mA.Plenum-rated, high-impact thermoplastic enclosure.Utilizes zero-crossing circuitry to prevent damage from inrush current.Maximum load rating of 16 amps for electronic lighting loads.RoHS compliant.Vacancy SensorsProvide vacancy sensors as indicated above under paragraph OCCUPANCY SENSORS, but with requirement of a manual operation to activate luminaires controlled. Provide automatic operation to turn luminaires off after a set period of inactivity.Exit SignsProvide exit signs consuming a maximum of five watts total.LED Self-Powered Exit SignsProvide in painted, die-cast aluminum housing, configured for ceiling, wall, or end mounting. Provide 6 inch high, 3/4 inch stroke red lettering on face of sign. Provide chevrons on either side of lettering to indicate direction. Provide single or double face. Equip with automatic power failure device, test switch, and pilot light, and fully automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery must be sealed, maintenance free nickel-cadmium type, and must operate unattended for a period of not less than five years. Emergency run time must be a minimum of 1 1/2 hours. LEDs must have a minimum rated life of 10 years. Provide self-diagnostic circuitry integral to emergency LED driver.LED Remote-Powered Exit SignsProvide as indicated above for self-powered type, but without battery and charger. Exit sign must contain provision for 120/277 VAC or 6-48 VDC input from remote source.Emergency Lighting UnitProvide in UV-stable, thermo-plastic housing.UL wet label as indicated. Equip units with brown-out sensitive circuit to activate battery when input voltage falls to 75 percent of normal. Equip with automatic power failure device, test switch, and pilot light, and fully automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery must be sealed, maintenance free nickel-cadmium type, and must operate unattended for a period of not less than five years. Emergency run time must be a minimum of 1 1/2 hours. LEDs must have a minimum rated life of 10 years. Provide self-diagnostic circuitry integral to emergency LED driver.LED Emergency DriversProvide LED emergency driver with automatic power failure detection, test switch and LED indicator (or combination switch/indicator) located on luminaire exterior, and fully-automatic solid-state charger, battery and inverter integral to a self-contained housing. Provide self-diagnostic function integral to emergency driver. Integral nickel-cadmium battery is required to supply a minimum of 90 minutes of emergency power.Driver must be RoHS compliant, rated for installation in plenum-rated spaces and damp locations, and be warranted for a minimum of five years.PART 3 EXECUTIONINSTALLATIONElectrical installations must conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein. Install luminaires and lighting controls to meet the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP and ASHRAE 189.1. To encourage consistency and uniformity, install luminaires of the same manufacture and model number when residing in the same facility or building.Light SourcesWhen light sources are not provided as an integral part of the luminaire, deliver light sources of the type, wattage, lumen output, color temperature, color rendering index, and voltage rating indicated to the project site and install just prior to project completion, if not already installed in the luminaires from the factory.LuminairesSet luminaires plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent luminaires and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation must meet requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated must be to the bottom of the luminaire for ceiling-mounted luminaires and to center of luminaire for wall-mounted luminaires. Obtain approval of the exact mounting height on the job before commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed luminaires must be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires, straps or rods per luminaire and located near each corner of the luminaire. Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported luminaires. Round luminaires or luminaires smaller in size than the ceiling grid must be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires, straps or rods per luminaire, spaced approximately equidistant around. Do not support luminaires by acoustical tile ceiling panels. Where luminaires of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel, support each independently and provide at least two 3/4 inch metal channels spanning, and secured to, the ceiling tees for centering and aligning the luminaire. Provide wires, straps, or rods for luminaire support in this section. Luminaires installed in suspended ceilings must also comply with the requirements of Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.Suspended LuminairesProvide suspended luminaires with 45 degree swivel hangers so that they hang plumb and level. Locate so that there are no obstructions within the45 degree range in all directions. The stem, canopy and luminaire must be capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 4 feet or longer excluding luminaire must be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at120 degree separation. Suspended luminaires in continuous rows must have internal wireway systems for end to end wiring and must be properly aligned to provide a straight and continuous row without bends, gaps, light leaks or filler pieces. Utilize aligning splines on extruded aluminum luminaires to assure minimal hairline joints. Support steel luminaires to prevent"oil-canning" effects. Luminaire finishes must be free of scratches, nicks, dents, and warps, and must match the color and gloss specified. Match supporting pendants with supported luminaire. Aircraft cable must be stainless steel. Canopies must be finished to match the ceiling and must below profile unless otherwise shown. Maximum distance between suspension points must be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is less.Ballasts, Generators and Power SuppliesTypically, provide ballasts, generators, and power supplies (drivers) integral to luminaire as constructed by the manufacturer.Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting UnitsWire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of the local switch, to the normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area.3.1.5.1Exit SignsConnect exit signs on circuits as noted on drawings.Occupancy/Vacancy SensorsProvide testing of sensor coverage in all spaces where sensors are placed. This should be done only after all furnishings (carpet, furniture, workstations, etc.) have been installed. Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full coverage must provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration type areas and walking motion for industrial areas, warehouses, storage rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings and to avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or airflow changes and usage.3.2FIELD APPLIED PAINTINGPaint lighting equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Provide painting as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.-- End of Section -- ................
................

In order to avoid copyright disputes, this page is only a partial summary.

Google Online Preview   Download